JP2020116437A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide an information medium and a game machine capable of granting a new additional value allowing a player to maintain interest in a game for a long time.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention grants a special value medium, where visibility of information is reduced by covering with covering means an information surface on which the information for visually suggesting contents of a special value as a value differing from a game value is written. Therefore, a recipient of the special value medium granted in a state in which the covering means is provided cannot easily identify the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered with the covering means only at a glance, thus maintaining a player's sense of expectation toward acquisition of the special value medium until a work for removing the covering means is completed so as to check the contents of the special value. As a result, it is possible to maintain player's interest in a game over a long period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and the like.

A game machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) that gives a player a game value (game ball, game medal, etc.) as a prize when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied is known as a general game machine.
With respect to such a general gaming machine, in Patent Document 1, a game value (game medal) is given to a player as a prize when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied, and a bonus is given based on a predetermined criterion. If the permission is given, a gaming machine (slot machine) that gives a bonus (privilege data) different from the gaming value to the player is described.

JP, 2002-224283, A

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured so as to be able to obtain a privilege different from the gaming value in the conventional general gaming machine, there is a problem in the conventional general gaming machine. It was still inadequate to solve the lack of variation (variation) in playability that was one. Therefore, there is a problem in that the tendency that the player feels monotonous about the game and gets tired of the game cannot be eliminated as the game time of the player becomes longer.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can give a new added value that allows a player to maintain interest in a game for a long time. It is an object.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 plays a game using a game medium, and gives a gaming value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a predetermined special value. A special value medium providing means for giving a special value medium having a special value different from the game value when the award condition is satisfied, and the special value medium visually suggests the contents of the special value. Is provided, and a removable covering means for reducing the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the covering means is provided on a base material layer and a back surface side of the base material layer, and an adhesive that enables sticking to the information surface. The base material layer has a brittleness to such an extent that at the time of peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress during peeling.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the covering means has a wireless communication means, and the wireless communication means has information corresponding to the contents of the special value. A circuit section having a storage section in which is stored, and an antenna section connected to the circuit section and capable of transmitting information corresponding to the contents of the special value stored in the storage section using a wireless transmission medium. And an information reading unit capable of reading the information corresponding to the content of the special value transmitted through the antenna unit of the wireless communication unit.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, while the game value is given when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied. Special value media having different special values are given by the special value medium giving means. In this special value medium, information that visually suggests the contents of the special value is written on the information surface.

Here, the information surface of the special value medium is provided with a covering unit that reduces the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information visually suggesting the content of the special value medium). Has been.

Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.

Therefore, the player's expectation for obtaining the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value, and therefore, the player's expectation is added to the game as compared to the game of simply obtaining the special value medium. You can add value. As a result, there is an effect that it becomes possible for the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) on the information surface is provided, the special value having the high value contents is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the value medium from being selected and illegally extracted.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. Covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (visually indicating the contents of the special value medium) by covering the information written on the information surface is provided on the base layer and the back side of the base layer. The adhesive layer is attached to the information surface by the adhesive layer.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. The effect is that it can be prevented.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. The covering means is provided with a wireless communication means capable of transmitting information stored in the circuit section (information corresponding to the contents of the special value) from the antenna section using a wireless transmission medium. Then, the information (information corresponding to the content of the special value) sent via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, based on the reading by the information reading means, it is possible to grasp the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the wireless communication means does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information to be sent from the wireless communication means. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. There is an effect that it is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.
When the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle to the extent that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna portion) is damaged. Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is sectional drawing which shows a privilege coin payout device typically. (A) And (b) is a perspective view which shows the bottom member in a privilege coin payout device, (c) is a perspective view which shows a standby member. It is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the payout of privilege coins by the privilege coin payout device. (A) is a front view of a privilege coin, (b) is a sectional view taken along line VIIb-VIIb in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual screen and effective line setting in a 3rd symbol display device. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed in the main process of FIG. 12. 13 is a flow chart showing a variation start process executed in the symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 15. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. 20 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol variable display process performed in the main process of FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a coin payout setting process executed in the decorative symbol variable display process of FIG. 20. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a complete omission counting process executed in the coin payout setting process of FIG. 22. It is a flowchart which shows the change production setting process performed in the decorative symbol change display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process performed in the decorative symbol variable display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the disengagement stop symbol setting process performed in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a coin payout process executed in the main process of FIG. 19. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the card information reading device as viewed from the top side, and (b) is a schematic internal structure of the card information reading device as viewed from the side. It is a sectional view showing typically, and (c) is a sectional view showing typically the case where a privilege card is attached to a card information reader. (A) is sectional drawing which shows typically an internal structure at the time of seeing a privilege card discharge device from the side surface, (b) is a schematic front view which saw the privilege card discharge device from the discharge side. And (c) is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device as viewed from the top side. FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining a privilege card discharging operation by the privilege card discharging device. (A) is a front view of a privilege card, (b) is a rear view of a privilege card, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line X8c-X8c in (a). It is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in a card information area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot effect setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the addition condition satisfaction confirmation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card discharge process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a receiver card reading process executed in the receiver card confirmation process of FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge mode change process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the addition condition satisfaction confirmation process of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a detachment reach discharge mode process executed in the imparting condition satisfaction confirmation process of FIG. 61. FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device as viewed from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Zb-Zb of the privilege card discharging device, (c) [Fig. 4] is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the standby member of the privilege card discharging device when viewed from the top side. FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining a privilege card discharging operation by the privilege card discharging device. (A) is a front view of a privilege card, (b) is a rear view of a privilege card. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in a card information area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion production completion confirmation process performed in the command determination process of FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 72. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process performed in the variation effect setting process of FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the stop design setting processing which is executed in the fluctuation production setting processing in Figure 73. It is a flowchart which shows the disengagement stop symbol setting process performed in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. 70 is a flowchart showing a card ejection process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a receiver card reading process executed in the receiver card confirmation process of FIG. 82. FIG. (A) is a top view which shows typically several privilege cards piled up in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a sectional side view which shows the state of the privilege card of (a) typically. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a privilege card used in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of privilege cards stacked in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the eighth embodiment. It is a typical side sectional view for explaining the composition of a 9th embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 10th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 10th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the privilege card in 11th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the privilege card in 11th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 12th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 12th Embodiment, ( FIG. 13C is a sectional view of a seal member attached to a privilege card in the twelfth embodiment. It is a typical side sectional view for explaining the composition which reads the information on the IC tag of the seal member stuck on each privilege card in a card discharge device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows discharge card confirmation processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 13th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 13th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows typically the internal structure at the time of seeing the privilege card ejection apparatus in 14th Embodiment from a side surface, (b) is an enlarged view of the Ex section in (a).

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17.

The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when changing the effect contents during the reach effect.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach production, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided. In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done.

Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. A touch sensor (not shown) for this purpose and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance are incorporated.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and in accordance with the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the variable resistance value of the variable resistor, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

On the left side of the lower plate 50, an opening 54 for paying out a bonus coin C (see FIG. 7) described later is formed, and below the opening 54, a coin for receiving the bonus coin C paid out. The payout tray 53 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. A bonus coin payout device 450 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided on the back surface side of the lower plate unit 15 as a payout device for bonus coins C paid out from the opening 54.

On the left side of the coin payout tray 53, a coin information reading device 300 is formed so as to project forward. A concave coin receiving portion 300a is formed on the upper surface of the coin information reading device 300, and the bonus coin C can be detachably (detachably) attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. There is.

Further, the coin information reading device 300 has an IC tag reader 302 for the receiving portion (see FIG. 8), and the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C mounted in the coin receiving portion 300a (see FIG. 7). From the reference), the coin information as the special value can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

A coin effect button 301 is provided on the front surface (the surface on the front view side) of the coin information reading device 300. This coin effect button 301 is used when the player desires the appearance of the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving portion 300a, or when the reach effect as the privilege is revealed. Is a button that can be operated by the player when the appearance of the reach effect is unnecessary.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to a back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16, so that a game can be played on the front surface of the game board 13 due to the behavior of the ball. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area which is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, indicate whether it is changing or not by a lighting state, and a stop symbol corresponding to a probability variation jackpot. It also indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a deviating symbol by a lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, the above-mentioned probability that the pachinko machine 10 is changing is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability increases and a special gaming state is likely to occur. Furthermore, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the ball is in a game state where it is easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state in which it is easy for the ball to easily enter the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 3) because the jackpot probability remains unchanged and only the second symbol hit probability increases. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, which is a state of a game that is neither probable change nor time saving (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is improved). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball inlet 64 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time are changed. Good as a thing.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that variably displays the third symbol triggered by winning in the first entrance 64. A second symbol display device 82 including a light emitting diode (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with passage of the sphere of the second ball entrance 67 as a trigger is provided.

The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the center frame 86. Is provided. Third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed in the first symbol display device 37, in the display of the first symbol display device 37 A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the LCD, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 before the stop symbol (any one of the probability variation jackpot symbol, the regular jackpot symbol, and the deviation symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the hold lamp 85. Four reserve lamps 85 are provided for the maximum reserve number, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, and three times or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times of variable display based on winning in the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed as a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is reserved. The display may be performed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different for the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

The second symbol display device 82 has a display unit 83 for the second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, as a display symbol (second symbol) on the display unit 83. The symbol "○" and the symbol "X" are alternately turned on to perform variable display, and when the variable display is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, symbol "○"), the first The ball entrance 64 is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the holding lamp 84 is also lit up. The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it perform using a part of. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of times of passing through the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times (for example, (8 times). Further, since the number of times of holding is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a lottery for the main controller 110 is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (a solenoid 209 (Fig. 8)) part)). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66 and a second inlet (through gate) 67. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, a bonus coin payout device 450, which is a payout device for paying out the bonus coins C, will be described. FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the privilege coin payout device 450. 5A and 5B are perspective views showing the bottom member 462 of the privilege coin payout device 450, and FIG. 5C is a perspective view showing the standby member 470.

As shown in FIG. 4, the privilege coin payout device 450 is a storage member 460 capable of storing a plurality of privilege coins C, and a temporary interval before paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54, separated from the storage member 460. And a standby member 470, which is a typical standby portion.

The storage member 460 in the privilege coin payout device 450 is a cylindrical peripheral wall member 461, a bottom member 462 located at the lower end side of the peripheral wall member 461 and movably provided with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, and the peripheral wall member 461. A lid member 463 for covering the opening at the upper end and a coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) serving as a drive source for moving the bottom member 462 in the front-rear direction (the arrow F direction and the opposite direction) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461. Have

In the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462, a plurality of privilege coins C can be stacked and accommodated in the thickness direction. The lid member 463 is configured to be removable, and can be removed as necessary, for example, when the privilege coin C is replenished in the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462. The lid member 463 is provided with a biasing member 463a that biases the stacked privilege coins C from above in order to stabilize payout of the privilege coins C.

The bottom member 462 includes a peripheral wall portion 462a having an inner peripheral wall that communicates with the inner peripheral wall of the peripheral wall member 461, and a bottom lid portion 462b that is openable and closable with respect to the peripheral wall member 462a by rotating about a shaft 462c. have.

In the bottom member 462, when the bottom cover 462b is closed, the depth (height) of the internal space formed by the peripheral wall 462a and the bottom cover 462b is the number of sheets to be paid out at one time (this embodiment). In the form, it is configured so as to be able to store the privilege coin C for one coin.

Specifically, when the bottom cover 462b is closed, the depth y of the internal space formed by the peripheral wall 462a and the bottom cover 462b is once when the thickness of the privilege coin C is x. When the number of bonus coins C paid out to is a, the depth is such that the relationship “(a-1)x<y≦ax” is established. In addition, a slight offset α (for example, α is about 1/10 of the thickness x of the privilege coin C) is provided so as not to affect the number of privilege coins C paid out at one time, and the peripheral wall portion 462a and the bottom cover portion 462b are provided. The depth y of the internal space formed by and may be the depth that satisfies the relationship of “(a−1)x<y≦a(x+α)”.

The bottom lid portion 462b is rotated around the shaft 462c by its own weight to be opened, so that the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 5A) changes to the opened state (the state shown in FIG. 5B). It is configured. As shown in FIG. 4, a support member 465 is provided below the storage member 460, and when the storage member 460 is in the normal state (state shown in FIG. 4), the upper end 465b of the support member 465 is By supporting the bottom lid portion 462b, the closed state of the bottom lid portion 462b is maintained.

On the other hand, when the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 reaches a position not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom of the bottom member 462 is reached. The lid 462b is rotated around the shaft 462c by its own weight to be opened, and as a result, one piece of the privilege coin C stored in the bottom member 462 is supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470 (FIG. 6 ( See a)).

When the bottom cover portion 462b of the bottom member 462 is removed from being supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom cover portion 462b is supported by the slope surface 465a of the support member 465, which slopes downward toward the lower plate unit 15 side. It is configured not to be opened beyond the inclination of 465a.

Further, the bottom member 462 is a privilege coin other than the one privilege coin C supplied to the standby member 470 when it is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, that is, of the peripheral wall member 461. It has a support plate 462d for prohibiting movement of the privilege coin C left in the internal space.

On the other hand, the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 includes a main body 471 and a coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) that serves as a drive source for moving the main body 471 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow U and the opposite direction). And have.

The main body portion 471 has an inclined surface 471a that descends and is inclined toward the lower plate unit 15 side, and a rib 471b that is provided upright around the storage member 460 side. In the normal state (state shown in FIG. 4), the main body portion 471 is located below the opening 54 of the lower plate unit 15 and is moved upward (in the direction of arrow U) by being driven by the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8). Is configured to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a payout IC tag reader 501 is arranged beside the standby member 470 in the normal state (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 5C). By the payout IC tag reader 501, the special coin C located on the standby member 470, that is, the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7) embedded in the special coin C to be paid out next time through the opening 54 is treated as a special value. Of the coin information can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

Here, since the standby member 470 is arranged apart from the storage member 460, it is possible to prevent the payout IC tag reader 501 from erroneously reading the coin information of the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460. You can

The main body 471 of the standby member 470 is made of a material that does not interfere with the transmission of a transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.) used for reading information, such as a non-metal such as resin, so that coin information can be read stably. It is preferable to be composed of the above material.

On the other hand, the storage member 460 is preferably made of a material, for example, a metal, which obstructs transmission of a transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.) used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7).

By configuring the storage member 460 from a material that interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium used for reading the coin information from the IC tag 602, the payout IC tag reader 501 allows the special coin C stored inside the storage member 460. It is possible to prevent reading the coin information of. As a result, the payout IC tag reader 501 can reliably read only the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470.

As described above, the privilege coin payout device 450 according to the present embodiment supplies (discharges, transfers) the plurality of privilege coins C stored in the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 one by one, and then, onto the standby member 470. The coin information of the privilege coin C located is read out.

With this configuration, each type of privilege coin C can be stored in the storage member 460 regardless of the type of the privilege coin C (that is, the content of the coin information of the privilege coin C).

Therefore, the manager who manages the privilege coin C (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 that can pay out the privilege coin C is installed) additionally supplies the privilege coin C to the storage member 460. In doing so, the privilege coins C are not sorted according to their type (that is, the content of the coin information). Therefore, the management load of the administrator who manages the privilege coin C is suppressed (reduced).

Further, since only one privilege coin C is on standby in the standby member 470, the type of the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the opening 54 is recognized by the reading by the payout IC tag reader 501. be able to. Therefore, when a suggestion condition described below is satisfied (satisfied), a variable display (dynamic display) or a stop display in a mode according to the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suggest (or inform) the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the operation of the above-described privilege coin payout device 450 for paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54 will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the payout of the privilege coin C by the privilege coin payout device 450.

When supplying one privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, first, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excitation), and the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F). To move.

Here, when the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 reaches a position where it is not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, as shown in FIG. 6A, the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 rotates around the shaft 462c by its own weight. It is rotated and released.

Then, one privilege coin C stored in the bottom member 462 slides in the direction of the arrow M1, and as a result, the privilege coin C is supplied to the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470. As a result, one piece of privilege coin C is brought into a state of waiting for payout from the opening 54 in the main body 471.

Here, when the bottom member 462 moves forward (in the direction of arrow F), the support plate 462d is located below the peripheral wall member 461, and the support plate 462d supports the internal space of the peripheral wall member 461. The movement of the remaining privilege coin C is prevented.

Then, when the bonus coin C is supplied to the main body 471 of the standby member 470, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the bottom member 462 is moved rearward (direction of arrow B). As a result, the storage member 460 returns to the normal state, and a new privilege coin C is stored in the bottom member 472 accordingly.

On the other hand, when paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excited). When the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on, the main body 471 moves upward (direction of arrow U).

Here, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the inclined surface 471a of the main body 471 reaches the opening 54, the privilege coin C that has been on standby by the standby member 470 (main body 471) slides in the direction of arrow M2. As a result, it is dispensed to the outside through the opening 54. After that, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the main body 471 is moved downward (direction of arrow D). As a result, the main body 471 returns to the normal state, and the new privilege coin C supplied from the storage member 460 can be received.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the privilege coin C used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. 7A is a front view of the privilege coin C, and FIG. 7B is a sectional view taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the bonus coin C is a medium formed in a coin shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a coin main body 601 made of a non-metal material such as resin, It is composed of an IC tag 602 embedded inside the coin body 601.

The IC tag 602 is a wireless tag mainly including a small IC (Integrated Circuit) chip (not shown) and a built-in antenna (not shown). Generally, the IC tag 602 and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) are provided. ) Tags or electronic tags.

The IC tag 602 embedded inside the privilege coin C (coin body 601) of the present embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. An active type IC tag having a built-in battery may be adopted as the IC tag 602.

The IC chip (not shown) of the IC tag 602 has a non-rewritable memory that can store information in a non-volatile manner (for example, ROM or WOROM (Write Once ROM)). Then, the coin information as a special value is stored in the non-rewritable memory.

The coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is five types of main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). Of the (identification information), this is information indicating one main symbol, and the type of the privilege coin C is distinguished by such coin information.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C can be recognized from the design of the surface of the coin body 601. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the privilege coin C in which the octopus pattern is designed on the surface of the coin body 601 stores information indicating the octopus pattern corresponding to “1”, Can visually recognize the design of the surface of the coin body 601 to know the type of privilege coin C (contents of coin information).

In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by mounting one piece of the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300, a symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the mounted privilege coin C, that is, The reach effect using any one of the five main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) can be displayed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting/receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, I/O, and other values are stored. Area) and. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 11). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Is input to the RAM 203, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) as the power failure processing is immediately executed, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a hold lamp 84, and various switches including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown). A solenoid 209 including 208, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a in the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and corresponds to the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the firing solenoid is excited, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice output from the voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the light output from the lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. It is for controlling setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that is performed. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory.

Here, the ROM 222 has a coin type table 222a that associates the coin information with the coin type (that is, the symbol) indicated by the coin information. The coin information of the privilege coin C read by the payout IC tag reader 501 or the receiving IC tag reader 302 can identify the type of the privilege coin C by referring to the coin type table 222a.

The RAM 223 includes a payout coin memory 223a, a receiving coin memory 223b, a complete removal counter 223c, a coin payout suggestion flag 223d, a coin payout confirmation flag 223e, a coin payout flag 223f, a coin supply flag 223g, and a receiving part. It has a coin flag 223h.

The payout coin memory 223a is a memory for storing the type of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 (main body 471) of the privilege coin payout device 450, that is, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time. Although details will be described later, when the suggestion condition is satisfied and the display for suggesting the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is performed on the third symbol display device 82, the privilege stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The display is set based on the type of coin C.

The receiving coin memory 223b is a memory for storing the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving portion 300a of the coin information reading device 300. Although details will be described later, when performing a reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a, the reach effect is set based on the type of the privilege coin C stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b. Is done.

The complete disengagement counter 223c sends a variation pattern command corresponding to complete disengagement from the main control device 110 in a state where the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is not suggested (that is, a state in which the suggestion condition is not satisfied). It is a counter for counting the number of consecutive receptions.

The complete deviation counter 223c is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to when the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the perfect deviation is interrupted, that is, the reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation at normal or probability variation jackpot, front-back deviation reach, and reach other than front-back deviation). When a command is received from main controller 110, it is cleared to 0. Further, the complete disconnection counter 223c is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the complete disengagement counter 223c reaches 30, that is, when the complete disengagement occurs 30 times in succession, the bonus coin to be paid out next time. The suggestion condition, which is a condition for starting suggestion (or notification) of the type C, is configured to be satisfied.

The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is a flag that indicates whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied. If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on, it indicates that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The coin payout suggestion flag 223d, which is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied, is then turned off when the privilege coin C is paid out from the opening 54.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received from the main control device 110 30 times, or regardless of the receipt of the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection. When the condition for awarding bonus coins is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main controller 110), the suggestion condition is established and the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on.

The coin payout confirmation flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the payout of the privilege coin C has been confirmed. If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on, it means that the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed because the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied.

The coin payout confirmation flag 223e is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is mainly used). It is turned on when it is received from the control device 110). The coin payout confirmation flag 223e, which is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied, is then turned on by receiving a stop command from the main control device 110.

The coin payout flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the payout operation of the privilege coin C is performed. If the coin payout flag 223f is on, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later, and the privilege coin C is paid out from the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450. The action of issuing is performed.

The coin payout flag 223f is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the benefit coin C is paid out. More specifically, after the payment of the bonus coin C is confirmed by receiving the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, it is turned on by receiving the stop command from the main control device 110. The coin payout flag 223f thus turned on is turned off when the operation of paying out the privilege coin C from the standby member 470 is completed in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

The coin supply flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the supply operation (transfer) of the privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is performed. If the coin supply flag 223g is turned on, the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later, and the supply operation of the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is performed. Is done.

The coin supply flag 223g is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the payout of the privilege coin C is completed. The coin supply flag 223g thus turned on is turned off when the supply operation of the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is completed in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

The receiving section coin flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving section 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is performed. If the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on, the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a is executed.

This coin receiving part flag 223h is a customer waiting effect under the condition that the bonus coin C is mounted on the coin accepting part 300a (an effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time). When the coin effect button 301 is pressed, the state is inverted each time. Specifically, when the coin effect button 301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect under the condition that the bonus coin C is attached to the coin accepting part 300a, the coin accepting part flag 223h is turned on if it is off. On the other hand, if the coin receiving portion flag 223h is on, it is turned off. The coin receiving portion flag 223h is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed, the command stored first in the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 has a main controller 110, a display controller 114, a voice output device 226 for outputting voice from a speaker (not shown), a lamp display device 227 for performing lamp display by the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, The payout IC tag reader 501, the receiving IC tag reader 302, the coin effect button 301, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 in the privilege coin payout device 450, etc. are respectively connected.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, bus lines 239 and 240. Equipped with. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same specification as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is another model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and has a variable time counter (not shown).

Here, the variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) from the start of the variation effect when the variation effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81. This fluctuation time counter is reset to zero (see S1404 of FIG. 33) immediately before the fluctuation effect is started in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 33) executed every 20 milliseconds, and the third symbol display device 81. It is updated by adding 1 every time the variable effect process is executed while the variable effect is being performed (see S1408 in FIG. 33). That is, the variable time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the fluctuation effect process, the fluctuation effect data and the continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter are read from the video RAM 234 described later, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the image corresponding to the effect data.

In addition, the work RAM 233 has, as flags (not shown), a production permission flag indicating whether or not production permission has been given, and a variation start flag indicating whether or not variation display should be started. The production permission flag is turned on when the production permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the power is cut off. (Not shown). Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the display fluctuation pattern command for instructing the mode of the fluctuation effect or the continuous notice effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 is received (S1206 in FIG. 31). ), when the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (see S1403 in FIG. 33).

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for presentation such as symbols (background symbol and third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format.

The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the data for the variable effect after decompression displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter, referred to as “variable effect data”) and the like. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in association with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. Accordingly, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) after the variation effect is started. The variable effect data for performing a new reach effect corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C is stored in the video RAM 234 together with other variable effect data.

Further, the video RAM 234 is provided with a variation effect area (not shown). The variable effect area (not shown) is an area for storing the variable effect data of the variable effect (variable display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines the variation elapsed time from the variation effect data in the form indicated by the display variation pattern command stored in advance in the video RAM 234. The variation effect data is read out and stored in this variation effect area (see S1406 in FIG. 33). The variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1407 in FIG. 33). Then, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the variation effect area in accordance with the variation elapsed time.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. To be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213 to complete the process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and at the same time, the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37, and lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 82.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used.

The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. It is appropriately stored in the created counter buffer.

The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored according to the winning timing of the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 738, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Here, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value=0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. , And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in. There are two types of random number values for jackpots, one for low probability and one for high probability, and the number of random number values for jackpot in low probability is 2, and the value is "373,727". The number of random numbers that are a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59,109,163,211,263,317,367,421,479,523,631,683,733".

The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit, and in the present embodiment, one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, It is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes a low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two kinds of hit types are determined. It Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high-probability state and a low-probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to the deviation. One of the three display modes in total is selected.

The high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability variation.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. And "rear out-of-front-reach" (for example, a range of 0 to 8) and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" (e.g., a range of 9 to 38) in which the last stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely disengaged" (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Is stored.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables in which the range of random number values for which the stop pattern is selected is different. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, in which area of the reserved sphere storage area each random value is stored (that is, the number of reserved pieces), and the like. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected with a range of random values of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “complete deviation” so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, so that it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". Further, if each random number value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, the disturbance corresponding to the “completely missed” stop pattern in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical range of 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than out of front/back" is widened to 9 to 50, and "reach other than out of front/rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily continued.

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) before returning to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 240, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the variation symbol number) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the medium symbol) is stopped after the reach is generated.

Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or similarly determine the symbol variation mode by the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stopped symbol. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third fluctuation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and besides the symbol variation, sliding the varying symbol, A notice effect is given such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, an effect pattern in which the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, the variable time is subtracted to reduce the time of variable display, or the variable time is not added or subtracted is selected. ..

As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values for which the effect patterns are selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on the low probability state, which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, and the like.

As described above, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 determine the variation time of the symbol variation, and the variation type counter CS3 determines the time to be added to and subtracted from the variation time. Therefore, the final change time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the change type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. Is obtained when The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting in the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol is 9 types of main symbols consisting of 9 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers "1" to "9", and one type of sub-symbol (smaller in this embodiment) formed smaller than the main symbols. It is composed of a picture of a shellfish). These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub-symbols between each main symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is displayed, and a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display ends. It is configured as follows. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of a big hit, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are displayed is performed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to even-numbered numbers (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) are arranged is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the main symbol and the sub symbol for each symbol row are cyclically scrolled from right to left (direction of arrow X) to scroll (horizontal scrolling). To be done.

In such a horizontal scroll, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in a descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are arranged so as to appear in an ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 10, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is arranged in each of the symbol columns (Z1 to Z3) in three stages of left/middle/right or upper/middle/lower. Is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns.

Here, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set in any case during horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, five lines including a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a rightward rising line L4, and a leftward rising line L5 are set as valid lines.

Then, in each game, when a variation of horizontal scrolling is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on one of the activated lines. .. At this time, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol sequence Z1, the lower symbol sequence Z3, and the middle symbol sequence Z2.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer allocation that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 11, in this start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power-off has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination. If the value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case also the process proceeds to S111. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main control device 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as a regular processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) or the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output processing (S201), for example, it is determined whether or not there is the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S501 (see FIG. 15), and if there is the winning detection information, the number of balls acquired for the payout control device 111 is determined. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted. Further, by this external output processing (S201), the variable pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, or the ball. In the case of launching, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the respective values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the first A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the jackpot state is executed (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly described, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is also acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display section 83 of. Then, the lottery for the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208), If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes after S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 and 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, the process at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S207 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 ends or the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

As shown in FIG. 13, in this variation process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 during the jackpot and the predetermined time period after the jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this processing is ended.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation-holding balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-holding balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number N of operation reserve balls> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of operation reserve balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserve ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area.

After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3, and this change time is If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to the value of the first per random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, a symbol which becomes a high probability state after the big hit according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether or not the symbol becomes a low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on if the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on if the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on if the probability is off. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. The command is set (S310). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the stop command, the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13). In this variation start processing (S306), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a normal low probability, “7,307” of the numerical values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 is a win value, and when the probability is high, “28, 30”. 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618" are the winning values.

When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402). ).

In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high-probability state after the big hit (probability variation big hit) or to shift to the low-probability state (normal big hit) is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. In addition, among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to a low probability state (normal big hit) thereafter, and in the case of "0, 4", the following. , Transition to high probability state (probability variation jackpot).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot is not the big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether it is the high probability state or the low probability state. ..

Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the detachment symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

After the processing of S403 or the processing of S405, the variation pattern command is set (S406). In the processing of S406, the variation pattern command at the time of the big hit is the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S403 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, a normal big hit or a probability big hit). It is set according to Further, in the processing of S406, the variation pattern command at the time of deviation is the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S405 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (that is, front/rear outreach or other than front/rear outreach). It is set according to whether it is reach or complete loss.

After the process of S406, a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404 (S407), and then the process returns to the variation process.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S201 of the main process (see FIG. 12), these commands are voice lamps. It is transmitted to the control device 113.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) associated with the winning in the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor, and turns on/off the firing of the ball on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

When this start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S602).

After the processing of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of operation-holding balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the number N of operation reserve balls <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of operation reserve balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The respective values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area of the empty holding areas of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605).

On the other hand, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 but the number N of operation-holding balls is not N<4 (S603: No) , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer allocation that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There is a built-in process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2115 (see FIG. 19) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 19, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2112 in FIG. 19), the power-off process of S2115 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2115 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004.

On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2115 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2005: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2115, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on before executing the power-off processing in S2115 (see S2114 in FIG. 19). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2115 is executed, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are already cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

After the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S2010, the privilege coin payout device 450 is set (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Here, in the process of S2011, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege coin C is located on the main body 471 of the standby member 470, and when the privilege coin C is not located on the main body 471 of the standby member 470, Turns on the coin supply solenoid 464 to supply the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, and ends the processing of S2011. On the other hand, when the privilege coin C is located on the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470, the processing of S2011 is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a main process executed after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing (S2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), The process moves to S2110 without performing S2102 to S2109.

Here, in the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2109 that determines whether 1 ms has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the update processing (see S2301 of FIG. 21) of each counter in the decorative symbol variable display processing of S2110 and the command determination processing of S2111 in a short cycle. By executing the command determination process in S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2107 described later ( After that, the power-on notification process is executed (S2103).

The power-on notification process (S2103) is for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S2104 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2104, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2105). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen (demo screen) is performed, and the setting is a command. Is transmitted to the display controller 114. In the hold quantity display updating process, the hold lamp 85 is turned on according to the value of the hold count counter 223a.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2106). In this frame button input monitoring/production process (S2106), if the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to. For example, when the notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It may be changed to a production that can be held or may be an enter button for selecting one of the reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2106 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2107), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process (S2107), the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process (S2108), the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. It

After the process of S2108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S2108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

The process of S2110 is a process of setting the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) on the third symbol display device 81, and transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 114. The details of the decorative symbol variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) is executed, a coin payout process for paying out the privilege coin C from the privilege coin payout device 450 is executed (S2111). The detailed processing of this coin payout processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2111, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2112). Details of this command determination processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S2112) is executed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed.

If the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he or she can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2112) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

In this command determination processing (S2112), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is analyzed to perform main control. It is confirmed whether the fluctuation pattern command is received from the device 110 (S2201).

When the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2201, the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205).

After the processing of S2205, the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2206). The variation time extracted by the process of S2206 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when the variation effect mode is set in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

After the process of S2206, the display mode (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front reach, complete out) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2207), the command determination process (S2112) ends, and the main Return to processing. The display mode extracted by the process of S2207 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is related to the setting of the mode of the variable effect in the decorative pattern variable display process (see FIG. 21) described later and the payout of the bonus coin C. It is used when setting.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). ..

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202: Yes), the stop symbol from the stop symbol command (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, front-back deviation reach, reach other than front-back deviation, Any one of the complete deviations is extracted (S2213), the command determination processing (S2112) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing. The stop symbol extracted by the process of S2213 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223 and is used when the stop symbol is set in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is on, that is, whether the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege coin C (S2209). That is, is the stop command being processed received after the reception of the command corresponding to the probability variation big hit (the variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the present embodiment) which is the condition for giving the privilege coin C? To confirm.

If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is on (S2209: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2209, the stop command in process is the stop command received after receiving the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. The payout flag 223f is turned on (S2210).

When the coin payout flag 223f is turned on in the process of S2210, in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described below, the coin payout flag 223f is located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in synchronization with the stop display of the probability variation big hit. The reward coin C is paid out.

After the process of S2210, the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned off (S2211), the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned off (S2212), the command determination process (S2112) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2209, if the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is off, that is, if the condition for granting the privilege coin C is not satisfied (S2209: No), the processes of S2210 to S2212 are skipped, The command determination process (S2112) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

In addition, as a result of checking by the process of S2203, when the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2203: No), other commands (that is, variation pattern command, stop symbol command, or other than the stop symbol command) Command) has been received, a process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2204), the command determination process (S2112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

In the processing of S2204, if the received other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 233. Alternatively, if the received other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the decorative symbol variable display processing (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 21, in the decorative symbol variable display process (S2110), first, various counters (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 (a counter for setting the effect mode of the variable effect, a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of a normal jackpot). , Update processing of a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of detachment) is executed (S2301).

After the processing of S2301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302). As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2302: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. The decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the coin payout setting process is executed (S2304). ). Here, in the coin payout setting process (S2304), based on the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2212, the setting relating to the payout of the privilege coin C is performed. The detailed process of this coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the coin payout setting process (S2304), the variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2205).

After the process of S2205, the mode of the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable time acquired by the process of S2206 and the setting by the coin payout setting process (S2304). The variation effect setting process is executed (S2306). The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2306), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2307). The detailed process of the stop symbol setting process (S2307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2306) is output to the display control device 114. (S2308).

Then, a display stop symbol command for instructing the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309), and this variable display process is performed. Ends and returns to the main processing.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Next, the above-mentioned coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a coin payout setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 22, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), first, it is confirmed whether or not a command indicating a big hit has been received (S2401). In the process of S2401, it is confirmed whether the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2401).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2401, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2401, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a mode indicating a deviation (front/rear reach, reach other than front/rear, complete disconnection) (S2401: No), it is It is confirmed whether the reach is off (S2406).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2406, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is out-of-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear) (S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

Therefore, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), if the variation pattern command indicates a display mode other than complete deviation, the process of S2402 is executed. In the process of S2402, the complete removal counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S2402).

After the processing of S2402, it is confirmed whether or not the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates the probability variation jackpot (S2403), and if it is the probability variation jackpot (S2403: Yes), the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied. Therefore, the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on (S2404).

By the coin payout confirmation flag 223e being turned on in the process of S2404, at the end of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command (that is, at the stop display), the privilege The privilege coin C that is on standby on the standby member 470 of the coin payout device 450 is paid out from the opening 54.

After the processing of S2404, the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on (S2405), and the coin payout setting processing (S2304) is ended. Since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2304, the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received fluctuation pattern command is a bonus coin to be paid out next time. It is performed in a mode of suggesting (or notifying) the type of C.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2406, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is not out-reach, that is, is completely out (S2406: Yes), the number of times of receiving the variation pattern command indicating complete out-of-sync is determined. The complete out-of-count process of counting is executed (S2407), and the coin payout setting process (S2304) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the above-described complete deviation count processing (S2407) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the complete omission counting process (S2407) executed in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

As shown in FIG. 23, in this complete disconnection counting process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2501). As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2501, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2501: No), the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is not made on the third symbol display device 81, Since the number of continuous receptions of the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is being counted, the complete disconnection counter 223c is incremented by 1 in this case (S2502).

After the processing of S2502, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the complete deviation counter 223c is 30 or more (S2503), and if the value of the complete deviation counter 223c is 30 or more (complete deviation counter 223c≧30) (S2503: Yes), Since the variation pattern command corresponding to complete failure is received 30 times in succession, the suggestion condition that is the condition for starting the suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied, so the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on. (S2504), the complete disconnection counting process (S2407) ends.

Although details will be described later, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the reach effect mode (change mode) that indicates the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time (change mode). ) Can be set. Further, since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is set in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25) or the disengaged stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26). It is possible to set the suggested stop design.

In general, the player has a desire to generate a jackpot game, so the variable display (or the stop display at the time of stop) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the jackpot state. If it continues to be completely out of line with the above, the player who sees it will gradually lose interest in the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion condition is satisfied and the coin payout suggestion is made when the variable display indicating the complete deviation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. The flag 223d is turned on. As a result, it is possible to set a stop symbol that suggests the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time, so that the player can be expected to acquire the bonus coin C.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the expectation for another value (privilege coin C) even in a gaming state in which a prize ball cannot be expected to be obtained, and thus the conventional general You can experience new game play that was not available in gaming machines. Therefore, such a new game property becomes a new added value, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a long time.

Since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received fluctuation pattern command is a bonus coin to be paid out next time. It will be performed in a manner that suggests the type of C.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2503, if the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is less than 30 (S2503: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, so the processing of S2504 is skipped and this complete disconnection is performed. The counting process (S2407) ends.

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2501: Yes) as a result of confirmation by the process of S2501, the suggestion condition has already been established, and the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is the symbol display device. Since it is performed at 81, the processing of S2502 to S2504 is skipped, and the complete deviation count processing (S2407) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 24, in the variation effect setting process (S2304), first, is the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) showing complete deviation? Is confirmed (S2601).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2601, if the display mode extracted from the fluctuation pattern command indicates complete deviation (S2601: Yes), the deviation fluctuation effect as the effect mode of the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A mode is set (S2606), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) is ended. In the process of S2606, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the outlier fluctuation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2601, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (rear out-of-front/reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2602.

In S2602, it is confirmed whether or not the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a normal jackpot (S2602).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2602, when the display mode extracted from the fluctuation pattern command does not normally indicate a jackpot, that is, the received fluctuation pattern command indicates a probability variation jackpot or out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out-of-front/reach). If it is shown (S2602: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S2603). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 has been operated in response to the player's desire to display the reach effect using the bonus coin C on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2603, if the receiving portion coin flag 223h is on (S2603: Yes), it is desired to display the reach effect using the privilege coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, the reach effect mode is set (S2607) based on the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b and the change time that defines the reach type (normal reach, special reach, etc.) (S2607). The setting process (S2306) ends.

The reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 is stored in the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b, that is, in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. It is a reach effect mode as a privilege including a pattern corresponding to the coin information that is present.

For example, when the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (the value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C mounted on the coin information reading device 300) corresponds to the octopus symbol, this octopus symbol A new reach production mode using is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

As an example of the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, and the remaining one column is displayed. As a result, a new reach production mode which is not usual and which includes a notice production in which the symbols pass as a group (so-called a school of fish) is illustrated. Further, while the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column is changed and the symbols are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.). ) May be a new reach production mode which is not normally performed.

As a result of the process of S2607, the reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2603, if the receiving coin flag 223h is off (S2603: No), it is confirmed whether the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2604). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting the suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied.

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S2604 (S2604; Yes), the suggestion condition is satisfied, and in such a case, the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, Based on the variation time period that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.), the reach effect mode is set (S2605), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) ends.

The reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 is the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, that is, the IC tag 602 of the bonus coin C to be paid out next, which is located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450. It is a new reach effect mode including a pattern corresponding to the coin information stored in. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using this octopus symbol is set.

As the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a in three columns are the same as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 described above. In a state where the two columns are stopped and displayed, the remaining one column fluctuates, and a new reach production mode which is not usually included including a notice production that the symbol passes through as a group (so-called a school of fish) and While the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the partial coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates and the symbols are highlighted (enlarged display etc.). An example of a new reach production mode, which is not usual, is illustrated.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the establishment of the suggestion condition) and the process of S2607 are set. If the coin information of the target privilege coin C is the same as the reach effect mode (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), the coin. The same reach effect mode using the design corresponding to the information is set. For example, with the reach effect mode set by the processes of S2605 and S2607, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three, and the remaining 1 As the row changes, the reach effect mode including the notice effect in which the symbols pass as a group is set.

As a result of the processing in S2605, a new reach effect mode corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is a value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time, a new reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the process of S2605. The mode is a variation mode (variation display mode) that suggests the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

Here, as described above, one of the requirements for satisfying the suggestion condition is that the complete deviation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is continuously displayed for a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment). is there. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied based on the fact that the complete disengagement has continued, the variation display for the probability variation jackpot or the outreach (rear out-of-front reach, non-rear-reach reach) is the third symbol. When it is performed on the display device 81, the variable display is performed in a new reach effect mode including a symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time.

Therefore, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the appearance frequency of a new reach production mode including a specific symbol corresponding to the bonus coin C to be paid out next time increases. As a result of the increase in the appearance frequency of the special reach effect mode including the specific symbol, the player recognizes the special reach effect mode including the specific symbol as a significant reach effect mode, and is paid out next time. It is possible to play a game while expecting to obtain the privilege coin C to be provided.

At this time, the player can predict the type of privilege coin C from the new reach effect mode including the specific symbol that appears with significant frequency. Therefore, if it is expected that the type of privilege coin C desired to be won will be paid out next time, the player will have a higher expectation for winning.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, by causing the third symbol display device 81 to produce a new reach production mode, the coin information as the special value (as the special value It is possible to make the player hold expectations for the privilege coin C having the information). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in playability as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is lost. Difficult to maintain interest for a long time.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2604, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2604: No), the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the effect mode of the variable effect. And the variation time period that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2608), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) ends.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2602, when the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a normal big hit (S2602: Yes), the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is Since it will stop at the main symbol corresponding to an even number, in such a case also, the process proceeds to S2608 and the value of a counter (not shown) for setting the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223, The reach effect mode is set based on the variation time that defines the type of reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the above-mentioned stop symbol setting process (S2307) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process (S2307) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 25, in this stop symbol setting process (S2307), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot). Is confirmed (S2701).

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2701, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2701: Yes), it is confirmed whether it indicates a probability variation big hit (S2702).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2702, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S2702: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S2703). ..

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2703, if the receiving portion coin flag 223h is ON (S2703: Yes), it is desired to display the reach effect using the privilege coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (S2704), and this stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

Due to the processing of S2704, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C mounted on the coin information reading device 300 (in the present embodiment, an odd number) A stop symbol in which one of the corresponding five main symbols) is arranged will be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2703, if the receiving coin flag 223h is off (S2703: No), a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2707). The stop symbol setting process (S2307) ends.

The symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C paid out next time from the privilege coin payout device 450 by the processing of S2707 (in the present embodiment, an odd number) A stop symbol having one of the five main symbols corresponding to 1) will be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2702, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the probability variation jackpot but the normal jackpot (S2702: No), the jackpot provided in the RAM 223. The stop symbol is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) for setting the stop symbol at the time (S2706), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

In addition, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2701, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, but indicates a detachment (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear, complete detachment) ( (S2701: No), the disengagement stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol at the time of disengagement is executed (S2705), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) executed in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIG. 26, in this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is released. It is confirmed whether or not it indicates a reach other than the front/back deviation (S2801).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2801, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear out of reach, reach other than out-of-rear) (S2801: Yes), the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is set. It is confirmed whether it is on (S2802).

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S2802 (S2802: Yes), the stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2804).

Due to the process of S2804, the detachment stop symbol in the reach (rearward/rearward reach, reach other than front/rearward reach) waiting for the symbol corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the privilege coin payout device 450, When the variable display is stopped, it is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2802, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2802: No), in this case, a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting a stop symbol at the time of removal. A stop symbol is set based on the value of (S2803), and this deviation stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2801, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the out-reach, that is, if it indicates the complete out (S2801: No), the coin payout suggestion flag It is confirmed whether or not 223d is on (S2805), and if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2805: No), the value of the counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting the stop symbol at the time of removal. A stop symbol is set based on (S2806), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2805, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2806: No), the chance pattern corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is set as a stop symbol (S2807). , This disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

Here, the chance eye set by the process of S2807 is defined in advance for each type of privilege coin C (five types of main symbols corresponding to odd numbers in the present embodiment), and the chance corresponding to each type. Each eye is defined as an array of symbols including one symbol corresponding to each type. For example, when the type of the privilege coin C is an octopus symbol (a symbol corresponding to “1”), “turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)” is defined as the corresponding chance item. There is. Therefore, for example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance of the corresponding “turtle (3)/shark (4)/octopus (1)” is stopped. It is set as a design.

As a result of the processing of S2807, a specific chance according to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the deviation effect (variation display) is stopped. .. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance of "turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)" is a deviation variation effect. When stopped, the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, even if the deviation variation effect that does not expect a transition to the big hit state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the deviation occurs. When the variation production is stopped, a specific chance item (stop display) that indicates the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is displayed, so that the player who sees the specific chance item is the bonus coin to be paid out next time. You can play while expecting to get C.

At this time, the player can predict the type of privilege coin C from a particular chance of suggesting the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time. Therefore, if it is expected that the type of privilege coin C desired to be won will be paid out next time, the player will have a higher expectation for winning.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to stop and display the specific chance eye suggesting the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time. As a result, the player can be expected to have the expectation for the privilege coin C having the coin information as the special value (information as the special value). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in playability as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is lost. Difficult to maintain interest for a long time.

Next, the coin payout process (S2111) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the coin payout process (S2111) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 27, in the coin payout process (S2111), first, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout flag 223f is turned on (S2901). If it is turned on (S2901: Yes), the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on ( It is confirmed whether it is excited) (S2902).

If the coin payout solenoid 472 is not turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2902 (S2902: No), the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) (S2903), and the coin payout process (S2903) is performed. finish. As a result of the processing of S2903, the standby member 470 (main body 471) in the normal state moves upward to the position of the opening 54 (see FIG. 6B).

On the other hand, when the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2902 (S2902: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on ( S2904). The "predetermined time" in the confirmation processing of S2904 is a time sufficient for the bonus coin C on the standby member 470 (main body 471) to be paid out from the opening 54, and is defined to be, for example, about 3 seconds.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2904, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: No), the coin payout process (S2111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2904, when the predetermined time has passed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: Yes), the privilege coin C on the standby member 470 (main body part 471) is opened. Since the coin has been paid out, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned off (S2905). As a result of the process of S2905, the standby member 470 (main body 471) that was in the normal state moves downward from the position of the opening 54 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6A).

After the processing of S2905, the coin payout flag 223f is turned off (S2906), the coin supply flag 223g is turned on (S2907), and the coin payout processing (S2903) is ended. As the coin supply flag 223g is turned on in the process of S2907, the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460 is newly supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470.

If the coin payout flag 223f is off (S2901: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2901, it is confirmed whether the coin supply flag 223g is on (S2908).

If the coin supply flag 223g is OFF as a result of the confirmation in S2908 (S2908: No), it is confirmed whether the coin supply solenoid 464 is ON (excitation) (S2909).

Here, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2909, if the coin supply solenoid 464 is not turned on (excitation) (S2909: No), the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excitation) (S2910), and this coin payout processing ( The processing of S2903 is ended. As a result of the process of S2910, the bottom lid portion 462 of the storage member 460 which is in the normal state moves forward (to the lower plate unit 15 side) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 (see FIG. 6A).

On the other hand, when the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2909 (S2909: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (( S2911). The “predetermined time” in the confirmation processing of S2911 is a time sufficient for the privilege coins C stored in the bottom lid 462 to be supplied to the standby member 470, and is defined to be, for example, about 3 seconds. ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2911, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: No), the coin payout process (S2903) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2911, if the predetermined time has passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: Yes), the new privilege coin C is supplied to the standby member 470. The coin supply solenoid 464 is turned off (S2912), the coin supply flag 223g is turned off (S2913), and the coin payout process (S2903) is ended. Here, as a result of the process of S2912, the bottom lid portion 462 of the storage member 460 moves rearward with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6B).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, a payout coin detection process of reading coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 is executed (S3001). ). The detailed processing of the payout coin detection processing (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the payout coin detecting process (S3001) is executed, a receiving part coin detecting process for reading the coin information of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is executed (S3002), and the timer interruption is performed. The process ends. The detailed process of the receiver coin detection process (S3002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-mentioned payout coin detection processing (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing payout coin detection processing (S3001) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

As shown in FIG. 29, in the payout coin detection process (S3001), first, coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501 (S3101).

Next, based on the read coin information and the information stored in the coin type table 222a, the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470, that is, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined (S3102), A value indicating the determined type of coin is stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S3103), and the payout coin detection process (S3001) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-described receiver coin detection processing (S3002) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the receiving coin detection process (S3002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

As shown in FIG. 30, in the receiving coin detecting process (S3002), first, it is confirmed whether or not the bonus coin C is attached to the coin receiving unit 300a of the coin information reading device 300 (S3201). Whether or not the bonus coin C is mounted in the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving portion 300a) is detected by a contact sensor (not shown) provided in the coin receiving portion 300a.

As a result of the confirmation in S3201, when the bonus coin C is loaded in the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: Yes), the bonus coin C loaded in the coin receiving portion 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is received. It is read by the IC tag reader 302 for parts (S3202).

After the processing of S3202, based on the read coin information and the information stored in the coin type table 222a, the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300 is discriminated (S3203), and the discriminated coin The value indicating the type is stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (S3204).

After the processing of S3204, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205). The "customer waiting effect" is not a variable display or a jackpot effect, and is an effect that is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, and is a display irrelevant to the game state ( For example, a title display, a demo display, etc.).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3205, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3206, if the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S3207), and the receiving coin flag 223h is off. If there is (S3207: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on (S3208), and the receiving coin detecting process (S3002) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3207, if the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S3207: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving coin detecting process (S3002) ends. To do.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3205, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3205: No), or the process of S3206. As a result of the confirmation, if the coin effect button 301 is not pressed (S3206: No), the receiving coin detection process (S3002) is terminated without performing the processes of S3207 to S3209.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3201, when the privilege coin C is not mounted on the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving unit The coin detection process (S3002) ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the bonus coin C is mounted on the coin information reading device 300, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Every time the coin effect button 301 is operated, the value of the receiving coin flag 223h is inverted.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and an external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt processing is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the external interrupt process is executed in response to the reception of the command from the voice lamp control device 113, the received command is determined in S1201, S1202, and S1203. Specifically, in S1201, it is confirmed whether the received command is a production command (S1201). At this time, if the received command is a production permission command (S1201: Yes), a production permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1202), and the external interrupt processing ends.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a production command (S1201: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1202). At this time, if the received command is the display variation pattern command (S1202: Yes), the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1206), and the display variation pattern command is included. The variation mode (reach effect mode, deviation variation effect mode) is extracted (S1207), and the external interrupt process ends. The variation mode extracted by the process of S1206 is stored in a predetermined area in the work RAM 233 and is referred to in a variation effect process (see FIG. 33) described later.

Further, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S1202: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S1203). At this time, if the received command is a display stop design command (S1203: Yes), the stop design indicated by the display stop design command is set (S1208), and the external interrupt process ends.

Finally, if the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S1203: No), that is, if the received command is neither a production permission command, a display variation pattern command, or a display stop symbol command, Executes another process corresponding to the received command (S1204) and ends the external interrupt process. For example, if the received command is a stop command, the process of stopping the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Next, the main processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

The main process shown in FIG. 32 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, processing such as initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

After the execution of the initialization process (S1301), the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1302), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1303). .. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed in the process of S1303. The extracted character information is written in the inner area (S1304).

After the processing of S1304, it is confirmed whether or not an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1305). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S1305, if the production permission flag is off (S1305: No), the production permission command is not yet received from the main control device 110, and in such a case, the production permission command is received. Up to, that is, until the effect permission flag is turned on, the processing from S1306 is awaited.

As a result of checking in the process of S1305, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S1305: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1304 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the processing shifts to S1306 and thereafter.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit (S1306), and if it is not a big hit (S1306: No), the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The variable effect process for displaying the variable effect is executed (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. The detailed process of the variation effect process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in S1306, if the big hit is in progress (S1306: Yes), the big hit production process is executed (S1309). In the jackpot production process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, and images of different backgrounds are updated for each round (new extraction of character information from video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write to). After the jackpot effect process (S1309) ends, the process proceeds to the process of S1308.

In S1308, in order to execute the process (S1306, S1307, S1309) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds (20 ms), whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the process of S1306 was started. It is confirmed (S1308).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S1308, if 20 ms has not yet passed (S1308: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has passed, while if 20 ms or more has passed (S1308: Yes). Then, the processing shifts to the processing of S1306. Then, the processing from S1306 to S1309 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the above-described variation effect process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable effect process (S1307) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32).

As shown in FIG. 33, in this variable display processing, first, it is confirmed whether the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S1401), and if it is not changing (S1401: No). Then, it is confirmed whether a fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is on (S1402).

As a result of checking by the processing of S1402, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S1402: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1403), and the fluctuation time counter for counting the fluctuation time provided in the work RAM 233 (see FIG. (Not shown) is reset to 0 (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1401, if it is changing (S1401: Yes), the change time counter (not shown) is updated (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1405. The variable time counter is updated by reading the value of the variable time counter, adding 1 to the value, and writing the added value back to the variable time counter.

In S1405, it is confirmed whether or not the stop command is received from the main control device 110, and it is determined whether or not it is within the variable effect time (S1405). At this time, if it is determined that the stop command is not received and it is within the variation effect time (S1405: Yes), it is extracted from the variation pattern command for display in S1207 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 31). From the variation effect data corresponding to the variation mode, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation elapsed time (the elapsed time after the variation effect is started) indicated by the variation time counter is read from the video RAM 234, and the variation effect area of the video RAM 234 is read. It is stored in (not shown) (S1406). Next, an image corresponding to the variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S1407), and this variation effect process (S1307) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1405, when the stop command is received and it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation exceeds the fluctuation effect time (S1405: No), in S1208 of the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). With the set stop symbol, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped (S1411), and the variable effect process ends.

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S1402, if the fluctuation start flag is off (S1402: No), other display processing, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time has elapsed. The displayed customer waiting effect is displayed (S1409), and the variation effect process (S1307) ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 130 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, the awarding condition is satisfied and the prize ball (game) is played. The reward coin C having special value different from the value) is paid out (assigned).

By mounting the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300, the privilege coin C corresponds to the coin information of the mounted privilege coin C (that is, according to the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b). A new reach effect mode as a privilege can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, the player playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can have a high interest in the game by the new game playability that can be experienced by using the privilege coin C, and the new game playability. Becomes a new added value, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward obtaining the privilege coin C that allows the player to experience a new game property, and in that respect, the game property is improved and the game held by the player is held. The interest of can be maintained for a long time.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state satisfies the predetermined suggestion condition, the type of coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time (that is, the type of the bonus coin C). Is suggested (or notified) by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, when a certain game state (a game state satisfying the suggestion condition) is reached, the type of the bonus coin to be paid out next time is suggested by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the game is played. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special coin C may be acquired before the special coin C is acquired.

In particular, if the type of privilege coin C to be given next time, which is suggested by the display content (variable display or stop display) of the third symbol display device 81, is one that the player himself desires to obtain, The player can continue the game while expecting to obtain the privilege coin C.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the privilege coin C to be given next time is suggested (or notified) by the display content of the third symbol display device 81, so that a conventional general gaming machine is used. You can experience a new gameplay that was not available in. Therefore, such new game play becomes a new added value, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 54. In the above-described first embodiment, the bonus coin C in which the coin information as the special value is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded inside is paid out when the predetermined giving condition is satisfied. The second embodiment is configured so that the privilege card CA having a special value is discharged when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. In addition, in this 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 34, an opening 1054 for paying out a privilege card CA (see FIG. 38) described later is formed on the left side of the lower plate 50 in the pachinko machine 10A. In addition, a privilege card discharging device 1450 (see FIG. 36) described later is provided on the back surface side of the lower plate unit 15 as a device for discharging the privilege card CA from the opening 1054.

On the left side of the lower plate 50 and the opening 1054, a card information reading device 1300 (see FIG. 35) is formed so as to project forward. The card information reading device 1300 is a box-shaped body having an opened upper surface, and the player inserts the already-acquired privilege card CA in the vertical direction (long-axis direction) through the opening as necessary. It is configured so that

As will be described later in detail, the card information reading device 1300 has a receiving part card reader 1303 (see FIG. 35), and the privilege card CA inserted in the card information reading device 1300 has a mounting solenoid 1304 (see FIG. 35). ), the card information recorded in the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA can be optically read.

A read button 1301 is provided on the front surface (the surface on the front view side) of the card information reading device 1300. The read button 1301 is used when the player desires the appearance of an effect (a big hit effect or a reach effect in the present embodiment) as a privilege using the privilege card CA inserted in the card information reading device 1300, or It is a button that can be operated by the player when the appearance of the effect as the benefit is not necessary in the state where the effect as the benefit is displayed.

Here, the above-described card information reading device 1300 will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the card information reading device 1300 when viewed from the upper surface side, and FIG. 35B is a side view of the card information reading device 1300. FIG. 35C is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure in the case, and FIG. 35C is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the case where the privilege card CA is attached to the card information reading device 1300. Note that FIGS. 35A to 35C are sectional views including the mounting solenoid 1304 for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention.

As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the card information reading device 1300 is attached to a housing 1302, a receiving card reader 1303, a mounting solenoid 1304, and a tip of a movable iron core of the mounting solenoid 1304. It has a plate member 1305 and a read button 1301.

As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the housing 1302 has a holder portion 1302a whose upper surface is opened so that the privilege card CA can be inserted in the vertical direction (long axis direction), and a front side of the holder portion 1302a. On the front side of the pachinko machine 10A, there is a chamber 1302b in which a card reader for receiving part 1303 is housed.

A rectangular transparent portion 1302c having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is formed on a wall separating the holder portion 1302a and the chamber 1302b in the housing 1302. More specifically, the rectangular transparent portion 1302c is formed at a height corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA when the privilege card CA is attached (FIG. 35(c)).

Therefore, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA can be seen from the room 1302b side through the transparent portion 1302c. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is configured as a transparent (light transmissive) area, and the contents of the privilege are stored in the card information area 1602. A code pattern (card information) indicating the is formed. Therefore, the receiving part card reader 1303 housed in the chamber 1302b reads the code pattern that passes through the transparent part 1302c.

The receiving card reader 1303 is a code reader using a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor. A code reader using a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor may be used instead of the CMOS image sensor.

The receiving-portion card reader 1303 converts an image of a subject (a code pattern that passes through the transparent portion 1302c) that passes through the transparent portion 1302c into an electrical signal, and inputs the electrical signal to the voice lamp control device 113.

The mounting solenoid 1304 is provided at a position where the plate member 1305 attached to the tip of the movable iron core and the transparent portion 1302c have the same height. Further, the plate member 1305 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1302c, and has a white ground-free surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the holder portion 1302a is inserted even if the maximum number of privilege cards CA that can be used at one time (five in this embodiment) is collectively inserted. In order to facilitate the operation, it is configured to have a sufficient depth (protruding length from the lower plate unit).

However, by providing a sufficient depth, the privilege card CA can be easily inserted into the holder part 1302a, while the privilege card CA inserted into the holder part 1302a is not orderly, so the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38). ) Does not match the transparent portion 1302c, and the code pattern cannot be read by the receiving card reader 1303.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the read button 1301 is pressed by the player, the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited), and the privilege card CA is pressed by the plate member 1305 toward the transparent portion 1302c side. As shown in FIG. 35(c), the privilege cards CA inserted in the holder section 1302a are aligned, and the code pattern (card information of one or more privilege cards CA) can be read by the receiving section card reader 1303. I have to.

When the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on to align the privilege cards CA in the holder 1302a, the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA has the same height as the transparent part 1302c (that is, the card information). The plate member 1305 located at the same height as the area 1602 is pressed against the transparent portion 1302c while being entirely covered.

When the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305 are pressed, the plate member 1305 covers the card information area 1602, so that the receiving card reader 1303 can read the code pattern against the white solid surface of the plate member 1305 as a background. The code pattern (card information) formed in the transparent card information area 1602 of the card CA can be reliably read.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a privilege card discharge device 1450 that is a discharge device of the privilege card CA will be described. FIG. 36(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device 1450 when viewed from the side, and FIG. 36(b) shows the privilege card discharging device 1450 from the discharge port 1451a side. FIG. 36( c) is a schematic front view as seen, and is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device 1450 as viewed from the top side. For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between adjacent privilege cards CA in FIG. 36(a). In addition, in FIG. 36C, a part of the configuration of the privilege card CA, the upper lid member 1452 and the like is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C, the privilege card discharge device 1450 includes a storage member 1451 capable of storing a plurality of privilege cards CA, an upper lid member 1452, and a discharge card reader 1453. Consists of

As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, the storage member 1451 has a box-shaped body whose upper surface is opened and which can be stored (stored) by stacking (superimposing) the privilege cards CA in the internal space. Is. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, on the front surface (the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side) of the storage member 1451, the storage member is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 1054 provided in the lower plate unit 15. Of the privilege cards CA stored in 1451, a discharge port 1451a for discharging one privilege card CA located at the bottom side is provided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(c), on the bottom surface of the storage member 1451, in a substantially central portion, a rectangle having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA. A transparent portion 1451b having a shape is formed. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, a transfer roller 1451d driven by a transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), which is a stepping motor, is attached to the discharge port 1451a side of the bottom surface of the storage member 1451. Has been.

The upper lid member 1452 is configured to be removable, and can be removed when necessary, for example, when the privilege card CA is replenished in the internal space of the storage member 1451. The upper lid member 1452 is provided with a biasing member 1455 that biases the stacked privilege cards CA from above in order to stabilize the discharge of the privilege cards CA.

The urging member 1455 is composed of a spring member 1455a whose one end side is connected to the upper lid member 1452, and a flat plate-shaped plate member 1455b which is connected to the other end side of the spring member 1455a. In the present embodiment, the urging member 1455 is arranged such that the plate member 1455b is located above the transparent portion 1451b (FIG. 36(c)) of the storage member 1451. Further, the plate member 1455b is a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b, and the surface thereof on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is white and ungrounded.

The ejection card reader 1453 is a code reader using a CMOS image sensor, like the above-mentioned receiving section card reader 1303. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(c), the ejection card reader 1453 is located below the transparent portion 1451b of the storage member 1451, converts the image of the subject seen from the transparent portion 1451b into an electric signal, and outputs a voice signal. Input to the lamp control device 113.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, one privilege card CA located at the bottom most side of the storage member 1451, that is, the privilege card CA discharged (given) from the opening 1054 next time is stored in the storage member 1451. Is configured to be transferred by the transfer roller 1451d from the initial position of the privilege card CA to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) on the transparent portion 1451b, and the discharge card reader 1453 is transparent. It is configured to read the image of the card information area 1602 seen from the unit 1451b. That is, the ejection card reader 1453 is for reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be ejected next time from the opening 1054.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the operation of the above-described privilege card discharging device 1450 for discharging the privilege card CA from the opening 1054 will be described. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the discharging operation of the privilege card CA by the privilege card discharging device 1450.

FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a state in which all of the privilege cards CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (storage member 1451) are located at the initial position. When discharging one privilege card CA, the transfer roller 1451d is driven (rotated) in the direction of arrow R by driving the transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), and the one located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451. Is transferred in the direction toward the opening 1054 of the lower plate unit 15 (direction of arrow M).

In the present embodiment, all the privilege cards CA are arranged so that the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) can be read by the discharge card reader 1453 after being transferred in the direction of the arrow M by the transfer roller 1451d. 1602 is stored on the storage member 1451 with the discharge port 1451a located on the opposite side (position P).

FIG. 37B is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is located at the confirmation position. The “confirmation position” is the position of the privilege card CA where the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is located on the transparent portion 1451b. The privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is transferred from the initial position to the M direction by the transfer roller 1451d and temporarily stopped at the confirmation position. Note that, as shown in FIG. 37B, at the confirmation position, the privilege card CA is not exposed to the outside through the opening 1504 and cannot be taken out by the player.

As will be described later in detail, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is a transparent (light-transmissive) area, and in the card information area 1602, a code pattern indicating the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA ( Card information) is formed. In the present embodiment, the code pattern of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at this confirmation position is read by the discharge card reader 1453, and is discharged next time according to the content of the read code pattern (card information). The grant condition (card discharge condition) for the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position) is changed.

In the privilege card ejection device 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance L from the initial position to the confirmation position is the transfer direction M1 (that is, from the initial position to the confirmation position) in the card information area 1602 which is the light transmissive area of the privilege card CA. Direction L) (see FIG. 38), and in the transfer direction M1 of the area on the confirmation position side of the card information area 1602 in the main body 1601 which is the opaque area (light impermeable area) of the privilege card CA. It is configured to be shorter than the length La (see FIG. 38).

By defining the relationship between L, La, and Lb as described above, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (that is, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time) is set to the privilege card CA. With the opaque area of No. 1 as the background, the card reader for discharge 1453 reads it. Here, if one side of the privilege card CA is white ungrounded, the white ungrounded surface is directed toward the bottom surface side of the privileged card ejection device 1450, and is arranged so as to face the ejection card reader 1453, the white ungrounded background becomes a card. The code pattern in the information area 1602 can be read, and the code pattern (card information) can be read reliably.

In the privilege card ejection device 1450 of this embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer roller 1451d to the opening end on the front side of the opening 1054 (the side facing the player) is the privilege card. It is configured to be shorter than the CA discharge direction length Lc (see FIG. 38). Therefore, at least the privilege card CA at the transfer limit position by the transfer roller 1451d is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054. Therefore, the privilege card CA can be positioned at a position where the player can take it out (that is, a position exposed to the outside) only by the transfer by the transfer roller 1451d.

Further, since part of the privilege card CA is used as the background when reading the card information area 1602, the distance between the initial position and the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450 can be suppressed to a relatively short distance. As a result, the privilege card ejection device 1450 can be configured to save space.

As described above, the plate member 1455b of the urging member 1455 that urges the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejecting device 1450 (storage member 1451) is a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b, and Since the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is configured to have no white ground, even when the last one privilege card CA is stored in the storage member 1451, the background of the card information area 1602 is white. It can be the ground, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be read appropriately.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the transparent portion 1451b is provided in a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA, the next time, without reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the initial position. It is possible to read only the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA discharged to the user.

FIG. 37C is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is located at the discharge position. The "discharging position" is a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 and can be taken out by the player. When the condition for granting the privilege card CA to the player (grant condition) is satisfied, the privilege card CA stopped at the confirmation position is driven from the confirmation position to the discharge position by driving the transfer roller 1451d (direction of arrow R). Is transferred to and stopped.

Then, when the player takes out the privilege card CA and completes the ejection of the card, the state returns to the state of FIG. 37A again, and at that time, the one privilege card CA located at the bottommost side of the storage member 1451 is displayed. Ejection is started.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 37, the presence/absence detection sensor, which is a reflection type photoelectric sensor, is arranged between the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and the opening 1054. 1461 is provided, and when the privilege card CA located at the ejection position is taken out by the player and the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off, it is determined that the card ejection is completed.

As described above, in the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer roller 1451d to the front opening end of the opening 1054 is the discharge direction length Lc of the privilege card CA. (See FIG. 38). Therefore, only by driving the transfer roller 1451d by the transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), the privilege card CA is stopped at a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 (that is, a discharge position), and the game is played. It can be taken out by a person.

On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is completely discharged from the opening 1054 without the help of the player, a stepping motor for card transfer is provided between the discharge port 1451a and the opening 1054 except for the transfer motor 1451c. However, according to the privilege card discharge device 1450 of the present embodiment, the privilege card CA can be transferred from the initial position to the discharge position by only one transfer motor 1451c, and as a result, Since the discharge can be completed, the privilege card discharge device 1450 can be configured compactly and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the privilege card CA used in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment will be specifically described. 38(a) is a front view of the privilege card CA, FIG. 38(b) is a rear view of the privilege card CA, and FIG. 38(c) is a line X8c-X8c in FIG. 38(a). FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, the privilege card CA is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape), and is made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material (for example, resin or A main body 1601 made of paper or the like and a card information area 1602 made of a transparent (light transmitting) material (for example, resin) are provided.

The card information area 1602 has a code pattern indicating card information formed therein. In the present embodiment, the code pattern (card information) is formed by dividing the inside of the card information area 1602 into 4 rows×4 columns sections and filling the sections according to the contents of the privilege.

A design 1601a1 (FIG. 38(a)) corresponding to the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 1602 (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is provided on the surface 1601a of the main body 1601. In the example, Miss Marin) is written.

Further, a mark 1601a2 indicating the division of privilege contents is written on the front surface 1601a. In the present embodiment, “gold card”, “silver card”, and “copper card” are set as the classification of the privilege contents, and in the example of FIG. 38(a), the privilege card CA is “gold card”. The word "gold" is written to mean that. On the other hand, the back surface 1601b of the main body portion 1601 is white and has no ground.

Here, as described above, the length La in the transfer direction M of the main body 1601 located on the confirmation position side of the card information area 1602 in the privilege card ejection device 1450 and the length Lb in the transfer direction M in the card information area 1602. Is designed such that Lb<L<La with respect to the distance L (see FIG. 36) from the initial position to the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450.

Therefore, since the back surface 1601b of the main body unit 1601 is a white plain surface, by arranging the white plain back surface 1601b toward the bottom surface side of the privilege card discharging device 1450, the card information by the discharge card reader 1453 is displayed. At the time of reading the area 1602, the background of the card information area 1602 can be made white ungrounded, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be preferably read.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38(a) and (b), in the privilege card CA, the card information area 1602 is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the privilege card CA. It is possible to have a large impermeable area. Therefore, when the back surface 1601b of the main body unit 1601 is used when the card information area 1602 is read by the discharge card reader 1453, the adjacent privilege card CA in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (that is, the privilege card to be discharged next time) It is possible to prevent the CA from overlapping the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA that uses the back surface 1601b as the background, and the code pattern (card information) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is erroneously detected. Can be prevented.

Here, the code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in the card information area 1602. Note that the card information areas 1602 shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are all in a state viewed from the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA.

FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of each section in the section of 4 rows×4 columns formed in the card information area 1602. Note that, in FIG. 39(a), in order to clarify the invention, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively attached to the nine sections forming the region 1602c.

Of the 4 rows×4 columns section formed in the card information area 1602, the section 1602a of (row, column)=(1, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “gold card”. Is. The section 1602b of (row, column)=(2, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “silver card”.

Also, (row, column)=(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), The area 1602c composed of nine sections (3, 2) and (3, 3) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “copper card”. In the present embodiment, nine types of copper cards corresponding to nine types of main symbols are set, and each type is associated with any of the nine sections forming the area 1602c.

For example, when (row, column)=(1, 1), a main symbol (octopus) for “1” is associated, and when this area 1602c1 (see FIG. 39(c)) is filled in, Indicates that the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main design for "1" among "copper cards". Similarly, (row, column)=(1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), (3,2), Main symbols for "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9" are respectively associated with (3, 3). ..

Further, the section 1602d of (row, column)=(4, 1) is an area 1602d for defining the direction (front and back) of the privilege card CA, and this area 1602d is common to all privilege cards CA. It is filled.

Since the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so that one type of privilege can be obtained for one privilege card CA, 11 sections that configure the region 1602a, the region 1602b, and the region 1602c. Of these, only one section is filled.

For example, FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. When the privilege card CA is a “gold card”, the area 1602a corresponding to the “gold card” is filled and the area 1602d common to all the benefit cards CA is filled.

Further, FIG. 39C is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA which is a “silver card”. When the privilege card CA is a “silver card”, the area 1602b corresponding to the “silver card” is filled and the area 1602d common to all the benefit cards CA is filled.

39D is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “1”. When the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main symbol for "1" of the "copper card", it corresponds to the main symbol for "1" in the area 1602c consisting of 9 sections corresponding to the "copper card" The area 1602c1 to be filled is filled, and the area 1602d common to all the privilege cards CA is filled.

FIG. 39E is a schematic diagram showing an example of the card information area 1602 in a state where a plurality of privilege cards CA are correctly stacked. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, a plurality of privilege cards CA acquired by the player can be mounted on the card information reading device 1300 in an overlapping manner. Although the details will be described later, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are mounted on the card information reading device 1300, as a result of the reading by the receiving-unit card reader 1302, an effect as a privilege is mounted on each privilege card CA. It is configured to appear as many as the number of privilege cards CA.

Since the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA is configured to be light-transmissive, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked, a new code pattern is generated by the section filled in each privilege card CA. Composed.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 39(e) is a card information area 1602 when three privilege cards CA each having the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIGS. 39(b) to (d) are stacked. .. Therefore, the area 1602a derived from the "gold card", the area 1602b derived from the "silver card", the area 1602c1 derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main design for "1", and all the privilege cards CA A code pattern is composed of the area 1602d formed in common.

When the code pattern of the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIG. 39E (a new code pattern formed by stacking three privilege cards CA) is read by the receiving unit card reader 1302, Since the area 1602a is filled, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 includes the privilege card CA of “gold card”. can do.

Similarly, since the areas 1602b and 1602c1 are painted out, the MPU 221 corresponds to the main symbols for the "silver card" and "1" in the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. It can be determined that the privilege card CA of “copper card” is included.

On the other hand, the area 1602d is derived from all the privilege cards CA. Here, if there is at least one privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 with the front and back reversed, it is determined that the area E of (row, column)=(4, 4) is filled. Become. Therefore, when the code pattern read by the receiving unit card reader 1302 includes the area E, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the presence of the privilege card CA that is mistakenly installed in reverse. can do.

In this way, since the area 1602d for defining the orientation (front and back) of the privilege card CA is formed commonly to all privilege cards CA, in the card information reading device 1300, with respect to the receiving unit card reader 1302. The surface to be directed can be clearly defined, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to the facing of the opposite surface and the occurrence of a result (malfunction) different from the result that should be originally displayed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment. is there. The main difference between the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8) described above is the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 40, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 installed in the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shows the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA and the card information thereof. It has a card type table 222b that correlates with the card type (that is, the content of the privilege). For the code pattern (card information) of the privilege card CA read by the ejection card reader 1453 or the receiving unit card reader 1303, by referring to the card type table 222b, the type of the privilege card CA (contents of privilege) ) Can be identified.

As shown in FIG. 41, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment has an eject card memory 223j, a card eject confirmation flag 223k, a card eject flag 223l, a card ejection wait flag 223m, and a card transfer flag. 223n, card reading flag 223o, card mounting flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, even copper card flag area 223u, and probability change It has a jackpot counter 223v.

The discharge card memory 223j is a memory for storing the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (see FIG. 37B) in the privilege card discharge device 1450, that is, the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. is there. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is for giving the player the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. The condition (grant condition) is changed.

The card ejection confirmation flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the ejection of the privilege card CA has been confirmed. When the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on, it means that the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed by the fulfillment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA.

The card discharge confirmation flag 223k is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege card CA is satisfied. The card discharge confirmation flag 223k that is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege card CA is established is then turned off when the discharge of the privilege card CA is started.

The card ejection flag 223l is a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the privilege card CA from the confirmed position to the ejection position. If the card ejection flag 223l is turned on, the transportation motor 1451c is driven in the later-described card ejection processing (see FIG. 49), and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card ejection device 1450 is transferred to the ejection position. To be done.

The card ejection flag 223l is initialized (OFF) in the initialization processing by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the privilege card CA is started to be ejected. The card ejection flag 223l thus turned on is turned off when the privilege card CA to be ejected next time is transferred to the ejection position in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49).

The card removal wait flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed, that is, whether or not the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 has been taken out by the player. If the card removal wait flag 223m is turned on, it means that the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 has not been taken out by the player.

The card removal wait flag 223m is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the discharge position. The card removal wait flag 223m thus turned on is turned off when the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed.

The card transfer flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position among the privilege cards CA located at the initial position in the privilege card discharging device 1450. If the card transfer flag 223n is turned on, the transfer motor 1451c is driven in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later, and the privilege card CA located at the initial position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the confirmation position. To be done.

The card transfer flag 223n is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed. Then, the card transfer flag 223n thus turned on is turned off when the player ejects the privilege card CA located at the discharge position in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed. To be done.

The card reading flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not to read the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450. If the card reading flag 223o is turned on, the card information is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The card reading flag 223o is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the confirmation position. Then, the card reading flag 223o thus turned on is turned off when the card information for discharge 1453 is read on the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position.

The card mounting flag 223p indicates whether or not the privilege card CA has been mounted in the holder portion 1302a of the card information reading device 1300, that is, the privilege card CA that has been loaded into the holder portion 1302a when the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the state of being set. When the card mounting flag 223p is ON, the privilege cards CA loaded in the holder section 1302a are in an aligned state, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be read by the receiving section card reader 1303. Indicates that there is.

The card mounting flag 223p is inverted every time the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10A is not played by the player for a predetermined time). Is configured to. That is, if the card mounting flag 223p is on, it is turned off, and if the card mounting flag 223p is on, it is turned off. The card mounting flag 223p is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

The gold card flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving part card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. When 223q is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The silver card flag 223r is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. When 223r is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The copper card flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “copper card”. If 223s is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The gold card flag 223q, the silver card flag 223r, and the copper card flag 223s are initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and based on the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. , Turned on when the corresponding card is included. On the other hand, these flags 223q, 223r, 223s are turned off when the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect and the card mounting flag 223p is turned off.

The odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t is an area for storing the presence/absence of a copper card corresponding to the high-probability symbol (the main symbol corresponding to the odd number) when the copper card flag 223s is turned on.

The odd copper card flag area 223t includes five flags of a number 1 flag 223t1, a number 3 flag 223t2, a number 5 flag 223t3, a number 7 flag 223t4, and a number 9 flag 223t5, and these flags 223t1 to 223t5 are respectively , "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" indicates the presence or absence of five types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbol. For example, if the number 5 flag 223t3 is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main symbol for "5" is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. ..

The even-numbered copper card flag area 223u is an area for storing the presence/absence of a copper card corresponding to a low probability symbol (main symbol corresponding to an even number) when the copper card flag 223s is on.

The even-numbered copper card flag area 223u includes four flags of a number 2 flag 223u1, a number 4 flag 223u2, a number 6 flag 223u3, and a number 8 flag 223u4, and these flags 223u1 to 223u4 are "2", respectively. The presence or absence of four types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for "4", "6", and "8" is shown. For example, if the number 2 flag 223u1 is ON, it indicates that the card information derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main symbol for "2" is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. ..

The flags 223t1 to 223t5 and 223u1 to 223u4 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t and the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on. Each time the card information is read by the card reader 1303, based on the read card information, it is turned on if the corresponding card is included, and is turned off if it is not included.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times the probability variation jackpot occurs after the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by one each time a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (in this embodiment, a stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) is received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, it is cleared to 0 every time the player takes out the privilege card CA (that is, every time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position). The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot counter 223v reaches the number of times set based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, The award condition is satisfied, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed, the command stored first in the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

Again, it returns to FIG. 40 and demonstrates. An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 225, the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the ejection card reader 1453, the transfer motor 1451c for driving (rotating) the transfer roller 1451d, and the presence/absence detection. A sensor 1461, a receiver card reader 1302, a mounting solenoid 1304, a read button 1301 and the like are connected to each other.

The display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, but the video RAM 234 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment has Dedicated change effect data for performing an effect (reach effect or jackpot effect in the present embodiment) corresponding to the card information of the privilege card CA is stored together with other variable effect data.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the startup process of the second embodiment, the process of S2011 for setting the privilege coin payout device 450 in the startup process of the first embodiment is changed to the process for setting the privilege card ejection device 1450 (S2013). The startup processing (see FIG. 18) of the first embodiment described above is different.

In the process of S2013, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450. If not, the transfer motor 1451c is driven to move the transfer roller 1451d. The privilege card CA located at the initial position is rotated and transferred to the confirmation position. On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position, the process of S2013 is ended and the process of S2012 is executed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a main process executed after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 43, when the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed from the start of the main processing (S2101), and 1 ms or more must be elapsed. If (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing S2102 to S2109.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2101, if 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the main process (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2109 are executed similarly to the first embodiment described above, and the process of S2118 is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S2118, a display setting process is executed (S2118). This display setting process (S2118) sets the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot effect, as in the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) of the first embodiment. After the mode is set, it is a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 a command for instructing each of the set variation effect mode and jackpot effect mode. The details of the display setting process (S2118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of the display setting process (S2118), a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the satisfaction of the grant condition for the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card discharging device 1450 (that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time). Is executed (S2119). The details of the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119), a card discharge process for discharging the privilege card CA from the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed (S2120). The detailed processing of this card ejection processing (S2120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the card ejection process (S2120) is executed, the command determination process is executed (S2121). This command determination processing (S2121) is processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (S2112) of the first embodiment. The details of the command determination process (S2121) of the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S2121) is executed, the processes of S2113 to S2117 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. That is, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 223 (S2113), and if the power interruption occurrence information is stored (S2113: Yes), the processes of S2115 to S2117 are executed, After that, the process loops infinitely.

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2113, when the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed ( (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2113, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped.

Next, the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment.

In the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. Then, it is confirmed whether the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), and the fluctuation pattern The variable time is extracted from the command (S2206), the command determination process (S2121) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). ..

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202: Yes), after executing the processing of S2213 as in the above-described first embodiment, the command determination processing (S2121). ) Is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is ON, that is, whether the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA (S2214).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is on (S2214: Yes), the stop command in process is the stop command received immediately after the grant condition of the privilege card CA is satisfied. The discharge flag 223l is turned on (S2215).

When the card ejection flag 223l is turned on in the process of S2215, the privilege card is ejected in synchronization with the corresponding stop display (in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot stop display) in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) described later. The discharge (transfer from the confirmation position to the discharge position) of the privilege card CA from the device 1450 is started. After the processing of S2215, the card ejection confirmation flag 223l is turned off (S2216), the command determination processing (S2121) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is off, that is, if the grant condition of the privilege card CA is not satisfied (S2214: No), the processes of S2215 and S2216 are skipped. This command determination process (S2121) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 as a result of checking in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), the process of S2204 is executed similarly to the first embodiment described above, and this command is executed. The determination process (S2121) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, the above-mentioned display setting process (S2118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2118) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45, in this display setting process (S2118), first, similar to the above-described first embodiment, the updating process of various counters is executed (S2301), and the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether or not is on (S2302).

As a result of checking in the process of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2302: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110. The display setting process (S2118) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is executed. The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2305).

After the processing of S2305, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2305, the variation effect setting processing for setting the aspect of the variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2310). The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2310), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2311). Specifically, information on stop symbols (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, etc.) extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) and Based on the value of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of jackpot provided in the RAM 223, the value of the counter for selecting the stop symbol at the time of deviation, etc., the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect. To set.

After the process of S2311, the big hit effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2312). The details of the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

After the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2310) is output to the display control device 114. Yes (S2308).

Then, a display stop symbol command for designating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309).

After the processing of S2309, the big hit production command which directs the big hit production setting mode set by the big hit production setting processing (S2312) is output to the display control device 114 (S2313), and this display setting processing (S2118) is terminated. , Return to the main processing.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Further, the display control device 114 controls the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the jackpot effect command output from the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S2312.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2310) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 46, in this variation effect setting process (S2310), first, is the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicating complete disengagement? Is confirmed (S2621).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2621, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2621: Yes), the deviation variation effect as an effect mode of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A mode is set (S2625), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended. In the process of S2625, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the deviation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2621, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2621: No), the process proceeds to S2622.

In S2622, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2622).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2622, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2622: Yes), whether the copper card flag 223s is on, that is, the receiving part card reader It is confirmed whether or not the card information read by 1303 includes the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” (S2623).

As a result of checking in S2623, when the copper card flag 223s is off, that is, when the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 does not include the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” ( S2623: No), and proceeds to the processing of S2624.

In addition, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2622, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, that is, the received stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than out-reach). If it is (S2622: No), the process proceeds to S2624.

In the process of S2624, the reach effect mode is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the effect mode of the variable effect, and the change time that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.). Is set (S2624). Then, after the processing of S2624, the variation effect setting processing (S2310) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2623, when the copper card flag 223s is on, that is, when the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “copper card”. In (S2623: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probability variation jackpot (S2626).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2626, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probability variation jackpot (S2626: Yes), it is turned on in the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd number copper card flag area 223t. It is confirmed whether or not there is a flag (S2627).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2627, if there is a flag that is turned on among the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t (S2627: Yes), it is included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t. Based on the value of each flag 223t1 to 223t5 and the variation time that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2628), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended.

As described above, the copper card flag 223s desires the player to display the reach effect as a privilege using the copper card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the copper on the card information reading device 1300. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is a card, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated. Therefore, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628 is a reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, if only the numeral 1 flag 223t1 is on, the main symbol for "1" A new reach effect mode using (octopus) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

Alternatively, if two of the number 1 flag 223t1 and the number 7 flag 223t4 are on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, “1” and “7” are set. A new reach effect mode using two corresponding main symbols (octopus, dugong) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

As still another example, when all of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t are on, 5 corresponding to the odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). A new reach effect mode using one main symbol (octopus, turtle, shrimp, dugong, crab) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

In the present embodiment, as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t is With the remaining one column fluctuating in a state of being stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of the flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that a group of fish pass by (a so-called fish school) is set.

Note that, of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is displayed in a stopped state in two rows out of three rows, and remains. 1 column fluctuates, and symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.) It may be a reach production mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2626, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (S2626: No), it is included in the even copper card flag area 223u. It is confirmed whether or not any of the flags 223u1 to 223u4 that are present are turned on (S2629).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2629, if there is a flag that is turned on in the flags 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u (S2629: Yes), it is included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u. Based on the values of the respective flags 223u1 to 223u4 and the variation time that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2630), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) ends. The reach effect mode set by the process of S2630 is also a reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA, like the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u, if only the numeral 4 flag 223u2 is on, the main symbol for "4" A new reach effect mode using (shark) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

Alternatively, if three of the number 2 flag 223u2, the number 6 flag 223u3, and the number 8 flag 223u4 among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are on, “2 ], "6", a new reach effect mode using the three main symbols corresponding to "8" (burdockbone, anglerfish, angelfish) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

In the present embodiment, as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2630, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is selected from the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u. In the state of being stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates, and the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of the flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that a group of fish pass by (a so-called fish school) is set.

It should be noted that, out of the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is displayed in a stopped state in two rows out of three rows, and remains. One column of changes, and symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.) It may be a reach production mode.

In addition, as a result of checking by the processing of S2627, when there is no flag turned on in the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t (S2627: No), or by the processing of S2629 As a result, if there is no flag that is turned on among the flags 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u (S2629: No), the counter that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223 ( (Not shown) and a variation time period that defines the type of reach are set (S2631), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 47, in this jackpot production process (S2312), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot). It is confirmed whether it is shown (S4001).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4001, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit (S4001: No), this big hit effect setting process (S2312) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4001, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S4001: Yes), whether the gold card flag 223q is on, that is, the receiving-unit card reader It is confirmed whether the card information read by 1303 includes the privilege card CA which is a “gold card” (S4002).

If the gold card flag is on as a result of the confirmation in S4002 (S4002: Yes), then the silver card flag 223r is on, that is, the card information read by the receiver card reader 1303 indicates " It is confirmed whether the privilege card CA that is a "silver card" is included in addition to the "gold card" (S4003).

If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the privilege card CA and the "silver card" which are "gold cards" are added to the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. Since both of the certain privilege cards CA are included, the "gold and silver jackpot effect", which is a predetermined jackpot effect, is set for the two sets of "gold card" and "silver card" (S4004). ), and ends the jackpot effect setting process (S2312).

On the other hand, if the silver card flag 223r is off as a result of the confirmation in S4003 (S4003: No), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. However, since the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is not included, a “big jackpot performance of gold” which is a predetermined jackpot performance is set for the “gold card” (S4008). The effect setting process (S2312) ends.

If the gold card flag 223q is off (S4002: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4002, whether the silver card flag 223r is on, that is, the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 indicates " It is confirmed whether a privilege card CA which is a "silver card" is included (S4005).

If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S4005 (S4005: Yes), the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. , A privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included, a “silver jackpot effect” that is a predetermined jackpot effect is set for the “silver card” (S4006), and this jackpot effect setting process is performed. The step (S2312) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in S4005, if the silver card flag 223q is off (S4005: No), the privilege information CA that is a “gold card” is also “silver” in the card information read by the receiver card reader 1303. Since the privilege card CA that is a "card" is not included, the normal jackpot effect setting process is set (S4007), and the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is ended.

As described above, the gold card flag 223q desires the player to display the jackpot effect as a privilege using the gold card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the card information reading device 1300 receives the money. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is a card, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated.

Similarly, the silver card flag 223r desires that the player display a jackpot effect as a privilege using the silver card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the silver card on the card information reading device 1300. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated.

Therefore, each jackpot performance mode set by the processing of S4004, S4006, or S4008 due to the fact that the privilege card CA of the gold card or the silver card is attached to the card information reading device 1300 is a benefit by the privilege card CA. Is a jackpot production mode.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card, respectively, is an effect that is difficult to appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA (for example, the jackpot is continuously generated a predetermined number of times). In the case of production).

In this way, by making the jackpot performance mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card difficult to appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA, the playability of the game using the privilege card CA is improved. be able to. In addition, the player's willingness to acquire the privilege card CA can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are compared with each other, by setting the effect that is more difficult to appear in a normal game as a jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card, Has a higher value than silver cards. As described above, by giving the superiority or inferiority to the value of the privilege card CA, the player expects to acquire the privilege card CA having a higher value, and the interest in the game increases.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are simultaneously attached to the card information reading device 1300, a special jackpot that is defined in advance for a set of two gold and silver cards. The effect (golden and silver jackpot effect) is set. In the present embodiment, such a jackpot effect (gold and silver jackpot effect) is an exclusive effect that cannot appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA.

As described above, by providing an effect that appears for the first time by combining a plurality of privilege cards CA (in the present embodiment, a set of two cards of a gold card and a silver card), it is possible to obtain a plurality of privilege cards CA. Value can be added. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, so that the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the jackpot mode that appears when a gold card or a silver card is individually attached to the card information reading device 1300 is not an effect that appears in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA. It may be a special effect that cannot appear in a normal game that is not used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-mentioned grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the giving condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates the probability variation jackpot. It is confirmed (S4101).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4101, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a probability variation jackpot (S4101: No), the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2119) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4101, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S4101: Yes), the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S4102), and the ejection card The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and discharged next time is read (S4103).

After the processing of S4103, it is confirmed whether the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4104, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. The processing of S4105 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the given grant condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is that the probability variation jackpot is generated 10 times. Therefore, in the process of S4105, it is confirmed whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more. Yes (S4105).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4105, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more (S4105: Yes), the grant condition for the privilege card CA, which is a “gold card”, is satisfied, so the card discharge confirmation flag 223k. Is turned on (S4106), and the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4105, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 10 (S4105: No), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “gold card” has not been established, and thus the process of S4106. Is skipped and the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4104, if the value is not a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is changed to the next time. It is confirmed whether the discharged privilege card CA has a value indicating that it is a "silver card" (S4107).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The processing of S4108 is executed to confirm whether or not the given grant condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is that the probability variation jackpot is generated five times, it is confirmed in the process of S4108 whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 5 or more. Yes (S4108).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4108, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 5 or more (S4108: Yes), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is satisfied, and thus the card discharge confirmation flag 223k. Is turned on (S4106), and the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4108, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 5 (S4108: No), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not satisfied, and thus the process of S4106. Is skipped and the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Card.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is one occurrence of the probability variation jackpot, the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110 this time is the probability variation jackpot. The provision condition is satisfied because it corresponds. Therefore, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4109). ), and the process of confirming the satisfaction of the applying condition (S2119) is ended.

In addition, as a result of the card discharge confirmation flag 223k being turned on in the process of S4106 or S4109, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the discharge position, and the privilege card CA is discharged. Be seen.

According to this grant condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2119), the number of probability variation jackpots is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be granted next time, and the difficulty level of granting the grant condition is changed. Therefore, the difference in the card information (contents of the privilege) can be grasped depending on whether the player feels it is easy or difficult to acquire the privilege card CA (ie, sensuously), so that the game progresses. Can be used as an intonation.

Further, in general, the higher the degree of difficulty of establishing the grant condition and the harder the player obtains the privilege card CA, the more the privilege card CA is recognized as being rare and of high value. Even if the player has difficulty in acquiring the privilege card CA due to the change in the granting condition having a relatively high degree of difficulty, the player is hard to acquire the bonus card CA, but the rarity is high and the value is high. You can continue playing while expecting to obtain a high special value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the above-described card ejection processing (S2120) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the card ejection process (S2120) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 43).

As shown in FIG. 49, in the card ejection process (S2120), first, it is confirmed whether the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201). If the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201: Yes), the transfer motor It is confirmed whether 1451c is being driven, that is, whether the transfer roller 1451d is being driven (rotated) (S4202).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4202, if the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven (S4202: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4203), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. .. As a result of the processing in S4203, transfer of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time from the confirmation position to the discharge position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4202, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven (S4202: Yes), it is confirmed whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the confirmation position to the discharge position. (S4208).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4208, when the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount (S4208: Yes), the privilege card CA has reached the ejection position, so the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped and the transfer roller is stopped. The rotation of 1451d is stopped (S4209), the card ejection flag 223l is turned off (S4210), the card ejection waiting flag 223m is turned on (S4211), and the privilege card CA is ejected from the privilege card ejection device 1450 by the player. In the standby state, the card ejection process (S2120) is finished, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4208, if the drive amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount (S4208: No), the privilege card CA being transferred has not reached the discharge position from the confirmation position. Therefore, the processes of S4209 to S4211 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the card ejection flag 223l is off (S4201: No) as a result of the confirmation in step S4201, it is confirmed whether the card transfer flag 223n is on (S4205).

If the card transfer flag 223n is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4205 (S4205; No), it means that the privilege card CA is not transferred, so the card discharge process (S2120) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S4205, when the card transfer flag 223n is on (S4205: Yes), the transfer motor 1451c is being driven, that is, the transfer roller 1451d is being driven (rotated). It is confirmed (S4206).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4206, if the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven (S4206: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4207), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. .. As a result of the processing in S4207, the transfer of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (that is, the privilege card CA located on the bottommost side of the storage member 1451) from the initial position to the confirmation position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4206, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven (S4206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the initial position to the confirmation position. (S4212).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4212, when the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount (S4212: Yes), the privilege card CA has reached the confirmation position, so the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped and the transfer roller is stopped. The rotation of 1451d is stopped (S4213), the card transfer flag 223n is turned off (S4214), the card reading flag 223o is turned on (S4215), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. By the process of S4215, when the card reading flag 223o is turned on, the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4212, when the drive amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount (S4212: No), the privilege card CA being transferred from the initial position has not yet reached the confirmed position. Therefore, the processes of S4213 to S4215 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, when the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, it is determined whether or not the privilege card CA is taken out by the player. A discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) for confirming whether or not is executed. The detailed process of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003), discharge card confirmation processing for reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed. (S3004). The detailed processing of the discharge card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the discharge card confirmation process (S3004) is executed, a receiving part card confirmation process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA inserted in the holder part 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 is executed (S3005), and the timer interrupt process is executed. To finish. The detailed process of the receiving unit card confirmation process (S3005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-described discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 51, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3003), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223m is ON (S3301). At this time, if the card ejection waiting flag 223m is off (S3301: No), it is not in the waiting state for the player to eject the privilege card CA from the privilege card ejecting device 1450, so this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3003) is performed. finish.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3301, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301: Yes), the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, and the privilege card CA by the player is displayed. Since it is in the state of waiting for taking out, in such a case, it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3302).

If the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the privilege card CA is still in the discharge position and has not been taken out yet, so this discharge completion confirmation process (S3003). ) Ends.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the removal of the privilege card CA has been completed, so that the requirement condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a requirement. The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 so that the number of certain probability variation jackpots can be counted (S3303).

After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the above-described discharged card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the ejected card confirmation processing (S3004) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 52, in this ejected card confirmation processing (S3004), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223o is on (S3401), and if the card reading flag 223o is off (S3401: No), Since the privilege card CA is not located at the confirmation position, in such a case, the discharge card confirmation process (S3004) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3401, if the card reading flag 223o is on (S3401: Yes), the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position. Therefore, the card of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is detected. Information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) is read by the ejection card reader 1453 (S3402).

Next, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position, that is, the type of privilege card CA to be discharged next time (contents of privilege) is determined. (S3403).

After the processing of S3403, a value indicating the type of the determined privilege card CA is stored in the discharge card memory 223j (S3404), the card reading flag 223o is turned off (S3405), and this discharge card confirmation processing (S3004) ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the receiver card confirmation processing (S3005) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the receiver card confirmation processing (S3005) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the receiving part card confirmation process (S3005), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501). The "customer waiting effect" is neither a variable display nor a jackpot effect, and is an effect that is displayed when the pachinko machine 10A has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, and is a display irrelevant to the game state ( For example, a title display, a demo display, etc.).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3501, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501: Yes), it is confirmed whether the read button 1301 has been pressed (S3502).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3502, when the read button 1301 is pressed (S3502: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card mounting flag 223p is on (S3503).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3503, if the card mounting flag 223p is on (S3503: Yes), the mounting solenoid 1304 is off (not excited), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned on (S3504). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (S3505).

After the process of S3505, a receiving part card reading process of reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA by the receiving part card reader 1303 is executed (S3506). The confirmation process (S3005) ends. The detailed process of the receiving unit card reading process (S3506) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3503, if the card mounting flag 223p is off (S3503: No), the mounting solenoid 1304 is on (excitation), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3507), The solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3508).

After the processing of S3508, the gold card flag 223q is turned off (S3509), the silver card flag 223r is turned off (S3510), the copper card flag 223s is turned off (S3511), and this receiving part card confirmation processing (S3005) is ended. To do.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3501, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3501: No), or the process of S3502. When the read button 1301 is not pressed as a result of confirmation by (S3502: No), the receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3005) is terminated without performing the processing of S3503 to S3511.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the value of the card mounting flag 223p is set every time the read button 1301 is operated. It is configured to be inverted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the above-described receiving unit card reading process (S3506) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the receiver card reading process (S3506) executed in the receiver card confirmation process (S3005).

As shown in FIG. 54, in the receiving unit card reading process (S3506), first, card information of one or a plurality of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 (that is, a code that passes through the transparent unit 1302c). The pattern) is read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 (S3601).

After the processing of S3601, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA included in one or a plurality of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 is displayed. Each type is determined (S3602).

After the processing of S3602, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA cannot be discriminated due to a bad mounting condition or the like (S3603), and if not (S3603: No), the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct. It is confirmed whether or not (S3604).

Whether or not the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct is determined in the privilege card region 1602 read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 by an area E (see FIG. 39(e)) indicating that the mounting direction is opposite. It can be determined by whether or not it is filled. More specifically, if the area E is not filled, the mounting directions of the privilege cards CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300 are all correct, and if the area E is filled, the front and back are incorrectly mounted. It is determined that the privilege card CA exists.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3604, if the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct (S3604: Yes), the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included, that is, the area 1602a (see FIG. 39(a)). It is confirmed whether or not is painted (S3605). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included (S3605: Yes), the gold card flag 223q is turned on (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3607. On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not included (S3605: No), the process of S3606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3607.

In the process of S3607, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included, that is, whether the area 1602b (see FIG. 39A) is filled (S3607). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included (S3607: Yes), the silver card flag 223r is turned on (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not included (S3607: No), the process of S3608 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3609.

In the process of S3609, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” is included, that is, whether or not there is a filled partition in the area 1602c (see FIG. 39(a)) (S3609). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included (S3609: Yes), the copper card flag 223s is turned on (S3610).

After the processing of S3610, the flags 223t1 to 223t5 of the odd copper card flag area 223t are set in accordance with the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the odd number among the copper cards (S3611).

In the processing of S3611, among the copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for odd numbers, the ones included as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 are turned on corresponding flags (223t1 to 223t5). To do.

After the processing of S3611, the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even copper card flag area 223u are set according to the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the even number among the copper cards (S3612). The partial card reading process (S3506) ends.

In the process of S3612, among the copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for even numbers, the corresponding flags (223u1 to 223u4) are turned on for those contained as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. To do.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609, if the privilege card CA which is the “copper card” is not included (S3609: No), the processes of S3611, S3612 are skipped and this receiving part card reading process (S3506). ) Ends.

In addition, if the result of the confirmation in the process of S3603 indicates that the determination is not possible (S3603: No), or if the result of the confirmation in the process of S3604 indicates that the privilege card CA is not properly attached (S3604: Yes), an error occurs. Is executed (S3613), the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3614), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3615), and the receiving section card reading process (S3506) is ended.

According to this receiving section card reading process (S3506), the card information read by the receiving section card reader 1303 is analyzed, and then a gold card flag 223q, a silver card flag 223r, a copper card flag 223s, and an odd number copper card area. Since the flags 223t1 to 223t5 of 223t or the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are set, even when a plurality of privilege cards CA are attached to the card information reading device 1300, It is possible to give a privilege (in the present embodiment, a big hit effect or a reach effect) according to the number of installed benefit cards CA.

Therefore, the player's interest can be directed to the acquisition of various privilege cards CA, and as a result, the player can create a situation in which he/she is less likely to get tired of the game, and the interest in the game for a long period of time. Can be maintained.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information (privilege content) of the privilege card CA to be granted next time is read (detected) in advance by the discharge card reader 1453 before being granted. Then, according to the read card information, the grant condition of the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA to be granted next time) is changed.

Therefore, since the frequency of granting the privilege card CA changes according to the card information (contents of the privilege), the progress of the game can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest in the game can be extended for a longer period of time. Can be maintained by the player.

Here, in the present embodiment, the requirement for satisfying the grant condition (in the present embodiment, the number of probability variation jackpots) is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be granted next time. Since the degree of difficulty of establishing the grant condition is changed, it is possible for the player to perceive the difference in the card information (contents of the privilege).

In particular, the award condition is changed by changing the number of occurrences based on the occurrence of a common game state (occurrence of a probability variation jackpot in the present embodiment), so that the player can feel the difference in the card information. Therefore, it is easy to grasp the expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA, it is easy for the player to create a situation in which the player is not tired of playing the game, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

By the way, since the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured not to inform (indicate) the type (contents of the privilege) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time before the discharge, the player pays the privilege. In addition to not being able to predict the timing at which the card CA will be discharged, the type of privilege card CA that the user can obtain next time cannot be predicted. The player tends to recognize that it is rare and highly valuable as it is hard to obtain, so if the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time cannot be predicted, the privilege card CA is discharged. As the period up to is longer, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the high-value privilege card CA.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA is configured as a code pattern formed in the light transmissive card information area 1602. Therefore, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked, a new code pattern can be formed by combining the code patterns formed in the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA.

Here, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, a privilege (in the present embodiment, a jackpot effect or a reach effect) is provided according to the number of privilege cards CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300, so that a game is played. Since the player expects to obtain various privilege cards CA, it is possible for the player to create a situation in which the player is not tired of playing the game, and it is possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

By the way, as described above, since the privilege card CA of the present embodiment has the code pattern as the card information formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602, a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked in the same direction. When the privilege information is stored in the privilege card ejecting device 1450, the card information areas 1602 of the privilege cards CA overlap each other at the initial position. Pattern) is difficult to read.

To address this problem, the privilege cards CA are arranged (pulled out) so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, and the code patterns of the card information areas 1602 located on the respective sides are changed. The problem can also be solved by providing two readable code readers at each position.

However, when such a solution is adopted, the administrator who manages the privilege card CA (for example, the manager of the hall in which the pachinko machine that can grant the privilege card CA is installed) or the manufacturer of the privilege card CA is When storing the privilege card CA in the privilege card ejection device 1450, it is necessary to rearrange the direction of the privilege card CA so as to arrange the privilege cards CA in a lever arrangement and to confirm the direction. The handling load is high.

Further, since the code readers are required at two places, the manufacturing cost increases, and the control for reading the code pattern by either one of the two places becomes complicated.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next is the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other privilege cards CA are stored. Since it is configured to be read (detected) after being transferred to, the transparent card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next time, without placing a large number of privilege cards CA in the leverage, It is possible to create a state in which the transparent card information area 1602 of the other privilege card CA does not overlap.

Therefore, the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be detected by the card reader for ejection 1453 of 1 and the load on the handling of the privilege card CA can be suppressed, so that the card information can be given next time. It is possible to preferably detect the card information of the privilege card CA that is available.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62. In the above-described second embodiment, the giving condition for giving the privilege card CA to the player is configured to be a condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the granting conditions for granting the privilege card CA to the player are the first granting condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot and the second granting condition based on the number of occurrences of the miss reach. It is composed of two types of conditions: a grant condition. In addition, in this 3rd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment which were mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10B according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, a discharge mode change button 1800 is provided on the front surface of the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10B. The discharge mode change button 1800 is a button for allowing the player to select the first grant condition (the grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot) or the second grant condition (the grant condition based on the number of times of out-of-range reach). Is.

FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10B in the third embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227 for performing lamp display, an ejection card reader 1453, In addition to the transfer motor 1451c for driving (rotating) the transfer roller 1451d, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461, the receiver card reader 1302, the mounting solenoid 1304, the read button 1301, and the like, a discharge mode change button 1800 is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment has a discharge card memory 223j, a card discharge confirmation flag 223k, a card discharge flag 223l, a card removal wait flag 223m, and a card. Transfer flag 223n, card reading flag 223o, card loading flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, and even copper card flag area 223u. , A probability variation jackpot counter 223v, a probability variation discharge mode flag 223w, and an out-reach counter 223x.

The discharge mode flag 223w is based on the number of occurrences of the out-reach, or whether the mode in which the privilege card CA is given to the player is the mode using the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation big jackpot (probability variation discharge mode). It is a flag indicating whether or not the mode is the mode using the second applying condition (disengagement reach discharge mode).

If the discharge mode flag 223w is off, it indicates that the mode in which the privilege card CA is given to the player is the probability variation discharge mode, while if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, the privilege card CA is given to the player. It indicates that the operation mode is the out-reach discharge mode.

The discharge mode flag 223w is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10B is powered on. That is, the pachinko machine 10B of this embodiment is set to the probability variation discharge mode when the power is turned on.

Then, when the discharge mode button 1800 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10B is not played by the player for a predetermined time), the state is inverted each time. Is configured. That is, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, it is turned off, and if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, it is turned off.

The detachment reach counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of occurrences of detachment reach in the detachment reach discharge mode. The detachment reach counter 223x is cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10B is powered on, and then the command corresponding to the detachment from the main control device 110 (in the present embodiment, the detachment reach (front-rear detachment, detachment other than front and rear). Each time the stop symbol command corresponding to the reach) is received, one is added. Then, it is cleared to 0 each time the privilege card CA is taken out by the player (that is, each time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position).

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when in the out-reach discharge mode, the out-reach counter 223x is set based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. When the number of times of execution is reached, the grant condition is satisfied, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the third embodiment. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the timer interrupt process of the third embodiment, first, when the player operates the discharge mode change button 1800 to instruct to change the discharge mode (probability variation discharge mode or detach reach discharge mode). Then, the discharge mode changing process for changing the discharge mode is executed (S3006). The detailed processing of this discharge mode change processing (3006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After the discharge mode changing process (S3006) is executed, a discharge completion confirmation process is executed (S3007). This discharge completion confirmation processing (S3007) is similar to the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) of the first embodiment, when the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, the privilege card CA is played. This is a process for confirming whether or not it has been taken out by a person. The details of this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is executed, the above-described ejection card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) and receiving part card confirmation processing (see FIG. 53) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the above-described discharge mode changing process (S3006) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the discharge mode changing process (S3006) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

As shown in FIG. 59, in the discharge mode change process (S3006), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301). When the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301: YES), it is confirmed whether the discharge mode change button 1800 has been pressed (S4302).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4302, when the discharge mode change button 1800 is pressed (S4302: Yes), it is confirmed whether the discharge mode flag 223w is ON (S4303).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4303, if the discharge mode flag 223w is off, that is, if the probability variation discharge mode using the first giving condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot is used (S4303: No), the discharge The discharge mode flag 223w is turned on (S4304) in order to change the mode to the probability variation discharge mode using the second giving condition based on the number of times of occurrence of detachment, and the process proceeds to S4305.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4303, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, that is, if the out-reach discharge mode is set (S4303: Yes), the discharge mode is changed to the probability variation discharge mode. The mode flag 223w is turned off (S4306), and the process proceeds to S4305.

In the process of S4305, the discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 (S4305). When the discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 by the process of S4305, the display control device 114 displays a display indicating to the player that the discharge mode has been changed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81. .. After the processing of S4305, the discharge mode changing processing (S3006) is ended.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4301, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S4301: No), or the process of S4302. When the discharge mode change button 1800 is not pressed as a result of confirmation by (S4302: No), the discharge mode change process (S3006) is terminated without performing the processes of S4303 to S4305.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, each time the discharge mode change button 1800 is operated when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the discharge mode flag 223w is set. The value is inverted and the ejection mode is changed.

Next, the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

As shown in FIG. 60, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223m is ON (S3301). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is off (S3301: No), this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3301, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301: Yes), it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3302). At this time, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is on (S3302: No), the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) is ended.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 (S3303), and the detachment reach counter 223x is cleared to 0 (S3306).

After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the addition condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2122) of the third embodiment.

The grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) of the third embodiment is executed instead of the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment. It is a process that is performed.

As shown in FIG. 61, in this confirmation processing of satisfaction of the application condition (S2122), it is first confirmed whether or not the discharge mode flag 223w is ON (S4110). When the discharge mode flag 223w is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4110 (S4110: No), the processes of S4104 to S4109 are executed similarly to the second embodiment described above, and the imparting condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122). ) Ends.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the discharge mode is the probability variation discharge mode using the first applying condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation big hit, the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot is at that time. When the number of times set in accordance with the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is reached, it is determined that the grant condition (first grant condition) is satisfied, and the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4110, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, that is, if the release reach discharge mode using the second grant condition based on the number of times of the release reach is generated (S4110: Yes), In order to confirm the satisfaction of the second application condition, the detach reach discharge mode process is executed (S4111), and the application condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned detachment reach discharge mode process (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the detachment reach discharge mode process (S4111) executed in the applying condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122).

As shown in FIG. 62, in the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) comes off (rear reach, front and rear, It is confirmed whether or not it indicates a reach other than the deviation from the front and rear (S4401).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4401, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the outreach (S4401: No), the outreach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4401, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (S4401: Yes), the out-reach counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the ejection card. The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharging device 1450 and discharged next time is read (S4403).

After the processing of S4403, it is confirmed whether the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4404).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. The processing of S4405 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the second giving condition that is satisfied is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is occurrence of the miss reach of 300 times, the value of the miss reach counter 223x is 300 or more in the process of S4405. It is confirmed (S4405).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S4405, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 300 or more (S4405: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA, which is a “gold card”, is satisfied. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and this disconnect reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4405, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is less than 300 (S4105: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not satisfied, The process of S4406 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is changed to the next time. It is confirmed whether the discharged privilege card CA has a value indicating that it is a "silver card" (S4407).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The processing of S4408 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the second giving condition that is satisfied is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is that the out-reach has occurred 150 times, the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 150 or more in the process of S4408. It is confirmed (S4408).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4408, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 150 or more (S4408: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “silver card” is satisfied, so the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and this disconnect reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4408, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 150 (S4408: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” has not been established. The process of S4406 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Since it is a "card", the process of S4409 is executed to confirm whether or not the second grant condition set for the privilege card CA which is a "copper card" is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is that the outreach has occurred 30 times, the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more in the process of S4409. It is confirmed (S4409).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S4409, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more (S4409: Yes), the second granting condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is satisfied, so the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4410), and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4409, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 30 (S4409: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is not satisfied, The process of S4410 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the ejection mode is the detach reach ejection mode using the second applying condition based on the occurrence number of detach reach, the occurrence number of detach reach is When the number of times set according to the type of privilege card CA located at the confirmation position at the time is reached, it is determined that the grant condition (second grant condition) is satisfied, and the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the award condition of the privilege coin CA is set to the first award condition (the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot). It is possible to use either the number-of-times-based grant condition) or the second grant-condition (the grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outlying reach).

Therefore, since a plurality of grant conditions are provided, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less tired of the game. Further, since the selection (selection) of the grant condition can be performed based on the player's intention, the game in which the privilege coin CA can be obtained by the satisfaction of the grant condition is performed by the grant condition reflecting the player's own intention. You can

Therefore, by providing a plurality of grant conditions, it is possible to improve the game playability of the game in which the bonus coin CA can be obtained by the satisfaction of the grant conditions, and it is possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time. .. In addition, since the player's intention can be reflected in the selection of the grant condition, the player's consciousness can be easily directed toward the acquisition of the privilege card CA, and a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game is created. be able to.

Here, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, even after the award condition of the privilege coin CA is changed in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the award condition before that is changed. The information (in the present embodiment, the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot or the out-reach in this embodiment) is retained until the discharge of the privilege card CA scheduled to be discharged next time is completed at the time of changing the grant condition. ..

Therefore, even if the award condition is restored again after the award condition of the bonus coin CA is changed in response to the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the game can be continued from the continuation before the change. it can. Therefore, it is possible to properly use the granting conditions that are considered to be optimal depending on the situation, and it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA from being impaired, and to keep the interest in the game for a long time. Can be maintained.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 83. In the above-described second embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged (granted) next time is read, and the content of the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (that is, the content of privilege) is read. The control, specifically, the configuration for changing the requirement for establishing the award condition of the privilege card according to the read card information is adopted.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the card information of a plurality of privilege cards including a privilege card to be discharged next time is piled up to be read collectively, and based on a plurality of card information derived from the plurality of privilege cards. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this 4th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram for explaining the privilege card ejection device 1450x according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the privilege card discharging device 1450x shown in FIG. 63 is provided on the back side of the lower plate unit 15 in the pachinko machine 10A (see FIG. 34) instead of the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the second embodiment. Has been.

More specifically, FIG. 63(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device 1450x as viewed from the front (the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the privilege card discharging device 1450x taken along the line Zb-Zb, and FIG. 63C schematically shows the internal structure of the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x when viewed from the upper surface side. It is a top view.

For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between the adjacent privilege cards CA' in FIG. 63(a). Further, in FIG. 63(c), a part of the configuration such as the privilege card CA' and the upper lid member 1452x is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the privilege card discharging device 1450x is a storage member 1450xa for storing a plurality of privilege cards CA' and a standby for being connected to the storage member 1450xa and discharging the privilege card CA'. Member 1450xb.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the storage member 1450xa has a box-like shape whose upper surface is opened and which is capable of accommodating (storing) by stacking (superimposing) the privilege card CA′ in the internal space. It has a body housing 1451x.

An upper lid member 1452 is detachably attached to the opening on the upper surface of the housing 1451x. Therefore, if necessary, for example, the upper lid member 1452 can be removed when the privilege card CA' is replenished in the internal space of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x). The upper lid member 1452 is provided with a biasing member 1455 that biases the stacked privilege cards CA from above in order to stabilize the discharge of the privilege cards CA.

The urging member 1455 is composed of a spring member 1455a whose one end side is connected to the upper lid member 1452, and a flat plate-shaped plate member 1455b which is connected to the other end side of the spring member 1455a.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the surface of the housing 1451x on the standby member 1450xb side is the bottom surface side of the privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x). There is provided an opening 1451xa for transferring the one privilege card CA' located in the standby member 1556x.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, on the bottom surface of the housing 1451x, a privilege card CA' (one located closest to the bottom surface) stored in the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) is provided. The first transfer roller 1451xd for transferring the privilege card CA') to the standby member 1556x side is attached. The first transfer roller 1451xd is driven by the first transfer motor 1451xc (see FIG. 67). As shown in FIG. 63(a), the standby member 1450xb has a box-shaped housing 1456x configured such that the privilege cards CA' can be stacked (superposed) in the internal space and housed. An opening 1456xa for receiving the privilege card CA' transferred from the storage member 1450xa is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 1451xa on the surface of the standby member 1450xb on the storage member 1450xa side.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the front surface of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x), that is, the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side corresponds to the opening 1054 (see FIG. 34) provided in the lower plate unit 15. Of the plurality of (two in the present embodiment) privilege cards CA′ that are on standby by the standby member 1456x at the position to be discharged for discharging one privilege card CA′ located on the bottom side. An outlet 1456xb (shown as a chain double-dashed line) is provided.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x) has a bottom surface corresponding to the card information area 1602x (see FIG. 65) of the privilege card CA' on the side facing the discharge port 1456xb. A rectangular transparent portion 1456xc having a size is formed. Below the transparent portion 1456xc, an ejection card reader 1453 is arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 63(c), a discharge roller 1456xe driven by a discharge motor 1456xd (see FIG. 67) which is a stepping motor is provided on the discharge port 1456xb side on the bottom surface of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x). It is installed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(a), a fixing solenoid 1456xf is attached to the upper surface side of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x), and is attached to the tip of the movable iron core of the fixing solenoid 1456xf. A plate member 1456xg is attached.

The plate member 1456xg has substantially the same shape as the privilege card CA', and the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA' is white and ungrounded. Although details will be described later, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned on (excited) when the privilege card CA′ is transferred to the standby member 1450xb, and the privilege card CA′ is pressed against the bottom side of the standby member 1450xb by the plate member 1456xg. It is configured.

Therefore, when the card information areas 1602x (see FIG. 65) of the plurality of privilege cards CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb are overlapped and collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, the card information area 1602x to be read is provided. The background can be white and ungrounded, and the card information included in the card information area 1602x can be suitably read.

Further, since the card information area 1602x can be read by the ejection card reader 1453 while the privilege card CA′ is pressed by the plate member 1456xg, a plurality of card information areas 1602x derived from a plurality of privilege cards CA′ can be displayed. It is possible to prevent warping of the privilege card CA′ when the sheets are stacked and read collectively, and it is possible to improve the reading accuracy of the card information.

Between the storage member 1450xa and the standby member 1450xb, a second transfer roller 1457xb for sending the privilege card CA′ sent from the opening 1451xa of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) to the standby member 1450xb, and a second transfer roller 1457xb. To the standby member 1450xb and a discharge mechanism (not shown) for discharging the privilege card CA′ transferred by the second transfer roller 1457xb and the driven roller 1457xc to the standby member 1450xb. A transfer completion confirmation sensor (not shown) such as a photoelectric sensor for confirming that the discharge of the privilege card CA′ is completed. The second transfer roller 1457xb is driven by the second transfer motor 1457xa (see FIG. 67). The privilege card ejecting device 1450x according to the fourth embodiment drives the first transfer motor 1451xc (see FIG. 67) and the second transfer motor 1457xa (see FIG. 67) to cause the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb. Are driven in the arrow R1 direction and the arrow R2 direction, respectively, and one privilege card CA′ located on the bottommost side of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) is directed to the standby member 1450xb (arrow M2 direction). Transfer.

In this way, the privilege card CA′ transferred in the direction of the arrow M2 by the second transfer roller 1457xb and the driven roller 1457xc is discharged to the standby member 1450xb by the discharge mechanism (not shown) and transferred from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb. (Move) is completed. As a discharging mechanism (not shown), impellers having blades are provided on both sides of the second transfer roller 1457xb, and a privilege card CA′ transferred in the direction of arrow M2 is blown toward the standby member 1450xb. Is exemplified.

In the present embodiment, two privilege cards CA′ are configured to stand by in the standby member 1450xb, and when the grant condition (card discharge condition) for the privilege card CA′ is satisfied, the standby member 1450xb (the housing 1456x). The privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of () is transferred in the direction of the arrow M3 (see FIG. 63(c)) by the rotation of the discharge roller 1456xe, and is discharged from the opening 1451 via the discharge port 1456xb.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, an operation of discharging the privilege card CA′ from the standby member 1450xb in the privilege card discharging device 1450x of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the discharging operation of the privilege card CA′ by the privilege card discharging device 1450x.

As shown in FIG. 64, when discharging one privilege card CA′ from the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x, the two privilege cards CA′ are discharged while being pressed by the plate member 1456xg. The discharge roller 1456xe is driven (rotated) in the arrow R3 direction by driving the motor 1456xd (see FIG. 67).

Thereby, one privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x) is transferred in the direction toward the opening 1054 of the lower plate unit 15 (direction of arrow M3). After transferring the privilege card CA' to the discharge position, the discharge motor 1456xd is stopped. The "discharging position" is a position where a part of the privilege card CA' is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 and can be taken out by the player.

Then, when the player takes out the privilege card CA′ and the ejection of the card is completed, the fixing solenoid 1456xf releases the excitation and pulls the plate member 1456xg upward, and then one sheet from the storage member 1450xa. The privilege card CA′ is transferred, and the standby member 1450xb is replenished with the privilege card CA′.

As shown in FIG. 64, presence/absence detection sensor 1461, which is a reflection type photoelectric sensor disposed, is provided between discharge opening 1456xb of standby member 1450xb and opening 1054 in privilege card discharge device 1450x. If the privilege card CA′ located at the ejection position is taken out by the player and the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off, it is determined that the card ejection is completed.

Next, the privilege card CA' used in the fourth embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the privilege card CA', and FIG. 65(b) is a rear view of the privilege card CA'.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), the privilege card CA′ is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (plate shape) and is made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material (for example, , A main body 1601x made of resin or paper, and a card information area 1602x made of a transparent (light transmissive) material (for example, resin).

The card information area 1602x has a code pattern indicating card information formed therein. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, in the present embodiment, the inside of the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, each area is divided into sections of 5 rows×10 columns, and 1 in each area. By correlating one card information with a section and filling the section corresponding to the card information, a code pattern (card information) including a total of two sections is formed.

On the surface 1601xa of the main body portion 1601x, a design 1601xa1 (FIG. 65(a) corresponding to the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 1602x (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA′)). In the example of), an octopus) is written. Further, the front surface 1601xa is provided with an explanation section 1601xa2 for explaining the contents of the privilege obtained by mounting the privilege card CA' on the card information reading device 1300 (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, the back surface 1601xb of the main body 1601 is white and has no ground, and is configured to be distinguishable from the front surface 1602xa. The back surface 1601xb of the main body portion 1601x is not limited to white or the like and may have a predetermined design that can be distinguished from the front surface 1602xa.

Here, the code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602x of the privilege card CA' will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x. The card information areas 1602x shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C are all viewed from the front surface 1601xa of the privilege card CA'.

FIG. 66A is a schematic diagram for explaining the content of each section in the section formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. As shown in FIG. 66(a), the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, area 1 and area 2, and each area is divided into sections of 5 rows×10 columns.

In each row in the section of 5 rows×10 columns in the area 1, information indicating a privilege (in the present embodiment, an odd number pattern used in the reach effect as a benefit that appears when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted) ) Is assigned. More specifically, from the top row to the bottom, "1 (that is, octopus)", "3 (that is, turtle)", "5 (that is, shrimp)", and "7 (that is, dugong)". , “9 (that is, crab)” is assigned.

Further, among the 5 rows×10 columns in the area 1, the additional production A as the suggestive production is assigned to the five columns from the first column to the fifth column, and from the sixth column to the tenth column. The additional effect B as a suggested effect is assigned to the five columns. In the present embodiment, the additional effect A is "slip notice" and the additional effect B is "group notice".

Further, in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 1, the frequency of causing the suggestive effect to appear in each of the first to fifth columns and each of the sixth to tenth columns. Five levels from “level 1” to “level 5” that define (probability) are assigned.

More specifically, in each row from the first column to the fifth column in the area 1, "level 1", "level 2", "level 3", " “Level 4” and “level 5” are assigned. Similarly, in each of the rows from the sixth column to the tenth column in the region 1, “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, “level 4” are sequentially arranged from the sixth column to the 10th column. , “Level 5” are assigned. In the present embodiment, the higher the numerical value of the level, the more frequently the suggestive effect is displayed.

On the other hand, “level 1” to “level 5” are assigned to each row in the section of 5 rows×10 columns in the area 2 in order from the top row to the bottom. Further, in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 2, the additional production B as the suggestive production is assigned to the five columns from the first column to the fifth column, and from the sixth column to the tenth column. An additional effect A as a suggested effect is assigned to the five columns.

In addition, when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted in order from the first column to the fifth column in each column from the first column to the fifth column in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 2 “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are assigned as the odd-numbered symbols used in the reach effect as the privilege appearing in FIG. Similarly, in each row from the sixth row to the tenth row in the area 2, from the sixth row to the tenth row, in order from the sixth row to the tenth row, "1" and " “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are assigned.

As a result of assigning the information as described above to the respective sections formed by dividing the card information area 1602x, the information of the “design number”, the information of the “additional effect”, and the information of the “level” are assigned to the respective sections. Can be associated with each other.

Therefore, a code pattern including the "design number" information, the "additional effect" information, and the "level" information by filling one of the sections formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. (Card information) can be formed.

The character string consisting of three characters described inside each section in FIG. 66A is for explaining the information assigned to each section formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. The character string consisting of these three characters represents, from the left, "symbol number", "additional effect", and "level". For example, the section “1A1” is assigned that the symbol is “1”, the additional effect is “additional effect A”, and the level is “1”.

As described above, since each section formed in the card information area 1602x includes a plurality of pieces of information, when the ejection card reader 1453 reads at least one section of the fill, the audio lamp control device The MPU 221 of 113 can recognize a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the read one section (in the present embodiment, information of “symbol number”, information of “additional effect”, and information of “level”).

Therefore, compared with the case where the code pattern is formed by dispersing different information at different positions, the formation area of the code pattern can be made smaller, and the privilege card CA′ can be prevented from being increased in size, and the privilege card CA′ can be suppressed accordingly. It is possible to increase the number of card information that CA′ can have (in other words, the type of privilege card CA′).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the inside of the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, each area is divided into a plurality of partitions, and one partition in each area is associated with one card information. A code pattern (card information) composed of a total of two sections is formed by filling the section corresponding to the card information. Here, the allocation of the card information to each section of each area is different between the two sections when viewed from the front surface 1601xa side of the privilege card CA′ and the two sections when viewed from the back surface 1601xb side. If this is done, it is easy to identify the front and back of the privilege card CA'.

66(b) and 66(c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602x. In FIG. 66B, "1A5", that is, the symbol indicating the content of the privilege is "1 (that is, octopus)", and the additional effect as the suggested effect is "additional effect A (that is, slip notice)". There is a case where the appearance frequency of the suggestive effect is "level 5", and FIG. 66(c) shows "3B3", that is, the symbol indicating the content of the privilege is "3 (that is, turtle)", The case where the additional effect as the suggested effect is "additional effect B (that is, group notice)" and the appearance frequency of the suggested effect is "level 3" is shown.

As described above, the card information area 1602x in the privilege card CA' of the present embodiment is divided into two areas, and the same information is associated with each section of each area, so that the number of specific elements of information increases. Therefore, the reading accuracy of the ejection card reader 1453 is improved, and erroneous detection of information can be prevented.

FIG. 66D is a schematic diagram showing an example of the card information area 1602x in a state where a plurality of privilege cards CA are correctly stacked. As will be described later in detail, in the fourth embodiment, the card information of a plurality of privilege cards including the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time is overlaid to be collectively read, and a plurality of cards derived from the plurality of privilege cards can be read. The effect based on the card information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the card information area 1602x of each privilege card CA′ is configured to be light-transmissive, when a plurality of privilege cards CA′ are stacked, a new section is added to each privilege card CA′. A code pattern is constructed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 66(d), the card information area when two privilege cards CA′ each having the privilege card area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(b) and FIG. 66(c) are overlapped It is 1602x. Therefore, in the card information area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(d), a code pattern in which four sections corresponding to “1A5” or “3B3” are filled is formed.

When the discharge card reader 1453 reads the code pattern of the privilege card area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(d) (a new code pattern formed by stacking two privilege cards CA'), the audio lamp controller The MPU 221 of 113 can recognize two types of card information that are “1A5” or “3B3”.

As described above, since each section formed in the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA′ is associated with a combination of a plurality of information (that is, “1A5” or “3B3”), the MPU 221 recognizes it. The two types of card information described above can be specified as the card information held by either of the two privilege cards CA′ that are stacked.

As described above, according to the privilege card CA′ of the present embodiment, all three types of information, which are the card information, are associated with one section, so that when a plurality of privilege cards CA′ are superposed on each other. , The combination of information that each privilege card CA′ has can be detected without confusion.

Further, in the privilege card CA′ of the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of pieces of information is associated with one section, and therefore, as compared with a case where different pieces of information are dispersed at different positions to form a code pattern, The shape is simple. Therefore, a new code pattern formed by stacking a plurality of privilege cards CA' also has a relatively simple shape, and erroneous detection by the ejection card reader 1453 can be prevented.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A in the fourth embodiment. is there.

As shown in FIG. 67, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment via the bus line 224. The input/output port 225 has a first transfer motor for driving (rotating) the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the ejection card reader 1453, and the first transfer roller 1451xd. 1451xc, a second transfer motor 1457xa for driving (rotating) the second transfer roller 1457xb, a fixing solenoid 1456xf, a second discharge motor 1456xd for driving (rotating) the discharge roller 1456xe, a presence detection sensor 1461, a receiving portion. A card reader 1302, a mounting solenoid 1304, a read button 1301 and the like are connected. Although not shown, a transfer completion confirmation sensor for confirming completion of transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is also connected to the input/output port 225.

As shown in FIG. 68, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment includes an ejection card A memory 223xa, an ejection card B memory 223xb, a card ejection suggestion flag 223xc, a card ejection confirmation flag 223xd, and a card. A discharge flag 223xe, a card removal waiting flag 223xf, a card transfer flag 223xg, a card reading flag 223xh, a receiving unit card memory 223xi, a receiving unit symbol flag area 223xj, a complete deviation counter 223xk, and a probability variation jackpot counter 223xl. , Has a suggestion effect counter 223xm.

The discharge card A memory 223xa and the discharge card B memory 223xb are two privilege cards CA' that are on standby by the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, that is, one privilege card CA' to be discharged next time. It is a memory for storing the card information of two privilege cards CA′ including.

More specifically, the discharge card A memory 223xa is a memory that stores the card information of one of the two privilege cards CA', and the discharge card B memory 223xb is the other privilege card CA'. This is a memory for storing the card information of CA'.

Which of the two privilege cards CA' is on standby by the standby member 1450xb, which privilege card CA' is stored in the discharge card A memory 223xa is the level of each privilege card CA' (card information. Card information of a higher level is stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa.

The card discharge suggestion flag 223xc indicates whether or not a suggestion condition (also referred to as a notification condition), which is a condition for initiating suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, is satisfied. Is a flag indicating. If the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is ON, it indicates that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The card ejection suggestion flag 223xc which is turned on in response to the establishment of the suggestion condition is then turned off when the provision condition is established and the ejection of the privilege card CA′ is confirmed, and the stop command is received from the main control device 110. ..

In the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received from the main control device 110 30 times, the suggestion condition is satisfied and the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on. ..

The card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is a flag indicating whether or not the ejection of the privilege card CA' has been confirmed. When the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is turned on, it means that the discharge of the privilege card CA' has been confirmed because the condition for granting the privilege card CA' has been established.

The card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the award condition of the privilege card CA' is established. The card discharge confirmation flag 223xd which is turned on in accordance with the satisfaction of the grant condition of the privilege card CA' is subsequently confirmed that the discharge condition of the privilege card CA' is satisfied and the stop command is received from the main control device 110. If turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, every time the stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 110 twice, the grant condition is satisfied, and the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is turned on.

The card discharge flag 223xe is a flag indicating whether or not one privilege card CA' is discharged from the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x. If the card ejection flag 223xe is turned on, the ejection motor 1456xd is driven in the later-described card ejection processing (see FIG. 78), and the privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1456x in the privilege card ejection device 1450x. Are transferred to the discharge position.

The card ejection flag 223xe is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, the grant condition is satisfied, the ejection of the privilege card CA' is confirmed, and the main controller 110 issues a stop command. It is turned on when it is received. The card ejection flag 223xe thus turned on is turned off when the privilege card CA' to be ejected next time is transferred to the ejection position in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 78).

The card removal waiting flag 223xf is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed, that is, whether or not the privilege card CA' located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x is taken out by the player. is there. When the card removal wait flag 223xf is turned on, it indicates that the privilege card CA' located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x has not been taken out by the player.

The card removal wait flag 223xf is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time is located at the discharge position. The card removal wait flag 223xf thus turned on is turned off when the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off and the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed.

The card transfer flag 223xg is one privilege card CA′ located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) among the plurality of privilege cards CA′ located in the storage member 1450xa in the privilege card ejection device 1450x. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be transferred to the standby member 1450xb for replenishment. If the card transfer flag 223xg is turned on, the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are driven in the card discharge processing (see FIG. 78) described later, and one privilege card located in the storage member 1450xa is driven. CA′ is transferred to the standby member 1456.

The card transfer flag 223xg is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed. Then, the card transfer flag 223xg thus turned on is turned off when the supplement (transfer) of the privilege card CA' to the standby member 1450xb is completed in the card discharge process (see FIG. 78) described later.

The card reading flag 223xh is a flag indicating whether or not to read the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the privilege card CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x. If the card reading flag 223xh is turned on, the card information is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The card reading flag 223xh is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and the privilege card ejection device 1450x is set in the startup process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is turned on when it is performed, or when the supplement (transfer) of the privilege card CA′ to the standby member 1450xb is completed and the card information can be read. The card reading flag 223xh thus turned on is turned off when the card information for ejection 1453 is read.

The receiving section card flag 223xi indicates whether or not the privilege card CA′ is attached to the holder section 1302a of the card information reading device 1300, that is, the attaching solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited) and inserted into the holder section 1302a. This is a flag indicating whether or not is aligned. When the receiving part card flag 223xi is turned on, the privilege cards CA′ inserted in the holder part 1302a are in an aligned state, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602x can be read by the receiving part card reader 1303. Indicates that it is possible.

When the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10A is not played by the player for a predetermined period of time), the state of the receiving section card flag 223xi is changed each time. It is configured to invert. That is, if the receiver card flag 223xi is on, it is turned off, and if the receiver card flag 223xi is on, it is turned off. The receiving unit card flag 223xi is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

The receiving portion symbol flag area 223xj is the symbol information included in the card information read by the receiving portion card reader 1303 (in the present embodiment, the reach effect as a benefit that appears when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted). This is an area for storing the presence/absence of each symbol for the symbols that appear (information of the main symbol corresponding to an odd number).

This receiving part design flag area 223xj includes five flags of a number 1 flag 223xj1, a number 3 flag 223xj2, a number 5 flag 223xj3, a number 7 flag 223xj4, and a number 9 flag 223xj5, and these flags 223xj1 to 223xj5, respectively. , "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" indicates the presence or absence of five types of symbols corresponding to the main symbol. For example, if the number 5 flag 223xj3 is on, in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303, the card information that is the main symbol for "5" is the symbol that appears in the reach effect as a privilege. Indicates that it is included.

Each flag 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiver pattern flag area 223xj is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and each time the card information is read by the receiver card reader 1303. On the basis of the read card information, if the corresponding card is included, it is turned on, and if it is not included, it is turned off.

The complete removal counter 223xk is completely removed from the main controller 110 in a state where the suggestion condition, which is a condition for initiating suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, is not satisfied. It is a counter for counting the number of times the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the deviation is continuously received.

This complete disengagement counter 223xk, when the reception of the symbol stop command corresponding to complete discontinuity is interrupted, that is, reach variation (reach variation at normal or probability variation jackpot, out-of-front/outer reach, reach other than out-of-position reach) When a command is received from main controller 110, it is cleared to 0. The complete disconnection counter 223xk is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the complete disconnection counter 223xk reaches 30, that is, when the complete disconnection occurs 30 times in succession. Is configured as.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is a counter for counting the number of times the probability variation jackpot occurs. The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is incremented by 1 when the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (in the present embodiment, the stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) is received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, each time the player takes out the privilege card CA', it is cleared to 0. In addition, the probability variation jackpot 223xl is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl reaches 2, that is, when the probability variation jackpot occurs twice, the granting condition is satisfied and the standby member 1450xb. Of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby, one privilege card CA′ is transferred to the ejection position.

When the suggestion counter 223xm suggests the types of the two privilege cards CA' that are on standby in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, the suggestion counter 223xm suggests based on the card information of which privilege card CA'. A counter used for selecting whether to perform the suggestion based on the content stored in the ejection card memory A 223xa or the suggestion based on the content stored in the ejection card memory B 223xb. Is.

The suggestion effect counter 223xm is a loop counter that can take a range of 0 to 9, and 1 is added to the previous value every time it is updated at a predetermined update interval. When the maximum value (value=9) is reached, the value is returned to 0 by the next update.

The suggestion effect counter 223xm in the present embodiment is initialized (cleared to 0) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 69). Is updated every 1 ms.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the suggestion appearance frequency (probability) is determined according to the value of the “level” of each of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby by the standby member 1450xb. It Based on the determined appearance frequency and the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the type of the two privilege cards CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb is suggested.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 70) described later is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

It returns to FIG. 67 and demonstrates. The display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, but the video RAM 234 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment has a The special fluctuating effect data for performing the effect corresponding to the card information of the privilege card CA' (in the present embodiment, the reach effect including the slip notice, the reach effect including the group notice) is stored together with other variable effect data. Has been done.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 83. In the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from that of FIG. 42 except that the process of setting the privilege card ejection device 1450 (S2013) is different. Similar processing is performed.

In the process of S2013 in the fourth embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not there is a privilege card CA′ in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x. If there is no privilege card CA′ in the standby member 1450xb, the first transfer motor 1451xc. Also, the second transfer motor 1457xa is driven to rotate the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb, and two privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage unit 1450xa are transferred to the standby member 1450xb. On the other hand, if there is a privilege card CA' in the standby member 1450xb, the process of S2013 is ended and the process of S2012 is executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the fourth embodiment executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 69, when the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed from the start of the main processing (S2101), and 1 ms or more must be elapsed. If (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing S2102 to S2109.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2101, if 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the main process (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2109 are executed similarly to the above-described first embodiment, and the process of S2123 is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S2123, the display setting process is executed (S2123). In this display setting process (S2123), similarly to the display setting process (S2118) of the second embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the mode of the jackpot effect is set. After the setting, it is a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 a command for instructing the set variation effect mode and jackpot effect mode, respectively. The details of the display setting process (S2123) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

After the execution of the display setting process (S2123), a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the satisfaction of the condition (grant condition) for discharging the privilege card CA' from the privilege card discharging device 1450x is executed (S2124). The details of the application condition establishment confirmation process (S2124) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124), a card discharge process for discharging the privilege card CA' from the privilege card discharge device 1450x is executed (S2125). The detailed processing of the card ejection processing (S2125) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the card ejection process (S2125) is executed, the command determination process is executed (S2126). This command determination processing (S2126) is processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment. The details of the command determination process (S2126) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

After executing the command determination process (S2126), the processes of S2113 to S2117 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. That is, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 223 (S2113), and if the power interruption occurrence information is stored (S2113: Yes), the processes of S2115 to S2117 are executed, After that, the process loops infinitely.

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2113, when the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed ( (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2113, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped.

Next, the command determination processing (S2126) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S2126) of the fourth embodiment.

In the command determination process (S2126) of the fourth embodiment, first, it is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201), and if a fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), Similar to the second embodiment described above, the processes of S2205 and S2206 are executed, the command determination process (S2126) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received (S2202: Yes), after executing the process of S2213 as in the second embodiment described above, based on the received stop symbol command, the privilege A suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the fulfillment of a condition (indication condition) for starting suggestion of the type of privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the card ejection device 1450x is executed (S2218). The detailed processing of the suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2218) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2218), the command determination process (S2126) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is on, that is, whether the discharge of the privilege card CA' is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA' (S2214).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is on (S2214: Yes), the stop command in process is the stop command received immediately after the grant condition of the privilege card CA′ is satisfied. The card ejection flag 223xe is turned on (S2215).

When the card ejection flag 223xe is turned on in the process of S2215, the privilege card ejection is performed in synchronization with the corresponding stop display (in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot stop display) in the card ejection process (see FIG. 78) described later. The discharge of the privilege card CA′ from the device 1450x is started. After the processing of S2215, the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is turned off (S2216), the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned off (S2217), the command determination processing (S2126) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is off, that is, if the grant condition of the privilege card CA′ is not satisfied (S2214: No), the processes of S2215 to S2217 are skipped. The command determination process (S2126) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Further, as a result of checking in the process of S2203, when the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2203: No), the process of S2204 is executed similarly to the above-described second embodiment, and this command is executed. The determination process (S2126) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the above-mentioned suggestive effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the suggested effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 70) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this suggestive effect formation confirmation process (S2218), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates complete disengagement. It is confirmed (S2421).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S2421, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2421: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2422). ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2422, if the card discharge suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2422: No), the suggestive effect suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb is the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the number of continuous receptions of the variation pattern command corresponding to the complete disconnection is being counted, and in this case, the complete disconnection counter 223xk is incremented by 1 (S2423).

After the processing of S2423, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is 30 or more (S2424), and if the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is 30 or more (complete disconnection counter 223xk≧30) (S2424: Yes), Since the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disengagement has been received 30 times in succession, the suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x is Since it has been established, the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on (S2425), and this suggestion effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

Although details will be described later, when the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on in the process of S2425, the suggestion for suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting in the waiting member 1450xb in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 73). A reach production mode (variation mode) as a production is set. Further, when the card discharge suggestion flag 223xc is turned on by the process of S2425, in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75) or the disengaged stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 76), the privilege card CA that is on standby in the standby member 1450xb. It is possible to set a stop pattern that suggests the type of'.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2424, if the value of the complete deviation counter 223x is less than 30 (S2424: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, so the process of S2425 is skipped and this suggestive effect is produced. The establishment confirmation process (S2218) ends.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2422, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2422: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the waiting member 1450xb is selected. Since the suggested effect to be suggested is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the processing of S2423 to S2425 is skipped, and the confirmation effect establishment confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2421, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the extracted stop symbol is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or a miss reach (front and rear). If it indicates "removal reach" or "reach other than front-back deviation" (S2421: No), the complete removal counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S2426), and this suggestive effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

Next, the above-mentioned display setting process (S2123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2123) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in this display setting process (S2123), first, the update process of various counters is executed as in the second embodiment described above (S2301). In the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect counter 223xm is updated in S2301.

After the processing of S2301, it is determined whether a fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302), and if the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2302: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this display setting process (S2123) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is executed. The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2305).

After the processing of S2305, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2305, the variation effect setting processing for setting the aspect of the variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2314).

The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, but in the variation effect setting process (S2314), the third symbol display device 81 when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect setting process for setting the mode of the suggestion effect (variable display suggesting the type of privilege card CA′ that is on standby by the standby member 1450xb) displayed at is included.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2314), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2315). The detailed process of the stop symbol setting process (S2315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2314) is output to the display control device 114. (S2308).

Next, a stop symbol command for display indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309), and this display setting process ( After S2123) is completed, the process returns to the main process.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Here, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2314) will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2314) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 72) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 73, in this variation effect setting process (S2314), first, is the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicating complete disengagement? Is confirmed (S2641).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2641, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2641: Yes), the deviation variation effect as an effect mode of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. The mode is set (S2646), and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

In the process of S2646, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the deviation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2641, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (reach before/after out, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2641: No), the process proceeds to S2642.

In S2642, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates a normal jackpot (S2642).

As a result of checking in the process of S2642, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a normal jackpot (S2642: Yes), a counter for setting the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223 (Fig. (Not shown) and a variation time period defining the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.) are set (S2648), and this variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2642, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not normally indicate a big jackpot, that is, a probability variation jackpot or out-reach (rear out-of-front/reach other than out-reach). In this case (S2642: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on, that is, whether the privilege card CA′ is attached to the holder unit 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 (S2643).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2643, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S2643: Yes), the receiving unit card effect setting process is executed (S2647), and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

In the receiving part card effect setting process (S2647), the values of the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiving part design flag area 223xj and the variable time defining the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.) are set. Based on this, the reach effect mode is set. As a result of the receiving unit card effect setting process (S2647), the player can see the reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA'.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2643, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is off (S2643: No), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2644).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2644, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2644: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, and in such a case, the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223 is set. The reach effect mode is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) to be set and the variation time that defines the type of reach (S2648). Then, after the processing of S2648, the variation effect setting processing (S2314) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2644, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2644: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and therefore the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb. The suggestion effect setting process for setting the mode of the variation display (indication effect) suggesting the type of (S2645) is completed, and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended. The detailed process of the suggestive effect setting process (S2645) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Here, with reference to FIG. 74, the above-mentioned suggestive effect setting process (S2645) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the suggested effect setting process (S2645) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 73).

As shown in FIG. 74, in this suggestive effect setting process (S2645), first, based on the value of the suggestive effect counter 223xm, of the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb, the ejection card used for the suggestive effect. A memory is selected (S2661).

In S2661, if the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is within the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa, the ejection card A memory 223xa is selected as the ejection card memory to be used. On the other hand, if the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is within the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xa, the ejection card B memory 223xb is selected as the ejection card memory to be used.

In addition, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa and the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb are the same as those of the respective ejection card memories (in the present embodiment, the ejection card A It is determined based on the selection probability according to the level value included in the memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb).

In the present embodiment, the value obtained by subtracting the (value of the level included in the ejection card B memory 223xb) from the (value of the level included in the ejection card A memory 223xa) is n, and the range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is N. At this time, the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to “((N/2)+n)/N”, and the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb is “( (N/2)-n)/N".

Therefore, when the value of n is 4, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 8 based on the selection probability obtained as described above, and the ejection is performed. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is only 9.

Further, when the value of n is 3, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the discharge card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 7 based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to 8 and 9.

When the value of n is 2, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 6 based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to a range of 7-9.

Further, when the value of n is 1, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 5 based on the selection probability obtained as described above, and the ejection is performed. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to a range of 6-9.

When the value of n is 0, that is, when the level values are equal, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The range of 0 to 4 is set, and the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb is set to the range of 5 to 9.

After the processing of S2661, it is confirmed whether the ejection card memory to be used is the ejection card A memory 223xa (S2662). As a result of checking in the process of S2662, when the ejection card A memory 223xa is used (S2662: Yes), the additional effect as the suggestion effect is “additional effect” based on the content stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa. It is confirmed whether it is "A (that is, slip notice)" (S2663).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2663, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2663: Yes), the contents of the ejection card A memory 223xa and S2305 in the display setting process (see FIG. 70). Based on the variable time acquired by the process of step S1, the reach effect mode including the slip notice is set as an additional effect (S2664), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2663, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect B (that is, group notice)” (S2663: No), the contents of the ejection card A memory 223xa and the display are displayed. Based on the variation time acquired by the process of S2305 in the setting process (see FIG. 70), the reach effect mode including the group notice as an additional effect is set (S2665), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2662, when the ejection card B memory 223xb is used instead of the ejection card A memory 223xa (S2662: No), based on the contents stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb, It is confirmed whether the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2666).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2666, when the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2666: Yes), the contents of the ejected card B memory 223xb and the variation acquired in S2305 (see FIG. 70). Based on the time, a reach effect mode including a slip notice is set as an additional effect (S2667), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2666, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect B” (S2666: No), the contents of the ejection card B memory 223xb and S2305 (see FIG. 70) Based on the acquired variation time, a reach effect mode including a group notice as an additional effect is set (S2668), and this suggestion effect setting process (S2645) ends.

Therefore, when the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is executed, the special reach effect according to the content of the selected privilege card CA' out of the two privilege cards CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb. The mode will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is the card information of the privilege card CA' to be ejected next time.

Therefore, the special reach production mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of execution of the suggestion production setting process (S2645) after the establishment of the suggestion condition suggests the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time. Since there is a possibility of a variation mode, the player can estimate the type of privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time when recognizing such a special reach effect mode.

In general, the degree of expectation that the player has for acquiring the privilege card CA′ varies depending on the type of the privilege card CA′, and therefore the expectation of the player according to the estimated type of the privilege card CA′. The degree can go up and down, and you can add intonation to the game.

According to the pachinko machine A of the present embodiment, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is the privilege card CA to be ejected next time. Although the content of the other is the card information of the privilege card CA that is not discharged next time, the special reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not always discharged next time. It does not correspond to the type of privilege card CA'.

Therefore, even if the player recognizes a special reach effect mode, it is difficult to guess the type of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time, and the player can obtain the result by discharging the privilege card CA'. You can continue playing while waiting for confirmation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to provide a wider variety of variations in game playability (variation) than the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is increased. It is hard to lose and enables to maintain its interest for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the above-mentioned stop symbol setting process (S2315) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process (S2315) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 72).

As shown in FIG. 75, in the stop symbol setting process (S2315), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot). Is confirmed (S2721).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2721, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2721: YES), it is confirmed whether or not it indicates a probability variation big hit (S2722).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2722, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S2722: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2723). ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2723, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2723: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and thus, similar to the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74). Based on the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the ejection card memory used for the suggestion effect is selected (S2728), and based on the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb). Then, the stop symbol is set (S2729), and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

As a result of the process of S2729, a stop pattern suggesting the type of the privilege card CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, specifically, the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa Alternatively, the stop symbol in which the symbols corresponding to the card information stored in the discharge card B memory 223xb) (in this embodiment, one of the five types of main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers) are arranged is the stop of the variable display. At this time, the third symbol display device 81 will be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2723, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2723: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S2724).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2724, if the receiving card flag 223xi is on (S2724: Yes), the receiving card stop symbol setting process is executed (S2725), and this stopping symbol setting process (S2315) is ended. In addition, the receiver card stop symbol setting process is executed (S2725), and the stop symbol is set based on the values of the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiver symbol flag area 223xj. As a result of the receiving unit card stop symbol setting process (S2725), the player can see the stop symbol as a privilege by the privilege card CA'.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2724, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is off (S2724: No), based on the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the stop symbol at the time of jackpot. Stop symbols are set (S2727), and this stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2722, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a normal jackpot (S2722: No), the process proceeds to S2727, and when the jackpot is provided in the RAM 223. The stop symbol is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) for setting the stop symbol, and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2721, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, but indicates a detachment (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear, complete detachment) ( (S2721: No), the disengagement stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol at the time of disengagement is executed (S2726), and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) executed in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75).

As shown in FIG. 76, in this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is released. It is confirmed whether it indicates a reach other than the front/rear deviation (S2821).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2821, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear) (S2821: Yes), the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is set. It is confirmed whether it is on (S2822).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2822, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2822: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and thus, similar to the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74). Based on the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the ejection card memory used for the suggestion effect is selected (S2824), and based on the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb). Then, a stop symbol is set (S2825), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

As a result of the process of S2825, a stop pattern suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, specifically, the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa Or, the reach for waiting for the design corresponding to the card information stored in the discharge card B memory 223xb) (in this embodiment, one of the five types of main designs corresponding to the odd number) (rear reach, front/rear) The stop symbol of the reach other than detachment) is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S28822, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2822: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied, and in this case, the stop symbol at the time of removal provided in the RAM 223. A stop symbol is set based on the value of a counter (not shown) for setting (S2823), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S 2821, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the out-reach, that is, if it indicates complete detachment (S 2821: No), a card ejection suggestion flag It is confirmed whether 223xc is on (S2826), and if it is off (S2826: No), the process proceeds to S2823, and a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting a stop symbol at the time of disconnection is provided. After setting the stop symbol based on the value, this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2826, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2826: No), the ejection card used for the suggestion production based on the value of the suggestion production counter 223xm as in the process of S2824. The memory is selected (S2827), the chance eye corresponding to the content of the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa or discharge card B memory 223xb) is set as a stop symbol (S2828), and this deviation stop symbol setting The process (S2726) ends.

Here, the chance eye set by the process of S2828 is defined in advance for each type of privilege card CA′, more specifically, for each design (in this embodiment, an odd design) corresponding to the card information, Each chance item corresponding to each type is defined as an arrangement of symbols including one of the symbols. For example, when the design corresponding to the card information is the octopus design (the design corresponding to "1"), "turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)" is defined as the corresponding chance item. ing.

As a result of the process of S2828, a specific chance eye corresponding to the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb) is the third symbol at the time of stopping the deviation effect (variation display). The display is stopped and displayed on the display device 81. For example, if the pattern stored in the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa or discharge card B memory 223xb) corresponds to the octopus pattern, "turtle (3)/shark (4)" -The chance of "Octopus (1)" is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of stopping the deviation variation effect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, even if the deviation variation effect that does not expect a transition to the jackpot state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the deviation occurs. When the variation effect is stopped, a specific chance eye (stop display) suggesting the type of privilege card CA' that is on standby by the standby member 1450xb is displayed, so that the player who sees the specific opportunity eye is privileged. It is possible to expect the acquisition of the card CA'.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the above-mentioned grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the giving condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2124) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates a probability variation jackpot. It is confirmed (S4121).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4121, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the probability variation jackpot (S4121: No), the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2124) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4121, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S4121: Yes), the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is incremented by 1 (S4122), and the probability variation jackpot is determined. It is confirmed whether the value of the counter 223xl is 2 or more (S4123).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S4123, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is 2 or more (S4123: Yes), the grant condition is satisfied, so the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is turned on (S4124), and this grant is given. The condition confirmation processing (S2124) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4123, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is less than 2 (S4123: No), the grant condition is not satisfied yet, so the process of S4124 is skipped and the grant condition is satisfied. The confirmation process (S2124) ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-described card ejection process (S2125) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the card ejection process (S2125) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 69).

As shown in FIG. 78, in the card ejection process (S2125), first, it is confirmed whether the card ejection flag 223xe is on (S4221). If the card ejection flag 223xe is on (S4221: Yes), the ejection motor is detected. It is confirmed whether 1456xd is being driven, that is, whether the discharge roller 1456xe is being driven (rotated) (S4222).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S4222, if the discharge motor 1456xd is not being driven (S4222: No), driving of the discharge motor 1456xd is started (S4223), the card discharge processing (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing. .. As a result of the processing in S4223, the transfer of the privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1450xb in the privilege card discharging device 1450x to the discharging position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4222, if the discharge motor 1456xd is being driven (S4222: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the predetermined amount required to transfer the privilege card CA' to the discharge position has been driven (S4227).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4227, when the discharge motor 1456xd is driven by a predetermined amount (S4227: Yes), the privilege card CA′ has reached the discharge position, and thus the discharge motor 1456xd is stopped to be discharged. The rotation of the roller 1456xe is stopped (S4228).

Next, the card ejection flag 223xe is turned off (S4229), the card ejection waiting flag 2233xf is turned on (S4230), and the player waits for the privilege card CA' to be ejected from the privilege card ejection device 1450x by the player. The card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4227, if the drive amount of the discharge motor 1456xd is still less than the predetermined amount (S4227: No), the privilege card CA′ being transferred has not yet reached the discharge position. The processes of S4228 to S4230 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the card ejection flag 223xe is off (S4221: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4221, it is confirmed whether the card transfer flag 2233xg is on (S4224).

If the card transfer flag 2233xg is OFF as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4224 (S4224; No), it means that the privilege card CA' is not transferred, so the card discharge process (S2125) is terminated and the main process is executed. Return.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S4224, when the card transfer flag 2233xg is on (S4224: Yes), it is determined whether the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are driving, that is, the first transfer motor. It is confirmed whether the roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb are being driven (rotated) (S4225).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4225, if the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are not being driven (S4225: No), the driving of the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa is started (S4226). The card ejection process (S2125) is finished, and the process returns to the main process. As a result of the processing in S4226, the transfer of one privilege card CA' located at the bottommost side of the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is started.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4225, if the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are being driven (S4225: Yes), the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is completed. Is confirmed by a transfer completion confirmation sensor (not shown) (S4231).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4231, when the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is completed (S4231: Yes), one privilege card CA′ is transferred (replenished) to the standby member 1450xb. Therefore, the driving of the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa is stopped, and the rotations of the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb are stopped (S4232).

Next, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned on (excited), the two privilege cards CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb are pressed (S2433), the card transfer flag 223xg is turned off (S4234), and the card reading flag 223xh is turned on. When turned on (S4235), this card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. By the process of S4235, when the card reading flag 223xh is turned on, the card information of the privilege card CA' is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4231, if the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is not completed yet (S4231: No), it is necessary to continue the transfer, so S4232. The process of S4235 is skipped, the card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, when the privilege card CA′ is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, the privilege card CA′ is taken out by the player. A discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) for confirming whether or not it is executed is executed. The detailed process of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After performing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008), a discharge card for reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the two privilege cards CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x. Confirmation processing is executed (S3009). The detailed processing of the discharged card confirmation processing (S3009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

After the discharge card confirmation process (S3009) is executed, a receiving part card confirmation process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA′ inserted in the holder part 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 is executed (S3010), and the timer interruption is performed. The process ends. The detailed process of the receiver card confirmation process (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-described discharge completion confirmation processing (S3008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3008) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 80, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3008), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223xf is on (S3321). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223xf is off (S3321: No), it is not in the waiting state for the player to remove the privilege card CA' from the privilege card ejecting device 1450x, so this ejection completion confirmation process (S3008). To finish.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3321, if the card removal waiting flag 223xf is on (S3321: Yes), the privilege card CA′ is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, and the privilege card CA by the player. In this case, it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3322).

If the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3322 (S3322: No), the privilege card CA′ is still in the discharge position and has not been taken out yet. S3008) is ended.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3322 (S3322: No), the removal of the privilege card CA has been completed, and thus the requirement condition for the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time. The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is cleared to 0 so that the number of probability variation jackpots can be counted (S3323).

After the processing of S3323, the card transfer flag 223xg is turned on (S3324), and the card removal waiting flag 223xf is turned off (S3325). Next, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned off to release the pressing state of the privilege card CA' located on the standby member 1450xb (S3326), and the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the above-mentioned ejected card confirmation processing (S3009) will be described. 81 is a flowchart showing the ejected card confirmation process (S3009) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 81, in this ejected card confirmation process (S3009), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223xh is on (S3421), and if the card reading flag 223xh is off (S3421: No), Since it is not the time to read the card information of the privilege card CA′, in such a case, the discharge card confirmation processing (S3009) is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of confirmation in the process of S3421 is that the card reading flag 223xh is on (S3421: Yes), it is the time to read the privilege card CA′, and therefore the card information of the privilege card CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb. The (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) is read by the ejection card reader 1453 (S3422).

Next, the content of the read card information is determined based on the information stored in the card type table 222b (S3423). In the present embodiment, the card information of the two privilege cards CA' located on the standby member 1450xb is read together, so that the contents of the two pieces of card information at the maximum can be discriminated.

After the processing of S3423, one card information is stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa based on the determination result (S3424), and the other card information is stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb (S3425).

In the present embodiment, the card information of the higher level is stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa, and the card information of the lower level is stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb. When the levels of the two card information are equal, the card information in which the additional effect is the additional effect A is preferentially stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa.

Further, when the card information levels are the same and the additional effects are the same, the card information having a large symbol number is preferentially stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa. When only one card information can be read, that is, when the card information of the two privilege cards CA′ is the same, the same card information is stored in the discharge card A memory 223xa and the discharge card B memory 223xb. Memorize

After the process of S3425, the card reading flag 223xh is turned off (S3426), and the ejected card confirmation process (S3009) ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the above-described receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3010) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the receiver card confirmation processing (S3010) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 82, in the receiver card confirmation process (S3010), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3521). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3521, if the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3521: Yes), it is confirmed whether the read button 1301 has been pressed (S3522).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3522, when the read button 1301 is pressed (S3522: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S3523).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3523, if the receiving card flag 223xi is on (S3523: Yes), the mounting solenoid 1304 is off (not excited), so the receiving card flag 223xi is turned on (S3524). ), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (S3525).

After the process of S3525, a receiving part card reading process of reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the privilege card CA′ by the receiving part card reader 1303 is executed (S3526), and the receiving part is read. The card confirmation process (S3010) ends. The detailed process of the receiving unit card reading process (S3526) will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing in S3523, if the receiving card flag 223xi is off (S3523: No), the mounting solenoid 1304 is on (excitation), so the receiving card flag 223xi is turned off (S3527). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3528). Then, the receiving unit card confirmation process (S3010) ends.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3521, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3521: No), or the process of S3522. When the read button 1301 is not pressed (S3522: No) as a result of the confirmation by the above, the receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3010) is terminated without performing the processing of S3523 to S3528.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the above-mentioned receiving unit card reading process (S3526) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the receiver card reading process (S3526) executed in the receiver card confirmation process (S3010).

As shown in FIG. 83, in this receiving section card reading process (S3526), first, card information of one or a plurality of privilege cards CA′ attached to the card information reading apparatus 1300 (that is, the transparent section 1302c is transmitted). The code pattern) is read by the receiver card reader 1303 (S3621).

After the process of S3621, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA included in one or a plurality of privilege cards CA′ attached to the card information reading device 1300. The type of'is discriminated (S3622).

After the process of S3622, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA' cannot be discriminated due to a bad mounting state or the like (S3623). If not discriminable (S3623: No), the process proceeds to S3624.

In the processing of S3624, the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 of the receiving portion design flag area 223xj are set according to the card information of the determined privilege card CA' (S3624). That is, the flags (223xj1 to 223xj5) corresponding to the symbols determined to be attached to the card information reading device 1300 are turned on. After the processing of S3624, the receiving section card reading processing (S3526) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S3623, if it is not possible to determine (S3623: No), error notification processing for notifying an error is executed (S3625), and the receiving unit card flag 223xi is turned off (S3626). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3627), and the receiving section card reading process (S3526) is ended.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment, when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied, the two privilege cards CA that are on standby by the standby member 1450b of the privilege card ejection device 1450x. The card information of'is collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, and a suggestive effect (a special reach effect mode in the present embodiment) is executed according to the read content.

Here, of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby in the standby member 1450b, one is the privilege card CA′ that will be discharged next time, so the player who has confirmed the suggestion effect makes a suggestion (notification). You can continue playing with the expectation that you will be able to get the privilege (special value) that will be given next time.

At this time, if the privilege suggested by the suggestive effect indicates a special value that the player himself desires to acquire, the player may next acquire the special value he or she desires to acquire. You can continue playing while expecting something you don't know.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is a privilege to be ejected next time. Although it is the card information of the card CA′, the other content is the card information of the privilege card CA′ that is not discharged next time, so the special reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not always the next time. It does not correspond to the type of privilege card CA' discharged to.

Therefore, even if the player recognizes the suggestion effect (special reach effect mode), it is difficult to guess the type of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time, and the player is not able to discharge the privilege card CA'. You will continue to play while looking forward to confirming the results.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to provide a wider variety of variations in game playability (variation) than the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is increased. It is hard to lose and enables to maintain its interest for a long time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, among the card information of the two privilege cards CA′ collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, selection according to the level value of each privilege card CA′ is performed. There is a probability that the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa or the card information stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb will be used.

Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggestive effect suggesting each of the two privilege cards CA′ collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453 is changed, and thus the expectation for acquisition is also changed. be able to. Therefore, the playability is improved by suggesting (notifying) the content of the card information of the privilege card CA'.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a large number of privilege cards CA are stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read. It is configured to be read after being transferred to the confirmation position separated from the initial position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the privilege cards CA are arranged (pulled out) and stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 such that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides. The card readers 1453 for ejection are provided at two locations corresponding to the card information areas 1602 located on each side.

In addition, in this 5th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the fifth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

FIG. 84(a) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of stacked privilege cards CA, and FIG. 84(b) is a side schematically showing the state of the privilege cards CA of FIG. 84(a). FIG. As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), in the fifth embodiment, levers are arranged so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, and the privilege cards are discharged. It is housed in the internal space of the storage member 1451 of the device 1450.

In the second embodiment described above, the transparent portion 1451b is provided at a position corresponding to the position of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position. Transparent portions similar to the transparent portion 1451b are provided at respective positions corresponding to the card information areas 1602 (1602A, 1602B) that can be located at two locations.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, one discharge is provided below the transparent portion 1451b so that the card information (code pattern) formed in the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position can be read. In the fifth embodiment, one discharge card reader 1453 is provided below each of the two transparent portions (that is, two discharge card readers 1453 in total). (See FIG. 84(b)).

In the fifth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the discharge card reader 1453 in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card reader 1453 used for reading the card information is set. , The privilege card CA is alternately switched every time one is discharged.

As shown in FIG. 84( b ), when the levers are arranged so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, the privilege card to be given (discarded) next time. Since the background of the CA card information area 1602 is the back surface 1601b (that is, white ungrounded surface) of the main body 1601 of the privilege card CA that is discharged one after another, or the plate member 1455b (see FIG. 36), the next time. Only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given can be read by the discharge card reader 1453.

According to the fifth embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read by the ejection card reader 1453. Since it can be performed, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, by placing the levers so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on the alternate sides, the privilege card CA to be given next time is provided. When the card information of 1 is read by the discharge card reader 1453, confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA stored in the privilege card discharging device 1450 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA given next time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the two discharge card readers 1453 are used, but the privilege card discharge device 1450 is configured to be rotatable around an axis passing through the stacking direction of the privilege cards CA, and the privilege card CA is used. It may be configured to rotate 180° each time one sheet is discharged. In this case, one discharge card reader 1453 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the discharge card reader 1453 in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card used for reading the card information. The card reader 1453 is configured to be alternately switched every time one privilege card CA is discharged.

Instead, the reading can be performed using both of the two ejection card readers 1453 every time, and the card information that can be read by either one of the ejection card readers 1453 can be used to read the card information. The content read by the other ejection card reader 1453 which has not been provided may be ignored.

Alternatively, when the card information of one privilege card CA is read, first, the reading is performed using one of the discharge card readers 1453, and if the card information can be read, the card information is read. On the other hand, if the card information cannot be read on the other hand, the card information may be read by switching to the other ejection card reader 1453.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The privilege card CA1 used in the sixth embodiment has a different shape from the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment described above.

FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing a privilege card CA1 used in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the privilege card CA1 used in this embodiment is a medium configured in a square card shape. The privilege card CA1 has a main body portion 2601 made of an opaque (light non-transmissive) material (for example, resin or paper) and a card information area 2602 made of a transparent (light transmissive) material. Composed.

Similar to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA (see FIG. 38), the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 has a code pattern (not shown) indicating card information formed therein.

Further, on the one surface side of the main body section 2601, as with the front surface 1601a of the main body section 1601 in the privilege card CA, the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 2602 (that is, the privilege card CA1 has The design corresponding to the contents of the privilege) is described. On the other hand, the other surface side of the main body 2601 is a white ungrounded surface, like the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 in the privilege card CA.

The privilege card CA1 having such a configuration has a storage member capable of accommodating a plurality of (stacked) sheets by stacking (superimposing), and is configured almost the same as the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the second embodiment ( It is housed in (not shown) and discharged one by one.

FIG. 85(b) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of stacked privilege cards CA1. In the sixth embodiment, the privilege cards CA1 are stacked by sequentially rotating the card information area 2602 by 90° counterclockwise from top to bottom.

On the bottom surface of the storage member in the privilege card ejection device according to the present embodiment, the card information regions 2602 can be positioned at four locations by stacking the privilege cards CA1 while rotating the card information regions 2602 by 90°. 2602D), transparent portions similar to the transparent portion 1451b are provided at the respective positions, and one discharge card reader similar to the discharge card reader 1453 is provided under each of the four transparent portions. It is provided. That is, in this embodiment, four ejection card readers are used.

In the sixth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA1 is read by the discharging card reader in the processing of S3402 of the discharging card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52), the discharging card reader used for reading the card information is It is changed every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged. Specifically, every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged, the discharge card reader to be used is changed to the adjacent one in the clockwise direction.

Since the adjacent privilege cards CA1 are rotated by 90° with respect to each other, the background of the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 given next time is the back surface of the main body 2601 of the privilege card CA1 discharged one after another ( That is, since the white plain surface) or a plate member similar to the plate member 1455b is positioned, only the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader.

As described above, since the other surface side of the main body 2601 is configured to be white groundless, the background of the card information area 2602 should be white groundless when the card information area 2602 is read by the ejection card reader. Therefore, the card information included in the card information area 2602 can be appropriately read. In the sixth embodiment, the other surface side of the main body 2601 is configured to be white and groundless, but the surface is not limited to white and may be any surface as long as the code pattern formed in the card information area 2602 can be read well.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. Further, the surface is not limited to the ground, and may be a surface on which a fine pattern is formed. Further, when the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 to be discharged next time is read by the discharge card reader, the surface may be designed so as not to overlap the card information area 2602 to be read.

According to the sixth embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time can be read by the discharge card reader. Since it can be performed, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time is obtained by stacking the privilege cards CA1 while rotating the card information area 2602 by 90°. When read by the discharge card reader, it is possible to prevent confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA1 stored in the privilege card discharge device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA1 given next time.

In the present embodiment, four discharge card readers are used, but the privilege card discharge device is configured to be rotatable about an axis passing through the stacking direction of the privilege cards CA1, and the privilege card CA is It may be configured to rotate 90° each time a sheet is discharged. In this case, one discharge card reader may be provided.

Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA1 is read by the discharge card reader in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card used for reading the card information. The reader is configured to be sequentially changed every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged.

Instead, reading is performed using four ejection card readers every time, and the card information that can be read by any one of the ejection card readers is used. The contents read by the ejection card reader may be ignored.

Alternatively, when the card information of one privilege card CA1 is read, first, the reading is performed by using one discharge card reader, and if the card information can be read, the card information is read. On the other hand, when the card information cannot be read on the other hand, the card information may be read by switching to the next ejection card reader.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a large number of privilege cards CA are stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read. It is configured to be read after being transferred to the confirmation position separated from the initial position.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by inserting the blocking member 2001 on the back surface side of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next, the discharge card reader 1453 causes the privilege card to be given next time. It is configured so that the card information possessed by the CA can be read. In addition, in this 7th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 86( a) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a blocking member 2001 is provided between the next privilege card CA (the lowest privilege card CA in FIG. 86(a)) and the privilege card CA granted one after another. It is configured to be insertable.

In the second embodiment described above, the transparent portion 1451b is provided at a position corresponding to the position of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position, but in the seventh embodiment, the initial stage of the privilege card CA is set. A transparent portion similar to the transparent portion 1451b is provided at each position corresponding to the card information area 1602, and an ejection card reader 1453 is provided below the transparent portion.

The blocking member 2001 is an opaque (light-impermeable) plate-shaped member, and has a size capable of covering the card information area 1602. The blocking member 2001 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F or arrow B) by a solenoid (not shown). The privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) of the seventh embodiment is provided with an opening that allows the blocking member 2001 to enter and exit.

The blocking member 2001 is configured such that the surface 2001a on the side of the privilege card CA to be given next time is white and ungrounded. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the blocking member 2001 is inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time, it is given next time. The background of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA can be the white solid surface 2001a of the insertion member 2001. Therefore, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The surface 2001a of the blocking member 2001 on the side of the privilege card CA to be given next time is not limited to the white groundless surface, and may be any surface that can read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602 well.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. Further, the surface is not limited to the ground, and may be a surface on which a fine pattern is formed.

In the seventh embodiment, when one privilege card CA is discharged, the blocking member 2001 is moved in the direction of the arrow B to be once discharged to the outside of the privilege card discharging device 1450, and then the blocking member 2001 is again marked by the arrow. It is moved in the F direction and inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is stored in the discharge card reader 1453. Since the card can be read, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the privilege card CA granted next time and the other privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 are granted next time. A blocking member 2001 that can be the background of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is inserted.

Therefore, when the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read by the discharge card reader 1453, it can be prevented from being confused with the card information of another privilege card CA stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA given next time.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the blocking member 2001 is preferably configured such that the thickness of the blocking member 2001 becomes thinner toward the tip thereof in the direction of the arrow F (that is, the lateral cross section tapers). When the end in the arrow F direction is configured to be thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2001 can be easily inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time. can do.

Note that the periphery of the privilege card CA may be thinned toward the edge. With this configuration, when the privilege cards CA are stacked, a gap can be formed between the adjacent privilege cards CA, and the blocking member 2001 is used as the privilege card CA that is given next time and the privilege card that is given one after another. It can be easily inserted into the CA.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86(b). In the above-described first embodiment, of the privilege coins C stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 (see FIG. 4), one coin to be paid out next time is transferred to the standby member 470, and the standby member The payout IC tag reader 501 reads the coin information of the privilege coin C located above 470.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the other bonus coins C stored in the storage member 460 are not transferred from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470. By inserting the blocking member 2002 between and, the coin information of the privilege coin C to be given (paid) next time can be read. In addition, in this 8th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 86(b) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, among the privilege coins C stacked and stored in the storage member 460, the privilege coin C to be paid out next time (the lowest benefit coin C in FIG. 86(b)), The blocking member 2002 can be inserted between the bonus coins C paid out one after another.

The blocking member 2002 is a plate-like member made of a material, for example, a metal, which obstructs transmission of a transmission medium (electric wave, electromagnetic wave, etc.) used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7). The size is larger than the cross section of the peripheral wall member 641 of the storage member 460.

The blocking member 2002 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F or arrow B) by a solenoid (not shown). In the privilege coin payout device 450 of the eighth embodiment, the space between the peripheral wall member 641 and the bottom member 642 in the storage member 460 is separated by a width that allows the blocking member 2002 to be inserted, and the privilege coins to be paid out next time. In a state where the blocking member 2002 is inserted between C and the bonus coin C paid out one after another, the blocking member 2002 serves as a bottom lid of the peripheral wall member 641.

In the eighth embodiment, the bottom member 642 is made of a material that does not interfere with the transmission of a transmission medium used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602, for example, a non-metallic material such as a resin, and the blocking member 2002. Is inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another, only the coin information (contents stored in the IC tag 602) of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is to be paid out. It can be read by the IC tag reader 501.

In the eighth embodiment, when one privilege coin C is discharged, the blocking member 2002 is moved in the direction of the arrow B to be once discharged to the outside of the privilege coin payout device 450, and then the blocking member 2002 is again marked with the arrow. It is moved in the F direction and inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another. According to the eighth embodiment, the reading of the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is executed before the transfer of the privilege coin C to the standby member 470.

As described above, according to the eighth embodiment, between the special coin C to be paid out next time and the other special coins C stored in the special coin payout device 450, the coin information is transferred from the IC tag 602. By inserting a blocking member 2002 formed of a material that obstructs the transmission of the transmission medium used for reading, only the coin information (contents of the IC tag 602) of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is inserted. It is configured to be read by.

Therefore, when the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, it is possible to prevent confusion with the coin information of other privilege coins C stored in the privilege coin payout device 450. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time.

As shown in FIG. 86( b ), the blocking member 2002 is preferably configured so that the end in the direction of arrow F becomes thinner toward the tip (that is, the side section is tapered). When the thickness in the direction of the arrow F becomes thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2002 can be easily inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another. You can

Further, the periphery of the privilege coin C may be thinned toward the edge. With this configuration, when the privilege coins C are stacked, a gap can be formed between the adjacent privilege coins C, and the blocking member 2002 is provided with the privilege coin C to be paid out next time and the privilege coin C to be paid out one after another. Can be easily inserted between.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked in the internal space of the storage member 1451 of the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA overlaps. It was configured to be stored.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, a plurality of privilege cards CA2 are stacked and accommodated in the privilege card ejection device in a state in which the positions are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap. It

FIG. 87 is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the ninth embodiment. The privilege card CA2 used in the ninth embodiment has a different structure from the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment described above.

The privilege card CA2 is a medium formed into a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape), and includes a transparent body 3603 made of a transparent (light-transmissive) material and an opaque material made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material. It is configured to have a main body portion including a main body portion 3601 and a card information area 3602 which is transparent and has a code pattern indicating the card information therein which is transparent like the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA. .. The opaque body portion 3601 has a design corresponding to the content of the card information included in the card information area 3602 (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA2).

In this ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, a predetermined number of privilege cards CA2 (four cards in the example shown in FIG. 87) are set as one set, and in this one set, each privilege card CA2 is set in advance. , The card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other, and the privilege cards CA2 adjacent to the background of the card information areas 3602 are stacked so that their positions are shifted so as not to interfere with each other.

In the privilege card ejection device of the ninth embodiment, a transparent portion for the number of privilege cards CA2 forming one set (4 in the example shown in FIG. 87) is formed on the bottom surface storing the privilege cards CA2. This transparent part is similar to the transparent part 1451b of the privilege card ejection device 1450, and is formed at a position corresponding to the positions of the respective card information areas 3602 which are shifted so as not to overlap each other.

Below the transparent parts, discharge card readers similar to the discharge card reader 1453 are provided one by one. That is, the same number of ejection card readers as the number of privilege cards CA2 (four in the example shown in FIG. 87) making up one set are provided.

As described above, the plurality of privilege cards CA2 forming one set are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap with each other, so that one discharge card reader 1453 allows one privilege. The card information in the card information area 3602 of the card CA2 can be read.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, since the transparent main body 3603 of another privilege card CA2 is located between the card information area 3602 of each privilege card CA2 and the ejection card reader 1453 located therebelow. The card information of all the privilege cards CA2 forming one set, that is, all the card information individually held by the four privilege cards CA2 in the example shown in FIG. 87 is collected by the four discharge card readers 1453. Can be read.

It should be noted that a set of a plurality of privilege cards CA2, which are preliminarily shifted and stacked so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other, has a plurality of sets prepared, and one privilege card CA2 is completely discharged. Then, the next set is replenished in the privilege card ejection device. Alternatively, the privilege cards CA2 corresponding to one set may be counted and replenished in the privilege card ejecting device, and then the privilege cards CA2 may be slid by rollers or the like so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other.

As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, the plurality of privilege cards CA2 forming one set are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap each other. Since the transparent main body 3603 is located between the card information area 3602 and each ejection card reader 1453, it is possible to read the card information of all the privilege cards CA2 that make up one set collectively. Therefore, not only the type of privilege card CA to be given next time, but also the type of privilege card CA to be given after the next time can be suggested in advance.

Further, since the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 that form one set are arranged so as not to overlap with each other, which card information is determined depending on the position of each ejection card reader 1453. It is possible to distinguish whether the card information is the second privilege card CA to be discharged. Therefore, in the case where not only the type of the privilege card CA to be given next time but also the type of the privilege card CA to be given after the next time is suggested in advance, the control for changing the strength of the suggestion in consideration of the discharge order. Is also possible.

Note that, as described above, the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 forming one set are arranged so as not to overlap each other, so that the card information of the privilege card CA2 to be given next time is to be discharged. When read by the card reader 1453, it is possible to prevent confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA2 stored in the privilege card ejection device.

Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to cause the ejection card reader 1453 to read only the card information of the privilege card CA2 to be given next time. In this case, each time one privilege card CA2 is discharged, the discharge card reader 1453 to be used may be sequentially moved from the front to the rear (direction of arrow B).

In addition, when the surface of the opaque main body 3601 on the card reader 1453 side for discharge is a white solid ground having a size corresponding to the card information area 3602 and the positions are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap, The white non-ground plane of the opaque main body 3601 may be configured to overlap as the background of each card information area 3602.

Alternatively, using the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, the position of each privilege card CA is shifted so that the card information area 1602 of one privilege card CA overlaps the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 of the adjacent privilege card CA. It may be configured to be stacked in a state. Also in such a case, it is possible to collectively read the card information of all the privilege cards CA2 that form one set.

In the ninth embodiment, a code pattern indicating the card information is formed in the card information areas 3602 of the plurality of privilege cards CA2, and the card information areas 3602 are shifted so that they do not overlap each other, so that they are given next time. The card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA2 can be read by the discharge card reader 1453. Instead of this, the privilege card has a configuration in which card information (for example, a code pattern) is written on the surface of the opaque main body 3601 on the side of the ejection card reader 1453, and each privilege card includes the card information of the transparent main body 3601. The marked surface may be shifted so as to be stepwise with respect to the ejection card reader, and the card information of the privilege card to be given next time may be read by the ejection card reader. The entire card can also be made of opaque material.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the above-described second embodiment, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A (privilege card discharging device 1450). On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the privilege card CA is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A with both sides hidden.

In addition, in this 10th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the tenth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

88(a) is a sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the tenth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), in the privilege card CA according to the tenth embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are the seal member 4001 (on the front surface 1601a1 side) when shipped from the manufacturer. , And the sealing member 4002 (back side).

The seal members 4001 and 4002 have the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and when the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached, the main body 1601 and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA are completely covered.

The seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured to be light impermeable (opaque). Therefore, in the state where the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached, the design 1601a1 written on the surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA cannot be visually recognized.

Here, the design 1601a1 of the privilege card CA is information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA. Therefore, by covering the front surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA with the seal member 4001, it is possible to prevent the card information from being leaked before the privilege card CA is given.

When the privilege card ejection device 1450 stores the privilege card CA with the opaque seal members 4001 and 4002 attached thereto, when the player takes out the privilege card CA, the design 1601a1 cannot be visually recognized, and It is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA taken out by the user.

In such a case, the expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA does not end at the stage of taking out the privilege card CA, but continues until the seal member 4001 is peeled off (removed) and the design 1601a1 becomes visible. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

In addition, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and the seal member 4001 is peeled off in order to make the design 1601a1 visible. Work is required. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA (for example, a privilege card CA that has a high value for a privilege due to its rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA.

Further, the seal members 4001 and 4002 of the present embodiment can be peeled off while maintaining the seal shape, but once peeled off, they cannot be reattached (that is, cannot be reused). Although the seal can be peeled off while maintaining the shape of the seal, the structure of the seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off is known, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured as seals that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, when a fraudster removes the seal member 4001 for the purpose of confirming the design 1601a1, the seal member 4001 is restored to the original state. Cannot be returned to. Therefore, it is easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal members 4001 and 4002 by an unauthorized person.

According to the tenth embodiment, since the card information area 1602 is covered by the seal members 4001 and 4002, the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read and read by the discharge card reader 1453. It is not possible to perform control according to the content (for example, control for changing the giving condition according to the card information as in the second embodiment).

Therefore, when the privilege card CA of the tenth embodiment is used, in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48) of the second embodiment, one kind of grant condition is set regardless of the type of the privilege card CA. When it is established (for example, when the probability variation jackpot is established twice), the privilege card CA may be given.

As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are impermeable to light when shipped from the manufacturer, and the seal member 4001 cannot be re-attached once peeled. , 4002 are attached, the sense of expectation that the player feels for the privilege card CA can be maintained until the design member 1601a1 becomes visible after the seal member 4001 is removed after the privilege card CA is taken out. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In addition, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured as seals that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA, and the seal members 4001 and 4002 by a fraudster. It is possible to make it easier to detect the illegal peeling of the.

In this embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are covered with the seal members 4001 and 4002, but at least the front surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA may be covered. That is, the seal member 4002 may not be attached to the back surface of the privilege card CA.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4001 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and the main body 1601 (front surface 1601a) and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA are completely covered. It suffices that at least the design 1601a1 that is the information that is specifically suggested is covered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4002 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and the back side of the main body 1601 of the privilege card CA and the card information area 1602 are completely covered, but the card information area 1602 is covered. It may be configured not to.

By configuring the seal member 4002 so as not to cover the card information area 1602, it becomes possible to read the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time by the ejection card reader 1453 as in the second embodiment. ..

In addition, by configuring the seal member 4002 so as not to cover the card information area 1602 and the seal member 4001 so as to cover the card information area 1602, the privilege card CA given next time is transferred from the initial position to the standby position. Even without doing so, only the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader 1453. At this time, by making the adhesive surface side of the seal member 4001 white, the adhesive surface side of the seal member 4001 can function as a reading assistance surface.

When both the seal members 4001 and 4002 cover the card information area 1602, coded (encrypted) code information corresponding to the content of the privilege is displayed on the surface (exposed surface) of the seal member 4001 or the seal member 4002. By printing and reading such code information with a readable reader, it is possible to perform control according to the content (card information) of the privilege of the privilege card CA to be given next time, as in the second embodiment.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the visibility of the design 1601a1 (information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is attached by being attached. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure as compared with that before attachment. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet) of the seal members 4001 and 4002 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 1601a1.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the seal members 4001 and 4002 can be peeled off while maintaining the seal shape, the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured such that they cannot be re-attached once peeled off. It may be a seal that is impaired in its condition and thus cannot be reapplied. For example, it may be a seal in which tearing, wrinkling, or the like occurs due to peeling and the state of the seal becomes rough, so that re-sticking becomes impossible. Alternatively, when peeled from the privilege card CA, the shape of the seal is maintained, but some layers constituting the seal (for example, an intermediate layer such as a hologram sheet layer or an adhesive layer) are peeled off, As a result, it may be a sticker that cannot be reattached.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The privilege card CA of the second embodiment described above has a configuration in which a code pattern (card information) according to the content of the privilege is formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602. However, the privilege card of the eleventh embodiment The information (card information) corresponding to the content of the privilege of CA3 is stored in the IC tag 4602.

89(a) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the privilege card CA3 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 89(b) is an exploded perspective view for explaining the privilege card CA3 in the eleventh embodiment. ..

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the privilege card CA3 is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape) like the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, and has a main body. It is composed of a portion 4601 and an IC tag 4602 embedded in the main body portion 4601.

The IC tag 4602 is a wireless tag including a small IC chip 4602a and an antenna portion 4602b, and is generally called an IC tag, an RFID tag, an electronic tag, or the like. The IC tag 4602 of the present embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. An active type IC tag with a built-in battery may be adopted as the IC tag 4602.

The IC chip 4602a has a non-rewritable memory (for example, a ROM, a WOROM, etc.) that can store information in a nonvolatile manner, and the non-rewritable memory has card information (a privilege of the privilege card CA3). Information indicating contents) is stored.

The antenna portion 4602b is formed as an antenna pattern so that the resonance frequency is a constant frequency such as 2.45 GHz. The card information stored in the IC chip 4602a is called by the control unit of the IC chip 4602a and output (transmitted) from the antenna unit 4602b. The card information output in this way is transmitted by a wireless transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.), and is received and read by a corresponding IC tag reader.

The main body portion 4601 of the privilege card CA3 of the present embodiment is made of a material (for example, a non-metallic material such as resin) that does not interfere with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information, and the surface other than the surface 4601a (ie , The back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c) are coated with a material (for example, metal) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium that transmits card information. Therefore, in the privilege card CA of this embodiment, the card information stored in the IC tag 4602 (IC chip 4602a) can be read by the IC tag reader only through the front surface 4601a.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3 is covered with the seal member 4003 at the time of shipment from the manufacturer. Similar to the seal members 4001 and 4002 of the tenth embodiment, the seal member 4003 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque) and can be peeled while maintaining the seal shape. Configured as an impossible seal. Further, the seal member 4003 of the present embodiment is made of a material (for example, metal) that interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information.

As described above, since the privilege card CA3 of the present embodiment can read the card information by the IC tag reader only through the front surface 4601a, by covering the front surface 4601a with the seal member 4003, the card information by the IC tag reader can be displayed. It becomes impossible to read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the leakage of the card information of the privilege card CA3, and it becomes difficult to find a specific privilege card CA3 (for example, a privilege card CA3 having a high privilege value due to the rarity or the like) using the IC tag reader. It is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3.

Further, the seal member 4003 of the present embodiment can be peeled off while keeping the seal shape, but since it is a seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, when a cheating person peels off the seal member 4003, I can't get it back. Therefore, it is easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal member 4003 by a fraudulent person.

Further, the card information stored in the IC tag 4602 cannot be read until the seal member 4003 is peeled off. Therefore, the card information stored in the privilege card CA3 is prevented from being leaked, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the contents of the privilege before acquiring the privilege card CA3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 before the acquisition and thereby losing the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA3. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), on the front surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3, like the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 (that is, A design 4601a1 corresponding to the card information stored in the IC tag 4602) is written. Therefore, by sticking the opaque seal member 4003, it becomes difficult to grasp the content of the privilege by just looking at it, and in that respect also, it is possible to prevent the leakage of the card information before the grant of the privilege card CA3.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA3 is ejected from the privilege card ejection device with the seal member 4003 attached, the player's expectation of the privilege card CA3 does not end when the privilege card CA3 is acquired. Since the seal member 4003 is peeled off and the design 4601a1 is maintained until it becomes visible, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

In addition, since the seal member 4003 is attached at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and it is necessary to remove the seal member 4003 to make the design 4601a1 visible. Become. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA3 (for example, a privilege card CA with a high value for a privilege due to rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3.

As described above, according to the eleventh embodiment, the surface (front surface 4601a) that enables the reading of the card information stored in the privilege card CA3 interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information. Since the seal member 4003 made of a material is attached, leakage of card information is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 before the acquisition and thereby losing the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA3. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, by covering the surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3 with the seal member 4003, it is possible to prevent the card information from leaking, and thus it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3 using the IC tag reader.

In the present embodiment, the back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c of the privilege card CA3 are coated with a material that obstructs the transmission of the transmission medium for transmitting the card information. However, the transmission of the transmission medium for transmitting the card information is obstructed. Instead of the coating, a seal member having the same structure as the seal member 4003 may be attached.

In addition, the coded (encrypted) code information corresponding to the contents of the privilege is printed on the surface (exposed surface) of the seal member 4003, and the code information is read by a readable reader, as in the second embodiment. In addition, control may be performed according to the content (card information) of the privilege of the privilege card CA to be given next time.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by exemplifying the privilege card CA3 which is a card form, the configuration of the present embodiment is a coin-shaped medium such as the privilege coin C (see FIG. 7) of the first embodiment. Is also applicable. For example, a portion of the privilege coin C other than one surface (for example, a surface on which a design indicating the content of the privilege is provided) is provided with a coating that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium that transmits information, and such coating is provided. A seal member similar to the seal member 4003 may be attached to the non-exposed surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card information is stored in the IC tag 4602. However, the card information is recorded on the front surface 4601a as code information such as a bar code, and the IC tag 4602 stores predetermined information (individual information). The IC tag 4602 may be configured to store ID information capable of identifying the IC tag 4602, specific information common to a plurality of IC tags 4602, and the like.

The privilege card CA3 having such a configuration can detect the information stored in the IC tag 4602 by the IC tag reader when the seal member 4003 is peeled off. Therefore, by providing the IC tag reader in the pachinko machine, it is possible to detect whether or not there is a privilege card CA3 whose front surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003, among the privilege cards CA3 before being given.

Here, the privilege card CA3 whose surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003 has a high possibility that the seal member 4003 has been unlawfully peeled off. Therefore, the privilege card CA3 whose surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003 is When it is detected, the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are used to notify, so that the possibility of fraud can be reported to the surroundings.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4003 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the stickiness of the design 4601a1 (information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA3) is attached by the sticking. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure compared with the above. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet) of the seal member 4003 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 4601a1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4003 can be peeled off while keeping the seal shape, but once it is peeled off, it cannot be re-adhered. However, the state of the seal is changed due to peeling from the privilege card CA. It may be a seal that is damaged and thereby makes re-application impossible. For example, it may be a seal in which tearing, wrinkling, or the like occurs due to peeling and the state of the seal becomes rough, so that re-sticking becomes impossible. Alternatively, when peeled from the privilege card CA, the shape of the seal is maintained, but some layers constituting the seal (for example, an intermediate layer such as a hologram sheet layer or an adhesive layer) are peeled off, As a result, it may be a sticker that cannot be reattached.

Further, in the present embodiment, the IC tag 4602 is configured to be embedded inside the privilege card CA3 (main body section 4601), but the IC tag 4602 may be provided on the front surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3. ..

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. In the above-described second embodiment, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A (privilege card discharging device 1450). On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, a seal member 4004 described below is attached to the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA.

In the twelfth embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the twelfth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

90(a) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 90(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 90C is a perspective view, and is a cross-sectional view of a seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b), the privilege card CA according to the twelfth embodiment is shipped from the manufacturer at the front surface 1601a side (main body 1601 and card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA. ) Is covered with a seal member 4004.

As shown in FIGS. 90(b) and 90(c), the seal member 4004 is formed by applying a base sheet 4004a having the same shape as the outer shape of the privilege card CA, and applying an adhesive to one side (back surface) side of the base sheet 4004a. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b is formed and the IC tag 4622 attached to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b.

Note that in FIG. 90C, the release sheet RS attached to the adhesive surface of the adhesive layer 4004b (that is, the surface that is the back surface side of the base sheet 4004a) is also shown. The release sheet RS is a sheet for storing the seal member 4004 before use so as not to be inadvertently attached to an unintended place, and is removed when the seal member 4004 is attached to the privilege card CA.

The base sheet 4004a is formed of a flexible resin film such as a polyester film and has appropriate brittleness. Since the base sheet 4004a has an appropriate degree of brittleness, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged by the stress caused by the peeling force. Therefore, a trace that the seal member 4004 has been peeled off can be left, which makes it easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal member 4004 by a fraudulent person.

In addition, the base sheet 4004a has reactivity with a solvent and heat. Specifically, when toluene or the like having solubility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b is applied to the base sheet 4004a, the base sheet 4004a is discolored. Furthermore, the base sheet 4004a is discolored even when heat is applied to the base sheet 4004a at a temperature (for example, 50° C.) at which the adhesive force of the adhesive layer decreases. Therefore, even if a solvent is applied or heat is applied for the purpose of peeling off the seal member 4004 from the privilege card CA, the base sheet 4004a is discolored, so that a trace of the misconduct can be left.

Further, in the present embodiment, the base sheet 4004a is colored so as not to transmit light (opaque). Therefore, by affixing the seal member 4004 to the privilege card CA, the design 1601a1 written on the surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA is made invisible, and the card information is prevented from leaking before the grant of the privilege card CA. ing.

By discharging the privilege card CA with the opaque seal member 4004 attached thereto from the privilege card discharge device 1450, the player cannot see the design 1601a1 at the time when the player takes out the privilege card CA. It is difficult to understand the content of the privilege of the retrieved privilege card CA. Therefore, the expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA does not end when the privilege card CA is taken out, but is maintained until the seal member 4001 is peeled off (removed) and the design 1601a1 becomes visible. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

Further, since the opaque seal member 4004 is attached to the privilege card CA at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and the design 1601a1 can be visually recognized. In this case, the work of peeling off the seal member 4004 is required. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA (for example, a privilege card CA that has a high value for a privilege due to its rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA.

Further, the adhesive layer 4004b of the seal member 4004 has such an adhesive strength that it is peeled from the base sheet 4004a when it is peeled off once it is attached to the privilege card CA. Therefore, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off from the privilege card CA, at least part of the adhesive layer 4004b remains on the privilege card CA, so that a trace of peeling off the seal member 4004 can be left.

Further, since the adhesive layer 4004b has an adhesive strength such that it can be peeled from the base sheet 4004a when peeled from the privilege card CA, the seal member 4004 cannot be re-attached once peeled from the privilege card CA ( That is, it is configured as a seal that cannot be reused.

The IC tag 4622 is a wireless tag including a small IC chip 4622a and an antenna portion 4622b, and is generally called an IC tag, an RFID tag, an electronic tag, or the like. The IC tag 4622 of this embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. Note that an active type IC tag with a built-in battery may be used as the IC tag 4622.

The IC chip 4622a has a non-rewritable memory (for example, ROM, WOROM, etc.) capable of storing information in a nonvolatile manner, and card information formed in the card information area 1602 in the non-rewritable memory. Information corresponding to (that is, information indicating the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is stored.

The antenna part 4622b is formed as an antenna pattern so that the resonance frequency is a constant frequency such as 2.45 GHz. The card information stored in the IC chip 4622a is called by the control unit of the IC chip 4622a and output (transmitted) from the antenna unit 4622b. The card information output in this way is transmitted by a wireless transmission medium (such as radio waves or electromagnetic waves), and is received and read by the IC tag reader 4501 (see FIG. 92) provided in the card ejection device 1450.

As described above, the base sheet 4004a of the seal member 4004 has an appropriate brittleness, and therefore is damaged by the stress associated with the peeling force. Therefore, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off from the privilege card CA, the base sheet 4004a is damaged, and the damage causes the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 located on the back side of the base sheet 4004a to be divided.

When the antenna portion 4622b is divided, the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information (information corresponding to the card information). Therefore, based on whether the IC tag reader 4501 can read the information or not, It is possible to confirm whether or not the member 4004 is normally attached to the privilege card CA.

If the IC tag reader 4501 cannot detect the information, the seal member 4004 is illicitly removed from the privilege card CA and does not exist, or the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 may be damaged due to the illicit removal. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to notify (error notification) when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read, and to inform the surroundings of the possibility of fraud. ing.

FIG. 91 is a schematic side sectional view for explaining a configuration for reading information of the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to each privilege card CA in the card ejection device 1450.

In the card ejection device 1450 of the twelfth embodiment, the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is made of a material that does not interfere with transmission of a transmission medium that transmits card information, while the other portions interfere with transmission of the transmission medium. It is composed of a material that The IC tag reader 4501 (displayed as a chain double-dashed line) is arranged below the bottom surface of the storage member 1451.

As shown in FIG. 91, the card ejection device 1450 of the twelfth embodiment includes a privilege card CA that is given next time (a privilege card CA at the bottom in FIG. 91) and a privilege card CA that is given one after another. A blocking member 2003 can be inserted between them.

The blocking member 2003 is a plate made of a material (for example, metal) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium (electric wave, electromagnetic wave, etc.) used for transmitting information (information corresponding to card information) from the IC tag 4622. The shape is a shape, and the size thereof is the size over the entire cross section of the storage member 1451.

The blocking member 2003 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (arrow F or arrow B direction) by a solenoid 1458 (see FIG. 92), and the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given one after another. The information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA to be given next time can be selectively read by the IC tag reader 4501 by inserting the blocking member 2003 between and. it can.

FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment. Note that the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment shown in FIG. 92 differs from the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment (see FIG. 40) in the configuration of the card ejection device 1450.

As shown in FIG. 92, the card ejection device 1450 in the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment operates the IC tag reader 4501 capable of reading the information stored in the IC tag 4622, the transfer motor 1451c, and the shielding member 2003. The IC tag reader 4501, the transfer motor 1451c, and the solenoid 1456 are connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 93 describes the ejection card confirmation processing (S3011) executed by the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the ejection card confirmation processing (S3011) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A.

The ejected card confirmation process (S3011) of the twelfth embodiment is replaced with the ejected card confirmation process (S3004) executed in the timer interrupt process process (see FIG. 50) of the second embodiment described above. This is the process to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this ejected card confirmation processing (S3011), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223o is on (S3406), and if the card reading flag 223o is off (S3406: No), Since it is not the information reading timing, in such a case, the ejected card confirmation processing (S3011) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3401, if the card reading flag 223o is on (S3406: Yes), it is the information reading timing. In this case, the solenoid 1458 is turned on (S3407).

As a result of the solenoid 1458 being turned on in the process of S3407, the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451, that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, is stored (stored) in the storage member 1451. It is separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA.

Next, the IC tag reader 4501 reads the information (information corresponding to the card information) stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA that is to be discharged next time and thus separated (S3408). ..

After the processing of S3408, it is confirmed whether or not the information can be read by the IC tag reader 4501 (S3409). If the information can be read as a result of the confirmation in S3409 (S3409: Yes), the privilege card CA to be read, that is, the privilege card CA to be read, based on the read information and the information stored in the card type table 222b. The type of privilege card CA (contents of privilege) to be discharged next time is determined (S3410).

After the processing of S3410, a value indicating the type of the determined privilege card CA is stored in the discharge card memory 223j (S3411), the solenoid 1458 is turned off (S3412), and the card reading flag 223o is turned off (S3413). The discharge card confirmation process (S3011) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S3409, if the information could not be read (S3409: No), an error notification process for notifying an error is executed (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3412. In addition, the notification performed by the error notification process (S3414) may be performed by any one of the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like capable of notifying, or a plurality of devices. You may perform combining the apparatus of.

As described above, when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot detect the information, the seal member 4004 is illegally peeled from the privilege card CA and does not exist, or the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 is damaged due to the illegal peeling. Since there is a possibility that the error has occurred, the possibility of fraud can be transmitted to the surroundings by notifying the error in the process of S3414.

As described above, according to the twelfth embodiment, at the time of shipment from the maker, the base sheet 4004a is opaque to the front surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA, and once peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged and regenerated. Since the sticker member 4004, which cannot be stuck, is stuck, the sense of expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA is removed so that the seal member 4004 can be peeled off and the design 1601a1 can be visually recognized after taking out the privilege card CA. It can be maintained until the end of the game, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period.

In addition, since the seal member 4004 is configured as a seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, it is possible to prevent the specific privilege card CA from being unlawfully pulled out, and also the fraudulent person peels off the seal member 4004. Can be made easier to discover.

Further, when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information (information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004), an error notification is given, so that the possibility of fraud is transmitted to the surroundings, thereby paying attention to fraud. Can be evoked.

In this embodiment, since the information can be read by the IC tag reader 4501 even when the privilege card CA is in the initial position, the confirmation position in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) of the second embodiment. The respective processes for transferring to (i.e., S4205 to S4207, S4212 to S4215) may be omitted. When omitting S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215, the card reading flag 223o is turned on instead of the process (S3304) of turning on the card transfer flag 223n in the discharge completion confirmation process (see FIG. 51) of the second embodiment. It suffices to execute the processing to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4004 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA and completely covers the main body 1601 (front surface 1601a) and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA. It suffices that at least the design 1601a1 that is the information that is specifically suggested is covered.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 91, the blocking member 2003 is preferably configured such that the end portion in the arrow F direction becomes thinner toward the tip (that is, taper in a side cross section). When the end in the arrow F direction is configured to be thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2003 can be easily inserted between the privilege card CA discharged next time and the privilege card CA discharged next time. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the IC tag 4622 is configured to store the information corresponding to the card information. However, the IC tag 4622 has predetermined information (ID information capable of identifying each IC tag 4622, a plurality of pieces of information). Specific information common to the IC tag 4622) may be stored. Note that when predetermined information is stored in the IC tag 4622 instead of the information corresponding to the card information, control according to the information read by the IC tag reader 4501 (for example, as in this embodiment, the card information It is not possible to perform the control of changing the giving condition according to the above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4004 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the visibility of the design 1601a1 (information visually suggesting the content of the privilege held by the privilege card CA) is not adhered before the bonding. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure compared with the above. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet 4004a) of the seal member 4004 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 1601a1.

In the present embodiment, the blocking member 2003 is inserted between the privilege card CA discharged next time and the privilege card CA discharged next time, and one privilege card CA discharged next time is stored. It is configured to be separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA stored in the member 1451. The insertion position of the blocking position 2003 is not limited to between the privilege card CA to be discharged next time and the privilege card CA to be discharged one after another, but a plurality of privilege cards CA (for example, a privilege card CA to be discharged next time may be A plurality of privilege cards CA at least included may be located so as to be separated from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ejected card confirmation process (see FIG. 93), when the information stored in the IC tag 4622 (information corresponding to the card information) cannot be read, an error notification process (that is, , S3414) and the process of determining the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejected card memory 223j (that is, the processes of S3410 and S3411). It was configured to do.

Instead, in the ejection card confirmation process (see FIG. 93), an error occurs when the information (information corresponding to the card information) stored in the IC tag 4622 cannot be read without performing the processes of S3410 and S3411. The configuration may be such that only the processing for making the notification is performed. In such a case, a process of discriminating the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejection card memory 223j is executed as a process different from the ejection card confirmation process of FIG. You can do it.

For example, when the card information is recorded as code information such as a barcode on the front surface 4601a separately from the information stored in the IC tag 4602, and the information stored in the IC tag 4622 cannot be read. The process of notifying the error is performed in the discharge card confirmation process of FIG. On the other hand, a process of determining the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejected card memory 223j is executed as a process different from the ejected card confirmation process of FIG. It may be configured as follows.

In this case, the information stored in the IC tag 4602 is not the card information but predetermined information (ID information capable of identifying each IC tag 4602, specific information common to a plurality of IC tags 4602). Etc.).

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described twelfth embodiment, the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time) whose information is read by the IC tag reader 4501 using the blocking member 2003 is housed in the storage member 1451. It is configured to be separated (separated) from the privilege card CA.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the privilege card CA whose information is to be read by the IC tag reader 4501 is separated from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451 without using the blocking member 2003 ( To separate.

In addition, in this 13th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 12th Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the thirteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the privilege card CA used in the twelfth embodiment (that is, the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment). The seal member 4004 used in the thirteenth embodiment is also the same as the seal member 4004 used in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 94(a) is a sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 94(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), the privilege card CA of the thirteenth embodiment is shipped from the manufacturer with the surface 1601a of the privilege card CA (main body 1601 and card information area 1602). ) Is covered with a seal member 4004, and the back side of the privilege card CA is covered with a seal member 4005.

Similar to the blocking member 2003 (see FIG. 91) of the twelfth embodiment, the seal member 4005 is made of a material (for example, a radio wave or an electromagnetic wave) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium used to transmit information from the IC tag 4622 ( For example, metal).

Therefore, the privilege card CA of the thirteenth embodiment can read information (information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004) from the front surface 1601a side by the IC tag reader 4501, but the seal member 4005 is provided on the back surface side. The information cannot be read from the back side because it is attached.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA according to the thirteenth embodiment is stacked with its front surface 1601a (that is, the seal member 4004) directed in one direction, the IC tag reader 4501 is at the end side where the seal member 4004 is exposed. The information can be read from the privilege card CA of the above, but for other privilege cards CA, the seal member 4005 attached to the back surface side of the adjacent privilege card CA blocks the transmission of the transmission medium, so that the IC tag reader The information cannot be read due to 4501.

Therefore, by stacking the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA toward the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451, the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface side without inserting the blocking member 2003 (see FIG. 91) (that is, The privilege card CA to be discharged next time can be separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, as described above, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is separated from the other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451 without inserting the blocking member 2003. Therefore, the processes of S3407 and S3412 in the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 93) of the twelfth embodiment can be omitted.

As described above, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the seal member 4005 attached to the rear surface side of the privilege card CA blocks transmission of the transmission medium, and thus is attached to the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. The information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the sealed seal member 4004 can be selectively read by the IC tag reader 4501.

Therefore, similar to the twelfth embodiment, an error can be notified when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information, so that the possibility of fraud can be communicated to the surroundings, thereby alerting the fraud. ..

Further, as in the twelfth embodiment, at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, the surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA is impermeable to light, and once peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged and cannot be reattached. Since the seal member 4004 is attached, the sense of expectation that the player feels for the privilege card CA can be maintained until the design member 1601a1 becomes visible after the privilege card CA is taken out and the seal member 4004 is peeled off. As a result, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the upper lid member 1452 of the privilege card ejection device 1450 is removable, and when replenishing the privilege card CA, the upper lid member 1452 is removed and the privilege card CA is stored in the internal space of the storage member 1451. Was added.

Instead, in the fourteenth embodiment, the privilege card ejection device 1450 accommodating the privilege card CA is purchased from the manufacturer, and the privilege card ejection device 1450 is replaced to supplement the privilege card CA. In the fourteenth embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment when viewed from the side, and FIG. 95(b) is similar to FIG. 95(a). It is an enlarged view of an Ex section. For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between the adjacent privilege cards CA in FIG. 95(a).

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the privilege card ejection device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured to be attachable/detachable to/from the pachinko machine 10A, and extends between the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 to store the storage member. It has a locking member 4801 that locks (fixes) 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 with difficulty or inseparability.

Since this locking member 4801 is locked at the time of shipment from the manufacturer (that is, in the state of being received from the manufacturer), the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 is not leaked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA before the acquisition, thereby preventing the player from losing his/her expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, since the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are locked by the locking member 4801 in a difficult or non-separable manner, it is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person.

Here, since this privilege card ejecting device 1450 is shipped from the manufacturer with the locking member 4801 locked, the storage period during transportation until arrival and during installation until arrival in the pachinko machine 10A. It is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person both during and after being attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The locking member 4801 may have a structure that can be unlocked by a corresponding key after locking or a structure that cannot be unlocked after being locked. In order to reliably prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person, it is preferable that the locking member 4801 be configured so that it cannot be released after being locked by the manufacturer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 in the fourteenth embodiment has the upper end face from the internal space side of the storage member 1451 to the outlet side. Since the position on the outlet side of the discharge port 1451a is lower than the height of the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface, the privilege card CA is inclined downward in the direction of arrow M4. While being discharged.

Here, two steps 1451a1 and 1451a2 are formed on the upper end surface of the discharge port 1451a. Of these steps 1451a1 and 1451a2, the step 1451a1 on the internal space side is located above the exit side step 1451a2.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA is pushed back in the direction from the outside of the outlet 1451a to the internal space of the storage member 1451 (that is, the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow M4), the privilege card CA pushed back in a downward curved state is: When the end on the most outlet side enters the discharge port 1451a, it springs up due to elasticity. Since the stepped portion 1451a1 is located above the stepped portion 1451a2, as a result of the privilege card CA jumping up, the privileged card CA cannot be pushed back further or taken out again.

As described above, since the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so as not to easily push back the privilege card CA, it is not possible to easily return the privilege card CA that has been illegally removed from the discharge port 1451a. Therefore, the removal of the privilege card CA can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are shipped from the manufacturer in a difficult or non-separable state due to the locking by the locking member 4801 (and the shipment. Since the privilege card CA is replenished by mounting the card ejection device 1450 on the pachinko machine 10A, the leakage of the card information of the privilege card CA is prevented.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA before the acquisition, thereby preventing the player from losing his/her expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period. Further, it is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person not only after being attached to the pachinko machine 10A but also during transportation from the manufacturer or during a storage period after receipt.

Further, since the discharge port 1451a of the card discharge device 1450 is configured to make it difficult (or impossible) to push back the privilege card CA from the outside to the inside, as a result, the removal of the privilege card CA can be suppressed. it can.

In the present embodiment, the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are locked by the locking member 4801 so that the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are difficult or inseparable to be fixed. The storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 may be fixed to each other.

For example, by providing a concave portion on the storage member 1451 side, providing a corresponding convex portion on the upper lid member 1452 side, and fitting the convex portion into the concave portion, it becomes difficult or impossible to separate the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452. It may be fixed. In such a case, it is preferable that it cannot be removed after the fitting. Alternatively, the card ejection device 1450 may be shipped from the manufacturer with the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 fixed to each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to locking (fixing) the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 in a difficult or inseparable state, or in place of such locking (fixing), It is also possible to provide an identification unit that can identify the separation from the upper lid member 1452, and prevent the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 from being leaked by the identification unit.

It is preferable that such an identification means does not return to the state before the separation once the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are separated. As the identification means, for example, a caulking structure that fixes the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 and needs to be destroyed when separating, or is attached across the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452, Examples include a seal seal that is damaged when peeled off, an upper lid member 1452 that is damaged when removed (separated) from the storage member 1451, and the like.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the privilege card CA accommodated in the card ejecting device 1450 (the storage member 1451) is the privilege card CA of the second embodiment (that is, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed). Not limited to this, the privilege card CA exemplified in the eleventh embodiment, the twelfth embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, or the like may be used.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

For example, in the first embodiment, when the coin information is given as the special value, the coin form is used as the medium of the coin (special coin C), but the special value is provided by the special coin C or the like. It is not limited to a tangible form using a medium, and may be provided in an intangible form (that is, a form of data such as coin information itself) that does not use a medium for holding information.

When providing information of special value in the form of data, a mobile terminal (a mobile phone, a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants), etc.) possessed by the player, a USB memory, etc. are provided when the data of special value is provided. It may be configured to be stored in a portable small memory such as.

In the first embodiment, the coin (privilege coin C) is used as the medium for holding the information (coin information) as the special value. However, the form of the medium for holding the information as the special value is a coin. It is not limited, and various media such as cards, sticks, and other tangible objects (eg, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, the information (coin information) as the special value is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C. However, like the IC tag 602, wireless communication is possible. It may be configured to store the data in an IC chip that does not have an antenna.

When an IC chip having no built-in antenna is used, an output terminal for outputting information stored in the IC chip is provided on the privilege coin C, and an input terminal connectable to the output terminal is provided on the privilege coin. The coin information stored in the bonus coin C may be read by being provided in the standby member 470 of the payout device 450.

Further, in the first embodiment, the information (coin information) as the special value is configured in the form of data stored in the IC tag 602. However, the barcode, the color of the medium, the pattern of the medium, the medium, and the like. Information that can be detected by an optical reading device (for example, an optical sensor or a bar code reader), such as the shape of the medium (the uneven pattern on the outer periphery of the medium, the outer shape of the medium (for example, the shape of a stuffed animal), etc.), or Alternatively, it may be configured in the form of information that can be identified by a shape recognition device (for example, a shape recognition device that is performed using imaging data (image) of an object).

Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, the plurality of partitions formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602 are filled so as to have a pattern according to the card information. May have a bar code or a shape (pattern) according to the card information.

Further, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, some of the plurality of partitions formed in the card information areas 1602, 1602x are filled, but the fill color is not limited to black. Various colors (eg, red, blue, etc.) may be used. In such a case, the card reader may be capable of color detection and may detect (read out) the card information according to the filling color.

At this time, the filling color may be different on the front and back sides. Since the filling color is different between the front and back, it is possible to determine the front and back of the privilege card CA by the filling color.

Further, when the filling color is multicolor, the colored portion may be light transmissive. When the filling pattern constituting the card information is configured to be light-transmissive, when reading the card information of the privilege cards CA and CA′ mounted on the card information 1300, light is emitted from the reading side by the value content detecting means, From the color of the reflected light, it is possible to determine the type of the privilege card CA, CA′ that is attached. Alternatively, it is possible to irradiate light from the side opposite to the reading side by the value content detecting means, and to discriminate the type of the privilege card, CA' mounted, from the color of the transmitted light.

In addition, by making the filling pattern that constitutes the card information of the privilege cards CA and CA′ light-transmissive, it is possible to form the pattern at a position where the privilege cards CA and CA′ are overlapped with each other. It is also possible to distinguish the combination by the color of the reflected light.

Further, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmitting card information area 1602. However, the privilege coin C illustrated in the first embodiment is exemplified. Alternatively, an IC tag may be used. The value content detecting means in the second and third embodiments detects the card information at the confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, so the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to confusion with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means when reading the.

Further, in the second and third embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602. The concavo-convex pattern, the outer peripheral shape) may have a shape corresponding to the card information, and the card information may be acquired using an optical sensor or a shape recognition device. The value content detecting means in the second and third embodiments detects the card information at the confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, so the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Can be detected without being confused with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means.

Further, in the above second and third embodiments, the card (privilege card CA) is used as the medium having the special value (card information), but the form of the medium is not limited to the card, and coins and Various media such as a stick, and other tangible objects (eg, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, the back surface 1601b of the privilege card CA is configured to be white groundless. Good.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. The surface is not limited to the ground, but is a surface on which a fine pattern is formed, or a surface that is designed at a position that does not overlap the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time at the confirmation position. May be.

Similarly, the white solid ground of the plate member 1305 and the white solid ground of the plate member 1455b are not limited to white as long as they can read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602 well.

Further, in the second, third and fourth embodiments, the card information areas 1602 and 1602x of the privilege cards CA and CA′ are configured such that the four sides are surrounded by the main body portions 1601 and 1601x. The edge of 1602x may constitute a part of the edge of the privilege card CA, CA′, that is, the edge of the card information area 1602, 1602x may be exposed without being surrounded by the main body 1601, 1601x. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the main body 1601x of the privilege card CA' is configured to be opaque, but the main body 1601x may be configured to be transparent like the card information area 1602x.

Further, in the privilege card ejection device 1450 of the second and third embodiments, as shown in FIG. 37, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is provided between the lower plate unit 15 and the ejection port 1451a on the side closer to the ejection port 1451a. Although the configuration is adopted, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 may be provided between the lower tray unit 15 and the outlet 1451a on the side closer to the lower tray unit 15 (that is, on the opening 1054 side).

Here, by setting the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 at a position where the tip of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position can be detected, it can be used only for confirmation of discharge completion as in the second and third embodiments. Instead, it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the arrival at the confirmation position when the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the medium for playing the game (gaming ball) and the medium for obtaining the privilege (privilege coin C or privilege card CA, CA′) are different, but for playing the game The medium and the medium for obtaining the privilege may have the same form, and the medium for obtaining the privilege may be configured to be usable as a medium for playing a game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is configured as the information indicating the symbol used in the new reach effect mode that can be displayed by mounting the special coin C on the coin information reading device 300. Alternatively, it may be configured as information of a character that appears in the reach effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value, one of the five main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) Although it is configured as the information shown, instead of this, it may be configured as information showing one main symbol out of the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). Good. Alternatively, it may be configured as information indicating one main symbol of all the main symbols.

Further, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is a symbol used in a new reach effect mode that can be displayed by mounting the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300 (specifically, an odd number). Although it is configured as information indicating one main symbol) among the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9), it is not limited to this, and points (score) and Information that can change the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability) or information that guides the game strategy can be used.

Similarly, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the card information as the special value is given a predetermined effect (a big hit effect or a reach effect) by mounting the privilege cards CA, CA′ on the card information reading device 1300. The information that can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the information is not limited to this, and information that can change the points (score) and the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability). Alternatively, it may be information that guides the game strategy.

Further, the card information as the special value may be information that allows a predetermined stop symbol to be displayed after the variable display by mounting the privilege cards CA and CA' on the card information reading device 1300.

Further, the new effect displayed based on the coin information or the card information is a predetermined effect mode using a certain symbol, but an effect unrelated to the symbol (for example, an effect that a specific character that is not a symbol appears) Alternatively, an effect in which a specific situation appears (for example, an effect by an image and sound of a bell ringing) may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA is attached to the pachinko machine 10 (the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300) in order to obtain the privilege. Is not limited to being mounted on the pachinko machine 10. For example, a player may obtain a privilege by exchanging with a prize based on coin information (for example, points) stored in the privilege coin C at a prize exchange place. Alternatively, the player reads out and uses the information by using an information processing device (for example, a personal computer) connected to an information reading device (a reader capable of reading data from various media such as an IC tag reader). It may be configured to obtain a privilege.

In the second and third embodiments, when a special combination of privilege cards CA (gold and silver cards) is attached to the card information reading device 1300, the special cards CA appear only after being combined. It was configured to display the jackpot performance. Alternatively, when a special combination of privilege cards CA is attached to the card information reading device 1300, the combination type or the number of combination of privilege cards CA is a privilege that appears only after combining these privilege cards CA. It may be configured to perform a special reach effect according to. At this time, a reach effect of a type that develops according to the combination type or the number of combinations of the privilege cards CA may be performed.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the contents of the special value (the special value However, if the special value information is information indicating a numerical value (for example, points), the numerical value may be displayed during variable display or stop display.

Alternatively, the information as the special value may be converted into a numerical value, and the numerical value may be displayed during variable display or stop display. For example, in the case where there is a high or low value due to a scarcity value or the like between each type of special value, a higher numerical value may be displayed for higher value information during variable display or stop display. In this case, it may be configured to have a table or a function for digitizing the information as the special value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when suggesting the coin information as the special value, the variable display and the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are configured in the same manner except for the symbol indicated by the coin information. When the value as the special value has high or low value, the mode of variable display or stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the high or low value.

In the first embodiment, the coin information of the privilege coin C is acquired based on the coin type table 222a, and a value indicating the type of coin is acquired and stored in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b. However, the coin information of the privilege coin C may be stored as it is in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b as a value indicating the type of coin.

Further, in the first and fourth embodiments, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). Not limited to the corresponding variation pattern command, the suggestion condition may be established when the variation pattern command corresponding to the out-reach (rear out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear reach) is continuously received a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in the first and fourth embodiments, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). For example, even in the configuration in which the suggestion condition is satisfied when the ratio of complete deviation to all fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined value in a period starting from the timing of paying out the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA′) Good. Alternatively, the suggestion condition may be satisfied when the ratio of deviation (complete deviation, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear) with respect to all fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined value in a predetermined period.

The suggestion condition is, as in the first and fourth embodiments, at least one profit lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state ( It is preferable that the condition is based on a lottery result of whether or not (a big hit state) is generated.

For example, if the deviation (the result of not generating an advantageous state) is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more as the suggestion condition is satisfied, the deviation is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more and the interest in the game is about to be lost. Also, by suggesting the types of the bonus coin C and the bonus card CA' to be paid out next time, the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the bonus coin C and the bonus card CA'. You can maintain interest in the game.

Alternatively, by setting that the result of generating the jackpot state is obtained as the suggestion condition, the type of the bonus coin C or the bonus card CA′ to be paid out next time is suggested together with the occurrence of the jackpot state. As a result, new amusement features are added to the amusement features provided by conventional general gaming machines by lottery, the interest of the amusement is improved, and the player's interest in the amusement can be maintained for a long time. enable.

Further, the establishment of the suggestion condition is based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 which is a trigger to start the variable display of the identification information (LED 37a and the pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Preferably.

With such a configuration, the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA′ to be paid out next time is a variable display (dynamic display) using the identification information performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. ), it is not only for the player who visually recognizes this variable display to have the same stop display as a conventional general-purpose gaming machine, but also for a special value that conventional general-purpose gaming machines do not have. Can be expected to be earned. Therefore, the change (variation) of the game property becomes richer than that of the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, the suggestion condition may be established according to the length of the game time. For example, the number of revolutions of the variable display, the period during which the player touches the operation handle 51, the switch provided by the player for inputting the start of the game to the pachinko machine 10, and the period after the switch is operated, etc. The game time may be set, and the suggestion condition may be established when the game time exceeds a predetermined period.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the receiving part coin flag 223h confirmation process (S2603 process) is preceded by the coin payout suggestion flag 223d confirmation process (S2604 process). It was configured to be done by. That is, when the bonus coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300, the reach effect mode is set by giving priority to the bonus coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. Instead of this, the confirmation process of the coin payout suggestion flag 223d may be executed prior to the confirmation process of the receiving section coin flag 223h, and the reach effect based on the establishment of the suggestion condition may be preferentially set.

Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 73), the confirmation process of the receiving card flag 223xi (the process of S2643) is replaced with the confirmation process of the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc (the process of S2644). The configuration is performed in advance. That is, when the privilege card CA′ is mounted on the card information reading device 1300, the reach effect mode is set by giving priority to the privilege card CA′ mounted on the card information reading device 1300. Alternatively, the confirmation processing of the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc may be executed prior to the confirmation processing of the receiving section card flag 223xi, and the reach effect based on the establishment of the suggestion condition may be preferentially set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured such that the suggestion condition is satisfied based on the command received from the main control device 110, but in the main control device 110, the bonus coin C to be paid out next time. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not to suggest the type of is drawn, and the result of the drawing is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Here, the lottery as to whether or not to suggest the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is performed when the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the game board 13 (for example, the ball enters the first entrance 64). If you enter the ball). Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, in the main control device 110, whether or not to suggest the type of privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time is selected by lottery, and the result of the lottery is output to the voice lamp control device 113. May be

In the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110 (specifically, a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot), the giving condition is Although it is configured that the bonus coin C is paid out when it is established, the granting condition can be set appropriately. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to a complete disconnection from the main control device 110 a predetermined number of times, and then receives a command corresponding to a reach other than a normal jackpot (probability variation jackpot, front-back detachment reach, reach other than front-back detachment). When it does, it is good also as satisfaction of grant conditions. It should be noted that the applying conditions can be appropriately set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment.

Further, in the first embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the establishment of the suggestion condition) and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607. If the coin information of the target benefit coin C is the same as (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the benefit coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), it corresponds to the coin information. It is configured that the same reach effect mode using the pattern is set.

Instead of this, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 may be different reach effect modes using symbols corresponding to the same coin information. For example, in the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a are stopped and displayed in two rows out of three, and the remaining one row fluctuates. Although it is a reach effect mode, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 remains in the state where the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in the two columns out of the three columns. It may be a configuration in which a new reach production mode including a notice production that the symbols pass through as a group fluctuates.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the content of the special value (special Although the type of value) is suggested, the special value is notified by voice from the audio output device 226, and the special value is displayed by the lamp display device 227 (lamp lighting, blinking, change of emission color, etc.). The content may be notified. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the content of the special value performed by the establishment of the suggestion condition is notified by using the lamp display by the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (lamp lighting, blinking, emission color change, etc.). It may be configured to.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the content of the special value (special Although the type of value) is suggested, the first symbol display device 37 may perform variable display or stop display according to the symbol corresponding to the coin information.

In addition, in the second and third embodiments, the grant condition is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot or the out-reach reaches the specified number according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next, and the grant condition is satisfied. Although the privilege card CA is discharged, the remaining number of times required to reach the grant condition may be notified (displayed or output by voice).

Further, in the second embodiment, the difference in the number of occurrences of the common game state (specifically, the probability variation big hit) is the difference in the giving condition, but the common game state in which the number of occurrences is counted. In addition to the probability variation jackpot, the out-reach, the out-revolution speed, the number of shot balls, or the like may be applied. Further, the difference in the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10A and the difference in the period in which the player is touching the operation handle 51 may be configured as the difference in the giving condition.

At this time, for example, a gold card is provided with 300 out-reach conditions, a silver card is provided with 150 out-reach conditions, and a copper card is provided with 30 out-reach conditions. be able to. Alternatively, the gold card is set to 3000 out-of-rotations, the silver card is set to 1500 out-of-rotations, and the copper card is set to 300 out-of-rotations. be able to. In addition, the number of shots (the number of shots) to be fired 30000 times is given to the gold card, the number of shots (the number of shots) to be 1500 times is given to the silver card, and the number of shots is set to be 300 times for the copper card. The number of shots (the number of shots) can be set as the giving condition.

Alternatively, even if the gaming state is not the common gaming state, the gaming state in which the number of occurrences is counted may be different according to the card information of the privilege card CA. For example, in the case of a gold card, the probability of 10 occurrences of a jackpot can be set as a grant condition, and in the case of a silver card, the occurrence of 10 times a normal jackpot can be set as a grant condition. In this case, it is possible to give a difference in the degree of difficulty of establishment to the grant condition depending on the difference in the game state. For example, the probability of establishment is higher when the probability variation jackpot with a low selection probability is used as the granting condition than when the normal jackpot is used as the granting condition.

In addition, the game state targeted for the grant condition may have a configuration in which not only the game state in which the number of occurrences is counted, but also the number of occurrences to be established is different according to the card information of the privilege card CA. For example, in the case of a gold card, 10 occurrences of a probability variation jackpot may be set as a grant condition, and in the case of a silver card, 150 occurrences of a miss reach may be set as a grant condition.

Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the discharge mode is changed based on the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800, the information stored for the previous application conditions is held, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information that has been accumulated for the previous grant conditions is cleared as the mode is changed.

In the second and third embodiments, the granting condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. In addition to changing the conditions, as in the first embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the type of privilege card CA to be paid out next time, an effect according to the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j ( The variable display and/or the stop display) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Alternatively, according to the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, instead of changing the grant condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, as in the first embodiment, it is paid out next time. In order to suggest (notify) the type of privilege card CA to be displayed, an effect (variable display and/or stop display) corresponding to the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured as follows.

In the second embodiment, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on. However, when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is not cleared to 0 and the power is shut off. The configuration may be such that it can continue from the hour value.

Since the probability variation jackpot occurs with a relatively low probability, the probability variation jackpot number 223v may not be cleared to 0 each time the power is turned on, so that the condition for granting the probability variation jackpot number may be satisfied soon after the opening of the hole. obtain. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game from the opening of the hall while expecting the discharge of the privilege card CA due to the establishment of the grant condition.

In the first embodiment, the payout coin detection process (see FIG. 29) and the receiving coin detection process (see FIG. 30) are executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 ms. However, the payout coin detecting process and the receiving coin detecting process may be executed in the main process (see FIG. 19).

Further, in the second embodiment, the timer allocation executed for the discharge completion confirmation processing (see FIG. 51), the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52), and the receiving unit card confirmation processing (see FIG. 53) every 2 ms. Although the configuration is performed in the plug-in process (see FIG. 50 ), the ejection completion confirmation process, the ejection card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process may be performed in the main process (see FIG. 43 ).

Further, in the third embodiment, the ejection mode changing process (see FIG. 59), the ejection completion confirmation process (see FIG. 60), the ejection card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), and the receiving unit card confirmation process (see FIG. 53). Is configured to be executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50) executed every 2 ms. However, the main processing is the discharge mode change process, the discharge completion confirmation process, the discharge card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process. It may be configured to be executed in the processing (see FIG. 43).

Also, in the fourth embodiment, the timer allocation executed for the discharge completion confirmation processing (see FIG. 80), the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81), and the receiving unit card confirmation processing (see FIG. 82) every 2 ms. Although the configuration is performed in the plug-in process (see FIG. 79), the ejection completion confirmation process, the ejection card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process may be performed in the main process (see FIG. 69).

Further, in the second and third embodiments, the type (contents of privilege) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is configured not to be notified (indicated) before the discharge, but like the first embodiment. Even when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display and the stop display according to the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time are performed to notify the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Good.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the bonus card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card, the grant condition is satisfied by the occurrence of 10 probability variation jackpots, and if it is a silver card, the probability variation jackpots of 5 probability variation jackpots. The condition for grant is satisfied by the occurrence, and in the case of a copper card, the condition for grant is satisfied by the occurrence of one probability variation jackpot.

Here, even if there is a probability variation jackpot occurrence in the main control device 110 for at least the last one of the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot that is the provision condition, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v determines that the probability variation jackpot that is the provision condition. The number of occurrences may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability). For example, if the bonus card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card and the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 9, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the probability variation jackpot, but the probability variation jackpot. Whether or not to add 1 to the counter 223v is determined with a probability of 1/2.

With this configuration, even if the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot as the granting condition is relatively small, the granting condition is not always satisfied in a short time. Therefore, the length of time until the privilege card CA is discharged and the length of the value of the privilege card CA are not necessarily proportional to each other, so that the game in which the privilege card CA can be obtained can be suppressed and the interest of the player can be increased. It can be prevented from being monotonic. Also, the player expects a high-value privilege card CA because the period until the privilege card CA is discharged is long, but thinks that the player may acquire a low-value privilege card CA. When the privilege card CA is acquired, the player's joy for the acquisition can be amplified.

In addition, for gold cards, silver cards, and copper cards, all of the same number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpots satisfy the condition for granting. However, even if the main controller 110 generates the probability variation jackpots, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is generated. According to the type of the privilege card CA (whether it is a gold card, a silver card, or a bronze card), the probability of deciding whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot as the grant condition is determined according to You may comprise. For example, the probability that the probability variation jackpot 223v determines whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot that is a grant condition is 1/5, 1/2, and 1 for a gold card, a silver card, and a copper card, respectively. Good.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (variation pattern command, stop symbol command) from the main control device 110 and then receives a stop command, the coin The payout flag 223f is turned on, and the payout operation of the bonus coin C is performed. Similarly, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a command (a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot or a command corresponding to the out-reach) that satisfies the grant condition. After that, when the stop command is received, the card ejection flag 223l is turned on and the privilege card CA is ejected.

Instead of these, a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is provided in the voice lamp control device 113 without using the stop command, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is included in the variation pattern command. Alternatively, the coin payout flag 223f or the card ejection flag 223l may be turned on at the timing when only the time elapses.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 includes information on the variation time and information on the first hit type counter C2 (that is, a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot). However, the variation pattern command may be configured as a command that does not include the information of the first hit type counter C2 but includes only the variation time information.

In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command is configured as a command including only variation time information, the voice lamp control device 113 is a big hit based on the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110. It distinguishes whether the mode of is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot.

Further, in the second, third and fourth embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes the jackpot display mode (probable variation jackpot, normal jackpot) based on the stop symbol command received from the main controller 110. Although configured, when the variation pattern command includes information of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, whether it is a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit), based on the change pattern command, as in the first embodiment. Then, it may be configured to distinguish whether the mode of the big hit is the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to use the stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol set based on the first hit type counter C2, but instead of the stop symbol command, the first hit The voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 uses the type command including the information of the type (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear reach, complete out) according to the value of the type counter C2. The stop symbol may be determined based on the content of the command. In such a case, the voice lamp control device 113 can distinguish the big hits (probability variation big hits, normal big hits) and the misses (rear out-of-front/reach, reach other than out-of-fronts/reach, complete disconnection) based on the type command. it can.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, in the reach other than the normal jackpot (probability variation jackpot, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outer hit), the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is determined. Since the new reach effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, not only the new reach effect mode appears, but also the appearance frequency increases.

Instead, a new reach effect mode according to the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is simply stopped in two rows out of three rows corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The remaining one column may fluctuate in the displayed state, and a reach production mode similar to that during a normal reach variation may be adopted, and only the appearance frequency of the reach production state similar to such a normal reach variation may be increased. ..

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on based on the bonus coin C being attached to the pachinko machine 10 (coin information reading device 300), a reach other than the normal jackpot (probably variable jackpot, In front and rear out-reach, reach other than out-of-front-and-rear), since a new reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the coin information of the installed privilege coin C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a new reach effect is obtained. Not only does the mode appear, but the frequency of occurrence also increases.

Instead of this, a new reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the coin information of the installed privilege coin C is simply used, and the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are two columns out of three columns. With the remaining one row fluctuating in a state where it is stopped and displayed, the reach production mode is the same as when the normal reach is changed, and only the frequency of the reach production is the same as when the normal reach is changed. Good.

Further, in the first embodiment, the privilege coins C are stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction, but the privilege coins C are arranged on a plane. A configuration may be used in which a storage member having a storage form is used.

As described above, when using a storage member in which the privilege coins C are arranged and stored on a plane, a push-out member (appended to push out the row of the privilege coins C arranged in the storage member from one end side to the standby member side) A biasing member) may be provided, and the privilege coin C stored in the storage member may be configured to be supplied to the standby member by being pushed (transferred) by the pushing member. Alternatively, the privilege coins C may be arranged on the conveyor in the storage member, and the privilege coins C stored in the storage member by the transfer by the conveyor may be supplied to the standby member.

In the first embodiment, the privilege coins C are stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction (gravitational direction). It may be configured to use a storage member having a configuration in which the items are horizontally arranged and stored.

As described above, when using a storage member in which the planes of the privilege coins C are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and stored, the pushing member (biasing member) that pushes the row of the privilege coins C arranged in the storage member from one end side to the standby member side. It is sufficient to provide a member) and supply the privilege coin C stored in the storage member to the standby member by pushing (transferring) by the pushing member. At this time, for example, from the discharge side of the storage member to the standby member, a descending inclined rail on which the outer peripheral surface of the privilege coin C can be placed is connected, and the privilege coin C is discharged from the discharge side of the storage member to the rail, The privilege coin C on the rail can be configured to run by utilizing gravity and be supplied to the standby member.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the privilege coin payout device 450, the coin information of one privilege coin located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, so that the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is read. Although the type is determined, a plurality of standby members according to the payout order are provided, the coin information of each privilege coin C stored in the plurality of standby members is individually read by the IC tag reader, and paid out from the next time. The type of the privilege coin C may be determined in advance in the payout order.

Similarly, in the second and third embodiments, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, and the card information is read, but a plurality of privilege cards are used. The card CA is transferred to the confirmation position as the privilege card to be discharged next time, and based on the code pattern read by the discharge card reader 1453, as in the case where a plurality of privilege cards CA are mounted in the card information reading device 1300. The card information of each privilege card CA may be acquired.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, as a device for paying out the privilege coin C, regardless of the type of the privilege coin C, one kind of privilege coin is stored from the storage member 460 that stores various kinds of privilege coins C in various ways. By supplying C to the standby member 470 and reading the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 by the payout IC tag reader 501, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined.

Alternatively, a plurality of storage units may be provided for each type of privilege coin C, and one storage unit to be paid out may be selected from the plurality of storage units when the grant condition is satisfied. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined by selecting the storage unit. Therefore, the reading for individually detecting the type of the privilege coin C (contents of coin information) The device (dispensing IC tag reader 501) can be eliminated.

It should be noted that by previously determining the selection order of the one storage unit to be paid out, it is possible to previously determine the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out after the next time. The selection order of the storage units may be determined by lottery or the like.

In the first embodiment, the coin information of one privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501. However, the standby member 470 is not provided (that is, the storage member). Only 460). For example, the coin information of the privilege coin C is made information that can be detected by an optical reading device, a transparent window that can read the coin information is provided on the discharge side of the storage member, and the standby member 470 is not provided next time. The configuration may be such that the type of privilege coins C to be paid out is determined.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 is formed with the concave coin receiving portion 300a, and the bonus coin C can be detachably attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. .. Alternatively, the bonus information C may be simply placed (arranged) on the plate-like portion without providing the coin information reading device 300 with a recess such as the coin receiving portion 300a. Similarly, instead of the card information reading device 1300 in the second and third embodiments, the privilege card CA may be simply placed (placed) at a position on the plate-shaped portion that can be read by the pattern reading means. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is integrally provided with the pachinko machine 10. However, the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is not the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured as a separate body and used by being connected to the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the main control device 110. Based on the command (fluctuation pattern command, stop symbol command), the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is suggested.

Instead, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 determines whether the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the suggestion condition are satisfied by the main control device 110. Alternatively, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, a corresponding command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113. At this time, for example, in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 14) executed by the main control device 110, when complete deviation is determined as a fluctuation pattern for a predetermined number of times in succession, or a probability variation jackpot is set as a display mode. If it is, it can be determined that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

Here, when the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the main control device 110 to determine whether or not the main control device 110 indicates the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time, The coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the coin payout device 450 are connected to the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 determines whether the grant condition is satisfied. When the grant condition is satisfied, a corresponding command is voiced. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113. At this time, for example, in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 14) executed by main controller 110, when the probability variation big hit is set as the display mode, it can be determined that the grant condition is satisfied.

Alternatively, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the display control device 114, and in the display control device 114, the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the command received from the voice lamp control device 114 (display variation pattern command, Based on the display stop symbol command), the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the privilege coin payout device 450 may be connected to the display control device 140.

In the first embodiment, the receiving IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113, but they are connected to the main control device 110. The coin information of the privilege coin C read by the receiving IC tag reader 302 may be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the receiving IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 may be connected to the display control device 114.

Further, in the first embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

In the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the ejection card reader 1453, the receiving card reader 1303, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461, and the read button 1301 are connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is connected. Although information and signals are input to 113, at least one of them is connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 to input information or signals to the connection destination control device. Good.

Here, when the ejection card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 performs processing according to the input information or signal, and the resulting command (privilege card CA , CA′ is instructed to be discharged, or a command to instruct a special effect is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the information and signals input from the ejection card reader 1453 or the like to the main control device 110 are output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the same processing as in the second, third and fourth embodiments is performed to the voice lamp control device 113. It is also possible to adopt a configuration of executing the above.

Alternatively, when the ejection card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 performs a process according to the input information or signal, and the display control device 114 causes the privilege card CA. , CA' can be discharged or effect display as a privilege can be performed.

In the second and third embodiments, the transfer motor 1451c and the mounting solenoid 1304 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and are driven and controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least one configuration may be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and driven and controlled by the control device of the connection destination.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first transfer motor 1451xc, the second transfer motor 1457xa, the discharge motor 1456xd, the fixing solenoid 1456xf, and the mounting solenoid 1304 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113. However, at least one of these configurations may be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and driven and controlled by the control device of the connection destination. ..

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, for one section formed in the card information area 1602x of the privilege card CA′, there are three types of information of “design number”, “additional effect” information, and “level” information. Although the card information, which is a combination of information, is associated with each other, these three types of information may be associated with one section without being combined.

In addition, the information associated with one section is not limited to the three types of information ("symbol number" information, "additional effect" information, and "level" information) exemplified in the fourth embodiment. Two types of information or four or more types of information may be associated with one section.

Further, the information used as the card information is not limited to the three types (the information of the “design number”, the information of the “additional effect”, and the information of the “level”) exemplified in the fourth embodiment, and other information may be used. It may be. For example, it may be information that defines the grant probability.

In the fourth embodiment, the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, but it may be divided into one area or three or more areas.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the card information area 1602x of the two privilege cards CA′ overlapping by the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x is collectively read by the discharging card reader 1453, but three cards are used. The card information area 1602x of the above privilege card CA′ may be collectively read.

Further, the privilege card CA of the second and third embodiments may be stored in the storage member 1450xa of the card ejection device 1450x of the fourth embodiment, and the same control as that of the fourth embodiment may be performed.

Further, in the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, as the selection probability for selecting either the ejection card A memory 223xa or the ejection card B memory 223xb, (ejection card A It is configured to calculate from the difference “n” between the value of the level included in the memory 223xa) and the value of the level included in the ejection card B memory 223xb, and the range “N” of the suggestive effect counter 223xm.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, since the number of privilege cards CA′ to be read collectively is two, the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is “((N/2)+n”. )/N” and the selection probability of the suggestion counter 223xm for selecting the discharge card B memory 223xb is “((N/2)−n)/N”, but the number of privilege cards CA′ to be read collectively is 3 In the case of more than one sheet, the range of the suggestive effect counter 223xm may be distributed according to the level included in the reading result.

Alternatively, the selection probability set for the card information of the higher level (that is, the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa) and the card information of the lower level (that is, the ejection card B memory 223xb The selection probability set for the stored card information) may be a uniform value irrelevant to the level difference. For example, the selection probability for the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa may be set to 2/3, and the selection probability for the card information stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb may be set to 1/3. When both the card information stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa and the card information stored in the ejected card B memory 223xb are at the same level, the selection probability is halved.

Further, as long as it is a medium capable of reading a plurality of card information, it is not limited to the privilege card CA′ having the light-transmitting card information area 1602x exemplified in the fourth embodiment, and other mediums can be used. For example, a plurality of privilege coins C illustrated in the first embodiment may be made to stand by in the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450, and the card information may be read by the payout IC tag reader 501.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x, after the card information for the two privilege cards CA′ that overlap is read by the discharging card reader 1453, and the granting condition is satisfied, It is configured to transfer one sheet on the bottom side to the discharge position.

Instead, in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, after reading the card information of the two privilege cards CA' that overlap each other by the discharge card reader 1453, before transferring the discharge position to the bottom one May be transferred to a position corresponding to the confirmation position in the second and third embodiments described above. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the card information of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time at the confirmation position. By independently confirming the card information of the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time, the discharge probability of the privilege card CA′ can be changed according to the content, for example, as in the second and third embodiments. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, in the card ejection device 1450x, by transferring the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb, two card privileges for reading the card information by the ejection card reader 1453. The card CA′ is configured to be separated from other privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage member 1450xa.

The configuration for separating the two privilege cards CA' for reading the card information by the ejection card reader 1453 from other privilege cards CA' is not limited to the configuration exemplified in the fourth embodiment.

For example, with the blocking member 2001 of the seventh embodiment, the privilege card CA' (the lowest and second privilege card CA' from the bottom in FIG. 86(a)) which is given to the next time and the next time, and the third from the bottom. The two privilege cards CA′ for reading the card information may be separated from the other (remaining) privilege cards CA′ by inserting the privilege card CA′ from the other privilege card CA′.

Alternatively, by using the card ejecting device 1450 of the second and third embodiments, two privilege cards CA' (next lowest and second privilege card in FIG. 86(a)) to be given next time and next time. CA') is provided with a push-out mechanism for pushing out toward the discharge outlet 1451a side, and the push-out mechanism pushes out the two privilege cards CA' to the confirmation position and separates them from other privilege cards CA'. The card information may be read by the discharge card reader 1453 with the back surface 1601b of the second privilege card CA' as the background.

In addition, to obtain a gaming machine in which the characteristic configurations of the pachinko machines 10, 10A, and 10B illustrated in the above embodiments, and the characteristic configurations included in the first to fourteenth embodiments are combined as necessary. Is of course possible.

For example, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a characteristic configuration of (A) suggesting or notifying the information of the special value medium (privilege coin C) to be paid out next time when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 10B of the third embodiment is characterized in that (B) the granting condition of the privilege card CA discharged next time is changed according to the information of the privilege card CA discharged next time. Although it has a configuration, it is naturally possible to obtain a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having the characteristic configurations (A) and (B) from these embodiments.

The present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to a pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. It is also possible to carry out. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and winning a ball in the special area as a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray.

In the following, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described various embodiments will be shown.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and pays out the game medium as a game value when the game state of the game satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game state satisfies a predetermined special value giving condition. And a special value giving means for giving a special value different from the game value, and a value judging means for judging the kind of the special value for the special value given at least next time by the special value giving means. , A value presenting means for suggesting or notifying the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means based on the judgment by the value judging means when the game state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition A gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, in the game using the game medium, when the game state satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out as a game value, while the game state satisfies a predetermined special value giving condition. Then, a special value different from the game value is given by the special value giving means.

Here, for at least the next time the special value is given by the special value giving means, the type of the special value is judged by the value judging means, and based on the judgment, when the gaming state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition. The type of special value to be given next time by the special value giving means is suggested or notified by the value presenting means.

Therefore, when a certain game state (a game state satisfying the suggestion condition) is reached, the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, so that the player can obtain the special value before the special value is acquired. You can continue playing with the expectation that you may win.

In particular, if the type of special value to be added next time, which is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, is one that the player desires to acquire, the player is waiting for the acquisition of the special value. You can continue playing while playing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A1, since the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, a new gaming property is created, which becomes a new added value, and the game is added. Allows the player to retain interest for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine A1, the "suggestion condition" that triggers the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next is the same condition as the "special value grant condition" that triggers the grant of the special value. May be different conditions. Further, in the gaming machine A1, the form of the special value given by the special value giving means may be a tangible form such as a medium or an intangible form such as data.

In the above embodiment, the special value giving means in the gaming machine A1 corresponds to the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22) in S2404 and the coin payout process (see FIG. 27). In the above embodiment, the payout coin detecting process (see FIG. 29) corresponds to the value determining means in the gaming machine A1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the value presenting means in the gaming machine A1, the process of S2405 of the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22), the process of S2504 of the complete miss count process (see FIG. 23), and the variation effect setting process ( The process of S2605 of FIG. 24), the process of S2707 of the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25), and the processes of S2804 and S2807 of the disengagement stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26) are applicable.

In the gaming machine A1, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display using identification information, a passage detecting unit provided at a predetermined position for detecting passage of a game medium, and the game medium by the passage detecting unit. And a dynamic display start means for starting dynamic display using the identification information on the display device based on the detection of the detection condition of the game medium by the passage detection means. Gaming machine A2 which is a condition based on.

According to the gaming machine A2, when the game medium that has passed through the predetermined location is detected by the passage detecting means, the dynamic display starting means starts the dynamic display using the identification information on the display device. At this time, the condition based on the detection of the game medium by the passage detecting unit is set as the suggesting condition that triggers the suggestion or notification by the value presenting unit. Therefore, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time will be performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device.

By the way, in the conventional general game machine, the dynamic display (variable display) of the identification information on the display device is started on the condition that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location as a starting condition, and the identification information is predetermined. There is a case where an advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs when the combination is stopped and displayed. However, according to the gaming machine A2, the display device gives a suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time. Since it is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information that is performed, not only the player who visually recognizes the dynamic display has an expectation about the outcome of the stop display similar to the conventional general gaming machine, It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a special value may be acquired, which is not possible with conventional general game machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, the suggestion or notification of the type of the special value to be given next time is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device, and thus The variation (variation) of the amusement property is richer than that of a general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to keep the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A2. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the passage detecting means in the game machine A2 corresponds to the first entrance opening switch provided in the first entrance 64. Further, in the above embodiment, the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A2 corresponds to the variable display start process (see FIG. 14) and the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21) in S2308.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a passage detecting means provided at a predetermined position for detecting passage of the game medium, and a player from the normal state based on the fact that the game medium is detected by the passage detecting means. A profit lottery means for lottery whether or not to generate an advantageous state advantageous to the gaming machine A3, which is a condition based on at least one lottery result performed by the profit lottery means.

According to the gaming machine A3, whether or not the advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is generated based on the fact that the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location. The lottery is carried out by the profit lottery means. At this time, the condition based on the result of the lottery performed at least once by the profit lottery means is the suggestion condition that triggers the suggestion by the value presenting means or the notification.

Therefore, since the kind of special value to be given next time will be suggested or notified according to the lottery result, it will be given next time to the game performance by the lottery provided by the conventional general gaming machine. A new game property is added by suggesting or informing the type of special value that is given, and as a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Generally, when a result of not generating an advantageous state is frequently obtained (for example, a predetermined number of consecutive times or a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period), the player tends to lose interest in the game. .. Here, for example, by setting as a suggestion condition that the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more, the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at the predetermined frequency or more and the interest of the game is obtained. Even if the player loses interest in the game, by suggesting or notifying the type of special value to be given next time, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of special value. Can be maintained.

Alternatively, by setting that the result of generating the advantageous state is obtained as the suggestion condition, the special value is suggested or informed at the same time as the occurrence of the advantageous state, whereby a conventional general gaming machine is provided. A new game playability is added to the game playability provided by the lottery, the interest of the game is improved, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a long time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first ball entrance switch provided in the first ball entrance 64 corresponds to the passage detecting means in the gaming machine A3. Further, in the above embodiment, the starting winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A3.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A3 is provided with a passage detecting unit which is provided at a predetermined position and detects passage of the game medium, and is usually based on the fact that the passage detecting unit detects the game medium. Providing profit lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the suggestion condition is that the result of not generating the advantageous state by the profit lottery means is obtained a predetermined number of times in a row Gaming machine A4 which is a condition satisfied with.

According to the gaming machine A4, when the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location, based on the detection, an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. The lottery is performed by the profit lottery means. At this time, the presenting means is configured as a condition that is satisfied when the profit lottery means continuously obtains the result of not generating the advantageous state a predetermined number of times.

Generally, a player tends to lose interest in a game when a state in which an advantageous state does not occur continues. However, according to the gaming machine A4, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the advantageous state is not generated in the lottery by the profit lottery means for a predetermined number of times in succession, and as a result, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is given. As a result, the range of game playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the passage detecting means in the game machine A4 corresponds to the first entrance opening switch provided in the first entrance 64. Further, in the above embodiment, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A4.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using the identification information, and a dynamic selection mode of the dynamic display using the identification information displayed by the display device The dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode selection means, the passage detection means provided at a predetermined location for detecting the passage of the game medium, and the game medium being detected by the passage detection means. Dynamic display starting means for starting the dynamic display of the mode set by the selecting means, and following the dynamic display started by the dynamic display starting means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination. And an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, wherein the value presenting means is provided with a special value next by the special value providing means after the suggestion condition is satisfied. In the meantime, when the mode for denying the generation of the advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means, the special value given next time by the special value giving means A combination of the identification information that includes identification information corresponding to the type and is configured as a specific combination different from the combination that causes the advantageous state generation means to generate the advantageous state on the display device. A game machine A5 that suggests or informs the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A5, when the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location, the dynamic display starting means dynamically uses the identification information based on the detection. The display is started on the display device. At this time, the dynamic display started by the dynamic display start means is the dynamic display of the set mode set by the dynamic display mode selection means. After that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the advantageous state generating means generates an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

When the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value presenting means suggests or informs the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means. Here, according to the gaming machine A5, a mode in which the generation of the advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means is denied is performed between the satisfaction of the suggestion condition and the next addition of the special value by the special value provision means. When selected by the special display mode selecting means, at that time, a combination including identification information corresponding to the type of special value to be added next by the special value adding means, and generating an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating means. The combination of identification information configured as a different specific combination is stopped and displayed on the display device, whereby the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the special value giving means.

In general, the dynamic display of the mode in which the occurrence of the advantageous state is denied cannot be expected to occur in the advantageous state. Therefore, if the dynamic display of such a mode continues, the player tends to lose interest in the game. It is in. However, according to the gaming machine A5, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, until the special value is given next by the special value giving means, the stop display is displayed next to the dynamic display of the mode in which the occurrence of the advantageous state is denied Since the type of special value to be given is suggested or notified, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, the interest in the game is extended over a long period of time. It allows people to maintain.

In addition, as a stop display for indicating or notifying the type of special value to be given next time, it is not a combination for generating an advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means, Since a specific combination including the corresponding identification information is displayed, the appearance of a specific stop indication can make the player expect to acquire a special value. Allows the player to maintain over.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A5. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first ball entrance switch provided in the first ball entrance 64 corresponds to the passage detecting means in the gaming machine A5. Further, in the above embodiment, as the dynamic display mode selection means in the gaming machine A5, the variation start process (see FIG. 14) and the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 23) correspond. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S2308 of the decorative symbol variable display processing (see FIG. 21) corresponds to the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A5.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the special value giving means gives the next time. And a setting means for setting a dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value, the value presenting means, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode set by the setting means. A gaming machine A6 that dynamically indicates on the display device to suggest or inform the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A6, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value presenting means sets the setting means to set the dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means. The value presenting means suggests or reports the type of special value to be given next time by the special value giving means. Here, according to the gaming machine A6, by dynamically displaying the dynamic display mode set by the setting means on the display device, the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the special value giving means. It

Therefore, since the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is performed using the dynamic display, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general gaming machine, and as a result, the game is played. It enables the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A6. Further, in the above embodiment, the setting means in the gaming machine A6 corresponds to the processing of S2605 in the variation effect setting processing (see FIG. 23).

In the gaming machine A6, when the display device dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined combination and then stops, the game machine A6 is provided with an advantageous state generation unit that generates an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the combination of the identification information including the identification information corresponding to the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means and causing the advantageous state to be generated by the advantageous state generating means, the setting means A gaming machine A7 in which an expected mode in which a part of the game is stopped during the dynamic display is set as a dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, the dynamic display mode set by the setting means as the dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means is an expected mode in which an advantageous state is expected to occur. Since it is configured by, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the special value assigned by the special value assigning means is a gaming machine A8 configured in the form of a second medium having the special value.

According to the gaming machine A8, since the special value provided by the special value providing means is configured in the form of the second medium having the special value, the special value can be easily handled. In the above embodiment, the bonus coin C corresponds to the second medium in the gaming machine A8.

In the gaming machine A8, a storage unit that stores the plurality of second media regardless of the type of special value of each second medium, and a standby unit that is separated from the storage unit and waits for the second medium. The special value imparting means includes a transfer means for transferring the second medium stored in the storage means from the storage means to the standby means, and the second means transferred by the transfer means to the standby means. A gaming machine A9 configured to include a payout executing means for paying out a medium, wherein the value determining means determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means.

According to the gaming machine A9, the second medium having the special value is stored in the storage means, and from the storage means to the standby means separated from the storage means, the transfer means (one of the special value adding means). Department). The second medium transferred to the standby means is kept on standby by the standby means until it is paid out by the payout execution means (a part of the special value giving means). Then, the value discriminating unit discriminates the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby unit.

Here, the storage means stores a plurality of (a plurality of, a plurality of) second media irrespective of the type of special value of each second medium, and therefore an administrator who manages the second media (For example, a manager of a hall in which a gaming machine that can dispense the second medium is installed), when the plurality of second mediums are put into the storing means and stored, each second medium is classified as a special value type. It is not necessary to sort according to the above, and the load on the management of the second medium can be suppressed.

Further, since the standby unit is provided at a position separated from the storage unit, it is possible to prevent the type of special value from being discriminated by the value discriminating unit with respect to the second medium stored in the storage unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to surely determine the special value of the second medium to be paid out at least next time while waiting by the waiting means, and to definitely indicate the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time after the condition for suggesting is satisfied. Or, it can be notified.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 460 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine A9. In the above embodiment, the standby member 470 corresponds to the standby means in the gaming machine A9. Further, in the above embodiment, the transfer means in the gaming machine A9 corresponds to the branch process to Yes in S2908 in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) and the processes in S2909 to S2913. Further, in the above embodiment, the payout executing means in the gaming machine A9 corresponds to the branch process to Yes in S2901 in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) and the processes in S2902 to S2907.

In the gaming machine A9, the standby means is a configuration in which the one second medium is in a standby state.

According to the gaming machine A10, since the standby means is configured to wait for the second medium, the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated by the value discriminating means. The special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with a wireless reading unit that reads information by wireless communication using a transmission medium, and the second medium is configured to include a storage unit that stores information as a special value of the second medium. The value discriminating means reads the information as the special value stored in the storage means of the second medium located in the standby means by the wireless reading means, and based on the read information as the special value. The type of special value possessed by the second medium located in the standby means, and the storage means is made of a material that prevents transmission of the transmission medium to the second medium stored therein. A gaming machine A11 configured.

According to the gaming machine A11, the special value type is discriminated by the value discriminating means, and for the second medium located in the standby means, the information as the special value stored in the storage means of the second medium is transmitted as the transmission medium. Is read by a wireless reading means by wireless communication using, and is performed based on the read information.

Here, since the storage means is made of a material that prevents the transmission medium from being transmitted to the second medium stored therein, the determination of the type of the special value by the value determination means is performed by the storage means. It is possible to effectively prevent the operation from being performed on the second medium stored in.

Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the wireless reading means in the gaming machine A11. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag 602 (more specifically, a non-rewritable memory that can store information provided in the IC tag 602 in a nonvolatile manner) is used as a storage unit in the gaming machine A11. Applicable

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with an optical detecting means for optically detecting the information that the object has, and the second medium is information corresponding to the information as the special value that the second medium has and the optical information. The media discriminator, the media discriminator including the medium information, which is information that can be physically detected, and the value discriminating unit detects the medium information of the second medium located in the standby unit by the optical detecting unit and is detected. A gaming machine A12 that determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means based on the medium information.

According to the gaming machine A12, the special value type is discriminated by the value discriminating means by detecting the medium information of the second medium located in the standby means by an optical detecting means (for example, an optical sensor or a bar code reader). Then, it is performed based on the detected medium information. Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with a shape recognition means for recognizing the shape of the object, and the second medium is configured to have a shape corresponding to information as a special value of the second medium. The value determining means recognizes the shape of the second medium located in the standby means by the shape recognizing means, and determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means based on the recognized shape. Playing machine A13.

According to the gaming machine A13, the type of the special value is discriminated by the value discriminating means by determining the shape of the second medium located in the standby means by using the shape recognizing means (for example, the shape obtained by using the imaged data (image) of the object). It is performed based on the recognized shape recognized by the recognition device or the like). Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

In the gaming machine A8, a plurality of storage means for storing the second medium for each type of special value of the second medium are provided, and the special value giving means selects the second from the plurality of storage means. The value discriminating means is provided with a selecting means for selecting one storage means for paying out the medium, and a payout executing means for paying out the second medium stored in the storage means selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine A14 that determines the type of the special value before being given by the special value giving means, based on the selection of the storage means by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine A14, a plurality of storage means are provided for each type of special value possessed by the second medium, and one storage medium corresponding to the second medium paid out by the selection means (a part of the special value giving means) is provided. The storage means is selected, and the second medium stored in the selected storage means is dispensed by the dispensing execution means.

Here, the type of special value is discriminated by the value discriminating unit based on the selection of the storage unit by the selecting unit. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time, without requiring a unit for detecting the identification information of each second medium.

In any of the gaming machines A8 to A14, the value of detecting the special value of the second medium with respect to the medium arranging means capable of removably arranging the second medium and the second medium arranged in the arranging means. A gaming machine A15 provided with a detecting means and a special effect executing means for performing a special effect according to the special value of the second medium detected by the value detecting means during a game using the game medium.

According to the gaming machine A15, a medium arranging unit capable of removably arranging the second medium is provided, and with respect to the second medium arranged in the medium arranging unit, the special value possessed by the second medium is the value detecting unit. The special effect corresponding to the detected special value is performed by the special effect executing means during the game using the game medium.

Therefore, the player can have a high interest in the game due to the new playability that can be experienced by using the second medium. Not only that, the interest of the player is also directed toward obtaining the second medium in which a new playability can be experienced, and in that respect, the playability is improved. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving portion 300a) corresponds to the medium mounting means in the gaming machine A15. Further, in the above embodiment, the receiving IC tag reader 302 corresponds to the value detecting means in the gaming machine A15. Further, in the above embodiment, as special effect executing means in the gaming machine A15, the receiving section coin detection processing (see FIG. 30), the variation effect setting processing (see FIG. 24) in S2607, and the stop symbol setting processing (see FIG. The processing of S2704 in (see 25) is applicable.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A15, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means for storing a plurality of the special value media, and a special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means. When the value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time and the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time are detected by the value content detecting means In addition, the game machine B1 is provided with confusion prevention means for preventing confusion with the contents of the special value of the other special value medium stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, as for the special value medium, among the plurality of special value media stored in the storage unit, the content of the special value of one special value medium to be provided next time by the special value medium providing unit is obtained by the value content detecting unit. To be detected.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the detected special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium. You can Alternatively, before giving the special value medium, by suggesting the detected special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be given next time) to the player according to the content of the detected special value. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B1, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, the detected content can be used to add value to the game. .. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, according to the gaming machine B1, when the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the one special value medium given next time, another special value medium stored in the storing means Confusion with the content of the special value possessed is prevented by the confusion prevention means.

Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the content of the special value possessed by the one special value medium given next time by the value content detecting means, the special value possessed by the other special value medium stored in the storing means. It is possible to prevent the contents of the item from being confused and detected. In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22) corresponds to the special value medium giving means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 or the like corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B1. Further, in the above embodiment, the privilege coin payout device 450 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B1. In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the confusion preventing means in the gaming machine B1, the configuration and operation of the privilege card discharging device 1450 shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and S4205 to S4207, S4212 in the card discharging process (see FIG. 49). This corresponds to the process of S4215. Further, in the above embodiment, as the transfer means in the gaming machine B1, the configuration and operation of the privilege coin payout device 450 shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 and the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) are performed. Applicable As the confusion prevention means in the gaming machine B1, for example, the configuration and arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, CA2 shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 66, and the blocking member 2001 (see FIG. 65(a)). Also, a blocking member 2002 (see FIG. 65(b)) is included.

In the gaming machine B1, the confusion prevention means adds one special value medium to the other special value medium next time so that the value content detecting means cannot detect the special value content of the other special value medium. A game machine B2, characterized in that the game machine B2 is configured to include a blocking means inserted between the value medium and the value medium.

According to the gaming machine B2, a blocking means (a part of confusion prevention means) is provided between one special value medium given next time by the special value medium giving means and another special value medium stored in the storage means. By being inserted, the special value content of another special value medium is configured so that it cannot be detected by the value content detecting means. Therefore, the special value content of one special value medium assigned next time is It can be suitably detected.

The blocking means in the gaming machine B2 includes, for example, a blocking member 2001 (see FIG. 65(a)) and a blocking member 2002 (see FIG. 65(b)).

In the gaming machine B1, the storage means has an initial position in which the plurality of special value mediums are stored, and a confirmation position provided apart from the initial position, and the confusion prevention means is Of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position in the storage means, a transfer means for transferring one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium adding means from the initial position to the confirmation position. B3, wherein the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the special value medium located at the confirmation position.

According to the gaming machine B3, a plurality of special value media are stored at the initial position in the storage means, and the special value medium providing means next gives the special value medium among the plurality of special value media located at the initial position. The one special value medium to be transferred is transferred by the transfer means (a part of the confusion prevention means) to the confirmation position provided in the storage means so as to be separated from the initial position, and is applied next at the confirmation position. The content of the special value of one special value medium is detected by the value content detecting means.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored, for example, the special value medium is given next time. Even if the special value content of a special value medium is detected using a transmission medium such as an electromagnetic wave, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to confusion with the special value content of another special value medium. It is possible.

By the way, for example, when a light transmissive area is provided in a predetermined area of each special value medium and a pattern indicating the content of the special value is formed in the light transmissive area, the light transmissive area in which the pattern is formed is If the light transmissive areas of each special value medium are adjacent to each other at the position, even if an attempt is made to detect the pattern of the light transmissive areas at the initial position, it will be detected as a pattern in which the special values of adjacent special value media are mixed. As a result, it becomes difficult to detect only the contents of the special value possessed by the one special value medium added next time.

Such a problem is that each special value medium is arranged (lever arrangement) so that the light transmissive areas of the adjacent special value media are on alternate sides, and the pattern of the light transmissive areas located on each side can be detected respectively. It is possible to solve the problem by arranging various detecting means at two places, but a plurality of detecting means (two places in this case) are required, which increases the manufacturing cost and one of the two detecting means. The control for detecting the pattern of the light transmissive region also becomes complicated. Furthermore, the administrator who manages the special value medium (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine to which the special value medium can be added) or the manufacturer of the special value medium is stored in the storage means. In addition, it is necessary to rearrange the directions of the special value media so that the special value media are in the lever arrangement, and the handling of the special value media is heavy.

However, according to the gaming machine B3, the content of the special value of one special value medium given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Even if the special-value mediums are not arranged in a lever shape, it is possible to create a state in which the light-transmissive areas of the special-value mediums to be given next do not overlap the light-transmissive areas of the adjacent special-value mediums. Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be detected by the one detecting unit, and the load on the handling of the special value medium can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the gaming machine B3, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Therefore, it is possible to preferably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the above embodiment, the transfer means in the gaming machine B3 corresponds to the processing of S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) corresponds to the transfer means in the gaming machine B3.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means having an initial position where a plurality of the special value media are stored, and a confirmation position provided apart from the initial position; Of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position, a transfer unit that transfers one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium adding unit from the initial position to the confirmation position, and A game machine B4 provided with a value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the positioned special value medium.

According to the gaming machine B4, in the game using the game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, a plurality of special value media are stored at the initial position in the storage means, and one of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position is given next by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium is transferred by the transfer means to a confirmation position provided in the storage means so as to be separated from the initial position, and at the confirmation position, the contents of the special value of one special value medium given next time It is detected by the value content detecting means.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the detected special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium. You can Alternatively, before giving the special value medium, by suggesting the detected special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be given next time) to the player according to the content of the detected special value. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B4, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. .. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. For example, even when the special value content of the special value medium to be given next time is detected using a transmission medium such as an electromagnetic wave, it is confused with the special value content of another special value medium. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to.

By the way, for example, when a light transmissive area is provided in a predetermined area of each special value medium and a pattern indicating the content of the special value is formed in the light transmissive area, the light transmissive area in which the pattern is formed is If the light transmissive areas of each special value medium are adjacent to each other at the position, even if an attempt is made to detect the pattern of the light transmissive areas at the initial position, it will be detected as a pattern in which the special values of adjacent special value media are mixed. As a result, it becomes difficult to detect only the contents of the special value possessed by the one special value medium added next time.

Such a problem is that each special value medium is arranged (lever arrangement) so that the light transmissive areas of the adjacent special value media are on alternate sides, and the pattern of the light transmissive areas located on each side can be detected respectively. It is possible to solve the problem by arranging various detecting means at two places, but a plurality of detecting means (two places in this case) are required, which increases the manufacturing cost and one of the two detecting means. The control for detecting the pattern of the light transmissive region also becomes complicated. Furthermore, the administrator who manages the special value medium (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine to which the special value medium can be added) or the manufacturer of the special value medium is stored in the storage means. In addition, it is necessary to rearrange the directions of the special value media so that the special value media are in the lever arrangement, and the handling of the special value media is heavy.

However, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Even if the special-value mediums are not arranged in a lever shape, it is possible to create a state in which the light-transmissive areas of the special-value mediums to be given next do not overlap the light-transmissive areas of the adjacent special-value mediums. Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be detected by the one detecting unit, and the load on the handling of the special value medium can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Therefore, it is possible to preferably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B4, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the special value medium adding means in the gaming machine B4 corresponds to the process of S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B4. Further, in the above embodiment, the privilege coin payout device 450 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B4.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the transfer means in the gaming machine B4, the processes of S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) corresponds to the transfer means in the gaming machine B4.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B4. In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B4.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the special value medium is a medium having a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value, The value content detecting means is configured to be able to read the pattern, and on the opposite side of the light transmissive region of the special value medium located at the confirmation position from the value content detecting means, a reading assistance surface. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B5, the special value medium has a light non-transmissive region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value. By reading the pattern formed in the area by the value content detecting means, the content of the special value is detected.

Here, since the reading auxiliary surface is arranged on the side opposite to the value content detecting means of the light transmissive area in the special value medium located at the confirmation position, the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is detected as the value content detection. When reading by a means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

It should be noted that the reading assisting surface may be a groundless surface or the like. Here, when the reading assistance surface is configured as a groundless surface, it is preferable that the color is a groundless surface that does not hinder the reading of the pattern. For example, when the color of the pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or dark blue), the reading assistance surface has a white or light color (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue). It is preferable to use the groundless surface as the reading assistance surface. Alternatively, when the color of the pattern is white or a light color, it is preferable that the read assisting surface is black or dark groundless ground.

In the gaming machine B5, one surface of the light opaque area of the special value medium is configured as the reading assistance surface, and the reading assistance surface of the plurality of special value media stored at the initial position is the value. A gaming machine B6, wherein the gaming machine B6 is superposed so as to face the content detecting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, the plurality of special value mediums stored in the initial position are superposed with the reading auxiliary surface, which is a light opaque area, facing toward the value content detecting means (overlapped). Exist). Therefore, the reading assistance surface of the special value medium located at the initial position is provided on the side opposite to the value content detecting means of the light transmissive region of the special value medium located at the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium to be added next time). Can be located.

Therefore, when reading the pattern formed in the light transmissive region by the value content detecting means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, one surface of the light opaque region of the special value medium is configured as the reading auxiliary surface, and the plurality of special value media stored in the initial position have the reading auxiliary surface. The special value medium is overlapped so as to face the value content detecting means, and the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position is a direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive region. And a length shorter than a length in a direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light non-transmission region on the confirmation position side of the light transmission region. B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, the plurality of special value mediums stored in the initial position are superposed with the reading assisting surface, which is a light opaque area, facing the value content detecting means. Further, the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position of the special value medium is longer than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive region, and the light opaque region on the confirmation position side of the light transmissive region. Is shorter than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position.

Therefore, when the special value medium to be added next time is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position, the value content of the light transmissive region in the special value medium located at the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium to be added next time) On the opposite side to the detecting means, the reading assistance surface of the special value medium located at the initial position is located.

Therefore, when reading the pattern formed in the light transmissive region by the value content detecting means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

Further, since the light opaque area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as the background when the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is read by the value content detecting means, the space between the initial position and the confirmation position is The distance can be suppressed to a relatively short distance. As a result, the entire device for applying the special value medium can be configured in a space-saving manner.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the light transmissive region is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the special value medium.

According to the gaming machine B8, the light transmissive region in the special value medium is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the special value medium, so that the light non-transmissive region can be widened. Therefore, when the light opaque area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as a background when the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is read by the value content detecting means, the light of the adjacent special value medium is used. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value content of one special value medium to be added next time because the transparent areas overlap each other.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, arrangement means capable of arranging the plurality of special value media, and pattern reading means for reading a pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means And a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display is selected based on the pattern read by the pattern reading means. A gaming machine B9, comprising: a display mode selection means.

According to the gaming machine B9, when the pattern of the light transmissive area in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means, it is displayed on the display device based on the read pattern. The display mode of the static display and/or the stop display is selected by the display selection means.

Therefore, by arranging a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player dynamically displays and/or stops the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed on the display device. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B9. Further, in the above embodiment, the card reader 1303 for receiving part corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B9. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B9. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B9, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In the gaming machine B9, the display mode selection means sets one dynamic display and/or one to one set of a combination of predetermined special value media among the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Alternatively, the game machine B10 is characterized in that a display mode of the stop display is selected.

According to the gaming machine B10, if there is one set consisting of a combination of predetermined special value media among the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means, one dynamic display and The display mode of the stop display is set by the display mode selection means.

Therefore, by combining a plurality of special value media, one display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display can be made to appear as a privilege, so in a game in which the special value medium is provided by the establishment of the special value providing condition. , It is possible to add value to the acquisition of a plurality of special value media. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a long time.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, an installation means capable of disposing one or more special value media, and a pattern of the light transmissive region in the one special value medium arranged in the disposition means, or Pattern reading means for reading a pattern formed by a combination of patterns of the light transmissive regions in the plurality of special value media, and analysis means for analyzing the contents of the game value included in the pattern read by the pattern reading means And a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the contents of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means. A gaming machine B11 provided with a display mode selection means for selecting.

According to the gaming machine B11, when one or a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one special value medium arranged in the arranging means, or a plurality of special values are arranged. The pattern formed by the combination of the patterns of the light transmissive regions on the medium is read by the pattern reading means, and the content of the game value contained in the read pattern is analyzed by the analyzing means. Then, the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selecting means based on the content of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means.

Therefore, by arranging the special value medium acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player displays on the display device a dynamic display and/or a stop display of a display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game.

In particular, when a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement means, after the contents of the game value included in the pattern formed by the combination of the patterns of the light transmissive regions in the plurality of special value media are analyzed. The display selection means selects the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device.

Therefore, it is possible to display the dynamic display and/or the stop display in the display mode on the display device according to the number of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Therefore, the player's interest is also directed toward obtaining a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading unit in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the analyzing means in the gaming machine B11 corresponds to the processing of S3605 to S3612 in the receiving card reading processing (see FIG. 54).

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B11, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In any of the gaming machines B9 to B11, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern irrespective of the content of the game value, and the special value medium. The common pattern formed in the light transmissive region is formed at a position where the reading result by the pattern reading unit differs depending on which side of the special value medium faces the pattern reading unit. A gaming machine B12 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B12, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern regardless of the content of the game value, and the common pattern is used by the pattern reading means. On the other hand, the reading result by the pattern reading means is formed at different positions depending on which side of the special value medium is turned.

Therefore, it is possible to clearly determine the side of the special value medium that should be properly oriented with respect to the pattern reading unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a result different from the result that should be originally produced from occurring by arranging the face opposite to the face to be legally directed to the pattern reading means, and it is possible to maintain fairness of each player. ..

In any of the gaming machines B9 to B12, the arranging means has a slot for inserting one or a plurality of the special value media, and the special value that has been inserted after the special value medium has been inserted into the slot. In order to arrange the media in alignment, there is provided an alignment means for pressing the special value media loaded into the input port from one surface side, and the alignment means corresponds to a pattern reading part in the pattern reading means. The pressing surface is provided at a position to press the special-value medium, and the pressing surface is configured to have a size to cover at least a pattern reading portion of the pattern reading unit and to read the pattern. A gaming machine B13, characterized in that a region covering the portion is configured as at least a reading assistance surface.

According to the gaming machine B13, after one or a plurality of special value media are loaded into the loading slot, the special value media loaded into the loading slot are pressed from one side by the aligning means, whereby the special value medium is loaded. It is arranged in an aligned state. At this time, the special value medium is aligned by the aligning means by pressing by the pressing surface provided at the position corresponding to the pattern reading portion in the pattern reading means.

Here, since the pressing surface is configured to have a size that covers at least the pattern reading portion of the pattern reading means, and the region that covers the pattern reading portion is configured at least as a reading assistance surface, the pressing surface is disposed in the arranging means. Further, it is possible to reliably read the pattern of the light transmissive region in one or more special value media, and to display the dynamic display and/or the stop display of the display mode according to the read pattern on the display device. ..

In the above embodiment, the opening of the holder portion 1302a corresponds to the insertion port of the gaming machine B13. Further, in the above embodiment, the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305 correspond to the aligning means in the gaming machine B13.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B13, the special value medium giving means exposes the special value medium located at the confirmation position to the outside of the gaming machine by the transferring means. A gaming machine B14, wherein the special value medium is added by transferring the special value medium to a predetermined discharge position.

According to the gaming machine B14, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to the predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, Since it can be realized by the common transfer means, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B13, the transfer means includes one drive means (for example, a transfer motor 1451c) for moving the position of the special value medium, and the initial position of the special game value medium by the drive means. The first transfer of the special value medium from the to the confirmation position is performed to a position where the special value medium is not exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, and after the transfer of 1, the driving means is used. The game machine B15, wherein the second transfer of the special value medium is performed to a predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B15, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to the predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the game machine, Since it can be realized by one driving means, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost. Further, since the special value medium located at the initial position can be transferred to the confirmation position and the discharge position by one driving means, the special value medium is transferred from the initial position to the discharge position via the confirmation position. It is possible to prevent the mechanism from becoming complicated.

In a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a light opaque area and a light transmissive area are provided when a predetermined special value addition condition is satisfied. And a special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium giving means. Arrangement means capable of arranging a plurality of special value media, pattern reading means for reading a pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, dynamic display using identification information, and A display device capable of displaying a stop display, and a display mode selecting means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the pattern detected by the pattern reading means. Characteristic game machine B16.

According to the gaming machine B16, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value.

Here, when a plurality of special value mediums are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means, and the read pattern is formed. Based on this, the display selecting means selects the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device.

Therefore, by arranging a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player dynamically displays and/or stops the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed on the display device. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B16, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B16. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading unit in the gaming machine B16. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B16. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B16, S2623 in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a light opaque area and a light transmissive area are provided when a predetermined special value addition condition is satisfied. And a special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium giving means. Arrangement means capable of arranging one or more special value media, pattern reading means for reading the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or more special value media arranged in the arrangement means, and identification information are used. A display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display, analysis means for analyzing the contents of the game value included in the pattern detected by the pattern reading means, and contents of the game value analyzed by the analysis means And a display mode selection means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B17, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value.

Here, when one or a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or a plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means and read. The content of the game value included in the created pattern is analyzed by the analysis means. Then, the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selecting means based on the content of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means.

Therefore, by arranging the special value medium acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player displays on the display device a dynamic display and/or a stop display of the display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B17, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above embodiment, the card reader 1303 for receiving part corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the analyzing means in the gaming machine B17 corresponds to the processing of S3605 to S3612 in the receiving card reading processing (see FIG. 54).

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B17, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

Any of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine B19 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine B20 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the special value medium given next by the special value medium giving means, and value content detecting means The game machine C1 is provided with condition changing means for changing the special value giving condition for the special value medium to be given next time in accordance with the content of the special value detected by.

According to the gaming machine C1, in the game using the game medium, when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out as the game value, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value is different from the game value. The special value is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time is detected by the value content detecting means, and the special value giving condition for the special value medium to be given next time is detected by the condition changing means. It is changed according to the content of the special value detected by the means.

Therefore, since the frequency of giving the special value medium changes according to the content of the special value, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine C1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 61) and the step S4406 in the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) are performed. The processing of S4410 and the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49) correspond to this.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine C1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the condition changing means in the gaming machine C1, the processing of S4104 and S4107 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 61), the step S4404 in the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62), The process of S4407 corresponds to this.

In the gaming machine C1, the condition changing means changes the degree of difficulty of establishing the special value giving condition according to the content of the special value.

According to the gaming machine C2, the condition changing means changes the degree of difficulty of establishing the special value giving condition in accordance with the content of the special value, so that the player changes the content of the special value held by each special value medium. It can be grasped sensuously.

It is generally recognized that a special value medium having a high degree of difficulty in establishing a special value giving condition and hard to obtain by a player has a high rarity and a high value. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the special value medium due to the change to the special value giving condition with a relatively high difficulty level, it is difficult for the player to obtain the special value medium. You can continue playing while expecting to obtain a special value that is highly valuable and valuable. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a counting means for counting the number of times that a predetermined state occurs is provided, the special value giving condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means, and the condition changing means is According to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, the number of times counted by the counting means necessary for satisfying the special value giving condition is changed. Machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value giving condition, that is, the predetermined state is The number of occurrences is changed by the condition changing means. Therefore, since it is possible to change the frequency of giving the special value medium, the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the player can keep his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the probability variation big hit counter 223v or the out-reach counter 223x corresponds to the counting means in the gaming machine C3.

In the gaming machine C3, the counting means counts the number of occurrences of a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, the special value giving condition is based on the occurrence of a common gaming state, so that the player sensibly grasps the ease or difficulty of acquiring the special value medium (special value). can do. Therefore, it is possible to fuel the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium and create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the second counting means for counting the number of times that a state different from the state whose number is counted by the counting means occurs, and the special value giving condition are counted by the counting means. The selection means for selecting whether to set the condition according to the number of times to be counted or the condition according to the number of times to be counted by the second counting means, and the special value giving condition to the conditions selected by the selection means. A second condition changing means for changing the condition, wherein the condition changing means changes the second condition changing means to a condition according to the number of times the special value giving condition is counted by the counting means. Is, in accordance with the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, changes the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value giving condition, on the other hand, When the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing unit to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting unit, the special value detected by the value content detecting unit A gaming machine C5, wherein the number of times counted by the second counting means, which is required to satisfy the special value giving condition, is changed according to the content.

According to the gaming machine C5, the special value giving condition is set to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state has occurred) or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, , The number of times that a state different from the state counted by the counting means occurs) is selected by the selecting means, the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing means by the selecting means. It will be changed to the selected conditions.

At this time, when the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means, according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, The condition changing means changes the number of times counted by the counting means necessary to satisfy the special value giving condition. On the other hand, when the special value provision condition is changed by the second condition changing unit to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting unit, the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting unit. Accordingly, the condition changing unit changes the number of times counted by the second counting unit, which is required to satisfy the special value giving condition.

Therefore, a variety of special value giving conditions for obtaining the special value medium (special value) are abundant, and it is possible to create a situation in which the player does not feel tired of playing the game. Here, by allowing the selection by the selection means to be performed based on the player's intention (for example, an input instructing which one to select), the player can obtain a special result reflecting his own intention. Value-adding conditions can be selected. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player's consciousness easy to obtain the special value medium, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the above embodiment, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v corresponds to the counting means in the gaming machine C4, and the detach reach counter 223x corresponds to the second counting means in the gaming machine C4.

Further, in the above embodiment, the discharge mode changing process (see FIG. 59) corresponds to the selecting means in the gaming machine C4. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S4110 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIG. 61) corresponds to the second condition changing means in the gaming machine C4.

In the gaming machine C5, the counting means and the second counting means hold the number of times counted before the condition is changed by the second condition changing means. A gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means, the number of times counted by the counting means or the second counting means before that is held, so that Even when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means and then the condition is returned, it is possible to count from the continuation before the change.

Therefore, the special value provision condition is appropriately set to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting unit (that is, the number of times a certain state occurs), or the number of times counted by the second counting unit (that is, the number counted by the counting unit). It is possible to make conditions according to the number of times that a state different from the state that occurs is generated), so there are abundant changes in the special value giving conditions for obtaining the special value medium (special value), and it is hard to feel bored with the game. Can create situations.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, an input means for inputting an instruction by a player is provided, and the selection means selects a condition when there is an input from the input means. Machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, since the selection by the selection means can be performed based on the intention of the player, the player can select the special value giving condition reflecting his own intention. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player's consciousness easy to obtain the special value medium, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the above embodiment, the discharge mode change button 1800 corresponds to the input means in the gaming machine C7.

The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine C9 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine C10 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, arrangement means for arranging a plurality of the special value media, and the special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means Detecting means for detecting the content of the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time based on the content of the information part detected by the detecting means And a value content acquisition unit for acquiring the value content, wherein the arranging unit is arranged so that the information section formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not overlap with the information section of the other special value medium. A gaming machine D1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D1, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied in a game using a game medium, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the special value medium is a plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, the content of the information portion formed in the special value medium to be added next by the special value medium addition means is detected by the detection means, Based on the detected content, the content of special value of the special value medium to be given next time is acquired by the value content acquisition means.

Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be acquired, and thus the added content can be added to the game by using the acquired content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the acquired special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium, so that the progress of the game can be suppressed. You can Alternatively, by suggesting the acquired special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be added next time) to the player according to the content of the acquired special value before the special value medium is added. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D1, since the contents of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time are acquired, it is possible to add value to the game by using the acquired contents. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Here, according to the game machine D1, the information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time is arranged by the arranging means so as not to overlap the information section of the other special value medium. Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information section of the special game medium and the information section of the other special value medium are overlapped, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information section.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine D1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the detection means in the gaming machine D1, and the ejection card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) corresponds to the value content acquisition means in the gaming machine D1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arrangement member 1451 or the like corresponds to the arrangement means in the game machine D1. Here, the arrangement in which "the information part formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not overlap the information part of the other special value medium" in the arrangement means is shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 66. The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1 and CA2 is applicable.

The gaming machine D2, wherein the arranging unit is arranged so that an information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time and an information section of another special value medium do not directly overlap with each other.

According to the gaming machine D2, the arranging unit arranges the information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time so as not to directly overlap the information section of the other special value medium. Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information part of the special game medium and the information part of the other special value medium are directly overlapped with each other, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information part.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as the arrangement of “the information section formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not directly overlap the information section of the other special value medium” in the arrangement means in the gaming machine D2, The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, and CA2 shown in 63, FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is applicable.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, arrangement means for arranging a plurality of the special value media, and the special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means Detecting means for detecting the content of the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time based on the content of the information part detected by the detecting means And a value content acquisition means for acquiring the information content formed in the special value medium to be given next time, at least, so that the information portion is not overlapped with the information portion of the special value medium given one after another. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine D3, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the special value medium is a plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, the content of the information portion formed in the special value medium to be added next by the special value medium addition means is detected by the detection means, Based on the detected content, the content of special value of the special value medium to be given next time is acquired by the value content acquisition means.

Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be acquired, and thus the added content can be added to the game by using the acquired content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the acquired special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium, so that the progress of the game can be suppressed. You can

Alternatively, by suggesting the acquired special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be added next time) to the player according to the content of the acquired special value before the special value medium is added. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D3, since the contents of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time are acquired, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the acquired contents. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Here, according to the gaming machine D3, the information unit formed on the special value medium to be given next time is arranged by the arranging unit so as not to overlap with the information portion of the special value medium to be given one after another. ..

Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information section of the special game medium to be played overlaps the information section of the special value medium to be given one after another, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information section.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine D3, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejecting card reader 1453 corresponds to the detecting means in the gaming machine D3, and the ejected card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) corresponds to the value content acquiring means in the gaming machine D3.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arrangement member 1451 or the like corresponds to the arrangement means in the game machine D3. 63, FIG. 64, and FIG. 63, FIG. 64, where the arrangement means "the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time does not at least overlap the information part of the special value medium to be added one after another" The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, CA2 shown in FIG. 66 is applicable.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detecting means is provided with a plurality of the information units arranged so as not to overlap each other so as to be respectively detectable.

According to the gaming machine D4, since the detection means is provided with a plurality of information portions which are arranged so as not to overlap in the arrangement means so as to be respectively detectable, it is possible to easily detect each information portion arranged so as not to overlap. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged in the arrangement means in a stacked manner while rotating the information section of each special value medium around an axis in the stacking direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, a plurality of special value media are stacked in the arranging means in a state where the information parts of the respective special value media are rotated around the axis in the stacking direction, so that the space saving is relatively space-efficient. It is possible to arrange a plurality of special value media so that the information sections of the special value media do not often overlap.

In the gaming machine D5, the special value medium is composed of the information section and a non-transparent main body section other than the information section, and the information section is internally provided according to the content of the special value. A gaming machine D6, which is a light-transmissive region in which a pattern is formed, and the detection means is configured to read the pattern.

According to the gaming machine D6, the information part in the special value medium is configured as a light transmissive region in which a pattern corresponding to the content of the special value is formed, and the pattern formed in the light transmissive region is formed. It is read by the detection means. As a result, the contents of the special value can be acquired.

Here, since the special value medium is configured as a light opaque main body except for the information section, a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement means such that the information section of each special value medium is stacked in the axis of the stacking direction. When stacked in a state of being rotated around, the light opaque body of the adjacent special value medium will overlap with one side of the information part (special value medium) of the special value medium, Only the pattern formed in the information portion (light transmissive area) can be detected by the detection means.

Therefore, it is possible to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time is confused with other special value and is erroneously detected. Can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged and stacked in the arrangement means while shifting the information section of each special value medium in a predetermined direction. Gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged and stacked in the arrangement means while being shifted in one direction of the information section of each special value medium. Therefore, the information section of each special value medium is arranged. Multiple special value media can be placed so that they do not overlap.

In the gaming machine D7, the special value medium has the information section and a first light transmissive area adjacent to the information section, and the information section internally corresponds to the content of the special value. A second light-transmissive region having a pattern formed thereon, the value content detecting means is configured to read the pattern, and the arranging means includes the plurality of special value media. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that the information section of the special value medium is arranged in a direction from the information section toward the first light-transmitting area while being shifted so as not to overlap each other. ..

According to the gaming machine D8, the information section of the special value medium is configured as a second light transmissive area in which a pattern according to the content of the special value is formed, and the second light transmissive area is formed. The pattern formed on is read by the detection means. As a result, the contents of the special value can be acquired.

Here, since the special value medium has the first light-transmissive region adjacent to the information section in addition to the information section, the information section of the special value medium has the first light transmission area from the information section. When the information parts are stacked in the direction toward the transmissive area while being shifted so that they do not overlap, the information part of each special value medium that is stacked must face through the first light transmissive area. You can

Therefore, it is possible to individually read a plurality of information sections in the special value mediums that are stacked. Here, by providing a plurality of detection means so that each information section can be read, the plurality of information sections can be read collectively without being confused with each other, so the special value medium to be given next time It is possible to more complicatedly provide an added value using a plurality of special value contents including the special value contents owned by.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine D10 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A plate-shaped information medium having a predetermined outer shape, which is used in a game machine for giving a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a main body having optical transparency And an information section of a specific shape having a light-transmitting property, which is continuously provided at a predetermined position of the main body section, and the information section is formed inside the information section and is readable by the gaming machine. The information medium 1 includes an information pattern indicating the content of information that gives a value different from the game value, and the information pattern is formed as a different pattern according to the content of the information.

According to the information medium 1, the information medium 1 is configured in a plate shape having a predetermined outer shape, and is used in a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using the game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. .. This information medium 1 has a light-impermeable main body and an information section connected to the main body.

In the information medium 1, the information section is formed in a specific shape having light transmissivity, and an information pattern showing the content of information giving a value different from the game value that can be read by a gaming machine is provided inside the information section. Contains.

Therefore, the information pattern can be read by the gaming machine, and the gaming machine that has read the information pattern can read a new value according to the information indicated by the information pattern (for example, by reading the information medium owned by the player. It is possible to present a new effect corresponding to the information medium, to give a notification suggesting the addition before giving the information medium to the player, and the like) to the player.

Here, since the information pattern is formed as a different pattern according to the content of the information, different types of information media can exist according to the difference in the information pattern, and the number of different information patterns can be varied. It is possible to provide the player with various values.

Further, according to the information medium 1, since the information pattern is formed in the light-transmissive information portion, and the information portion is located at the predetermined position of the information medium and has the specific shape, a plurality of information patterns are formed. By overlapping the information media, the information patterns of the information media can be overlapped. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to read the information patterns in a superimposed state. That is, it is possible to collectively cause the gaming machine to read the information that each of the plurality of information media has.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the information possessed by one information medium is read by collectively causing the gaming machine to read the information possessed by each of the plurality of information mediums, the amount of information is increased and the value based on the read information is increased. Offers can be diversified.

For example, in the case where a new value is provided to a player by causing a player to read an information medium owned by the player to bring out a new effect corresponding to the information medium, the number of information media owned is The more there are, the more diversified the effects that appear. Further, by giving a notification suggesting the giving before giving the information medium to the player, when providing a new value to the player, by giving one of the information read collectively, It is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information mediums are attached, and thereby, it is possible to enhance the playability by attaching the information mediums.

As described above, according to the information medium 1, a value different from the game value provided by the information medium becomes an added value, thereby allowing the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time. To do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the privilege cards CA and CA' correspond to the information medium which is the information medium 1. Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the main body portions 1601 and 1601x correspond to the main body portion in the information medium 1. In the above embodiment, the card information areas 1602 and 1602x correspond to the information section of the information medium 1.

In the information medium 1, the one information pattern is a pattern formed by one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area of the information section into a plurality of sections, and with respect to the one information pattern, An information medium 2 in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated.

According to the information medium 2, of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections, one section has one information pattern in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated. ..

Therefore, it is possible to form different information patterns for each partition, and it is possible to increase the number of information media having different information (that is, information patterns) while suppressing an increase in the size of the information medium. By doing so, the added value can be increased.

Further, since a large amount of information can be included in one information pattern, it is possible to diversify the value that one information medium can provide to the player. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability by adding the information medium.

In addition, when a plurality of information media are overlapped and an information pattern is read, it is possible to obtain a combination of various types of information that each information medium has without being confused. Therefore, when a new value is provided to the player by notifying the player before giving the information medium to the player, it is possible to notify any of the information read collectively. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information media are added, and thus it is possible to enhance the game play by adding the information media.

In the information medium 1 or 2, the information section is divided into a plurality of areas, and each area in the plurality of areas is divided into a plurality of sections so that the information pattern can be formed. The information medium 3 is characterized in that the pattern is a pattern formed by using one section for each area among the sections formed in each area.

According to the information medium 3, the information section is divided into a plurality of areas, and each area in the plurality of areas is divided into a plurality of sections so that an information pattern can be formed. Here, one information pattern is formed by using one section for each area among the sections formed in each area.

Therefore, when a plurality of information media are overlapped and an information pattern is read, it is possible to obtain a combination of a plurality of types of information included in each information medium without confusion. Therefore, when a new value is provided to the player by notifying the player before giving the information medium to the player, it is possible to notify any of the information read collectively. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information media are added, and thus it is possible to enhance the game play by adding the information media. Further, since one information pattern is formed by using one section from each of the plurality of regions, the number of specific elements of the information pattern is increased, and the accuracy of reading the information pattern can be improved.

In the information medium 3, the information pattern 1 is formed such that the arrangement when viewed from one surface side is different from the arrangement when viewed from the other surface side.

According to the information medium 4, one information pattern is formed so that the arrangement when viewed from one surface side is different from the arrangement when viewed from the other surface side. easy.

The information medium 5 according to any one of the information media 1 to 4, wherein a reading assistance surface for assisting the reading of the information pattern by the gaming machine is provided on one surface side of the main body portion.

According to the information medium 5, since the reading auxiliary surface for assisting the reading of the information pattern by the gaming machine is provided on the one surface side of the main body portion, the information medium is superposed with the reading auxiliary surface in one direction. In this case, by moving one information medium, it becomes possible to cause the gaming machine to read the information pattern with the reading auxiliary surface of the adjacent information medium as the background. Therefore, the information pattern of 1 can be surely read by the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the reading assisting surface may be a groundless surface or the like. Here, when the reading assistance surface is configured as a groundless surface, it is preferable that the color is a groundless surface that does not hinder the reading of the pattern. For example, when the color of the pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or dark blue), the reading assistance surface has a white or light color (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue). It is preferable to use the groundless surface as the reading assistance surface. Alternatively, when the color of the pattern is white or a light color, it is preferable that the read assisting surface is black or dark groundless ground. In the above-described embodiment, the back surface 1601b of the privilege card CA corresponds to the reading assistance surface of the information medium 5.

In a gaming machine for playing a game using a gaming medium and giving a gaming value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is arranged on one side of the information medium in any one of the information media 1 to 5, and from the one side. An amusement machine E1 comprising: a reading unit capable of reading an information pattern of the information medium, and a control unit executing a control based on the information pattern read by the reading unit.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the information pattern of the information medium in any of the information media 1 to 6 is read by the reading means, the control means executes the control based on the read information pattern. Therefore, the value indicated by the information pattern of the information medium can be provided to the player based on the control executed by the game machine, thereby keeping the player interested in the game for a longer period of time. Enable that.

In the above embodiment, the reading card in the gaming machine E1 corresponds to the ejection card reader 1453 and the receiving section card reader 1303. Further, in the above embodiment, as the control means in the gaming machine E1, the variation effect setting means (see FIG. 46), the addition condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and the receiving section card reading processing (FIG. 54). , FIG. 83), suggestive effect setting process (see FIG. 74), stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75), and the like.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with an informing means for making an informing, and the control means causes the informing means to execute an informing according to the information pattern read by the reading means.

According to the gaming machine E2, since the notification by the notification means is executed by the control means based on the information pattern read by the reading means, it is possible to perform the notification according to the information pattern of each information medium. Therefore, when the information medium is given from the gaming machine according to the situation of the game, the information medium is given to the player by giving a notification according to the information pattern of each information medium (that is, the game value is It is possible to add a sense of expectation to the acquisition of different new value.

Further, since the notification given by the notifying means based on the information pattern read by the reading means is a notification according to the read information pattern, it is possible to notify the player of the value of the information medium, and thereby, It enables the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the notification means in the gaming machine E2.

The gaming machine E1 or 2 is provided with a variable display means for displaying a variable display when the starting condition is satisfied, and the control means changes the specific variable display according to the information pattern read by the reading means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine E3, the variable display is displayed by the variable display means when the starting condition is satisfied. Here, when the information pattern is read by the reading means, a specific variable display according to the information pattern thus read is displayed on the variable display means under the control of the control means.

Therefore, when the information pattern is read by the reading means, a specific variable display different from the normal variable display is displayed, and the player is informed of the value of the information medium by the specific variable display. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation display means in the gaming machine E3.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a housing means for housing the plurality of information media, and a predetermined number of information media of the plurality of information media housed in the housing means, The separating means for separating from the information part of the information medium and the reading means read the information part of the predetermined number of information media separated from the information part of the other information medium by the separating means. Gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, the information unit of two or more information media among the plurality of information media stored in the storage unit is separated from the information units of other information media by the separation unit. Then, the reading means reads the information parts of the predetermined number of information media separated from the information parts of other information media by the separating means.

Therefore, a plurality of values based on two or more information media can be provided to the player based on the control executed by the gaming machine, so that the value can be provided regardless of the order of giving. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the playability by providing a value different from the game value, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1450xa corresponds to the accommodating means in the gaming machine E4. In the above embodiment, the standby member 1450xb corresponds to the separating means in the gaming machine E4.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the information medium is read by the reading means, a holding means for holding the information medium to be read from a surface opposite to the reading means is provided. Playing machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, when the information medium is read by the reading means, the information medium to be read is pushed by the pressing means from the surface opposite to the reading means, so that the warp of the information medium can be prevented, The accuracy of reading the information pattern can be improved. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the fixing solenoid 1456xf and the plate member 1456xg correspond to the pressing means in the gaming machine E5.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means for storing a plurality of the special value media, and a special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means. Separation means for separating two or more special value media including at least one special value medium to be given next time from other special value media, and the above-mentioned 2 separated from the other special value media by the separating means. Value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value possessed by the above special value medium, and notifying means for notifying based on the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, a plurality of special value media are stored in the storage means, and among the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means, one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium addition means is selected. The two or more special value media at least included are separated from the other special value media by the separating means, and the special content of the two or more special value media thus separated is detected by the value content detecting means. ..

Then, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, notification is performed based on the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means. Here, since the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means includes the content of the special value of one special value medium given next time, the notified special value may be acquired next time. You can continue playing with the expectation.

In particular, if the content of the notification by the notification means indicates a special value that the player himself desires to acquire, the player may be able to acquire the special value he or she desires next time. You can continue playing while expecting.

On the other hand, the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means is not only the special value of the one special value medium given next time but also the special value of the special value medium given after that. Therefore, the notification by the notification means does not necessarily indicate the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to reliably estimate the type of special value medium to be given next time, and the player is looking forward to confirming the result by actually ejecting the special value medium and playing the game. I can continue.

As described above, according to the gaming machine F1, since the notification is performed based on the contents of the special value of two or more special value media including at least one special value medium to be given next time, the gaming property is improved, It becomes a new added value and makes it possible to keep the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine F1, the “notification condition” that triggers the notification of the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means is the same condition as the “special value granting condition” that triggers the granting of the special value. Alternatively, different conditions may be used. Further, in the gaming machine F1, the form of the special value given by the special value medium giving means may be a tangible form such as a medium or an intangible form such as data.

In the above embodiment, the special value medium adding means in the gaming machine F1 corresponds to the processing of S4124 in the addition condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 77). Further, in the above embodiment, the storage member 1450xa corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine F1. In the above embodiment, the standby member 1450xb corresponds to the separating means in the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the notification means, the process of S2425 in the suggestion effect formation confirmation process (see FIG. 71), S2664, S2665, S2667, S2668 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) and the like correspond.

In the gaming machine F1, the classifying means for classifying the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means and the content of the special value classified by the classifying means when the information is notified by the notifying means. The game machine F2 is further provided with a notification content selection means for selecting the content of the special value to be notified by the notification means based on the selection probability according to a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine F2, the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means is classified by the classification means. Then, when performing the notification by the notifying means, the content of the special value to be notified by the notifying means is notified from among the contents of the special value classified by the classifying means based on the selection probability according to a predetermined rule. Selected by the content selection means. As a result, the notification means gives notification based on the content of the special value selected by the notification content selection means.

Therefore, the probability of notification based on the content of each classified special value is changed according to the probability of being selected by the notification content selection means (that is, the selection probability according to a predetermined rule). It is possible to inflate the expectation for acquisition and to improve the playability by notifying the contents of the special value.

Further, in the above embodiment, the classification means in the gaming machine F2 corresponds to the processing of S3424 and S3425 in the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2661 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) corresponds to the notification content selection unit in the gaming machine F2.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the special value medium includes a main body portion having a predetermined outer shape and having a light opacity, and an information portion having a light permeable property, which is continuously provided at a predetermined position in the main body portion. The information section includes an information pattern formed inside the information section and indicating the content of the special value that can be detected by the value content detecting unit, and the separating unit includes the two or more special values. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the information unit of the value medium is separated from the other special value medium.

According to the gaming machine F3, the special value medium is configured in a plate shape having a predetermined outer shape, and has a light-impermeable main body section and an information section connected to the main body section. The information part of the special value medium is formed in a specific shape having light transmissivity, and contains an information pattern indicating the content of the special value that can be detected by the value content detecting means.

Here, of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means, two or more of the special value media including at least one special value medium to be provided next time by the special value medium providing means are separated by the separating means. It is separated from other special value media in a state where the information parts of two or more special value media are overlapped.

Therefore, since the content value detecting means can collectively detect the contents of the special values respectively possessed by the two or more special value media, it is possible to make a notification based on the contents of the special values respectively possessed by these special value media. it can.

In the above embodiment, the special value medium in the gaming machine F3 corresponds to the privilege card CA'. In the above embodiment, the main body 1601x corresponds to the main body of the special value medium in the gaming machine F3. Further, in the above embodiment, the card information area 1602x corresponds to the information section of the special value medium in the gaming machine F3.

In the gaming machine F3, one of the information patterns is a pattern formed by one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections, and with respect to the one information pattern, A gaming machine F4 characterized in that a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated as one gaming value.

According to the gaming machine F4, one information pattern in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated is formed in one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections. ..

Therefore, when a plurality of special value media are read and information patterns are read, it is possible to obtain a combination of each type of information that each special value medium has without being confused. Since it is possible to provide the player with a notification based on the content of the special value regardless of the order of giving, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the order of giving the special value medium. It is possible to improve the game playability.

In the gaming machine F4, a classifying unit that classifies the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting unit, and in the case of performing the notification by the notifying unit, the content of the special value classified by the classifying unit From the above, there is provided notification content selection means for selecting the content of the special value to be notified by the notification means based on a predetermined selection probability, and one of the plurality of types of information is the selection probability. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the information is prescribed information.

According to the gaming machine F5, the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means is classified by the classifying means. Then, when the notification means performs the notification, the notification is performed based on the selection probability defined by the information defining the selection probability included in one information pattern from the contents of the special value classified by the classification means. The content of the special value to be notified by the means is selected by the notification content selection means. As a result, the notification means gives notification based on the content of the special value selected by the notification content selection means.

Therefore, the probability of notification based on the content of each classified special value is the probability of being selected by the notification content selection means (that is, the selection probability defined by the information defining the selection probability included in one information pattern). Since it is changed accordingly, the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the notified special value can be added, and the playability by notifying the content of the special value can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the classification means in the gaming machine F5 corresponds to the processing of S3424 and S3425 in the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2661 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) corresponds to the notification content selection unit in the gaming machine F5.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the value content detecting means is arranged on one surface side of the special value medium, detects the information pattern from the one surface side, and is separated by the separating means. When the content of special value of the special value medium is detected by the value content detecting means, a holding means for holding the special value medium from the surface opposite to the value content detecting means is provided. Machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, when the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the special value medium separated by the separating means, the special value medium is pressed by the pressing means on the opposite side of the value content detecting means. Since it is pressed from the side, the warp of the special value medium can be prevented and the reading accuracy of the information pattern can be improved. In the above embodiment, the holding means in the gaming machine F6 corresponds to the fixing solenoid 1456xf and the plate member 1456xg, or the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305.

The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine F8 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, wherein the special value medium has an information surface on which information visually suggesting the content of the special value is written, and the information written on the information surface. A gaming machine G1 provided with a removable covering means that reduces visibility of the information by covering.

According to the gaming machine G1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value The special value medium having is added by the special value medium giving means. In this special value medium, information that visually suggests the contents of the special value is written on the information surface.

Here, the information surface of the special value medium is provided with a covering unit that reduces the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information visually suggesting the content of the special value medium). Has been.

Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.

Therefore, the player's expectation for obtaining the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value, and therefore, the player's expectation is added to the game as compared to the game of simply obtaining the special value medium. You can add value. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) on the information surface is provided, the special value having the high value contents is provided. It is possible to prevent the value medium from being selected and illegally extracted.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine G1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

In the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a, etc. correspond to the information surface in the gaming machine G1. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing members 4001, 4003, 4004 and the like correspond to the covering means in the gaming machine G1.

In the gaming machine G1, a game machine G2, wherein the covering means is removable and cannot be reused after removal.

According to the gaming machine G2, since the covering means is configured so that it cannot be reused after being removed, the covering is performed from the special value medium obtained by illegally extracting it, not by justifying the acquisition of the special value giving condition. It is possible to prevent illegal reading of the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the means.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the covering means includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer comprises: A gaming machine G3 characterized by having brittleness such that at least a part thereof is damaged by the stress when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface.

According to the gaming machine G3, the coating means for reducing the visibility of the information (information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) written on the information surface is a base layer and a base layer. The adhesive layer is provided on the back side of the material layer, and is adhered to the information surface by the adhesive layer.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the gaming machine G3, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the gaming machine G3.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the covering unit has a wireless communication unit, and the wireless communication unit has a circuit unit having a storage unit in which information corresponding to the contents of the special value is stored. An antenna unit connected to the circuit unit and capable of transmitting information corresponding to the contents of the special value stored in the storage unit by using a wireless transmission medium, A gaming machine G4 comprising information reading means capable of reading information corresponding to the contents of the special value sent through the antenna section.

According to the gaming machine G4, the covering means is provided with the wireless communication means capable of transmitting the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value) stored in the circuit section from the antenna section using the wireless transmission medium. ing. Then, the information (information corresponding to the content of the special value) sent via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, based on the reading by the information reading means, the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium given by the special value medium giving means can be grasped. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the wireless communication means does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information to be sent from the wireless communication means. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. It is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.

When the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle to the extent that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna part) Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4622 corresponds to the wireless communication means in the gaming machine G4, the IC chip 4622a corresponds to the circuit unit in the gaming machine G4, and the antenna is used as the antenna unit in the gaming machine G4. The part 4622b is applicable. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag reader 4501 corresponds to the information reading means in the gaming machine G4.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the covering means includes an information code formed on an exposed surface and encoding information corresponding to the content of the special value, and the information code can be read. A gaming machine G5, characterized by comprising information reading means.

According to the gaming machine G5, the covering means has, on the exposed surface, an information code that encodes information corresponding to the content of the special value. The information code on the exposed surface of the covering means is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, based on the reading of the information code by the information reading unit, the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium added by the special value medium adding unit can be grasped. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the information code does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means can read the information code, that is, the information corresponding to the content of the special value. Can not. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. It is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.

The gaming machine G6 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine G7 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine G8 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value giving means for giving the special value medium, accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium given by the special value giving means, and contents of the special value of the special value medium accommodated in the accommodating means A gaming machine H1 provided with a leak prevention means for preventing the leak of the game machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, while the game value is stored in the storing means when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied. The special value medium is added from the containing means by the special value medium adding means. Here, the leakage of the special value contained in the special value medium stored in the storage means is prevented by the leakage prevention means.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for. Therefore, the player's expectation for acquiring the special value medium can be maintained at all times, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine H1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the accommodating means in the gaming machine H1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the leakage prevention means in the gaming machine H1, the seal members 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004, 4005 and the back surface 4601b and the side surface coated with a material that obstructs the transmission of a transmission medium that transmits information. 4601c, the locking member 4801, the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment (see FIG. 95(b)), and the like.

In the gaming machine H1, the special value medium has an information surface on which information that can identify the content of the special value is written, and the leakage prevention means is written on the information surface of the special value medium. A gaming machine H2, comprising removable covering means for covering the information to reduce the identifiability of the information.

According to the gaming machine H2, the information surface of the special value medium covers the information written on the information surface (information that can identify the content of the special value medium) to reduce the identifiability of the information. Means are provided.

Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.

Therefore, the player's expectation for obtaining the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value, and therefore, the player's expectation is added to the game as compared to the game of simply obtaining the special value medium. It is possible to add value, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the covering means is provided to reduce the identifiability of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information that can identify the content of the special value medium), the special value having the high value content is provided. It is possible to prevent illegal selection of a medium.

In the gaming machine H2, the "information capable of identifying the contents of the special value medium" is not limited to the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium (for example, a picture, a pattern, a character, etc.), but a special value medium. It also includes information (for example, information that can determine the content of the special value by reading and processing with a corresponding reading device) that encodes the content of the.

Further, in the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a and the like correspond to the information surface in the gaming machine H2. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing members 4001, 4003, 4004 and the like correspond to the covering means (a part of the leakage preventing means) in the gaming machine H2.

In the gaming machine H2, the covering means is removable and cannot be reused after being removed.

According to the gaming machine H3, the covering means is configured so that it cannot be reused after being removed, so that the covering is performed from the special value medium that is illegally extracted and not obtained legally by the establishment of the special value giving condition. It is possible to prevent illegal reading of the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the means.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the covering means includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer is A gaming machine H4 characterized by having brittleness such that at least a part thereof is damaged by a stress when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface.

According to the gaming machine H4, the covering means that reduces the distinguishability of the information (information that can identify the contents of the special value medium) written on the information surface is the base layer and the base material. And an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the layer, and the adhesive layer is applied to the information surface.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the gaming machine H4, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the gaming machine H4.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the covering means has a wireless communication means provided on the back side of the base material layer, and the wireless communication means has a storage unit in which predetermined information is stored. And a antenna unit connected to the circuit unit and capable of transmitting the predetermined information stored in the storage unit by using a wireless transmission medium. A gaming machine H5, comprising information reading means capable of reading the predetermined information sent out through the antenna section.

According to the gaming machine H5, the wireless communication means capable of transmitting the predetermined information stored in the circuit portion from the antenna portion using the wireless transmission medium is provided on the back surface side of the base material layer in the covering means. There is. Then, the predetermined information transmitted via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, if the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, the wireless communication means does not exist, and in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the predetermined information to be transmitted from the wireless communication means. ..

Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the covering means covers the special value medium by confirming the reading by the information reading means with respect to the privilege value medium accommodated in the accommodating means. One of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by the wrongdoer's hand. Therefore, it is possible that an illegal act was performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. The sex can be confirmed.

Here, when the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle so that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled off from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna part) is damaged. ) Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

The “predetermined information” stored in the storage unit may be information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium or information unrelated to the contents of the special value medium. When the "predetermined information" stored in the storage unit is information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium, the special value medium provided by the special value medium providing unit has the information based on the reading by the information reading unit. It is possible to perform an effect according to information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium).

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4622 corresponds to the wireless communication means of the gaming machine H5, the IC chip 4622a corresponds to the circuit section of the gaming machine H5, and the antenna section of the gaming machine H5 includes the antenna. The part 4622b is applicable. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag reader 4501 corresponds to the information reading means in the gaming machine H5.

In the gaming machine H5, it is interposed between a predetermined number of special value media including at least the special value medium to be given next time by the special value medium giving means and another special value medium accommodated in the accommodating means, A gaming machine H6, comprising partitioning means for obstructing transmission of the transmission medium from the wireless communication means to another special value medium contained in the containing means.

According to the gaming machine H6, wireless communication is performed between a predetermined number of special value mediums including at least the special value medium to be given next time by the special value medium giving means and other special value mediums accommodated in the accommodating means. The transmission of the transmission medium from the means to the other special-value medium contained in the containing means is obstructed by the partition means.

Therefore, with respect to a predetermined number of special value media including at least the special value medium to be given next time, the predetermined information included in the special value medium is exchanged with other information included in the other special value medium contained in the accommodating means. It can be separated and selectively read.

In the above embodiment, the partitioning means in the gaming machine H6 corresponds to the blocking member 2003 and the sealing member 4005.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the covering means includes an information code formed on an exposed surface and encoding predetermined information, and is provided with an information reading means capable of reading the information code. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H7, the covering means has the information code, which encodes predetermined information, on the exposed surface. The information code on the exposed surface of the covering means is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, there is no information code, and in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information code, that is, the predetermined information.

Therefore, based on the reading of the information code by the information reading means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the covering means covers the special value medium. One of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by the wrongdoer's hand. Therefore, it is possible that an illegal act was performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. The sex can be confirmed.

The "predetermined information" to be encoded may be information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium or may be information irrelevant to the contents of the special value medium. When the "predetermined information" stored in the storage unit is information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium, the special value medium provided by the special value medium providing unit has the information based on the reading by the information reading unit. It is possible to perform an effect according to information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium).

The gaming machine H8 according to any one of the gaming machines H5 to H7, wherein the leakage prevention means includes an informing means for informing when the information reading means cannot read the information.

According to the gaming machine H8, when the information reading means cannot read the information, the notification means (a part of the leakage prevention means) notifies the possibility of misconduct to the surroundings. it can. In the above embodiment, the notification means in the gaming machine H8 corresponds to the processing of S3414 in the discharged card confirmation processing (see FIG. 93).

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the special value medium has information indicating the content of the special value in a predetermined form that can be read by a reader, and the leakage prevention unit is the special value medium. A game machine characterized by including information isolation means for unreadablely isolating the information indicating the content of the special value of the special value medium from the special value medium before the addition by the adding means. H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, the information indicating the content of the special value which the special value medium has in a predetermined form that can be read by the reader is provided before the special value medium is added by the special value medium adding means. , The information is quarantined by the information quarantine means (a part of the leakage prevention means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information indicating the contents of the special value from being read from the special value medium before being added by the special value medium adding means, so that the player grasps the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. , It is possible to prevent losing sense of expectation for acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the information isolating means (a part of the leak preventing means) in the gaming machine H9 is a seal member 4001, 4002, 4004, 4005 covering the card information area 1602, and a transmission medium for transmitting information. The back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c coated with an interfering material, a seal member 4003 made of a material that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium for transmitting information, and the like are applicable.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the special value medium has a second wireless communication unit, and the second wireless communication unit stores a second storage in which information indicating the content of the special value is stored. Circuit section having a section, and a second antenna connected to the second circuit section and capable of transmitting information indicating the content of the special value stored in the second storage section using a wireless transmission medium. The information surface is configured to be permeable to the wireless transmission medium, the covering means is configured to prevent transmission of the wireless transmission medium, and the leakage prevention means is A gaming machine H10 characterized by including a covering means.

According to the gaming machine H10, as the special value medium, the second wireless communication means capable of transmitting the information indicating the content of the special value stored in the second circuit section from the second antenna section by using the wireless transmission medium. Is provided.

Here, the information surface of the special value medium is configured to be permeable to the wireless transmission medium, while the covering means is configured to interfere with the transmission of the wireless transmission medium. Therefore, when the special value medium is covered by the covering means, it is possible to prevent the reading of the information indicating the content of the special value by the reader capable of reading the information communicated using the wireless transmission medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4602 corresponds to the second wireless communication means in the gaming machine H10, the IC chip 4602a corresponds to the second circuit unit in the gaming machine H10, and the second circuit unit in the gaming machine H10. The antenna portion 4602b corresponds to the antenna portion. Further, in the above embodiment, the seal member 4003 corresponds to the covering means (a part of the leakage preventing means) in the gaming machine H10.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the accommodating means forms an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a part of the housing is opened to supply the special value medium, and And a lid that covers an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention unit is configured to include a fixing unit that fixes the housing and the lid inseparably or inseparably. A gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the housing and the lid are fixed by the fixing means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in a difficult or non-separable manner, the lid is removed to be housed in the housing means (housing). It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium that is present from being extracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H11, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H11. Further, in the above embodiment, the locking member 4801 corresponds to the fixing means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H11.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the housing means has an internal space capable of housing the special value medium, and a part of the housing opened to supply the special value medium, and And a lid that can be opened and closed to cover an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention unit includes a locking unit that locks the lid and the housing when the lid is closed. A gaming machine H12 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine H12, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the housing and the lid are locked by the locking means (part of the leakage prevention means), it is possible to remove the privilege value medium stored in the housing means (housing) by removing the lid. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H12, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H12. Further, in the above embodiment, the locking member 4801 corresponds to the locking means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H12.

In the gaming machine H12, the locking means is configured such that unlocking after locking is difficult or impossible.

According to the gaming machine H13, the housing and the lid are made difficult or impossible to unlock after locking by the locking means (a part of the leakage prevention means). It is possible to reliably prevent the removal of the.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H13, the housing means forms an internal space capable of housing the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and A lid for covering an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention means is configured to include an identification means capable of identifying that the housing and the lid are separated from each other. A gaming machine H14.

According to the gaming machine H14, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the separation between the housing and the lid is identifiable by the identification means (a part of the leakage prevention means), it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium stored in the housing means (housing). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H11, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification means in the gaming machine H11 corresponds to the identification means exemplified as a modification in the fourteenth embodiment.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H14, the accommodating means has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and has a housing part of which is opened so that the special value medium can be sent out. The leakage prevention means prevents the special-value medium sent from the opening capable of sending the special-value medium in the casing from making it difficult or impossible to move the special-value medium in the direction returning to the inside of the casing. A gaming machine H15 characterized by including means.

According to the gaming machine H15, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium is composed of a casing in which an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and the special value medium is provided in a part of this casing. A delivery opening is provided.

Here, the special value medium sent out from the opening capable of sending the special value medium in the housing is difficult or difficult to move in the direction of returning to the inside of the housing due to the presence of the return prevention means (a part of the leakage prevention means). Made possible. Therefore, extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the storage means before the special value medium is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H15. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment (see FIG. 95B) corresponds to the return prevention means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H15.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium replenishing method for replenishing a special value medium to a game machine having a special value medium giving means, wherein the game machine has a container which is detachably attached to the game machine and in which the special value medium is previously stored. And a case in which an inner space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed in the accommodation body, and a part of which is opened to supply the special value medium, and the enclosure. And a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and that the housing and the lid are fixed to the gaming machine in a difficult or non-separable manner, and are mounted on the gaming machine by the mounting step. 1. A medium replenishing method 1.

According to the medium replenishment method 1, while the game value giving means gives the game value when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value has a special value different from the game value. When the special value medium is replenished to the gaming machine to which the special value medium is given by the special value medium giving means, the special value medium is removably attached to the gaming machine by the mounting step and the special value medium is stored in advance. This is done by mounting the body on the game machine.

Here, the accommodation body includes an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. It is configured, and when it is mounted on the gaming machine in the mounting step, it is mounted on the gaming machine in a state where the housing and the lid are fixed inseparable or inseparable.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container after the mounting by the mounting means (that is, after the supplement of the special value medium). As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the container in the medium replenishing method 1, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the case in the medium replenishing method 1, and the cover body in the medium replenishing method 1 corresponds to the case. Corresponds to the upper lid member 1452.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium replenishing method for replenishing a special value medium to a game machine having a special value medium giving means, wherein the game machine has a container that is detachably attached to the game machine and pre-stores the special value medium. And a case in which an inner space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed in the accommodation body, and a part of which is opened to supply the special value medium, and the enclosure. And a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and when the housing and the lid are separated from each other, the game machine is attached by the mounting step while being fixed so that the separation can be discriminated. A medium replenishing method 2 characterized by being mounted.

According to the medium replenishment method 2, while the game value giving means gives the game value when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value has a special value different from the game value. When the special value medium is replenished to the gaming machine to which the special value medium is given by the special value medium giving means, the special value medium is removably attached to the gaming machine by the mounting step and the special value medium is stored in advance. This is done by mounting the body on the game machine.

Here, the accommodation body includes an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. It is configured, and when it is mounted on the gaming machine in the mounting step, when the housing and the lid are separated, they are mounted on the gaming machine in a state of being fixed so that the separation can be discriminated.

Therefore, after mounting by the mounting means (that is, after supplementing the special value medium), it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium from the container. As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the container in the medium replenishing method 2, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing in the medium replenishing method 2, and the cover body in the medium replenishing method 2 corresponds to the case. Corresponds to the upper lid member 1452.

The medium replenishment method 1 or 2 includes a shipping step of shipping the container from a manufacturer, and the container is fixed such that the housing and the lid are difficult or inseparable at the time of shipping in the shipping step. 3. A medium replenishing method 3 characterized in that

According to the medium replenishment method 3, the container is shipped from the manufacturer in the shipping process. At this time, at the time of shipping in the shipping process, since the housing and the lid of the container are fixed so as to be difficult or inseparable, they are not attached to the gaming machine (during transportation before arrival and after arrival) It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container during the storage period of the container).

In any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 3, a receiving step of receiving the container from the manufacturer is included, and it is difficult to separate the housing and the lid body in the state of being received by the receiving step. A medium replenishing method 4 characterized by being fixed inseparably.

According to the medium replenishment method 4, the container is received from the manufacturer in the receiving process. At this time, since the housing and the lid of the container are fixed inseparably or inseparably in the received state, before mounting on the gaming machine (during storage of the container after receipt). It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container.

In any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 4, the container is exposed to the outside of the housing through a delivery opening opened in the housing so as to deliver the special value medium and the delivery opening. 6. The medium replenishing method 5 characterized in that the special value medium has a return preventing portion that makes it difficult or impossible to move in the direction in which the special value medium returns.

According to the medium replenishment method 5, the special value medium is delivered from the delivery port provided in the housing of the container. Here, it is difficult or impossible for the special-value medium sent out from the delivery port to move back in the housing due to the presence of the return prevention unit. Therefore, since the extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the accommodating means before the special value medium is added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the outlet 1451a corresponds to the outlet in the medium replenishing method 5, and the shape of the outlet 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment corresponds to the return prevention unit in the medium replenishing method 5.

In any of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 5, the special value medium has an information surface on which information capable of identifying the content of the special value is written, and the special value medium previously stored in the container. The value medium has a removable covering member for covering the information written on the information surface, and by covering with the covering member, the identifiability of the information is reduced as compared with that before the covering. Medium supplement method 6.

According to the medium replenishment method 6, the information surface of the special value medium is covered with the information written on the information surface (information capable of identifying the content of the special value medium), thereby reducing the identifiable property of the information. , A removable covering member is provided.

Therefore, since the special value medium is provided with the covering member that reduces the identifiability of the information by covering the information written on the information surface, the special value medium having a high value content is selected and illegally selected. In addition, when the special value medium is provided with such a covering member provided, the recipient of the special value medium has the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It is not possible to easily identify the contents of the special value shown by.

Therefore, the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering member is completed in order to confirm the content of the special value. It is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

The "information that can identify the contents of the special-value medium" is not limited to information that visually indicates the contents of the special-value medium (for example, a picture, a design, characters, etc.), but the contents of the special-value medium are coded. It also includes converted information (for example, information that can be used to determine the contents of special value by reading and processing with a corresponding reading device).

Further, in the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a, etc. correspond to the information surface in the medium replenishment method 6. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing member 4001, 4003, 4004 or the like corresponds to the covering means in the medium replenishing method 6.

In the medium replenishing method 6, the covering member includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer is 8. A medium replenishing method 7, characterized in that, when the covering member attached to the information surface is peeled off, the covering member has brittleness such that at least a part of the covering member is damaged by the stress when peeling off.

According to the medium replenishment method 7, by covering the information (information that can identify the contents of the special-value medium) written on the information surface, the covering means that reduces the identifiability of the information is a base layer and a base layer. The adhesive layer is provided on the back side of the material layer, and is adhered to the information surface by the adhesive layer.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the medium replenishment method 7, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the medium replenishment method 7.

9. The medium replenishment method 8 according to any one of medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

9. The medium replenishment method 9 according to any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

11. The medium replenishment method 10 according to any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is sent and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A medium container for accommodating the special value medium, which is mounted and used in a game machine having a special value medium providing means, wherein an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and A housing whose portion is opened to supply the special value medium, a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and the housing and the lid are difficult to separate after the housing is covered with the lid. Alternatively, it is configured to include a fixing member that is fixed inseparably, and is mounted on the game machine in a state in which the housing and the lid are difficult or inseparably fixed by the fixing member. And a medium container 1.

According to the medium container 1, an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and a housing partly opened so that the special value medium can be supplied, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game value giving means gives the game value, while when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given. The special value medium that the user has is used by mounting it on the gaming machine provided by the special value medium providing means.

Here, after the housing is covered with the lid, the housing and the lid are fixed by the fixing member in a difficult or non-separable manner. When it is mounted on the game machine, it is mounted in a state where the housing and the lid are fixed with difficulty or inseparability by the fixing member.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the medium replenisher, and thus it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before being imparted by the special value medium imparting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her expectation for the acquisition by grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium, and the player's interest in the game can be extended to the player for a longer period of time. It is possible to maintain it.

In the above-described embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the medium container 1, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the medium container 1, and the lid of the medium container 1 corresponds to the upper lid. The member 1452 corresponds to this, and the locking member 4801 corresponds to the fixing member in the medium container 1.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium container for accommodating the special value medium, which is mounted and used in a game machine equipped with the special value medium providing means, wherein an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and A housing whose part is opened to supply the special value medium, a lid for covering the opening of the housing, and the housing and the lid are separated after the housing is covered with the lid. When the casing and the lid are separated by the identifying unit, the identifying unit is attached to the gaming machine in a state of being fixed so that the separation can be identified. A medium containing body 2.

According to the medium container 2, an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, a part of which is opened so that the special value medium can be supplied, and a lid which covers the opening of the case. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game value giving means gives the game value, while when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given. The special value medium that the user has is used by mounting it on the gaming machine provided by the special value medium providing means.

Here, after the housing is covered with the lid, when the housing and the lid are separated by the identifying means, the separation is fixed so that the separation can be discriminated. When it is mounted on the game machine, when the casing and the lid are separated by the identifying means, the separation is fixed so that the separation can be discriminated.

Therefore, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated after being mounted on the gaming machine (that is, after supplementing the special value medium). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium from the medium container. As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above-described embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the medium container 2, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the medium container 2, and the top cover is the lid of the medium container 2. The member 1452 corresponds to this, and the identifying means in the medium container 2 corresponds to the identifying means exemplified as a modification in the fourteenth embodiment.

In the medium container 1 or 2, the delivery port opened in the housing so that the special value medium can be delivered, and the special value medium exposed to the outside of the enclosure through the delivery port are the housings. A medium container 3 having a return preventing portion that makes it difficult or impossible to move in the direction of returning to the inside of the body.

According to the medium container 3, the special value medium is delivered from the delivery port provided in the housing. Here, it is difficult or impossible for the special-value medium sent out from the delivery port to move back in the housing due to the presence of the return prevention unit. Therefore, extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the storage means before the special value medium is provided.

In the above embodiment, the outlet of the medium container 3 corresponds to the discharge port 1451a, and the return prevention portion of the medium container 3 corresponds to the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment.

The medium container 4 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The medium container 5 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The medium container 6 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10, 10A, 10B Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
4001 Seal member (covering means)
4003 Seal member (covering means)
4004 Seal member (covering means)
4004a Base sheet (base material layer)
4004b Adhesive layer (adhesive layer)
4501 IC tag reader (information reader)
4622 IC tag (wireless communication means)
4622a IC chip (circuit part)
4622b Antenna part (antenna part)
CA Privilege Card (Special Value Medium)
CA3 privilege card (special value medium)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and the like.

Perform a game using the predetermined game medium, predetermined game machine granting the player a game medium such as a game ball or game medals as a game value when the payout condition is satisfied (a pachinko machine or a slot machine, etc. ) Is known as a general game machine.
To such typical gaming machine, as well as imparting Yu technique worth (game medals) to the player when the Tokoro constant payout condition is satisfied, when a grant privileges based on predetermined criteria is permitted the gaming machine (slot machine) for imparting benefits associated with the game based on different predetermined game information with the game value to the player even Ru Yes.

JP, 2002-224283, A

However, such a gaming machine, since only those configured to impart benefits associated with the game based on different predetermined game information from the game value in the conventional general game machine, a conventional general It was still insufficient to solve the lack of interest in games, which was one of the problems with other gaming machines. Therefore, until the award of the game-related privilege based on the predetermined game information is confirmed, it is difficult to increase the interest of the privilege .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc. , and gives a game value to a player when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and grants a privilege based on a predetermined determination. In the case of being given, not only the privilege related to the game based on the predetermined game information different from the game value is granted to the player, but also the interest for granting the privilege is increased before the grant is confirmed. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game .

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this goal, which pays out performs game using game medium, the game medium as imparting gaming value if it meets a predetermined payout condition in the recreation a is, if it meets certain privilege granting conditions in the game, and the game-related benefits assigning means for assigning different game-related benefits with the game medium, the game related imparted by the recreation associated privilege granting means A game-related privilege determination means capable of determining the type of privilege before the game-related privilege is given to the player, and the game-related privilege for the player when a predetermined game condition is satisfied in the game. Before being given, means for suggesting or notifying the type of the game-related privilege based on the judgment by the game-related privilege judgment means .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a game is played using the game medium, and when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied in the game, the game medium is paid out as a value of the game is paid out. When a predetermined privilege grant condition is satisfied, a game-related privilege granting unit that grants a game-related privilege different from the game medium, and a type of the game-related privilege granted by the game-related privilege granting unit are defined by the player. A game-related privilege determination means that can be determined prior to the granting of the game-related privilege to the player, and before the game-related privilege is granted to the player if a predetermined game condition is satisfied in the game. , And means for suggesting or notifying the type of the game-related privilege based on the discrimination by the game-related privilege discriminating means, so that the game value is given to the player when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. If the privilege is granted based on the predetermined judgment, the privilege related to the game based on the predetermined game information different from the game value is not only granted to the player, but also the privilege is granted. There is an effect that the interest for can be increased before the grant is confirmed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is sectional drawing which shows a privilege coin payout device typically. (A) And (b) is a perspective view which shows the bottom member in a privilege coin payout device, (c) is a perspective view which shows a standby member. It is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the payout of privilege coins by the privilege coin payout device. (A) is a front view of a privilege coin, (b) is a sectional view taken along line VIIb-VIIb in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual screen and effective line setting in a 3rd symbol display device. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed in the main process of FIG. 12. 13 is a flow chart showing a variation start process executed in the symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 15. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. 20 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol variable display process performed in the main process of FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a coin payout setting process executed in the decorative symbol variable display process of FIG. 20. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a complete omission counting process executed in the coin payout setting process of FIG. 22. It is a flowchart which shows the change production setting process performed in the decorative symbol change display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process performed in the decorative symbol variable display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the disengagement stop symbol setting process performed in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a coin payout process executed in the main process of FIG. 19. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the card information reading device as viewed from the top side, and (b) is a schematic internal structure of the card information reading device as viewed from the side. It is a sectional view showing typically, and (c) is a sectional view showing typically the case where a privilege card is attached to a card information reader. (A) is sectional drawing which shows typically an internal structure at the time of seeing a privilege card discharge device from the side surface, (b) is a schematic front view which saw the privilege card discharge device from the discharge side. And (c) is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device as viewed from the top side. FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining a privilege card discharging operation by the privilege card discharging device. (A) is a front view of a privilege card, (b) is a rear view of a privilege card, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line X8c-X8c in (a). It is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in a card information area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot effect setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the addition condition satisfaction confirmation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card discharge process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a receiver card reading process executed in the receiver card confirmation process of FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge mode change process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the addition condition satisfaction confirmation process of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a detachment reach discharge mode process executed in the imparting condition satisfaction confirmation process of FIG. 61. FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device as viewed from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Zb-Zb of the privilege card discharging device, (c) [Fig. 4] is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the standby member of the privilege card discharging device when viewed from the top side. FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining a privilege card discharging operation by the privilege card discharging device. (A) is a front view of a privilege card, (b) is a rear view of a privilege card. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in a card information area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion production completion confirmation process performed in the command determination process of FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 72. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process performed in the variation effect setting process of FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the stop design setting processing which is executed in the fluctuation production setting processing in Figure 73. It is a flowchart which shows the disengagement stop symbol setting process performed in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. 70 is a flowchart showing a card ejection process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge completion confirmation process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part card confirmation process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a receiver card reading process executed in the receiver card confirmation process of FIG. 82. FIG. (A) is a top view which shows typically several privilege cards piled up in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a sectional side view which shows the state of the privilege card of (a) typically. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a privilege card used in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of privilege cards stacked in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the eighth embodiment. It is a typical side sectional view for explaining the composition of a 9th embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 10th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 10th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the privilege card in 11th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the privilege card in 11th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 12th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 12th Embodiment, ( FIG. 13C is a sectional view of a seal member attached to a privilege card in the twelfth embodiment. It is a typical side sectional view for explaining the composition which reads the information on the IC tag of the seal member stuck on each privilege card in a card discharge device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows discharge card confirmation processing performed by MPU of a voice lamp control device. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 13th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the state of the privilege card in 13th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows typically the internal structure at the time of seeing the privilege card ejection apparatus in 14th Embodiment from a side surface, (b) is an enlarged view of the Ex section in (a).

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17.

The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when changing the effect contents during the reach effect.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach production, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided. In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done.

Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. A touch sensor (not shown) for this purpose and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance are incorporated.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and in accordance with the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the variable resistance value of the variable resistor, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

On the left side of the lower plate 50, an opening 54 for paying out a bonus coin C (see FIG. 7) described later is formed, and below the opening 54, a coin for receiving the bonus coin C paid out. The payout tray 53 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. A bonus coin payout device 450 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided on the back surface side of the lower plate unit 15 as a payout device for bonus coins C paid out from the opening 54.

On the left side of the coin payout tray 53, a coin information reading device 300 is formed so as to project forward. A concave coin receiving portion 300a is formed on the upper surface of the coin information reading device 300, and the bonus coin C can be detachably (detachably) attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. There is.

Further, the coin information reading device 300 has an IC tag reader 302 for the receiving portion (see FIG. 8), and the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C mounted in the coin receiving portion 300a (see FIG. 7). From the reference), the coin information as the special value can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

A coin effect button 301 is provided on the front surface (the surface on the front view side) of the coin information reading device 300. This coin effect button 301 is used when the player desires the appearance of the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving portion 300a, or when the reach effect as the privilege is revealed. Is a button that can be operated by the player when the appearance of the reach effect is unnecessary.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to a back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16, so that a game can be played on the front surface of the game board 13 due to the behavior of the ball. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area which is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, indicate whether it is changing or not by a lighting state, and a stop symbol corresponding to a probability variation jackpot. It also indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a deviating symbol by a lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, the above-mentioned probability that the pachinko machine 10 is changing is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability increases and a special gaming state is likely to occur. Furthermore, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the ball is in a game state where it is easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state in which it is easy for the ball to easily enter the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 3) because the jackpot probability remains unchanged and only the second symbol hit probability increases. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, which is a state of a game that is neither probable change nor time saving (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is improved). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball inlet 64 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time are changed. Good as a thing.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that variably displays the third symbol triggered by winning in the first entrance 64. A second symbol display device 82 including a light emitting diode (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with passage of the sphere of the second ball entrance 67 as a trigger is provided.

The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the center frame 86. Is provided. Third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed in the first symbol display device 37, in the display of the first symbol display device 37 A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the LCD, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 before the stop symbol (any one of the probability variation jackpot symbol, the regular jackpot symbol, and the deviation symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the hold lamp 85. Four reserve lamps 85 are provided for the maximum reserve number, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, and three times or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times of variable display based on winning in the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed as a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is reserved. The display may be performed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different for the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

The second symbol display device 82 has a display unit 83 for the second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, as a display symbol (second symbol) on the display unit 83. The symbol "○" and the symbol "X" are alternately turned on to perform variable display, and when the variable display is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, symbol "○"), the first The ball entrance 64 is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the holding lamp 84 is also lit up. The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it perform using a part of. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of times of passing through the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times (for example, (8 times). Further, since the number of times of holding is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a lottery for the main controller 110 is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (a solenoid 209 (Fig. 8)) part)). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66 and a second inlet (through gate) 67. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, a bonus coin payout device 450, which is a payout device for paying out the bonus coins C, will be described. FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the privilege coin payout device 450. 5A and 5B are perspective views showing the bottom member 462 of the privilege coin payout device 450, and FIG. 5C is a perspective view showing the standby member 470.

As shown in FIG. 4, the privilege coin payout device 450 is a storage member 460 capable of storing a plurality of privilege coins C, and a temporary interval before paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54, separated from the storage member 460. And a standby member 470, which is a typical standby portion.

The storage member 460 in the privilege coin payout device 450 is a cylindrical peripheral wall member 461, a bottom member 462 located at the lower end side of the peripheral wall member 461 and movably provided with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, and the peripheral wall member 461. A lid member 463 for covering the opening at the upper end and a coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) serving as a drive source for moving the bottom member 462 in the front-rear direction (the arrow F direction and the opposite direction) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461. Have

In the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462, a plurality of privilege coins C can be stacked and accommodated in the thickness direction. The lid member 463 is configured to be removable, and can be removed as necessary, for example, when the privilege coin C is replenished in the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462. The lid member 463 is provided with a biasing member 463a that biases the stacked privilege coins C from above in order to stabilize payout of the privilege coins C.

The bottom member 462 includes a peripheral wall portion 462a having an inner peripheral wall that communicates with the inner peripheral wall of the peripheral wall member 461, and a bottom lid portion 462b that is openable and closable with respect to the peripheral wall member 462a by rotating about a shaft 462c. have.

In the bottom member 462, when the bottom cover 462b is closed, the depth (height) of the internal space formed by the peripheral wall 462a and the bottom cover 462b is the number of sheets to be paid out at one time (this embodiment). In the form, it is configured so as to be able to store the privilege coin C for one coin.

Specifically, when the bottom cover 462b is closed, the depth y of the internal space formed by the peripheral wall 462a and the bottom cover 462b is once when the thickness of the privilege coin C is x. When the number of bonus coins C paid out to is a, the depth is such that the relationship “(a-1)x<y≦ax” is established. In addition, a slight offset α (for example, α is about 1/10 of the thickness x of the privilege coin C) is provided so as not to affect the number of privilege coins C paid out at one time, and the peripheral wall portion 462a and the bottom cover portion 462b are provided. The depth y of the internal space formed by and may be the depth that satisfies the relationship of “(a−1)x<y≦a(x+α)”.

The bottom lid portion 462b is rotated around the shaft 462c by its own weight to be opened, so that the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 5A) changes to the opened state (the state shown in FIG. 5B). It is configured. As shown in FIG. 4, a support member 465 is provided below the storage member 460, and when the storage member 460 is in the normal state (state shown in FIG. 4), the upper end 465b of the support member 465 is By supporting the bottom lid portion 462b, the closed state of the bottom lid portion 462b is maintained.

On the other hand, when the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 reaches a position not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom of the bottom member 462 is reached. The lid 462b is rotated around the shaft 462c by its own weight to be opened, and as a result, one piece of the privilege coin C stored in the bottom member 462 is supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470 (FIG. 6 ( See a)).

When the bottom cover portion 462b of the bottom member 462 is removed from being supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom cover portion 462b is supported by the slope surface 465a of the support member 465, which slopes downward toward the lower plate unit 15 side. It is configured not to be opened beyond the inclination of 465a.

Further, the bottom member 462 is a privilege coin other than the one privilege coin C supplied to the standby member 470 when it is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, that is, of the peripheral wall member 461. It has a support plate 462d for prohibiting movement of the privilege coin C left in the internal space.

On the other hand, the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 includes a main body 471 and a coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) that serves as a drive source for moving the main body 471 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow U and the opposite direction). And have.

The main body portion 471 has an inclined surface 471a that descends and is inclined toward the lower plate unit 15 side, and a rib 471b that is provided upright around the storage member 460 side. In the normal state (state shown in FIG. 4), the main body portion 471 is located below the opening 54 of the lower plate unit 15 and is moved upward (in the direction of arrow U) by being driven by the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8). Is configured to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a payout IC tag reader 501 is arranged beside the standby member 470 in the normal state (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 5C). By the payout IC tag reader 501, the special coin C located on the standby member 470, that is, the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7) embedded in the special coin C to be paid out next time through the opening 54 is treated as a special value. Of the coin information can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

Here, since the standby member 470 is arranged apart from the storage member 460, it is possible to prevent the payout IC tag reader 501 from erroneously reading the coin information of the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460. You can

The main body 471 of the standby member 470 is made of a material that does not interfere with the transmission of a transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.) used for reading information, such as a non-metal such as resin, so that coin information can be read stably. It is preferable to be composed of the above material.

On the other hand, the storage member 460 is preferably made of a material, for example, a metal, which obstructs transmission of a transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.) used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7).

By configuring the storage member 460 from a material that interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium used for reading the coin information from the IC tag 602, the payout IC tag reader 501 allows the special coin C stored inside the storage member 460. It is possible to prevent reading the coin information of. As a result, the payout IC tag reader 501 can reliably read only the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470.

As described above, the privilege coin payout device 450 according to the present embodiment supplies (discharges, transfers) the plurality of privilege coins C stored in the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 one by one, and then, onto the standby member 470. The coin information of the privilege coin C located is read out.

With this configuration, each type of privilege coin C can be stored in the storage member 460 regardless of the type of the privilege coin C (that is, the content of the coin information of the privilege coin C).

Therefore, the manager who manages the privilege coin C (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 that can pay out the privilege coin C is installed) additionally supplies the privilege coin C to the storage member 460. In doing so, the privilege coins C are not sorted according to their type (that is, the content of the coin information). Therefore, the management load of the administrator who manages the privilege coin C is suppressed (reduced).

Further, since only one privilege coin C is on standby in the standby member 470, the type of the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the opening 54 is recognized by the reading by the payout IC tag reader 501. be able to. Therefore, when a suggestion condition described below is satisfied (satisfied), a variable display (dynamic display) or a stop display in a mode according to the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suggest (or inform) the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the operation of the above-described privilege coin payout device 450 for paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54 will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the payout of the privilege coin C by the privilege coin payout device 450.

When supplying one privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, first, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excitation), and the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F). To move.

Here, when the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 reaches a position where it is not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, as shown in FIG. 6A, the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 rotates around the shaft 462c by its own weight. It is rotated and released.

Then, one privilege coin C stored in the bottom member 462 slides in the direction of the arrow M1, and as a result, the privilege coin C is supplied to the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470. As a result, one piece of privilege coin C is brought into a state of waiting for payout from the opening 54 in the main body 471.

Here, when the bottom member 462 moves forward (in the direction of arrow F), the support plate 462d is located below the peripheral wall member 461, and the support plate 462d supports the internal space of the peripheral wall member 461. The movement of the remaining privilege coin C is prevented.

Then, when the bonus coin C is supplied to the main body 471 of the standby member 470, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the bottom member 462 is moved rearward (direction of arrow B). As a result, the storage member 460 returns to the normal state, and a new privilege coin C is stored in the bottom member 472 accordingly.

On the other hand, when paying out the privilege coin C from the opening 54, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excited). When the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on, the main body 471 moves upward (direction of arrow U).

Here, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the inclined surface 471a of the main body 471 reaches the opening 54, the privilege coin C that has been on standby by the standby member 470 (main body 471) slides in the direction of arrow M2. As a result, it is dispensed to the outside through the opening 54. After that, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the main body 471 is moved downward (direction of arrow D). As a result, the main body 471 returns to the normal state, and the new privilege coin C supplied from the storage member 460 can be received.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the privilege coin C used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. 7A is a front view of the privilege coin C, and FIG. 7B is a sectional view taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the bonus coin C is a medium formed in a coin shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a coin main body 601 made of a non-metal material such as resin, It is composed of an IC tag 602 embedded inside the coin body 601.

The IC tag 602 is a wireless tag mainly including a small IC (Integrated Circuit) chip (not shown) and a built-in antenna (not shown). Generally, the IC tag 602 and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) are provided. ) Tags or electronic tags.

The IC tag 602 embedded inside the privilege coin C (coin body 601) of the present embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. An active type IC tag having a built-in battery may be adopted as the IC tag 602.

The IC chip (not shown) of the IC tag 602 has a non-rewritable memory that can store information in a non-volatile manner (for example, ROM or WOROM (Write Once ROM)). Then, the coin information as a special value is stored in the non-rewritable memory.

The coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is five types of main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). Of the (identification information), this is information indicating one main symbol, and the type of the privilege coin C is distinguished by such coin information.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C can be recognized from the design of the surface of the coin body 601. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the privilege coin C in which the octopus pattern is designed on the surface of the coin body 601 stores information indicating the octopus pattern corresponding to “1”, Can visually recognize the design of the surface of the coin body 601 to know the type of privilege coin C (contents of coin information).

In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by mounting one piece of the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300, a symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the mounted privilege coin C, that is, The reach effect using any one of the five main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) can be displayed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting/receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, I/O, and other values are stored. Area) and. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 11). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Is input to the RAM 203, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) as the power failure processing is immediately executed, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a hold lamp 84, and various switches including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown). A solenoid 209 including 208, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a in the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and corresponds to the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the firing solenoid is excited, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice output from the voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the light output from the lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. It is for controlling setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that is performed. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory.

Here, the ROM 222 has a coin type table 222a that associates the coin information with the coin type (that is, the symbol) indicated by the coin information. The coin information of the privilege coin C read by the payout IC tag reader 501 or the receiving IC tag reader 302 can identify the type of the privilege coin C by referring to the coin type table 222a.

The RAM 223 includes a payout coin memory 223a, a receiving coin memory 223b, a complete removal counter 223c, a coin payout suggestion flag 223d, a coin payout confirmation flag 223e, a coin payout flag 223f, a coin supply flag 223g, and a receiving part. It has a coin flag 223h.

The payout coin memory 223a is a memory for storing the type of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 (main body 471) of the privilege coin payout device 450, that is, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time. Although details will be described later, when the suggestion condition is satisfied and the display for suggesting the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is performed on the third symbol display device 82, the privilege stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The display is set based on the type of coin C.

The receiving coin memory 223b is a memory for storing the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving portion 300a of the coin information reading device 300. Although details will be described later, when performing a reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a, the reach effect is set based on the type of the privilege coin C stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b. Is done.

The complete disengagement counter 223c sends a variation pattern command corresponding to complete disengagement from the main control device 110 in a state where the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is not suggested (that is, a state in which the suggestion condition is not satisfied). It is a counter for counting the number of consecutive receptions.

The complete deviation counter 223c is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to when the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the perfect deviation is interrupted, that is, the reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation at normal or probability variation jackpot, front-back deviation reach, and reach other than front-back deviation). When a command is received from main controller 110, it is cleared to 0. Further, the complete disconnection counter 223c is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the complete disengagement counter 223c reaches 30, that is, when the complete disengagement occurs 30 times in succession, the bonus coin to be paid out next time. The suggestion condition, which is a condition for starting suggestion (or notification) of the type C, is configured to be satisfied.

The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is a flag that indicates whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied. If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on, it indicates that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The coin payout suggestion flag 223d, which is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied, is then turned off when the privilege coin C is paid out from the opening 54.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received from the main control device 110 30 times, or regardless of the receipt of the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection. When the condition for awarding bonus coins is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main controller 110), the suggestion condition is established and the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on.

The coin payout confirmation flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the payout of the privilege coin C has been confirmed. If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on, it means that the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed because the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied.

The coin payout confirmation flag 223e is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is mainly used). It is turned on when it is received from the control device 110). The coin payout confirmation flag 223e, which is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied, is then turned on by receiving a stop command from the main control device 110.

The coin payout flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the payout operation of the privilege coin C is performed. If the coin payout flag 223f is on, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later, and the privilege coin C is paid out from the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450. The action of issuing is performed.

The coin payout flag 223f is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the benefit coin C is paid out. More specifically, after the payment of the bonus coin C is confirmed by receiving the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, it is turned on by receiving the stop command from the main control device 110. The coin payout flag 223f thus turned on is turned off when the operation of paying out the privilege coin C from the standby member 470 is completed in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

The coin supply flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the supply operation (transfer) of the privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is performed. If the coin supply flag 223g is turned on, the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later, and the supply operation of the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is performed. Is done.

The coin supply flag 223g is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the payout of the privilege coin C is completed. The coin supply flag 223g thus turned on is turned off when the supply operation of the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is completed in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

The receiving section coin flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving section 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is performed. If the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on, the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a is executed.

This coin receiving part flag 223h is a customer waiting effect under the condition that the bonus coin C is mounted on the coin accepting part 300a (an effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time). When the coin effect button 301 is pressed, the state is inverted each time. Specifically, when the coin effect button 301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect under the condition that the bonus coin C is attached to the coin accepting part 300a, the coin accepting part flag 223h is turned on if it is off. On the other hand, if the coin receiving portion flag 223h is on, it is turned off. The coin receiving portion flag 223h is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed, the command stored first in the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 has a main controller 110, a display controller 114, a voice output device 226 for outputting voice from a speaker (not shown), a lamp display device 227 for performing lamp display by the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, The payout IC tag reader 501, the receiving IC tag reader 302, the coin effect button 301, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 in the privilege coin payout device 450, etc. are respectively connected.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, bus lines 239 and 240. Equipped with. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same specification as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is another model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and has a variable time counter (not shown).

Here, the variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) from the start of the variation effect when the variation effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81. This fluctuation time counter is reset to zero (see S1404 of FIG. 33) immediately before the fluctuation effect is started in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 33) executed every 20 milliseconds, and the third symbol display device 81. It is updated by adding 1 every time the variable effect process is executed while the variable effect is being performed (see S1408 in FIG. 33). That is, the variable time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the fluctuation effect process, the fluctuation effect data and the continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter are read from the video RAM 234 described later, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the image corresponding to the effect data.

In addition, the work RAM 233 has, as flags (not shown), a production permission flag indicating whether or not production permission has been given, and a variation start flag indicating whether or not variation display should be started. The production permission flag is turned on when the production permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the power is cut off. (Not shown). Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the display fluctuation pattern command for instructing the mode of the fluctuation effect or the continuous notice effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 is received (S1206 in FIG. 31). ), when the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (see S1403 in FIG. 33).

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for presentation such as symbols (background symbol and third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format.

The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the data for the variable effect after decompression displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter, referred to as “variable effect data”) and the like. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in association with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. Accordingly, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) after the variation effect is started. The variable effect data for performing a new reach effect corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C is stored in the video RAM 234 together with other variable effect data.

Further, the video RAM 234 is provided with a variation effect area (not shown). The variable effect area (not shown) is an area for storing the variable effect data of the variable effect (variable display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines the variation elapsed time from the variation effect data in the form indicated by the display variation pattern command stored in advance in the video RAM 234. The variation effect data is read out and stored in this variation effect area (see S1406 in FIG. 33). The variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1407 in FIG. 33). Then, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the variation effect area in accordance with the variation elapsed time.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. To be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213 to complete the process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and at the same time, the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37, and lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 82.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used.

The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. It is appropriately stored in the created counter buffer.

The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored according to the winning timing of the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 738, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Here, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value=0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. , And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in. There are two types of random number values for jackpots, one for low probability and one for high probability, and the number of random number values for jackpot in low probability is 2, and the value is "373,727". The number of random numbers that are a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59,109,163,211,263,317,367,421,479,523,631,683,733".

The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit, and in the present embodiment, one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, It is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes a low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two kinds of hit types are determined. It Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high-probability state and a low-probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to the deviation. One of the three display modes in total is selected.

The high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability variation.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. And "rear out-of-front-reach" (for example, a range of 0 to 8) and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" (e.g., a range of 9 to 38) in which the last stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely disengaged" (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Is stored.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables in which the range of random number values for which the stop pattern is selected is different. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, in which area of the reserved sphere storage area each random value is stored (that is, the number of reserved pieces), and the like. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected with a range of random values of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “complete deviation” so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, so that it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". Further, if each random number value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, the disturbance corresponding to the “completely missed” stop pattern in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical range of 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than out of front/back" is widened to 9 to 50, and "reach other than out of front/rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily continued.

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) before returning to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 240, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the variation symbol number) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the medium symbol) is stopped after the reach is generated.

Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or similarly determine the symbol variation mode by the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stopped symbol. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third fluctuation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and besides the symbol variation, sliding the varying symbol, A notice effect is given such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, an effect pattern in which the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, the variable time is subtracted to reduce the time of variable display, or the variable time is not added or subtracted is selected. ..

As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values for which the effect patterns are selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on the low probability state, which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, and the like.

As described above, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 determine the variation time of the symbol variation, and the variation type counter CS3 determines the time to be added to and subtracted from the variation time. Therefore, the final change time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the change type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. Is obtained when The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting in the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol is 9 types of main symbols consisting of 9 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers "1" to "9", and one type of sub-symbol (smaller in this embodiment) formed smaller than the main symbols. It is composed of a picture of a shellfish). These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub-symbols between each main symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is displayed, and a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display ends. It is configured as follows. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of a big hit, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are displayed is performed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to even-numbered numbers (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) are arranged is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the main symbol and the sub symbol for each symbol row are cyclically scrolled from right to left (direction of arrow X) to scroll (horizontal scrolling). To be done.

In such a horizontal scroll, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in a descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are arranged so as to appear in an ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 10, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is arranged in each of the symbol columns (Z1 to Z3) in three stages of left/middle/right or upper/middle/lower. Is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns.

Here, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set in any case during horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, five lines including a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a rightward rising line L4, and a leftward rising line L5 are set as valid lines.

Then, in each game, when a variation of horizontal scrolling is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on one of the activated lines. .. At this time, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol sequence Z1, the lower symbol sequence Z3, and the middle symbol sequence Z2.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer allocation that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 11, in this start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power-off has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination. If the value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case also the process proceeds to S111. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main control device 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as a regular processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) or the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output processing (S201), for example, it is determined whether or not there is the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S501 (see FIG. 15), and if there is the winning detection information, the number of balls acquired for the payout control device 111 is determined. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted. Further, by this external output processing (S201), the variable pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, or the ball. In the case of launching, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the respective values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the first A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the jackpot state is executed (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly described, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is also acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display section 83 of. Then, the lottery for the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208), If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes after S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 and 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, the process at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S207 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 ends or the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

As shown in FIG. 13, in this variation process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 during the jackpot and the predetermined time period after the jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this processing is ended.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation-holding balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-holding balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number N of operation reserve balls> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of operation reserve balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserve ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area.

After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3, and this change time is If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to the value of the first per random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, a symbol which becomes a high probability state after the big hit according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether or not the symbol becomes a low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on if the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on if the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on if the probability is off. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. The command is set (S310). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the stop command, the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13). In this variation start processing (S306), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a normal low probability, “7,307” of the numerical values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 is a win value, and when the probability is high, “28, 30”. 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618" are the winning values.

When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402). ).

In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high-probability state after the big hit (probability variation big hit) or to shift to the low-probability state (normal big hit) is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. In addition, among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to a low probability state (normal big hit) thereafter, and in the case of "0, 4", the following. , Transition to high probability state (probability variation jackpot).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot is not the big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether it is the high probability state or the low probability state. ..

Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the detachment symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

After the processing of S403 or the processing of S405, the variation pattern command is set (S406). In the processing of S406, the variation pattern command at the time of the big hit is the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S403 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, a normal big hit or a probability big hit). It is set according to Further, in the processing of S406, the variation pattern command at the time of deviation is the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S405 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (that is, front/rear outreach or other than front/rear outreach). It is set according to whether it is reach or complete loss.

After the process of S406, a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404 (S407), and then the process returns to the variation process.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S201 of the main process (see FIG. 12), these commands are voice lamps. It is transmitted to the control device 113.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) associated with the winning in the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor, and turns on/off the firing of the ball on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

When this start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S602).

After the processing of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of operation-holding balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the number N of operation reserve balls <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of operation reserve balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The respective values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area of the empty holding areas of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605).

On the other hand, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 but the number N of operation-holding balls is not N<4 (S603: No) , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer allocation that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There is a built-in process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2115 (see FIG. 19) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 19, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2112 in FIG. 19), the power-off process of S2115 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2115 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004.

On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2115 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2005: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2115, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on before executing the power-off processing in S2115 (see S2114 in FIG. 19). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2115 is executed, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are already cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

After the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S2010, the privilege coin payout device 450 is set (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Here, in the process of S2011, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege coin C is located on the main body 471 of the standby member 470, and when the privilege coin C is not located on the main body 471 of the standby member 470, Turns on the coin supply solenoid 464 to supply the bonus coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, and ends the processing of S2011. On the other hand, when the privilege coin C is located on the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470, the processing of S2011 is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a main process executed after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing (S2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), The process moves to S2110 without performing S2102 to S2109.

Here, in the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2109 that determines whether 1 ms has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the update processing (see S2301 of FIG. 21) of each counter in the decorative symbol variable display processing of S2110 and the command determination processing of S2111 in a short cycle. By executing the command determination process in S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2107 described later ( After that, the power-on notification process is executed (S2103).

The power-on notification process (S2103) is for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S2104 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2104, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2105). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen (demo screen) is performed, and the setting is a command. Is transmitted to the display controller 114. In the hold quantity display updating process, the hold lamp 85 is turned on according to the value of the hold count counter 223a.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2106). In this frame button input monitoring/production process (S2106), if the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to. For example, when the notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It may be changed to a production that can be held or may be an enter button for selecting one of the reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2106 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2107), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process (S2107), the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process (S2108), the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. It

After the process of S2108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S2108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

The process of S2110 is a process of setting the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) on the third symbol display device 81, and transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 114. The details of the decorative symbol variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) is executed, a coin payout process for paying out the privilege coin C from the privilege coin payout device 450 is executed (S2111). The detailed processing of this coin payout processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2111, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2112). Details of this command determination processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S2112) is executed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed.

If the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he or she can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2112) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

In this command determination processing (S2112), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is analyzed to perform main control. It is confirmed whether the fluctuation pattern command is received from the device 110 (S2201).

When the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2201, the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205).

After the processing of S2205, the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2206). The variation time extracted by the process of S2206 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when the variation effect mode is set in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

After the process of S2206, the display mode (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front reach, complete out) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2207), the command determination process (S2112) ends, and the main Return to processing. The display mode extracted by the process of S2207 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is related to the setting of the mode of the variable effect in the decorative pattern variable display process (see FIG. 21) described later and the payout of the bonus coin C. It is used when setting.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). ..

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202: Yes), the stop symbol from the stop symbol command (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, front-back deviation reach, reach other than front-back deviation, Any one of the complete deviations is extracted (S2213), the command determination processing (S2112) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing. The stop symbol extracted by the process of S2213 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223 and is used when the stop symbol is set in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is on, that is, whether the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege coin C (S2209). That is, is the stop command being processed received after the reception of the command corresponding to the probability variation big hit (the variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the present embodiment) which is the condition for giving the privilege coin C? To confirm.

If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is on (S2209: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2209, the stop command in process is the stop command received after receiving the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. The payout flag 223f is turned on (S2210).

When the coin payout flag 223f is turned on in the process of S2210, in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described below, the coin payout flag 223f is located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in synchronization with the stop display of the probability variation big hit. The reward coin C is paid out.

After the process of S2210, the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned off (S2211), the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned off (S2212), the command determination process (S2112) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2209, if the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is off, that is, if the condition for granting the privilege coin C is not satisfied (S2209: No), the processes of S2210 to S2212 are skipped, The command determination process (S2112) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

In addition, as a result of checking by the process of S2203, when the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2203: No), other commands (that is, variation pattern command, stop symbol command, or other than the stop symbol command) Command) has been received, a process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2204), the command determination process (S2112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

In the processing of S2204, if the received other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 233. Alternatively, if the received other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the decorative symbol variable display processing (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 21, in the decorative symbol variable display process (S2110), first, various counters (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 (a counter for setting the effect mode of the variable effect, a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of a normal jackpot). , Update processing of a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of detachment) is executed (S2301).

After the processing of S2301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302). As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2302: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. The decorative symbol variable display process (S2110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the coin payout setting process is executed (S2304). ). Here, in the coin payout setting process (S2304), based on the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2212, the setting relating to the payout of the privilege coin C is performed. The detailed process of this coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the coin payout setting process (S2304), the variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2205).

After the process of S2205, the mode of the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable time acquired by the process of S2206 and the setting by the coin payout setting process (S2304). The variation effect setting process is executed (S2306). The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2306), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2307). The detailed process of the stop symbol setting process (S2307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2306) is output to the display control device 114. (S2308).

Then, a display stop symbol command for instructing the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309), and this variable display process is performed. Ends and returns to the main processing.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Next, the above-mentioned coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a coin payout setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 22, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), first, it is confirmed whether or not a command indicating a big hit has been received (S2401). In the process of S2401, it is confirmed whether the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2401).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2401, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2401, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a mode indicating a deviation (front/rear reach, reach other than front/rear, complete disconnection) (S2401: No), it is It is confirmed whether the reach is off (S2406).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2406, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is out-of-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear) (S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

Therefore, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), if the variation pattern command indicates a display mode other than complete deviation, the process of S2402 is executed. In the process of S2402, the complete removal counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S2402).

After the processing of S2402, it is confirmed whether or not the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates the probability variation jackpot (S2403), and if it is the probability variation jackpot (S2403: Yes), the condition for granting the privilege coin C is satisfied. Therefore, the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on (S2404).

By the coin payout confirmation flag 223e being turned on in the process of S2404, at the end of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command (that is, at the stop display), the privilege The privilege coin C that is on standby on the standby member 470 of the coin payout device 450 is paid out from the opening 54.

After the processing of S2404, the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on (S2405), and the coin payout setting processing (S2304) is ended. Since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2304, the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received fluctuation pattern command is a bonus coin to be paid out next time. It is performed in a mode of suggesting (or notifying) the type of C.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2406, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is not out-reach, that is, is completely out (S2406: Yes), the number of times of receiving the variation pattern command indicating complete out-of-sync is determined. The complete out-of-count process of counting is executed (S2407), and the coin payout setting process (S2304) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the above-described complete deviation count processing (S2407) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the complete omission counting process (S2407) executed in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

As shown in FIG. 23, in this complete disconnection counting process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2501). As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2501, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2501: No), the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is not made on the third symbol display device 81, Since the number of continuous receptions of the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is being counted, the complete disconnection counter 223c is incremented by 1 in this case (S2502).

After the processing of S2502, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the complete deviation counter 223c is 30 or more (S2503), and if the value of the complete deviation counter 223c is 30 or more (complete deviation counter 223c≧30) (S2503: Yes), Since the variation pattern command corresponding to complete failure is received 30 times in succession, the suggestion condition that is the condition for starting the suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied, so the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on. (S2504), the complete disconnection counting process (S2407) ends.

Although details will be described later, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the reach effect mode (change mode) that indicates the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time (change mode). ) Can be set. Further, since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is set in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25) or the disengaged stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26). It is possible to set the suggested stop design.

In general, the player has a desire to generate a jackpot game, so the variable display (or the stop display at the time of stop) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the jackpot state. If it continues to be completely out of line with the above, the player who sees it will gradually lose interest in the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion condition is satisfied and the coin payout suggestion is made when the variable display indicating the complete deviation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. The flag 223d is turned on. As a result, it is possible to set a stop symbol that suggests the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time, so that the player can be expected to acquire the bonus coin C.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the expectation for another value (privilege coin C) even in a gaming state in which a prize ball cannot be expected to be obtained, and thus the conventional general You can experience new game play that was not available in gaming machines. Therefore, such a new game property becomes a new added value, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a long time.

Since the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on in the process of S2504, the variable display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received fluctuation pattern command is a bonus coin to be paid out next time. It will be performed in a manner that suggests the type of C.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2503, if the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is less than 30 (S2503: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, so the processing of S2504 is skipped and this complete disconnection is performed. The counting process (S2407) ends.

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2501: Yes) as a result of confirmation by the process of S2501, the suggestion condition has already been established, and the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is the symbol display device. Since it is performed at 81, the processing of S2502 to S2504 is skipped, and the complete deviation count processing (S2407) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 24, in the variation effect setting process (S2304), first, is the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) showing complete deviation? Is confirmed (S2601).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2601, if the display mode extracted from the fluctuation pattern command indicates complete deviation (S2601: Yes), the deviation fluctuation effect as the effect mode of the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A mode is set (S2606), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) is ended. In the process of S2606, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the outlier fluctuation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2601, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (rear out-of-front/reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2602.

In S2602, it is confirmed whether or not the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a normal jackpot (S2602).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2602, when the display mode extracted from the fluctuation pattern command does not normally indicate a jackpot, that is, the received fluctuation pattern command indicates a probability variation jackpot or out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out-of-front/reach). If it is shown (S2602: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S2603). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 has been operated in response to the player's desire to display the reach effect using the bonus coin C on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2603, if the receiving portion coin flag 223h is on (S2603: Yes), it is desired to display the reach effect using the privilege coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, the reach effect mode is set (S2607) based on the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b and the change time that defines the reach type (normal reach, special reach, etc.) (S2607). The setting process (S2306) ends.

The reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 is stored in the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b, that is, in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. It is a reach effect mode as a privilege including a pattern corresponding to the coin information that is present.

For example, when the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (the value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C mounted on the coin information reading device 300) corresponds to the octopus symbol, this octopus symbol A new reach production mode using is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

As an example of the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, and the remaining one column is displayed. As a result, a new reach production mode which is not usual and which includes a notice production in which the symbols pass as a group (so-called a school of fish) is illustrated. Further, while the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column is changed and the symbols are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.). ) May be a new reach production mode which is not normally performed.

As a result of the process of S2607, the reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2603, if the receiving coin flag 223h is off (S2603: No), it is confirmed whether the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2604). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting the suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied.

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S2604 (S2604; Yes), the suggestion condition is satisfied, and in such a case, the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, Based on the variation time period that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.), the reach effect mode is set (S2605), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) ends.

The reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 is the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, that is, the IC tag 602 of the bonus coin C to be paid out next, which is located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450. It is a new reach effect mode including a pattern corresponding to the coin information stored in. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using this octopus symbol is set.

As the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a in three columns are the same as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 described above. In a state where the two columns are stopped and displayed, the remaining one column fluctuates, and a new reach production mode which is not usually included including a notice production that the symbol passes through as a group (so-called a school of fish) and While the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the partial coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates and the symbols are highlighted (enlarged display etc.). An example of a new reach production mode, which is not usual, is illustrated.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the establishment of the suggestion condition) and the process of S2607 are set. If the coin information of the target privilege coin C is the same as the reach effect mode (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), the coin. The same reach effect mode using the design corresponding to the information is set. For example, with the reach effect mode set by the processes of S2605 and S2607, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two columns out of three, and the remaining 1 As the row changes, the reach effect mode including the notice effect in which the symbols pass as a group is set.

As a result of the processing in S2605, a new reach effect mode corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is a value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time, a new reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the process of S2605. The mode is a variation mode (variation display mode) that suggests the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

Here, as described above, one of the requirements for satisfying the suggestion condition is that the complete deviation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is continuously displayed for a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment). is there. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied based on the fact that the complete disengagement has continued, the variation display for the probability variation jackpot or the outreach (rear out-of-front reach, non-rear-reach reach) is the third symbol. When it is performed on the display device 81, the variable display is performed in a new reach effect mode including a symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time.

Therefore, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the appearance frequency of a new reach production mode including a specific symbol corresponding to the bonus coin C to be paid out next time increases. As a result of the increase in the appearance frequency of the special reach effect mode including the specific symbol, the player recognizes the special reach effect mode including the specific symbol as a significant reach effect mode, and is paid out next time. It is possible to play a game while expecting to obtain the privilege coin C to be provided.

At this time, the player can predict the type of privilege coin C from the new reach effect mode including the specific symbol that appears with significant frequency. Therefore, if it is expected that the type of privilege coin C desired to be won will be paid out next time, the player will have a higher expectation for winning.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, by causing the third symbol display device 81 to produce a new reach production mode, the coin information as the special value (as the special value It is possible to make the player hold expectations for the privilege coin C having the information). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in playability as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is lost. Difficult to maintain interest for a long time.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2604, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2604: No), the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the effect mode of the variable effect. And the variation time period that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2608), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) ends.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2602, when the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a normal big hit (S2602: Yes), the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is Since it will stop at the main symbol corresponding to an even number, in such a case also, the process proceeds to S2608 and the value of a counter (not shown) for setting the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223, The reach effect mode is set based on the variation time that defines the type of reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the above-mentioned stop symbol setting process (S2307) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process (S2307) executed in the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 25, in this stop symbol setting process (S2307), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot). Is confirmed (S2701).

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2701, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2701: Yes), it is confirmed whether it indicates a probability variation big hit (S2702).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2702, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S2702: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S2703). ..

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2703, if the receiving portion coin flag 223h is ON (S2703: Yes), it is desired to display the reach effect using the privilege coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (S2704), and this stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

Due to the processing of S2704, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C mounted on the coin information reading device 300 (in the present embodiment, an odd number) A stop symbol in which one of the corresponding five main symbols) is arranged will be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2703, if the receiving coin flag 223h is off (S2703: No), a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2707). The stop symbol setting process (S2307) ends.

The symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C paid out next time from the privilege coin payout device 450 by the processing of S2707 (in the present embodiment, an odd number) A stop symbol having one of the five main symbols corresponding to 1) will be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2702, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the probability variation jackpot but the normal jackpot (S2702: No), the jackpot provided in the RAM 223. The stop symbol is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) for setting the stop symbol at the time (S2706), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

In addition, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2701, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, but indicates a detachment (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear, complete detachment) ( (S2701: No), the disengagement stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol at the time of disengagement is executed (S2705), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) executed in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIG. 26, in this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is released. It is confirmed whether or not it indicates a reach other than the front/back deviation (S2801).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2801, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear out of reach, reach other than out-of-rear) (S2801: Yes), the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is set. It is confirmed whether it is on (S2802).

If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S2802 (S2802: Yes), the stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2804).

Due to the process of S2804, the detachment stop symbol in the reach (rearward/rearward reach, reach other than front/rearward reach) waiting for the symbol corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the privilege coin payout device 450, When the variable display is stopped, it is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2802, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2802: No), in this case, a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting a stop symbol at the time of removal. A stop symbol is set based on the value of (S2803), and this deviation stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2801, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the out-reach, that is, if it indicates the complete out (S2801: No), the coin payout suggestion flag It is confirmed whether or not 223d is on (S2805), and if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2805: No), the value of the counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting the stop symbol at the time of removal. A stop symbol is set based on (S2806), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2805, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2806: No), the chance pattern corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is set as a stop symbol (S2807). , This disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2705) is ended.

Here, the chance eye set by the process of S2807 is defined in advance for each type of privilege coin C (five types of main symbols corresponding to odd numbers in the present embodiment), and the chance corresponding to each type. Each eye is defined as an array of symbols including one symbol corresponding to each type. For example, when the type of the privilege coin C is an octopus symbol (a symbol corresponding to “1”), “turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)” is defined as the corresponding chance item. There is. Therefore, for example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance of the corresponding “turtle (3)/shark (4)/octopus (1)” is stopped. It is set as a design.

As a result of the processing of S2807, a specific chance according to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the deviation effect (variation display) is stopped. .. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance of "turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)" is a deviation variation effect. When stopped, the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, even if the deviation variation effect that does not expect a transition to the big hit state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the deviation occurs. When the variation production is stopped, a specific chance item (stop display) that indicates the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is displayed, so that the player who sees the specific chance item is the bonus coin to be paid out next time. You can play while expecting to get C.

At this time, the player can predict the type of privilege coin C from a particular chance of suggesting the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time. Therefore, if it is expected that the type of privilege coin C desired to be won will be paid out next time, the player will have a higher expectation for winning.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to stop and display the specific chance eye suggesting the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time. As a result, the player can be expected to have the expectation for the privilege coin C having the coin information as the special value (information as the special value). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in playability as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is lost. Difficult to maintain interest for a long time.

Next, the coin payout process (S2111) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the coin payout process (S2111) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 27, in the coin payout process (S2111), first, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout flag 223f is turned on (S2901). If it is turned on (S2901: Yes), the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on ( It is confirmed whether it is excited) (S2902).

If the coin payout solenoid 472 is not turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2902 (S2902: No), the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) (S2903), and the coin payout process (S2903) is performed. finish. As a result of the processing of S2903, the standby member 470 (main body 471) in the normal state moves upward to the position of the opening 54 (see FIG. 6B).

On the other hand, when the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2902 (S2902: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on ( S2904). The "predetermined time" in the confirmation processing of S2904 is a time sufficient for the bonus coin C on the standby member 470 (main body 471) to be paid out from the opening 54, and is defined to be, for example, about 3 seconds.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2904, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: No), the coin payout process (S2111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2904, when the predetermined time has passed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: Yes), the privilege coin C on the standby member 470 (main body part 471) is opened. Since the coin has been paid out, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned off (S2905). As a result of the process of S2905, the standby member 470 (main body 471) that was in the normal state moves downward from the position of the opening 54 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6A).

After the processing of S2905, the coin payout flag 223f is turned off (S2906), the coin supply flag 223g is turned on (S2907), and the coin payout processing (S2903) is ended. As the coin supply flag 223g is turned on in the process of S2907, the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460 is newly supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470.

If the coin payout flag 223f is off (S2901: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2901, it is confirmed whether the coin supply flag 223g is on (S2908).

If the coin supply flag 223g is OFF as a result of the confirmation in S2908 (S2908: No), it is confirmed whether the coin supply solenoid 464 is ON (excitation) (S2909).

Here, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2909, if the coin supply solenoid 464 is not turned on (excitation) (S2909: No), the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excitation) (S2910), and this coin payout processing ( The processing of S2903 is ended. As a result of the process of S2910, the bottom lid portion 462 of the storage member 460 which is in the normal state moves forward (to the lower plate unit 15 side) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 (see FIG. 6A).

On the other hand, when the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2909 (S2909: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (( S2911). The “predetermined time” in the confirmation processing of S2911 is a time sufficient for the privilege coins C stored in the bottom lid 462 to be supplied to the standby member 470, and is defined to be, for example, about 3 seconds. ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2911, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: No), the coin payout process (S2903) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2911, if the predetermined time has passed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: Yes), the new privilege coin C is supplied to the standby member 470. The coin supply solenoid 464 is turned off (S2912), the coin supply flag 223g is turned off (S2913), and the coin payout process (S2903) is ended. Here, as a result of the process of S2912, the bottom lid portion 462 of the storage member 460 moves rearward with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6B).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, a payout coin detection process of reading coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450 is executed (S3001). ). The detailed processing of the payout coin detection processing (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the payout coin detecting process (S3001) is executed, a receiving part coin detecting process for reading the coin information of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is executed (S3002), and the timer interruption is performed. The process ends. The detailed process of the receiver coin detection process (S3002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-mentioned payout coin detection processing (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing payout coin detection processing (S3001) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

As shown in FIG. 29, in the payout coin detection process (S3001), first, coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501 (S3101).

Next, based on the read coin information and the information stored in the coin type table 222a, the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470, that is, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined (S3102), A value indicating the determined type of coin is stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S3103), and the payout coin detection process (S3001) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-described receiver coin detection processing (S3002) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the receiving coin detection process (S3002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

As shown in FIG. 30, in the receiving coin detecting process (S3002), first, it is confirmed whether or not the bonus coin C is attached to the coin receiving unit 300a of the coin information reading device 300 (S3201). Whether or not the bonus coin C is mounted in the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving portion 300a) is detected by a contact sensor (not shown) provided in the coin receiving portion 300a.

As a result of the confirmation in S3201, when the bonus coin C is loaded in the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: Yes), the bonus coin C loaded in the coin receiving portion 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is received. It is read by the IC tag reader 302 for parts (S3202).

After the processing of S3202, based on the read coin information and the information stored in the coin type table 222a, the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300 is discriminated (S3203), and the discriminated coin The value indicating the type is stored in the receiving coin memory 223b (S3204).

After the processing of S3204, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205). The "customer waiting effect" is not a variable display or a jackpot effect, and is an effect that is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, and is a display irrelevant to the game state ( For example, a title display, a demo display, etc.).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3205, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3206, if the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S3207), and the receiving coin flag 223h is off. If there is (S3207: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on (S3208), and the receiving coin detecting process (S3002) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3207, if the receiving coin flag 223h is on (S3207: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving coin detecting process (S3002) ends. To do.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3205, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3205: No), or the process of S3206. As a result of the confirmation, if the coin effect button 301 is not pressed (S3206: No), the receiving coin detection process (S3002) is terminated without performing the processes of S3207 to S3209.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3201, when the privilege coin C is not mounted on the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: No), the receiving coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving unit The coin detection process (S3002) ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the bonus coin C is mounted on the coin information reading device 300, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Every time the coin effect button 301 is operated, the value of the receiving coin flag 223h is inverted.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and an external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt processing is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the external interrupt process is executed in response to the reception of the command from the voice lamp control device 113, the received command is determined in S1201, S1202, and S1203. Specifically, in S1201, it is confirmed whether the received command is a production command (S1201). At this time, if the received command is a production permission command (S1201: Yes), a production permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1202), and the external interrupt processing ends.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a production command (S1201: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1202). At this time, if the received command is the display variation pattern command (S1202: Yes), the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1206), and the display variation pattern command is included. The variation mode (reach effect mode, deviation variation effect mode) is extracted (S1207), and the external interrupt process ends. The variation mode extracted by the process of S1206 is stored in a predetermined area in the work RAM 233 and is referred to in a variation effect process (see FIG. 33) described later.

Further, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S1202: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S1203). At this time, if the received command is a display stop design command (S1203: Yes), the stop design indicated by the display stop design command is set (S1208), and the external interrupt process ends.

Finally, if the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S1203: No), that is, if the received command is neither a production permission command, a display variation pattern command, or a display stop symbol command, Executes another process corresponding to the received command (S1204) and ends the external interrupt process. For example, if the received command is a stop command, the process of stopping the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Next, the main processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

The main process shown in FIG. 32 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, processing such as initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

After the execution of the initialization process (S1301), the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1302), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1303). .. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed in the process of S1303. The extracted character information is written in the inner area (S1304).

After the processing of S1304, it is confirmed whether or not an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1305). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S1305, if the production permission flag is off (S1305: No), the production permission command is not yet received from the main control device 110, and in such a case, the production permission command is received. Up to, that is, until the effect permission flag is turned on, the processing from S1306 is awaited.

As a result of checking in the process of S1305, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S1305: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1304 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the processing shifts to S1306 and thereafter.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit (S1306), and if it is not a big hit (S1306: No), the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The variable effect process for displaying the variable effect is executed (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. The detailed process of the variation effect process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in S1306, if the big hit is in progress (S1306: Yes), the big hit production process is executed (S1309). In the jackpot production process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, and images of different backgrounds are updated for each round (new extraction of character information from video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write to). After the jackpot effect process (S1309) ends, the process proceeds to the process of S1308.

In S1308, in order to execute the process (S1306, S1307, S1309) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds (20 ms), whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the process of S1306 was started. It is confirmed (S1308).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S1308, if 20 ms has not yet passed (S1308: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has passed, while if 20 ms or more has passed (S1308: Yes). Then, the processing shifts to the processing of S1306. Then, the processing from S1306 to S1309 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the above-described variation effect process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable effect process (S1307) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32).

As shown in FIG. 33, in this variable display processing, first, it is confirmed whether the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S1401), and if it is not changing (S1401: No). Then, it is confirmed whether a fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is on (S1402).

As a result of checking by the processing of S1402, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S1402: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1403), and the fluctuation time counter for counting the fluctuation time provided in the work RAM 233 (see FIG. (Not shown) is reset to 0 (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1401, if it is changing (S1401: Yes), the change time counter (not shown) is updated (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1405. The variable time counter is updated by reading the value of the variable time counter, adding 1 to the value, and writing the added value back to the variable time counter.

In S1405, it is confirmed whether or not the stop command is received from the main control device 110, and it is determined whether or not it is within the variable effect time (S1405). At this time, if it is determined that the stop command is not received and it is within the variation effect time (S1405: Yes), it is extracted from the variation pattern command for display in S1207 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 31). From the variation effect data corresponding to the variation mode, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation elapsed time (the elapsed time after the variation effect is started) indicated by the variation time counter is read from the video RAM 234, and the variation effect area of the video RAM 234 is read. It is stored in (not shown) (S1406). Next, an image corresponding to the variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S1407), and this variation effect process (S1307) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1405, when the stop command is received and it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation exceeds the fluctuation effect time (S1405: No), in S1208 of the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). With the set stop symbol, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped (S1411), and the variable effect process ends.

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S1402, if the fluctuation start flag is off (S1402: No), other display processing, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time has elapsed. The displayed customer waiting effect is displayed (S1409), and the variation effect process (S1307) ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 130 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, the awarding condition is satisfied and the prize ball (game) is played. The reward coin C having special value different from the value) is paid out (assigned).

By mounting the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300, the privilege coin C corresponds to the coin information of the mounted privilege coin C (that is, according to the value stored in the receiving coin memory 223b). A new reach effect mode as a privilege can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, the player playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can have a high interest in the game by the new game playability that can be experienced by using the privilege coin C, and the new game playability. Becomes a new added value, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward obtaining the privilege coin C that allows the player to experience a new game property, and in that respect, the game property is improved and the game held by the player is held. The interest of can be maintained for a long time.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state satisfies the predetermined suggestion condition, the type of coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time (that is, the type of the bonus coin C). Is suggested (or notified) by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, when a certain game state (a game state satisfying the suggestion condition) is reached, the type of the bonus coin to be paid out next time is suggested by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the game is played. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special coin C may be acquired before the special coin C is acquired.

In particular, if the type of privilege coin C to be given next time, which is suggested by the display content (variable display or stop display) of the third symbol display device 81, is one that the player himself desires to obtain, The player can continue the game while expecting to obtain the privilege coin C.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the privilege coin C to be given next time is suggested (or notified) by the display content of the third symbol display device 81, so that a conventional general gaming machine is used. You can experience a new gameplay that was not available in. Therefore, such new game play becomes a new added value, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 54. In the above-described first embodiment, the bonus coin C in which the coin information as the special value is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded inside is paid out when the predetermined giving condition is satisfied. The second embodiment is configured so that the privilege card CA having a special value is discharged when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. In addition, in this 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 34, an opening 1054 for paying out a privilege card CA (see FIG. 38) described later is formed on the left side of the lower plate 50 in the pachinko machine 10A. In addition, a privilege card discharging device 1450 (see FIG. 36) described later is provided on the back surface side of the lower plate unit 15 as a device for discharging the privilege card CA from the opening 1054.

On the left side of the lower plate 50 and the opening 1054, a card information reading device 1300 (see FIG. 35) is formed so as to project forward. The card information reading device 1300 is a box-shaped body having an opened upper surface, and the player inserts the already-acquired privilege card CA in the vertical direction (long-axis direction) through the opening as necessary. It is configured so that

As will be described later in detail, the card information reading device 1300 has a receiving part card reader 1303 (see FIG. 35), and the privilege card CA inserted in the card information reading device 1300 has a mounting solenoid 1304 (see FIG. 35). ), the card information recorded in the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA can be optically read.

A read button 1301 is provided on the front surface (the surface on the front view side) of the card information reading device 1300. The read button 1301 is used when the player desires the appearance of an effect (a big hit effect or a reach effect in the present embodiment) as a privilege using the privilege card CA inserted in the card information reading device 1300, or It is a button that can be operated by the player when the appearance of the effect as the benefit is not necessary in the state where the effect as the benefit is displayed.

Here, the above-described card information reading device 1300 will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the card information reading device 1300 when viewed from the upper surface side, and FIG. 35B is a side view of the card information reading device 1300. FIG. 35C is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure in the case, and FIG. 35C is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the case where the privilege card CA is attached to the card information reading device 1300. Note that FIGS. 35A to 35C are sectional views including the mounting solenoid 1304 for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention.

As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the card information reading device 1300 is attached to a housing 1302, a receiving card reader 1303, a mounting solenoid 1304, and a tip of a movable iron core of the mounting solenoid 1304. It has a plate member 1305 and a read button 1301.

As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the housing 1302 has a holder portion 1302a whose upper surface is opened so that the privilege card CA can be inserted in the vertical direction (long axis direction), and a front side of the holder portion 1302a. On the front side of the pachinko machine 10A, there is a chamber 1302b in which a card reader for receiving part 1303 is housed.

A rectangular transparent portion 1302c having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is formed on a wall separating the holder portion 1302a and the chamber 1302b in the housing 1302. More specifically, the rectangular transparent portion 1302c is formed at a height corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA when the privilege card CA is attached (FIG. 35(c)).

Therefore, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA can be seen from the room 1302b side through the transparent portion 1302c. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is configured as a transparent (light transmissive) area, and the contents of the privilege are stored in the card information area 1602. A code pattern (card information) indicating the is formed. Therefore, the receiving part card reader 1303 housed in the chamber 1302b reads the code pattern that passes through the transparent part 1302c.

The receiving card reader 1303 is a code reader using a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor. A code reader using a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor may be used instead of the CMOS image sensor.

The receiving-portion card reader 1303 converts an image of a subject (a code pattern that passes through the transparent portion 1302c) that passes through the transparent portion 1302c into an electrical signal, and inputs the electrical signal to the voice lamp control device 113.

The mounting solenoid 1304 is provided at a position where the plate member 1305 attached to the tip of the movable iron core and the transparent portion 1302c have the same height. Further, the plate member 1305 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1302c, and has a white ground-free surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the holder portion 1302a is inserted even if the maximum number of privilege cards CA that can be used at one time (five in this embodiment) is collectively inserted. In order to facilitate the operation, it is configured to have a sufficient depth (protruding length from the lower plate unit).

However, by providing a sufficient depth, the privilege card CA can be easily inserted into the holder part 1302a, while the privilege card CA inserted into the holder part 1302a is not orderly, so the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38). ) Does not match the transparent portion 1302c, and the code pattern cannot be read by the receiving card reader 1303.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the read button 1301 is pressed by the player, the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited), and the privilege card CA is pressed by the plate member 1305 toward the transparent portion 1302c side. As shown in FIG. 35(c), the privilege cards CA inserted in the holder section 1302a are aligned, and the code pattern (card information of one or more privilege cards CA) can be read by the receiving section card reader 1303. I have to.

When the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on to align the privilege cards CA in the holder 1302a, the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA has the same height as the transparent part 1302c (that is, the card information). The plate member 1305 located at the same height as the area 1602 is pressed against the transparent portion 1302c while being entirely covered.

When the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305 are pressed, the plate member 1305 covers the card information area 1602, so that the receiving card reader 1303 can read the code pattern against the white solid surface of the plate member 1305 as a background. The code pattern (card information) formed in the transparent card information area 1602 of the card CA can be reliably read.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a privilege card discharge device 1450 that is a discharge device of the privilege card CA will be described. FIG. 36(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device 1450 when viewed from the side, and FIG. 36(b) shows the privilege card discharging device 1450 from the discharge port 1451a side. FIG. 36( c) is a schematic front view as seen, and is a top view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device 1450 as viewed from the top side. For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between adjacent privilege cards CA in FIG. 36(a). In addition, in FIG. 36C, a part of the configuration of the privilege card CA, the upper lid member 1452 and the like is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C, the privilege card discharge device 1450 includes a storage member 1451 capable of storing a plurality of privilege cards CA, an upper lid member 1452, and a discharge card reader 1453. Consists of

As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, the storage member 1451 has a box-shaped body whose upper surface is opened and which can be stored (stored) by stacking (superimposing) the privilege cards CA in the internal space. Is. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, on the front surface (the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side) of the storage member 1451, the storage member is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 1054 provided in the lower plate unit 15. Of the privilege cards CA stored in 1451, a discharge port 1451a for discharging one privilege card CA located at the bottom side is provided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(c), on the bottom surface of the storage member 1451, in a substantially central portion, a rectangle having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA. A transparent portion 1451b having a shape is formed. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, a transfer roller 1451d driven by a transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), which is a stepping motor, is attached to the discharge port 1451a side of the bottom surface of the storage member 1451. Has been.

The upper lid member 1452 is configured to be removable, and can be removed when necessary, for example, when the privilege card CA is replenished in the internal space of the storage member 1451. The upper lid member 1452 is provided with a biasing member 1455 that biases the stacked privilege cards CA from above in order to stabilize the discharge of the privilege cards CA.

The urging member 1455 is composed of a spring member 1455a whose one end side is connected to the upper lid member 1452, and a flat plate-shaped plate member 1455b which is connected to the other end side of the spring member 1455a. In the present embodiment, the urging member 1455 is arranged such that the plate member 1455b is located above the transparent portion 1451b (FIG. 36(c)) of the storage member 1451. Further, the plate member 1455b is a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b, and the surface thereof on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is white and ungrounded.

The ejection card reader 1453 is a code reader using a CMOS image sensor, like the above-mentioned receiving section card reader 1303. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(c), the ejection card reader 1453 is located below the transparent portion 1451b of the storage member 1451, converts the image of the subject seen from the transparent portion 1451b into an electric signal, and outputs a voice signal. Input to the lamp control device 113.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, one privilege card CA located at the bottom most side of the storage member 1451, that is, the privilege card CA discharged (given) from the opening 1054 next time is stored in the storage member 1451. Is configured to be transferred by the transfer roller 1451d from the initial position of the privilege card CA to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) on the transparent portion 1451b, and the discharge card reader 1453 is transparent. It is configured to read the image of the card information area 1602 seen from the unit 1451b. That is, the ejection card reader 1453 is for reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be ejected next time from the opening 1054.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the operation of the above-described privilege card discharging device 1450 for discharging the privilege card CA from the opening 1054 will be described. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the discharging operation of the privilege card CA by the privilege card discharging device 1450.

FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a state in which all of the privilege cards CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (storage member 1451) are located at the initial position. When discharging one privilege card CA, the transfer roller 1451d is driven (rotated) in the direction of arrow R by driving the transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), and the one located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451. Is transferred in the direction toward the opening 1054 of the lower plate unit 15 (direction of arrow M).

In the present embodiment, all the privilege cards CA are arranged so that the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) can be read by the discharge card reader 1453 after being transferred in the direction of the arrow M by the transfer roller 1451d. 1602 is stored on the storage member 1451 with the discharge port 1451a located on the opposite side (position P).

FIG. 37B is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is located at the confirmation position. The “confirmation position” is the position of the privilege card CA where the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is located on the transparent portion 1451b. The privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is transferred from the initial position to the M direction by the transfer roller 1451d and temporarily stopped at the confirmation position. Note that, as shown in FIG. 37B, at the confirmation position, the privilege card CA is not exposed to the outside through the opening 1504 and cannot be taken out by the player.

As will be described later in detail, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is a transparent (light-transmissive) area, and in the card information area 1602, a code pattern indicating the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA ( Card information) is formed. In the present embodiment, the code pattern of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at this confirmation position is read by the discharge card reader 1453, and is discharged next time according to the content of the read code pattern (card information). The grant condition (card discharge condition) for the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position) is changed.

In the privilege card ejection device 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance L from the initial position to the confirmation position is the transfer direction M1 (that is, from the initial position to the confirmation position) in the card information area 1602 which is the light transmissive area of the privilege card CA. Direction L) (see FIG. 38), and in the transfer direction M1 of the area on the confirmation position side of the card information area 1602 in the main body 1601 which is the opaque area (light impermeable area) of the privilege card CA. It is configured to be shorter than the length La (see FIG. 38).

By defining the relationship between L, La, and Lb as described above, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (that is, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time) is set to the privilege card CA. With the opaque area of No. 1 as the background, the card reader for discharge 1453 reads it. Here, if one side of the privilege card CA is white ungrounded, the white ungrounded surface is directed toward the bottom surface side of the privileged card ejection device 1450, and is arranged so as to face the ejection card reader 1453, the white ungrounded background becomes a card. The code pattern in the information area 1602 can be read, and the code pattern (card information) can be read reliably.

In the privilege card ejection device 1450 of this embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer roller 1451d to the opening end on the front side of the opening 1054 (the side facing the player) is the privilege card. It is configured to be shorter than the CA discharge direction length Lc (see FIG. 38). Therefore, at least the privilege card CA at the transfer limit position by the transfer roller 1451d is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054. Therefore, the privilege card CA can be positioned at a position where the player can take it out (that is, a position exposed to the outside) only by the transfer by the transfer roller 1451d.

Further, since part of the privilege card CA is used as the background when reading the card information area 1602, the distance between the initial position and the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450 can be suppressed to a relatively short distance. As a result, the privilege card ejection device 1450 can be configured to save space.

As described above, the plate member 1455b of the urging member 1455 that urges the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejecting device 1450 (storage member 1451) is a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b, and Since the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is configured to have no white ground, even when the last one privilege card CA is stored in the storage member 1451, the background of the card information area 1602 is white. It can be the ground, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be read appropriately.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the transparent portion 1451b is provided in a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA, the next time, without reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the initial position. It is possible to read only the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA discharged to the user.

FIG. 37C is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is located at the discharge position. The "discharging position" is a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 and can be taken out by the player. When the condition for granting the privilege card CA to the player (grant condition) is satisfied, the privilege card CA stopped at the confirmation position is driven from the confirmation position to the discharge position by driving the transfer roller 1451d (direction of arrow R). Is transferred to and stopped.

Then, when the player takes out the privilege card CA and completes the ejection of the card, the state returns to the state of FIG. 37A again, and at that time, the one privilege card CA located at the bottommost side of the storage member 1451 is displayed. Ejection is started.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 37, the presence/absence detection sensor, which is a reflection type photoelectric sensor, is arranged between the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and the opening 1054. 1461 is provided, and when the privilege card CA located at the ejection position is taken out by the player and the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off, it is determined that the card ejection is completed.

As described above, in the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer roller 1451d to the front opening end of the opening 1054 is the discharge direction length Lc of the privilege card CA. (See FIG. 38). Therefore, only by driving the transfer roller 1451d by the transfer motor 1451c (see FIG. 40), the privilege card CA is stopped at a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 (that is, a discharge position), and the game is played. It can be taken out by a person.

On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is completely discharged from the opening 1054 without the help of the player, a stepping motor for card transfer is provided between the discharge port 1451a and the opening 1054 except for the transfer motor 1451c. However, according to the privilege card discharge device 1450 of the present embodiment, the privilege card CA can be transferred from the initial position to the discharge position by only one transfer motor 1451c, and as a result, Since the discharge can be completed, the privilege card discharge device 1450 can be configured compactly and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the privilege card CA used in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment will be specifically described. 38(a) is a front view of the privilege card CA, FIG. 38(b) is a rear view of the privilege card CA, and FIG. 38(c) is a line X8c-X8c in FIG. 38(a). FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, the privilege card CA is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape), and is made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material (for example, resin or A main body 1601 made of paper or the like and a card information area 1602 made of a transparent (light transmitting) material (for example, resin) are provided.

The card information area 1602 has a code pattern indicating card information formed therein. In the present embodiment, the code pattern (card information) is formed by dividing the inside of the card information area 1602 into 4 rows×4 columns sections and filling the sections according to the contents of the privilege.

A design 1601a1 (FIG. 38(a)) corresponding to the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 1602 (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is provided on the surface 1601a of the main body 1601. In the example, Miss Marin) is written.

Further, a mark 1601a2 indicating the division of privilege contents is written on the front surface 1601a. In the present embodiment, “gold card”, “silver card”, and “copper card” are set as the classification of the privilege contents, and in the example of FIG. 38(a), the privilege card CA is “gold card”. The word "gold" is written to mean that. On the other hand, the back surface 1601b of the main body portion 1601 is white and has no ground.

Here, as described above, the length La in the transfer direction M of the main body 1601 located on the confirmation position side of the card information area 1602 in the privilege card ejection device 1450 and the length Lb in the transfer direction M in the card information area 1602. Is designed such that Lb<L<La with respect to the distance L (see FIG. 36) from the initial position to the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450.

Therefore, since the back surface 1601b of the main body unit 1601 is a white plain surface, by arranging the white plain back surface 1601b toward the bottom surface side of the privilege card discharging device 1450, the card information by the discharge card reader 1453 is displayed. At the time of reading the area 1602, the background of the card information area 1602 can be made white ungrounded, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be preferably read.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38(a) and (b), in the privilege card CA, the card information area 1602 is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the privilege card CA. It is possible to have a large impermeable area. Therefore, when the back surface 1601b of the main body unit 1601 is used when the card information area 1602 is read by the discharge card reader 1453, the adjacent privilege card CA in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (that is, the privilege card to be discharged next time) It is possible to prevent the CA from overlapping the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA that uses the back surface 1601b as the background, and the code pattern (card information) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is erroneously detected. Can be prevented.

Here, the code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in the card information area 1602. Note that the card information areas 1602 shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are all in a state viewed from the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA.

FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of each section in the section of 4 rows×4 columns formed in the card information area 1602. Note that, in FIG. 39(a), in order to clarify the invention, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively attached to the nine sections forming the region 1602c.

Of the 4 rows×4 columns section formed in the card information area 1602, the section 1602a of (row, column)=(1, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “gold card”. Is. The section 1602b of (row, column)=(2, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “silver card”.

Also, (row, column)=(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), The area 1602c composed of nine sections (3, 2) and (3, 3) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “copper card”. In the present embodiment, nine types of copper cards corresponding to nine types of main symbols are set, and each type is associated with any of the nine sections forming the area 1602c.

For example, when (row, column)=(1, 1), a main symbol (octopus) for “1” is associated, and when this area 1602c1 (see FIG. 39(c)) is filled in, Indicates that the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main design for "1" among "copper cards". Similarly, (row, column)=(1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), (3,2), Main symbols for "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9" are respectively associated with (3, 3). ..

Further, the section 1602d of (row, column)=(4, 1) is an area 1602d for defining the direction (front and back) of the privilege card CA, and this area 1602d is common to all privilege cards CA. It is filled.

Since the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so that one type of privilege can be obtained for one privilege card CA, 11 sections that configure the region 1602a, the region 1602b, and the region 1602c. Of these, only one section is filled.

For example, FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. When the privilege card CA is a “gold card”, the area 1602a corresponding to the “gold card” is filled and the area 1602d common to all the benefit cards CA is filled.

Further, FIG. 39C is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA which is a “silver card”. When the privilege card CA is a “silver card”, the area 1602b corresponding to the “silver card” is filled and the area 1602d common to all the benefit cards CA is filled.

39D is a schematic diagram showing the card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “1”. When the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main symbol for "1" of the "copper card", it corresponds to the main symbol for "1" in the area 1602c consisting of 9 sections corresponding to the "copper card" The area 1602c1 to be filled is filled, and the area 1602d common to all the privilege cards CA is filled.

FIG. 39E is a schematic diagram showing an example of the card information area 1602 in a state where a plurality of privilege cards CA are correctly stacked. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, a plurality of privilege cards CA acquired by the player can be mounted on the card information reading device 1300 in an overlapping manner. Although the details will be described later, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are mounted on the card information reading device 1300, as a result of the reading by the receiving-unit card reader 1302, an effect as a privilege is mounted on each privilege card CA. It is configured to appear as many as the number of privilege cards CA.

Since the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA is configured to be light-transmissive, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked, a new code pattern is generated by the section filled in each privilege card CA. Composed.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 39(e) is a card information area 1602 when three privilege cards CA each having the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIGS. 39(b) to (d) are stacked. .. Therefore, the area 1602a derived from the "gold card", the area 1602b derived from the "silver card", the area 1602c1 derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main design for "1", and all the privilege cards CA A code pattern is composed of the area 1602d formed in common.

When the code pattern of the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIG. 39E (a new code pattern formed by stacking three privilege cards CA) is read by the receiving unit card reader 1302, Since the area 1602a is filled, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 includes the privilege card CA of “gold card”. can do.

Similarly, since the areas 1602b and 1602c1 are painted out, the MPU 221 corresponds to the main symbols for the "silver card" and "1" in the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. It can be determined that the privilege card CA of “copper card” is included.

On the other hand, the area 1602d is derived from all the privilege cards CA. Here, if there is at least one privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 with the front and back reversed, it is determined that the area E of (row, column)=(4, 4) is filled. Become. Therefore, when the code pattern read by the receiving unit card reader 1302 includes the area E, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the presence of the privilege card CA that is mistakenly installed in reverse. can do.

In this way, since the area 1602d for defining the orientation (front and back) of the privilege card CA is formed commonly to all privilege cards CA, in the card information reading device 1300, with respect to the receiving unit card reader 1302. The surface to be directed can be clearly defined, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to the facing of the opposite surface and the occurrence of a result (malfunction) different from the result that should be originally displayed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment. is there. The main difference between the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8) described above is the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 40, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 installed in the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shows the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA and the card information thereof. It has a card type table 222b that correlates with the card type (that is, the content of the privilege). For the code pattern (card information) of the privilege card CA read by the ejection card reader 1453 or the receiving unit card reader 1303, by referring to the card type table 222b, the type of the privilege card CA (contents of privilege) ) Can be identified.

As shown in FIG. 41, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment has an eject card memory 223j, a card eject confirmation flag 223k, a card eject flag 223l, a card ejection wait flag 223m, and a card transfer flag. 223n, card reading flag 223o, card mounting flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, even copper card flag area 223u, and probability change It has a jackpot counter 223v.

The discharge card memory 223j is a memory for storing the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (see FIG. 37B) in the privilege card discharge device 1450, that is, the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. is there. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is for giving the player the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. The condition (grant condition) is changed.

The card ejection confirmation flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the ejection of the privilege card CA has been confirmed. When the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on, it means that the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed by the fulfillment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA.

The card discharge confirmation flag 223k is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege card CA is satisfied. The card discharge confirmation flag 223k that is turned on when the condition for granting the privilege card CA is established is then turned off when the discharge of the privilege card CA is started.

The card ejection flag 223l is a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the privilege card CA from the confirmed position to the ejection position. If the card ejection flag 223l is turned on, the transportation motor 1451c is driven in the later-described card ejection processing (see FIG. 49), and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card ejection device 1450 is transferred to the ejection position. To be done.

The card ejection flag 223l is initialized (OFF) in the initialization processing by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the privilege card CA is started to be ejected. The card ejection flag 223l thus turned on is turned off when the privilege card CA to be ejected next time is transferred to the ejection position in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49).

The card removal wait flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed, that is, whether or not the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 has been taken out by the player. If the card removal wait flag 223m is turned on, it means that the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 has not been taken out by the player.

The card removal wait flag 223m is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the discharge position. The card removal wait flag 223m thus turned on is turned off when the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed.

The card transfer flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position among the privilege cards CA located at the initial position in the privilege card discharging device 1450. If the card transfer flag 223n is turned on, the transfer motor 1451c is driven in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later, and the privilege card CA located at the initial position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the confirmation position. To be done.

The card transfer flag 223n is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed. Then, the card transfer flag 223n thus turned on is turned off when the player ejects the privilege card CA located at the discharge position in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed. To be done.

The card reading flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not to read the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450. If the card reading flag 223o is turned on, the card information is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The card reading flag 223o is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10A, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the confirmation position. Then, the card reading flag 223o thus turned on is turned off when the card information for discharge 1453 is read on the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position.

The card mounting flag 223p indicates whether or not the privilege card CA has been mounted in the holder portion 1302a of the card information reading device 1300, that is, the privilege card CA that has been loaded into the holder portion 1302a when the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the state of being set. When the card mounting flag 223p is ON, the privilege cards CA loaded in the holder section 1302a are in an aligned state, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602 can be read by the receiving section card reader 1303. Indicates that there is.

The card mounting flag 223p is inverted every time the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10A is not played by the player for a predetermined time). Is configured to. That is, if the card mounting flag 223p is on, it is turned off, and if the card mounting flag 223p is on, it is turned off. The card mounting flag 223p is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

The gold card flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving part card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. When 223q is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The silver card flag 223r is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. When 223r is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The copper card flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “copper card”. If 223s is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

The gold card flag 223q, the silver card flag 223r, and the copper card flag 223s are initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and based on the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. , Turned on when the corresponding card is included. On the other hand, these flags 223q, 223r, 223s are turned off when the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect and the card mounting flag 223p is turned off.

The odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t is an area for storing the presence/absence of a copper card corresponding to the high-probability symbol (the main symbol corresponding to the odd number) when the copper card flag 223s is turned on.

The odd copper card flag area 223t includes five flags of a number 1 flag 223t1, a number 3 flag 223t2, a number 5 flag 223t3, a number 7 flag 223t4, and a number 9 flag 223t5, and these flags 223t1 to 223t5 are respectively , "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" indicates the presence or absence of five types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbol. For example, if the number 5 flag 223t3 is turned on, it indicates that the card information derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main symbol for "5" is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. ..

The even-numbered copper card flag area 223u is an area for storing the presence/absence of a copper card corresponding to a low probability symbol (main symbol corresponding to an even number) when the copper card flag 223s is on.

The even-numbered copper card flag area 223u includes four flags of a number 2 flag 223u1, a number 4 flag 223u2, a number 6 flag 223u3, and a number 8 flag 223u4, and these flags 223u1 to 223u4 are "2", respectively. The presence or absence of four types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for "4", "6", and "8" is shown. For example, if the number 2 flag 223u1 is ON, it indicates that the card information derived from the "copper card" corresponding to the main symbol for "2" is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. ..

The flags 223t1 to 223t5 and 223u1 to 223u4 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t and the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on. Each time the card information is read by the card reader 1303, based on the read card information, it is turned on if the corresponding card is included, and is turned off if it is not included.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times the probability variation jackpot occurs after the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by one each time a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (in this embodiment, a stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) is received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, it is cleared to 0 every time the player takes out the privilege card CA (that is, every time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position). The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot counter 223v reaches the number of times set based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, The award condition is satisfied, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed, the command stored first in the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

Again, it returns to FIG. 40 and demonstrates. An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 225, the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the ejection card reader 1453, the transfer motor 1451c for driving (rotating) the transfer roller 1451d, and the presence/absence detection. A sensor 1461, a receiver card reader 1302, a mounting solenoid 1304, a read button 1301 and the like are connected to each other.

The display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, but the video RAM 234 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment has Dedicated change effect data for performing an effect (reach effect or jackpot effect in the present embodiment) corresponding to the card information of the privilege card CA is stored together with other variable effect data.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the startup process of the second embodiment, the process of S2011 for setting the privilege coin payout device 450 in the startup process of the first embodiment is changed to the process for setting the privilege card ejection device 1450 (S2013). The startup processing (see FIG. 18) of the first embodiment described above is different.

In the process of S2013, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position in the privilege card ejection device 1450. If not, the transfer motor 1451c is driven to move the transfer roller 1451d. The privilege card CA located at the initial position is rotated and transferred to the confirmation position. On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position, the process of S2013 is ended and the process of S2012 is executed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a main process executed after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 43, when the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed from the start of the main processing (S2101), and 1 ms or more must be elapsed. If (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing S2102 to S2109.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2101, if 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the main process (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2109 are executed similarly to the first embodiment described above, and the process of S2118 is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S2118, a display setting process is executed (S2118). This display setting process (S2118) sets the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot effect, as in the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) of the first embodiment. After the mode is set, it is a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 a command for instructing each of the set variation effect mode and jackpot effect mode. The details of the display setting process (S2118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of the display setting process (S2118), a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the satisfaction of the grant condition for the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card discharging device 1450 (that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time). Is executed (S2119). The details of the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119), a card discharge process for discharging the privilege card CA from the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed (S2120). The detailed processing of this card ejection processing (S2120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the card ejection process (S2120) is executed, the command determination process is executed (S2121). This command determination processing (S2121) is processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (S2112) of the first embodiment. The details of the command determination process (S2121) of the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S2121) is executed, the processes of S2113 to S2117 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. That is, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 223 (S2113), and if the power interruption occurrence information is stored (S2113: Yes), the processes of S2115 to S2117 are executed, After that, the process loops infinitely.

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2113, when the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed ( (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2113, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped.

Next, the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment.

In the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. Then, it is confirmed whether the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), and the fluctuation pattern The variable time is extracted from the command (S2206), the command determination process (S2121) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). ..

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202: Yes), after executing the processing of S2213 as in the above-described first embodiment, the command determination processing (S2121). ) Is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is ON, that is, whether the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA (S2214).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is on (S2214: Yes), the stop command in process is the stop command received immediately after the grant condition of the privilege card CA is satisfied. The discharge flag 223l is turned on (S2215).

When the card ejection flag 223l is turned on in the process of S2215, the privilege card is ejected in synchronization with the corresponding stop display (in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot stop display) in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) described later. The discharge (transfer from the confirmation position to the discharge position) of the privilege card CA from the device 1450 is started. After the processing of S2215, the card ejection confirmation flag 223l is turned off (S2216), the command determination processing (S2121) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is off, that is, if the grant condition of the privilege card CA is not satisfied (S2214: No), the processes of S2215 and S2216 are skipped. This command determination process (S2121) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 as a result of checking in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), the process of S2204 is executed similarly to the first embodiment described above, and this command is executed. The determination process (S2121) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, the above-mentioned display setting process (S2118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2118) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45, in this display setting process (S2118), first, similar to the above-described first embodiment, the updating process of various counters is executed (S2301), and the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether or not is on (S2302).

As a result of checking in the process of S2302, when the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2302: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110. The display setting process (S2118) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is executed. The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2305).

After the processing of S2305, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2305, the variation effect setting processing for setting the aspect of the variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2310). The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2310), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2311). Specifically, information on stop symbols (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, etc.) extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) and Based on the value of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of jackpot provided in the RAM 223, the value of the counter for selecting the stop symbol at the time of deviation, etc., the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect. To set.

After the process of S2311, the big hit effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2312). The details of the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

After the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2310) is output to the display control device 114. Yes (S2308).

Then, a display stop symbol command for designating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309).

After the processing of S2309, the big hit production command which directs the big hit production setting mode set by the big hit production setting processing (S2312) is output to the display control device 114 (S2313), and this display setting processing (S2118) is terminated. , Return to the main processing.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Further, the display control device 114 controls the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the jackpot effect command output from the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S2312.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2310) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 46, in this variation effect setting process (S2310), first, is the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicating complete disengagement? Is confirmed (S2621).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2621, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2621: Yes), the deviation variation effect as an effect mode of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A mode is set (S2625), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended. In the process of S2625, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the deviation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2621, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2621: No), the process proceeds to S2622.

In S2622, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit) (S2622).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2622, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2622: Yes), whether the copper card flag 223s is on, that is, the receiving part card reader It is confirmed whether or not the card information read by 1303 includes the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” (S2623).

As a result of checking in S2623, when the copper card flag 223s is off, that is, when the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 does not include the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” ( S2623: No), and proceeds to the processing of S2624.

In addition, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2622, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, that is, the received stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than out-reach). If it is (S2622: No), the process proceeds to S2624.

In the process of S2624, the reach effect mode is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the effect mode of the variable effect, and the change time that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.). Is set (S2624). Then, after the processing of S2624, the variation effect setting processing (S2310) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2623, when the copper card flag 223s is on, that is, when the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “copper card”. In (S2623: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probability variation jackpot (S2626).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2626, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probability variation jackpot (S2626: Yes), it is turned on in the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd number copper card flag area 223t. It is confirmed whether or not there is a flag (S2627).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S2627, if there is a flag that is turned on among the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t (S2627: Yes), it is included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t. Based on the value of each flag 223t1 to 223t5 and the variation time that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2628), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended.

As described above, the copper card flag 223s desires the player to display the reach effect as a privilege using the copper card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the copper on the card information reading device 1300. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is a card, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated. Therefore, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628 is a reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, if only the numeral 1 flag 223t1 is on, the main symbol for "1" A new reach effect mode using (octopus) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

Alternatively, if two of the number 1 flag 223t1 and the number 7 flag 223t4 are on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, “1” and “7” are set. A new reach effect mode using two corresponding main symbols (octopus, dugong) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

As still another example, when all of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t are on, 5 corresponding to the odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). A new reach effect mode using one main symbol (octopus, turtle, shrimp, dugong, crab) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

In the present embodiment, as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t is With the remaining one column fluctuating in a state of being stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of the flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that a group of fish pass by (a so-called fish school) is set.

Note that, of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is displayed in a stopped state in two rows out of three rows, and remains. 1 column fluctuates, and symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.) It may be a reach production mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2626, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (S2626: No), it is included in the even copper card flag area 223u. It is confirmed whether or not any of the flags 223u1 to 223u4 that are present are turned on (S2629).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2629, if there is a flag that is turned on in the flags 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u (S2629: Yes), it is included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u. Based on the values of the respective flags 223u1 to 223u4 and the variation time that defines the type of reach, the reach effect mode is set (S2630), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) ends. The reach effect mode set by the process of S2630 is also a reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA, like the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u, if only the numeral 4 flag 223u2 is on, the main symbol for "4" A new reach effect mode using (shark) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

Alternatively, if three of the number 2 flag 223u2, the number 6 flag 223u3, and the number 8 flag 223u4 among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are on, “2 ], "6", a new reach effect mode using the three main symbols corresponding to "8" (burdockbone, anglerfish, angelfish) is set as a reach effect mode as a privilege.

In the present embodiment, as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2630, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is selected from the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u. In the state of being stopped and displayed in two columns out of three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates, and the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of the flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that a group of fish pass by (a so-called fish school) is set.

It should be noted that, out of the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on is displayed in a stopped state in two rows out of three rows, and remains. One column of changes, and symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) are highlighted (enlarged display, etc.) It may be a reach production mode.

In addition, as a result of checking by the processing of S2627, when there is no flag turned on in the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t (S2627: No), or by the processing of S2629 As a result, if there is no flag that is turned on among the flags 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u (S2629: No), the counter that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223 ( (Not shown) and a variation time period that defines the type of reach are set (S2631), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 47, in this jackpot production process (S2312), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot). It is confirmed whether it is shown (S4001).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4001, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit (S4001: No), this big hit effect setting process (S2312) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4001, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S4001: Yes), whether the gold card flag 223q is on, that is, the receiving-unit card reader It is confirmed whether the card information read by 1303 includes the privilege card CA which is a “gold card” (S4002).

If the gold card flag is on as a result of the confirmation in S4002 (S4002: Yes), then the silver card flag 223r is on, that is, the card information read by the receiver card reader 1303 indicates " It is confirmed whether the privilege card CA that is a "silver card" is included in addition to the "gold card" (S4003).

If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the privilege card CA and the "silver card" which are "gold cards" are added to the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. Since both of the certain privilege cards CA are included, the "gold and silver jackpot effect", which is a predetermined jackpot effect, is set for the two sets of "gold card" and "silver card" (S4004). ), and ends the jackpot effect setting process (S2312).

On the other hand, if the silver card flag 223r is off as a result of the confirmation in S4003 (S4003: No), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. However, since the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is not included, a “big jackpot performance of gold” which is a predetermined jackpot performance is set for the “gold card” (S4008). The effect setting process (S2312) ends.

If the gold card flag 223q is off (S4002: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4002, whether the silver card flag 223r is on, that is, the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 indicates " It is confirmed whether a privilege card CA which is a "silver card" is included (S4005).

If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S4005 (S4005: Yes), the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. , A privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included, a “silver jackpot effect” that is a predetermined jackpot effect is set for the “silver card” (S4006), and this jackpot effect setting process is performed. The step (S2312) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in S4005, if the silver card flag 223q is off (S4005: No), the privilege information CA that is a “gold card” is also “silver” in the card information read by the receiver card reader 1303. Since the privilege card CA that is a "card" is not included, the normal jackpot effect setting process is set (S4007), and the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is ended.

As described above, the gold card flag 223q desires the player to display the jackpot effect as a privilege using the gold card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the card information reading device 1300 receives the money. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is a card, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated.

Similarly, the silver card flag 223r desires that the player display a jackpot effect as a privilege using the silver card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the silver card on the card information reading device 1300. It is turned on when the privilege card CA, which is, is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated.

Therefore, each jackpot performance mode set by the processing of S4004, S4006, or S4008 due to the fact that the privilege card CA of the gold card or the silver card is attached to the card information reading device 1300 is a benefit by the privilege card CA. Is a jackpot production mode.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card, respectively, is an effect that is difficult to appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA (for example, the jackpot is continuously generated a predetermined number of times). In the case of production).

In this way, by making the jackpot performance mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card difficult to appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA, the playability of the game using the privilege card CA is improved. be able to. In addition, the player's willingness to acquire the privilege card CA can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are compared with each other, by setting the effect that is more difficult to appear in a normal game as a jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card, Has a higher value than silver cards. As described above, by giving the superiority or inferiority to the value of the privilege card CA, the player expects to acquire the privilege card CA having a higher value, and the interest in the game increases.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are simultaneously attached to the card information reading device 1300, a special jackpot that is defined in advance for a set of two gold and silver cards. The effect (golden and silver jackpot effect) is set. In the present embodiment, such a jackpot effect (gold and silver jackpot effect) is an exclusive effect that cannot appear in a normal game without using the privilege card CA.

As described above, by providing an effect that appears for the first time by combining a plurality of privilege cards CA (in the present embodiment, a set of two cards of a gold card and a silver card), it is possible to obtain a plurality of privilege cards CA. Value can be added. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, so that the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the jackpot mode that appears when a gold card or a silver card is individually attached to the card information reading device 1300 is not an effect that appears in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA. It may be a special effect that cannot appear in a normal game that is not used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-mentioned grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the giving condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates the probability variation jackpot. It is confirmed (S4101).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4101, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a probability variation jackpot (S4101: No), the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2119) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4101, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S4101: Yes), the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S4102), and the ejection card The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and discharged next time is read (S4103).

After the processing of S4103, it is confirmed whether the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4104, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. The processing of S4105 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the given grant condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is that the probability variation jackpot is generated 10 times. Therefore, in the process of S4105, it is confirmed whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more. Yes (S4105).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4105, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more (S4105: Yes), the grant condition for the privilege card CA, which is a “gold card”, is satisfied, so the card discharge confirmation flag 223k. Is turned on (S4106), and the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4105, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 10 (S4105: No), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “gold card” has not been established, and thus the process of S4106. Is skipped and the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4104, if the value is not a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is changed to the next time. It is confirmed whether the discharged privilege card CA has a value indicating that it is a "silver card" (S4107).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The processing of S4108 is executed to confirm whether or not the given grant condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is that the probability variation jackpot is generated five times, it is confirmed in the process of S4108 whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 5 or more. Yes (S4108).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4108, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 5 or more (S4108: Yes), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is satisfied, and thus the card discharge confirmation flag 223k. Is turned on (S4106), and the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4108, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 5 (S4108: No), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not satisfied, and thus the process of S4106. Is skipped and the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) is ended.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Card.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is one occurrence of the probability variation jackpot, the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110 this time is the probability variation jackpot. The provision condition is satisfied because it corresponds. Therefore, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4109). ), and the process of confirming the satisfaction of the applying condition (S2119) is ended.

In addition, as a result of the card discharge confirmation flag 223k being turned on in the process of S4106 or S4109, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the discharge position, and the privilege card CA is discharged. Be seen.

According to this grant condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2119), the number of probability variation jackpots is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be granted next time, and the difficulty level of granting the grant condition is changed. Therefore, the difference in the card information (contents of the privilege) can be grasped depending on whether the player feels it is easy or difficult to acquire the privilege card CA (ie, sensuously), so that the game progresses. Can be used as an intonation.

Further, in general, the higher the degree of difficulty of establishing the grant condition and the harder the player obtains the privilege card CA, the more the privilege card CA is recognized as being rare and of high value. Even if the player has difficulty in acquiring the privilege card CA due to the change in the granting condition having a relatively high degree of difficulty, the player is hard to acquire the bonus card CA, but the rarity is high and the value is high. You can continue playing while expecting to obtain a high special value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the above-described card ejection processing (S2120) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the card ejection process (S2120) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 43).

As shown in FIG. 49, in the card ejection process (S2120), first, it is confirmed whether the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201). If the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201: Yes), the transfer motor It is confirmed whether 1451c is being driven, that is, whether the transfer roller 1451d is being driven (rotated) (S4202).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4202, if the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven (S4202: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4203), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. .. As a result of the processing in S4203, transfer of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time from the confirmation position to the discharge position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4202, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven (S4202: Yes), it is confirmed whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the confirmation position to the discharge position. (S4208).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4208, when the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount (S4208: Yes), the privilege card CA has reached the ejection position, so the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped and the transfer roller is stopped. The rotation of 1451d is stopped (S4209), the card ejection flag 223l is turned off (S4210), the card ejection waiting flag 223m is turned on (S4211), and the privilege card CA is ejected from the privilege card ejection device 1450 by the player. In the standby state, the card ejection process (S2120) is finished, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4208, if the drive amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount (S4208: No), the privilege card CA being transferred has not reached the discharge position from the confirmation position. Therefore, the processes of S4209 to S4211 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the card ejection flag 223l is off (S4201: No) as a result of the confirmation in step S4201, it is confirmed whether the card transfer flag 223n is on (S4205).

If the card transfer flag 223n is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4205 (S4205; No), it means that the privilege card CA is not transferred, so the card discharge process (S2120) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S4205, when the card transfer flag 223n is on (S4205: Yes), the transfer motor 1451c is being driven, that is, the transfer roller 1451d is being driven (rotated). It is confirmed (S4206).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4206, if the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven (S4206: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4207), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. .. As a result of the processing in S4207, the transfer of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (that is, the privilege card CA located on the bottommost side of the storage member 1451) from the initial position to the confirmation position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4206, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven (S4206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the initial position to the confirmation position. (S4212).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4212, when the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount (S4212: Yes), the privilege card CA has reached the confirmation position, so the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped and the transfer roller is stopped. The rotation of 1451d is stopped (S4213), the card transfer flag 223n is turned off (S4214), the card reading flag 223o is turned on (S4215), the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. By the process of S4215, when the card reading flag 223o is turned on, the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4212, when the drive amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount (S4212: No), the privilege card CA being transferred from the initial position has not yet reached the confirmed position. Therefore, the processes of S4213 to S4215 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2120) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, when the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, it is determined whether or not the privilege card CA is taken out by the player. A discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) for confirming whether or not is executed. The detailed process of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003), discharge card confirmation processing for reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed. (S3004). The detailed processing of the discharge card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the discharge card confirmation process (S3004) is executed, a receiving part card confirmation process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA inserted in the holder part 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 is executed (S3005), and the timer interrupt process is executed. To finish. The detailed process of the receiving unit card confirmation process (S3005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-described discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 51, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3003), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223m is ON (S3301). At this time, if the card ejection waiting flag 223m is off (S3301: No), it is not in the waiting state for the player to eject the privilege card CA from the privilege card ejecting device 1450, so this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3003) is performed. finish.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3301, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301: Yes), the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, and the privilege card CA by the player is displayed. Since it is in the state of waiting for taking out, in such a case, it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3302).

If the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the privilege card CA is still in the discharge position and has not been taken out yet, so this discharge completion confirmation process (S3003). ) Ends.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the removal of the privilege card CA has been completed, so that the requirement condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a requirement. The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 so that the number of certain probability variation jackpots can be counted (S3303).

After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the above-described discharged card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the ejected card confirmation processing (S3004) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 52, in this ejected card confirmation processing (S3004), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223o is on (S3401), and if the card reading flag 223o is off (S3401: No), Since the privilege card CA is not located at the confirmation position, in such a case, the discharge card confirmation process (S3004) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3401, if the card reading flag 223o is on (S3401: Yes), the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position. Therefore, the card of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is detected. Information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) is read by the ejection card reader 1453 (S3402).

Next, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position, that is, the type of privilege card CA to be discharged next time (contents of privilege) is determined. (S3403).

After the processing of S3403, a value indicating the type of the determined privilege card CA is stored in the discharge card memory 223j (S3404), the card reading flag 223o is turned off (S3405), and this discharge card confirmation processing (S3004) ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the receiver card confirmation processing (S3005) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the receiver card confirmation processing (S3005) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the receiving part card confirmation process (S3005), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501). The "customer waiting effect" is neither a variable display nor a jackpot effect, and is an effect that is displayed when the pachinko machine 10A has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, and is a display irrelevant to the game state ( For example, a title display, a demo display, etc.).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3501, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501: Yes), it is confirmed whether the read button 1301 has been pressed (S3502).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3502, when the read button 1301 is pressed (S3502: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card mounting flag 223p is on (S3503).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3503, if the card mounting flag 223p is on (S3503: Yes), the mounting solenoid 1304 is off (not excited), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned on (S3504). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (S3505).

After the process of S3505, a receiving part card reading process of reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA by the receiving part card reader 1303 is executed (S3506). The confirmation process (S3005) ends. The detailed process of the receiving unit card reading process (S3506) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3503, if the card mounting flag 223p is off (S3503: No), the mounting solenoid 1304 is on (excitation), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3507), The solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3508).

After the processing of S3508, the gold card flag 223q is turned off (S3509), the silver card flag 223r is turned off (S3510), the copper card flag 223s is turned off (S3511), and this receiving part card confirmation processing (S3005) is ended. To do.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3501, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3501: No), or the process of S3502. When the read button 1301 is not pressed as a result of confirmation by (S3502: No), the receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3005) is terminated without performing the processing of S3503 to S3511.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the value of the card mounting flag 223p is set every time the read button 1301 is operated. It is configured to be inverted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the above-described receiving unit card reading process (S3506) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the receiver card reading process (S3506) executed in the receiver card confirmation process (S3005).

As shown in FIG. 54, in the receiving unit card reading process (S3506), first, card information of one or a plurality of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 (that is, a code that passes through the transparent unit 1302c). The pattern) is read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 (S3601).

After the processing of S3601, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA included in one or a plurality of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 is displayed. Each type is determined (S3602).

After the processing of S3602, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA cannot be discriminated due to a bad mounting condition or the like (S3603), and if not (S3603: No), the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct. It is confirmed whether or not (S3604).

Whether or not the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct is determined in the privilege card region 1602 read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 by an area E (see FIG. 39(e)) indicating that the mounting direction is opposite. It can be determined by whether or not it is filled. More specifically, if the area E is not filled, the mounting directions of the privilege cards CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300 are all correct, and if the area E is filled, the front and back are incorrectly mounted. It is determined that the privilege card CA exists.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3604, if the mounting direction of the privilege card CA is correct (S3604: Yes), the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included, that is, the area 1602a (see FIG. 39(a)). It is confirmed whether or not is painted (S3605). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is included (S3605: Yes), the gold card flag 223q is turned on (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3607. On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not included (S3605: No), the process of S3606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3607.

In the process of S3607, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included, that is, whether the area 1602b (see FIG. 39A) is filled (S3607). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included (S3607: Yes), the silver card flag 223r is turned on (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not included (S3607: No), the process of S3608 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3609.

In the process of S3609, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” is included, that is, whether or not there is a filled partition in the area 1602c (see FIG. 39(a)) (S3609). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609, if the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included (S3609: Yes), the copper card flag 223s is turned on (S3610).

After the processing of S3610, the flags 223t1 to 223t5 of the odd copper card flag area 223t are set in accordance with the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the odd number among the copper cards (S3611).

In the processing of S3611, among the copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for odd numbers, the ones included as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 are turned on corresponding flags (223t1 to 223t5). To do.

After the processing of S3611, the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even copper card flag area 223u are set according to the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the even number among the copper cards (S3612). The partial card reading process (S3506) ends.

In the process of S3612, among the copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for even numbers, the corresponding flags (223u1 to 223u4) are turned on for those contained as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. To do.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609, if the privilege card CA which is the “copper card” is not included (S3609: No), the processes of S3611, S3612 are skipped and this receiving part card reading process (S3506). ) Ends.

In addition, if the result of the confirmation in the process of S3603 indicates that the determination is not possible (S3603: No), or if the result of the confirmation in the process of S3604 indicates that the privilege card CA is not properly attached (S3604: Yes), an error occurs. Is executed (S3613), the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3614), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3615), and the receiving section card reading process (S3506) is ended.

According to this receiving section card reading process (S3506), the card information read by the receiving section card reader 1303 is analyzed, and then a gold card flag 223q, a silver card flag 223r, a copper card flag 223s, and an odd number copper card area. Since the flags 223t1 to 223t5 of 223t or the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even-numbered copper card flag area 223u are set, even when a plurality of privilege cards CA are attached to the card information reading device 1300, It is possible to give a privilege (in the present embodiment, a big hit effect or a reach effect) according to the number of installed benefit cards CA.

Therefore, the player's interest can be directed to the acquisition of various privilege cards CA, and as a result, the player can create a situation in which he/she is less likely to get tired of the game, and the interest in the game for a long period of time. Can be maintained.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information (privilege content) of the privilege card CA to be granted next time is read (detected) in advance by the discharge card reader 1453 before being granted. Then, according to the read card information, the grant condition of the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA to be granted next time) is changed.

Therefore, since the frequency of granting the privilege card CA changes according to the card information (contents of the privilege), the progress of the game can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest in the game can be extended for a longer period of time. Can be maintained by the player.

Here, in the present embodiment, the requirement for satisfying the grant condition (in the present embodiment, the number of probability variation jackpots) is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be granted next time. Since the degree of difficulty of establishing the grant condition is changed, it is possible for the player to perceive the difference in the card information (contents of the privilege).

In particular, the award condition is changed by changing the number of occurrences based on the occurrence of a common game state (occurrence of a probability variation jackpot in the present embodiment), so that the player can feel the difference in the card information. Therefore, it is easy to grasp the expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA, it is easy for the player to create a situation in which the player is not tired of playing the game, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

By the way, since the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured not to inform (indicate) the type (contents of the privilege) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time before the discharge, the player pays the privilege. In addition to not being able to predict the timing at which the card CA will be discharged, the type of privilege card CA that the user can obtain next time cannot be predicted. The player tends to recognize that it is rare and highly valuable as it is hard to obtain, so if the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time cannot be predicted, the privilege card CA is discharged. As the period up to is longer, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the high-value privilege card CA.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA is configured as a code pattern formed in the light transmissive card information area 1602. Therefore, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked, a new code pattern can be formed by combining the code patterns formed in the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA.

Here, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, a privilege (in the present embodiment, a jackpot effect or a reach effect) is provided according to the number of privilege cards CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300, so that a game is played. Since the player expects to obtain various privilege cards CA, it is possible for the player to create a situation in which the player is not tired of playing the game, and it is possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

By the way, as described above, since the privilege card CA of the present embodiment has the code pattern as the card information formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602, a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked in the same direction. When the privilege information is stored in the privilege card ejecting device 1450, the card information areas 1602 of the privilege cards CA overlap each other at the initial position. Pattern) is difficult to read.

To address this problem, the privilege cards CA are arranged (pulled out) so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, and the code patterns of the card information areas 1602 located on the respective sides are changed. The problem can also be solved by providing two readable code readers at each position.

However, when such a solution is adopted, the administrator who manages the privilege card CA (for example, the manager of the hall in which the pachinko machine that can grant the privilege card CA is installed) or the manufacturer of the privilege card CA is When storing the privilege card CA in the privilege card ejection device 1450, it is necessary to rearrange the direction of the privilege card CA so as to arrange the privilege cards CA in a lever arrangement and to confirm the direction. The handling load is high.

Further, since the code readers are required at two places, the manufacturing cost increases, and the control for reading the code pattern by either one of the two places becomes complicated.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next is the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other privilege cards CA are stored. Since it is configured to be read (detected) after being transferred to, the transparent card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next time, without placing a large number of privilege cards CA in the leverage, It is possible to create a state in which the transparent card information area 1602 of the other privilege card CA does not overlap.

Therefore, the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be detected by the card reader for ejection 1453 of 1 and the load on the handling of the privilege card CA can be suppressed, so that the card information can be given next time. It is possible to preferably detect the card information of the privilege card CA that is available.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62. In the above-described second embodiment, the giving condition for giving the privilege card CA to the player is configured to be a condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the granting conditions for granting the privilege card CA to the player are the first granting condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot and the second granting condition based on the number of occurrences of the miss reach. It is composed of two types of conditions: a grant condition. In addition, in this 3rd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment which were mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10B according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, a discharge mode change button 1800 is provided on the front surface of the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10B. The discharge mode change button 1800 is a button for allowing the player to select the first grant condition (the grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot) or the second grant condition (the grant condition based on the number of times of out-of-range reach). Is.

FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10B in the third embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227 for performing lamp display, an ejection card reader 1453, In addition to the transfer motor 1451c for driving (rotating) the transfer roller 1451d, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461, the receiver card reader 1302, the mounting solenoid 1304, the read button 1301, and the like, a discharge mode change button 1800 is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment has a discharge card memory 223j, a card discharge confirmation flag 223k, a card discharge flag 223l, a card removal wait flag 223m, and a card. Transfer flag 223n, card reading flag 223o, card loading flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, and even copper card flag area 223u. , A probability variation jackpot counter 223v, a probability variation discharge mode flag 223w, and an out-reach counter 223x.

The discharge mode flag 223w is based on the number of occurrences of the out-reach, or whether the mode in which the privilege card CA is given to the player is the mode using the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation big jackpot (probability variation discharge mode). It is a flag indicating whether or not the mode is the mode using the second applying condition (disengagement reach discharge mode).

If the discharge mode flag 223w is off, it indicates that the mode in which the privilege card CA is given to the player is the probability variation discharge mode, while if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, the privilege card CA is given to the player. It indicates that the operation mode is the out-reach discharge mode.

The discharge mode flag 223w is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10B is powered on. That is, the pachinko machine 10B of this embodiment is set to the probability variation discharge mode when the power is turned on.

Then, when the discharge mode button 1800 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10B is not played by the player for a predetermined time), the state is inverted each time. Is configured. That is, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, it is turned off, and if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, it is turned off.

The detachment reach counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of occurrences of detachment reach in the detachment reach discharge mode. The detachment reach counter 223x is cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10B is powered on, and then the command corresponding to the detachment from the main control device 110 (in the present embodiment, the detachment reach (front-rear detachment, detachment other than front and rear). Each time the stop symbol command corresponding to the reach) is received, one is added. Then, it is cleared to 0 each time the privilege card CA is taken out by the player (that is, each time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position).

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when in the out-reach discharge mode, the out-reach counter 223x is set based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. When the number of times of execution is reached, the grant condition is satisfied, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the third embodiment. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the timer interrupt process of the third embodiment, first, when the player operates the discharge mode change button 1800 to instruct to change the discharge mode (probability variation discharge mode or detach reach discharge mode). Then, the discharge mode changing process for changing the discharge mode is executed (S3006). The detailed processing of this discharge mode change processing (3006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After the discharge mode changing process (S3006) is executed, a discharge completion confirmation process is executed (S3007). This discharge completion confirmation processing (S3007) is similar to the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) of the first embodiment, when the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, the privilege card CA is played. This is a process for confirming whether or not it has been taken out by a person. The details of this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is executed, the above-described ejection card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) and receiving part card confirmation processing (see FIG. 53) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the above-described discharge mode changing process (S3006) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the discharge mode changing process (S3006) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

As shown in FIG. 59, in the discharge mode change process (S3006), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301). When the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301: YES), it is confirmed whether the discharge mode change button 1800 has been pressed (S4302).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4302, when the discharge mode change button 1800 is pressed (S4302: Yes), it is confirmed whether the discharge mode flag 223w is ON (S4303).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4303, if the discharge mode flag 223w is off, that is, if the probability variation discharge mode using the first giving condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot is used (S4303: No), the discharge The discharge mode flag 223w is turned on (S4304) in order to change the mode to the probability variation discharge mode using the second giving condition based on the number of times of occurrence of detachment, and the process proceeds to S4305.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4303, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, that is, if the out-reach discharge mode is set (S4303: Yes), the discharge mode is changed to the probability variation discharge mode. The mode flag 223w is turned off (S4306), and the process proceeds to S4305.

In the process of S4305, the discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 (S4305). When the discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 by the process of S4305, the display control device 114 displays a display indicating to the player that the discharge mode has been changed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81. .. After the processing of S4305, the discharge mode changing processing (S3006) is ended.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4301, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S4301: No), or the process of S4302. When the discharge mode change button 1800 is not pressed as a result of confirmation by (S4302: No), the discharge mode change process (S3006) is terminated without performing the processes of S4303 to S4305.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, each time the discharge mode change button 1800 is operated when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the discharge mode flag 223w is set. The value is inverted and the ejection mode is changed.

Next, the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

As shown in FIG. 60, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223m is ON (S3301). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is off (S3301: No), this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3301, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301: Yes), it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3302). At this time, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is on (S3302: No), the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) is ended.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 (S3303), and the detachment reach counter 223x is cleared to 0 (S3306).

After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3007) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the addition condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2122) of the third embodiment.

The grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) of the third embodiment is executed instead of the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2119) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment. It is a process that is performed.

As shown in FIG. 61, in this confirmation processing of satisfaction of the application condition (S2122), it is first confirmed whether or not the discharge mode flag 223w is ON (S4110). When the discharge mode flag 223w is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4110 (S4110: No), the processes of S4104 to S4109 are executed similarly to the second embodiment described above, and the imparting condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122). ) Ends.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the discharge mode is the probability variation discharge mode using the first applying condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation big hit, the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot is at that time. When the number of times set in accordance with the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is reached, it is determined that the grant condition (first grant condition) is satisfied, and the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4110, if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, that is, if the release reach discharge mode using the second grant condition based on the number of times of the release reach is generated (S4110: Yes), In order to confirm the satisfaction of the second application condition, the detach reach discharge mode process is executed (S4111), and the application condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned detachment reach discharge mode process (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the detachment reach discharge mode process (S4111) executed in the applying condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2122).

As shown in FIG. 62, in the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) comes off (rear reach, front and rear, It is confirmed whether or not it indicates a reach other than the deviation from the front and rear (S4401).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4401, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the outreach (S4401: No), the outreach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4401, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (S4401: Yes), the out-reach counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the ejection card. The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharging device 1450 and discharged next time is read (S4403).

After the processing of S4403, it is confirmed whether the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4404).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. The processing of S4405 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the second giving condition that is satisfied is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is occurrence of the miss reach of 300 times, the value of the miss reach counter 223x is 300 or more in the process of S4405. It is confirmed (S4405).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S4405, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 300 or more (S4405: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA, which is a “gold card”, is satisfied. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and this disconnect reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4405, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is less than 300 (S4105: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not satisfied, The process of S4406 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is changed to the next time. It is confirmed whether the discharged privilege card CA has a value indicating that it is a "silver card" (S4407).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The processing of S4408 is executed in order to confirm whether or not the second giving condition that is satisfied is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is that the out-reach has occurred 150 times, the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 150 or more in the process of S4408. It is confirmed (S4408).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4408, if the value of the out-reach counter 223x is 150 or more (S4408: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “silver card” is satisfied, so the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and this disconnect reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S4408, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 150 (S4408: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” has not been established. The process of S4406 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Since it is a "card", the process of S4409 is executed to confirm whether or not the second grant condition set for the privilege card CA which is a "copper card" is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is that the outreach has occurred 30 times, the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more in the process of S4409. It is confirmed (S4409).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S4409, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more (S4409: Yes), the second granting condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is satisfied, so the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4410), and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4409, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 30 (S4409: No), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is not satisfied, The process of S4410 is skipped, and the out-reach reach discharge mode process (S4111) ends.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the ejection mode is the detach reach ejection mode using the second applying condition based on the occurrence number of detach reach, the occurrence number of detach reach is When the number of times set according to the type of privilege card CA located at the confirmation position at the time is reached, it is determined that the grant condition (second grant condition) is satisfied, and the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the award condition of the privilege coin CA is set to the first award condition (the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot). It is possible to use either the number-of-times-based grant condition) or the second grant-condition (the grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outlying reach).

Therefore, since a plurality of grant conditions are provided, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less tired of the game. Further, since the selection (selection) of the grant condition can be performed based on the player's intention, the game in which the privilege coin CA can be obtained by the satisfaction of the grant condition is performed by the grant condition reflecting the player's own intention. You can

Therefore, by providing a plurality of grant conditions, it is possible to improve the game playability of the game in which the bonus coin CA can be obtained by the satisfaction of the grant conditions, and it is possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time. .. In addition, since the player's intention can be reflected in the selection of the grant condition, the player's consciousness can be easily directed toward the acquisition of the privilege card CA, and a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game is created. be able to.

Here, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, even after the award condition of the privilege coin CA is changed in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the award condition before that is changed. The information (in the present embodiment, the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot or the out-reach in this embodiment) is retained until the discharge of the privilege card CA scheduled to be discharged next time is completed at the time of changing the grant condition. ..

Therefore, even if the award condition is restored again after the award condition of the bonus coin CA is changed in response to the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the game can be continued from the continuation before the change. it can. Therefore, it is possible to properly use the granting conditions that are considered to be optimal depending on the situation, and it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA from being impaired, and to keep the interest in the game for a long time. Can be maintained.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 83. In the above-described second embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged (granted) next time is read, and the content of the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (that is, the content of privilege) is read. The control, specifically, the configuration for changing the requirement for establishing the award condition of the privilege card according to the read card information is adopted.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the card information of a plurality of privilege cards including a privilege card to be discharged next time is piled up to be read collectively, and based on a plurality of card information derived from the plurality of privilege cards. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this 4th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram for explaining the privilege card ejection device 1450x according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the privilege card discharging device 1450x shown in FIG. 63 is provided on the back side of the lower plate unit 15 in the pachinko machine 10A (see FIG. 34) instead of the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the second embodiment. Has been.

More specifically, FIG. 63(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card discharging device 1450x as viewed from the front (the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the privilege card discharging device 1450x taken along the line Zb-Zb, and FIG. 63C schematically shows the internal structure of the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x when viewed from the upper surface side. It is a top view.

For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between the adjacent privilege cards CA' in FIG. 63(a). Further, in FIG. 63(c), a part of the configuration such as the privilege card CA' and the upper lid member 1452x is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the privilege card discharging device 1450x is a storage member 1450xa for storing a plurality of privilege cards CA' and a standby for being connected to the storage member 1450xa and discharging the privilege card CA'. Member 1450xb.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the storage member 1450xa has a box-like shape whose upper surface is opened and which is capable of accommodating (storing) by stacking (superimposing) the privilege card CA′ in the internal space. It has a body housing 1451x.

An upper lid member 1452 is detachably attached to the opening on the upper surface of the housing 1451x. Therefore, if necessary, for example, the upper lid member 1452 can be removed when the privilege card CA' is replenished in the internal space of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x). The upper lid member 1452 is provided with a biasing member 1455 that biases the stacked privilege cards CA from above in order to stabilize the discharge of the privilege cards CA.

The urging member 1455 is composed of a spring member 1455a whose one end side is connected to the upper lid member 1452, and a flat plate-shaped plate member 1455b which is connected to the other end side of the spring member 1455a.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the surface of the housing 1451x on the standby member 1450xb side is the bottom surface side of the privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x). There is provided an opening 1451xa for transferring the one privilege card CA' located in the standby member 1556x.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, on the bottom surface of the housing 1451x, a privilege card CA' (one located closest to the bottom surface) stored in the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) is provided. The first transfer roller 1451xd for transferring the privilege card CA') to the standby member 1556x side is attached. The first transfer roller 1451xd is driven by the first transfer motor 1451xc (see FIG. 67). As shown in FIG. 63(a), the standby member 1450xb has a box-shaped housing 1456x configured such that the privilege cards CA' can be stacked (superposed) in the internal space and housed. An opening 1456xa for receiving the privilege card CA' transferred from the storage member 1450xa is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 1451xa on the surface of the standby member 1450xb on the storage member 1450xa side.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the front surface of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x), that is, the surface on the lower plate unit 15 side corresponds to the opening 1054 (see FIG. 34) provided in the lower plate unit 15. Of the plurality of (two in the present embodiment) privilege cards CA′ that are on standby by the standby member 1456x at the position to be discharged for discharging one privilege card CA′ located on the bottom side. An outlet 1456xb (shown as a chain double-dashed line) is provided.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x) has a bottom surface corresponding to the card information area 1602x (see FIG. 65) of the privilege card CA' on the side facing the discharge port 1456xb. A rectangular transparent portion 1456xc having a size is formed. Below the transparent portion 1456xc, an ejection card reader 1453 is arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 63(c), a discharge roller 1456xe driven by a discharge motor 1456xd (see FIG. 67) which is a stepping motor is provided on the discharge port 1456xb side on the bottom surface of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x). It is installed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(a), a fixing solenoid 1456xf is attached to the upper surface side of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x), and is attached to the tip of the movable iron core of the fixing solenoid 1456xf. A plate member 1456xg is attached.

The plate member 1456xg has substantially the same shape as the privilege card CA', and the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA' is white and ungrounded. Although details will be described later, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned on (excited) when the privilege card CA′ is transferred to the standby member 1450xb, and the privilege card CA′ is pressed against the bottom side of the standby member 1450xb by the plate member 1456xg. It is configured.

Therefore, when the card information areas 1602x (see FIG. 65) of the plurality of privilege cards CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb are overlapped and collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, the card information area 1602x to be read is provided. The background can be white and ungrounded, and the card information included in the card information area 1602x can be suitably read.

Further, since the card information area 1602x can be read by the ejection card reader 1453 while the privilege card CA′ is pressed by the plate member 1456xg, a plurality of card information areas 1602x derived from a plurality of privilege cards CA′ can be displayed. It is possible to prevent warping of the privilege card CA′ when the sheets are stacked and read collectively, and it is possible to improve the reading accuracy of the card information.

Between the storage member 1450xa and the standby member 1450xb, a second transfer roller 1457xb for sending the privilege card CA′ sent from the opening 1451xa of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) to the standby member 1450xb, and a second transfer roller 1457xb. To the standby member 1450xb and a discharge mechanism (not shown) for discharging the privilege card CA′ transferred by the second transfer roller 1457xb and the driven roller 1457xc to the standby member 1450xb. A transfer completion confirmation sensor (not shown) such as a photoelectric sensor for confirming that the discharge of the privilege card CA′ is completed. The second transfer roller 1457xb is driven by the second transfer motor 1457xa (see FIG. 67). The privilege card ejecting device 1450x according to the fourth embodiment drives the first transfer motor 1451xc (see FIG. 67) and the second transfer motor 1457xa (see FIG. 67) to cause the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb. Are driven in the arrow R1 direction and the arrow R2 direction, respectively, and one privilege card CA′ located on the bottommost side of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) is directed to the standby member 1450xb (arrow M2 direction). Transfer.

In this way, the privilege card CA′ transferred in the direction of the arrow M2 by the second transfer roller 1457xb and the driven roller 1457xc is discharged to the standby member 1450xb by the discharge mechanism (not shown) and transferred from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb. (Move) is completed. As a discharging mechanism (not shown), impellers having blades are provided on both sides of the second transfer roller 1457xb, and a privilege card CA′ transferred in the direction of arrow M2 is blown toward the standby member 1450xb. Is exemplified.

In the present embodiment, two privilege cards CA′ are configured to stand by in the standby member 1450xb, and when the grant condition (card discharge condition) for the privilege card CA′ is satisfied, the standby member 1450xb (the housing 1456x). The privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of () is transferred in the direction of the arrow M3 (see FIG. 63(c)) by the rotation of the discharge roller 1456xe, and is discharged from the opening 1451 via the discharge port 1456xb.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, an operation of discharging the privilege card CA′ from the standby member 1450xb in the privilege card discharging device 1450x of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the discharging operation of the privilege card CA′ by the privilege card discharging device 1450x.

As shown in FIG. 64, when discharging one privilege card CA′ from the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x, the two privilege cards CA′ are discharged while being pressed by the plate member 1456xg. The discharge roller 1456xe is driven (rotated) in the arrow R3 direction by driving the motor 1456xd (see FIG. 67).

Thereby, one privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1450xb (housing 1456x) is transferred in the direction toward the opening 1054 of the lower plate unit 15 (direction of arrow M3). After transferring the privilege card CA' to the discharge position, the discharge motor 1456xd is stopped. The "discharging position" is a position where a part of the privilege card CA' is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 and can be taken out by the player.

Then, when the player takes out the privilege card CA′ and the ejection of the card is completed, the fixing solenoid 1456xf releases the excitation and pulls the plate member 1456xg upward, and then one sheet from the storage member 1450xa. The privilege card CA′ is transferred, and the standby member 1450xb is replenished with the privilege card CA′.

As shown in FIG. 64, presence/absence detection sensor 1461, which is a reflection type photoelectric sensor disposed, is provided between discharge opening 1456xb of standby member 1450xb and opening 1054 in privilege card discharge device 1450x. If the privilege card CA′ located at the ejection position is taken out by the player and the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off, it is determined that the card ejection is completed.

Next, the privilege card CA' used in the fourth embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the privilege card CA', and FIG. 65(b) is a rear view of the privilege card CA'.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), the privilege card CA′ is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (plate shape) and is made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material (for example, , A main body 1601x made of resin or paper, and a card information area 1602x made of a transparent (light transmissive) material (for example, resin).

The card information area 1602x has a code pattern indicating card information formed therein. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, in the present embodiment, the inside of the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, each area is divided into sections of 5 rows×10 columns, and 1 in each area. By correlating one card information with a section and filling the section corresponding to the card information, a code pattern (card information) including a total of two sections is formed.

On the surface 1601xa of the main body portion 1601x, a design 1601xa1 (FIG. 65(a) corresponding to the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 1602x (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA′)). In the example of), an octopus) is written. Further, the front surface 1601xa is provided with an explanation section 1601xa2 for explaining the contents of the privilege obtained by mounting the privilege card CA' on the card information reading device 1300 (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, the back surface 1601xb of the main body 1601 is white and has no ground, and is configured to be distinguishable from the front surface 1602xa. The back surface 1601xb of the main body portion 1601x is not limited to white or the like and may have a predetermined design that can be distinguished from the front surface 1602xa.

Here, the code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602x of the privilege card CA' will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x. The card information areas 1602x shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C are all viewed from the front surface 1601xa of the privilege card CA'.

FIG. 66A is a schematic diagram for explaining the content of each section in the section formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. As shown in FIG. 66(a), the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, area 1 and area 2, and each area is divided into sections of 5 rows×10 columns.

In each row in the section of 5 rows×10 columns in the area 1, information indicating a privilege (in the present embodiment, an odd number pattern used in the reach effect as a benefit that appears when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted) ) Is assigned. More specifically, from the top row to the bottom, "1 (that is, octopus)", "3 (that is, turtle)", "5 (that is, shrimp)", and "7 (that is, dugong)". , “9 (that is, crab)” is assigned.

Further, among the 5 rows×10 columns in the area 1, the additional production A as the suggestive production is assigned to the five columns from the first column to the fifth column, and from the sixth column to the tenth column. The additional effect B as a suggested effect is assigned to the five columns. In the present embodiment, the additional effect A is "slip notice" and the additional effect B is "group notice".

Further, in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 1, the frequency of causing the suggestive effect to appear in each of the first to fifth columns and each of the sixth to tenth columns. Five levels from “level 1” to “level 5” that define (probability) are assigned.

More specifically, in each row from the first column to the fifth column in the area 1, "level 1", "level 2", "level 3", " “Level 4” and “level 5” are assigned. Similarly, in each of the rows from the sixth column to the tenth column in the region 1, “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, “level 4” are sequentially arranged from the sixth column to the 10th column. , “Level 5” are assigned. In the present embodiment, the higher the numerical value of the level, the more frequently the suggestive effect is displayed.

On the other hand, “level 1” to “level 5” are assigned to each row in the section of 5 rows×10 columns in the area 2 in order from the top row to the bottom. Further, in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 2, the additional production B as the suggestive production is assigned to the five columns from the first column to the fifth column, and from the sixth column to the tenth column. An additional effect A as a suggested effect is assigned to the five columns.

In addition, when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted in order from the first column to the fifth column in each column from the first column to the fifth column in the 5 rows×10 columns section in the area 2 “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are assigned as the odd-numbered symbols used in the reach effect as the privilege appearing in FIG. Similarly, in each row from the sixth row to the tenth row in the area 2, from the sixth row to the tenth row, in order from the sixth row to the tenth row, "1" and " “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are assigned.

As a result of assigning the information as described above to the respective sections formed by dividing the card information area 1602x, the information of the “design number”, the information of the “additional effect”, and the information of the “level” are assigned to the respective sections. Can be associated with each other.

Therefore, a code pattern including the "design number" information, the "additional effect" information, and the "level" information by filling one of the sections formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. (Card information) can be formed.

The character string consisting of three characters described inside each section in FIG. 66A is for explaining the information assigned to each section formed by dividing the card information area 1602x. The character string consisting of these three characters represents, from the left, "symbol number", "additional effect", and "level". For example, the section “1A1” is assigned that the symbol is “1”, the additional effect is “additional effect A”, and the level is “1”.

As described above, since each section formed in the card information area 1602x includes a plurality of pieces of information, when the ejection card reader 1453 reads at least one section of the fill, the audio lamp control device The MPU 221 of 113 can recognize a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the read one section (in the present embodiment, information of “symbol number”, information of “additional effect”, and information of “level”).

Therefore, compared with the case where the code pattern is formed by dispersing different information at different positions, the formation area of the code pattern can be made smaller, and the privilege card CA′ can be prevented from being increased in size, and the privilege card CA′ can be suppressed accordingly. It is possible to increase the number of card information that CA′ can have (in other words, the type of privilege card CA′).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the inside of the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, each area is divided into a plurality of partitions, and one partition in each area is associated with one card information. A code pattern (card information) composed of a total of two sections is formed by filling the section corresponding to the card information. Here, the allocation of the card information to each section of each area is different between the two sections when viewed from the front surface 1601xa side of the privilege card CA′ and the two sections when viewed from the back surface 1601xb side. If this is done, it is easy to identify the front and back of the privilege card CA'.

66(b) and 66(c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602x. In FIG. 66B, "1A5", that is, the symbol indicating the content of the privilege is "1 (that is, octopus)", and the additional effect as the suggested effect is "additional effect A (that is, slip notice)". There is a case where the appearance frequency of the suggestive effect is "level 5", and FIG. 66(c) shows "3B3", that is, the symbol indicating the content of the privilege is "3 (that is, turtle)", The case where the additional effect as the suggested effect is "additional effect B (that is, group notice)" and the appearance frequency of the suggested effect is "level 3" is shown.

As described above, the card information area 1602x in the privilege card CA' of the present embodiment is divided into two areas, and the same information is associated with each section of each area, so that the number of specific elements of information increases. Therefore, the reading accuracy of the ejection card reader 1453 is improved, and erroneous detection of information can be prevented.

FIG. 66D is a schematic diagram showing an example of the card information area 1602x in a state where a plurality of privilege cards CA are correctly stacked. As will be described later in detail, in the fourth embodiment, the card information of a plurality of privilege cards including the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time is overlaid to be collectively read, and a plurality of cards derived from the plurality of privilege cards can be read. The effect based on the card information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the card information area 1602x of each privilege card CA′ is configured to be light-transmissive, when a plurality of privilege cards CA′ are stacked, a new section is added to each privilege card CA′. A code pattern is constructed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 66(d), the card information area when two privilege cards CA′ each having the privilege card area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(b) and FIG. 66(c) are overlapped It is 1602x. Therefore, in the card information area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(d), a code pattern in which four sections corresponding to “1A5” or “3B3” are filled is formed.

When the discharge card reader 1453 reads the code pattern of the privilege card area 1602x shown in FIG. 66(d) (a new code pattern formed by stacking two privilege cards CA'), the audio lamp controller The MPU 221 of 113 can recognize two types of card information that are “1A5” or “3B3”.

As described above, since each section formed in the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA′ is associated with a combination of a plurality of information (that is, “1A5” or “3B3”), the MPU 221 recognizes it. The two types of card information described above can be specified as the card information held by either of the two privilege cards CA′ that are stacked.

As described above, according to the privilege card CA′ of the present embodiment, all three types of information, which are the card information, are associated with one section, so that when a plurality of privilege cards CA′ are superposed on each other. , The combination of information that each privilege card CA′ has can be detected without confusion.

Further, in the privilege card CA′ of the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of pieces of information is associated with one section, and therefore, as compared with a case where different pieces of information are dispersed at different positions to form a code pattern, The shape is simple. Therefore, a new code pattern formed by stacking a plurality of privilege cards CA' also has a relatively simple shape, and erroneous detection by the ejection card reader 1453 can be prevented.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A in the fourth embodiment. is there.

As shown in FIG. 67, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment via the bus line 224. The input/output port 225 has a first transfer motor for driving (rotating) the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the ejection card reader 1453, and the first transfer roller 1451xd. 1451xc, a second transfer motor 1457xa for driving (rotating) the second transfer roller 1457xb, a fixing solenoid 1456xf, a second discharge motor 1456xd for driving (rotating) the discharge roller 1456xe, a presence detection sensor 1461, a receiving portion. A card reader 1302, a mounting solenoid 1304, a read button 1301 and the like are connected. Although not shown, a transfer completion confirmation sensor for confirming completion of transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is also connected to the input/output port 225.

As shown in FIG. 68, the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment includes an ejection card A memory 223xa, an ejection card B memory 223xb, a card ejection suggestion flag 223xc, a card ejection confirmation flag 223xd, and a card. A discharge flag 223xe, a card removal waiting flag 223xf, a card transfer flag 223xg, a card reading flag 223xh, a receiving unit card memory 223xi, a receiving unit symbol flag area 223xj, a complete deviation counter 223xk, and a probability variation jackpot counter 223xl. , Has a suggestion effect counter 223xm.

The discharge card A memory 223xa and the discharge card B memory 223xb are two privilege cards CA' that are on standby by the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, that is, one privilege card CA' to be discharged next time. It is a memory for storing the card information of two privilege cards CA′ including.

More specifically, the discharge card A memory 223xa is a memory that stores the card information of one of the two privilege cards CA', and the discharge card B memory 223xb is the other privilege card CA'. This is a memory for storing the card information of CA'.

Which of the two privilege cards CA' is on standby by the standby member 1450xb, which privilege card CA' is stored in the discharge card A memory 223xa is the level of each privilege card CA' (card information. Card information of a higher level is stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa.

The card discharge suggestion flag 223xc indicates whether or not a suggestion condition (also referred to as a notification condition), which is a condition for initiating suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, is satisfied. Is a flag indicating. If the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is ON, it indicates that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The card ejection suggestion flag 223xc which is turned on in response to the establishment of the suggestion condition is then turned off when the provision condition is established and the ejection of the privilege card CA′ is confirmed, and the stop command is received from the main control device 110. ..

In the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received from the main control device 110 30 times, the suggestion condition is satisfied and the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on. ..

The card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is a flag indicating whether or not the ejection of the privilege card CA' has been confirmed. When the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is turned on, it means that the discharge of the privilege card CA' has been confirmed because the condition for granting the privilege card CA' has been established.

The card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the award condition of the privilege card CA' is established. The card discharge confirmation flag 223xd which is turned on in accordance with the satisfaction of the grant condition of the privilege card CA' is subsequently confirmed that the discharge condition of the privilege card CA' is satisfied and the stop command is received from the main control device 110. If turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, every time the stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 110 twice, the grant condition is satisfied, and the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is turned on.

The card discharge flag 223xe is a flag indicating whether or not one privilege card CA' is discharged from the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x. If the card ejection flag 223xe is turned on, the ejection motor 1456xd is driven in the later-described card ejection processing (see FIG. 78), and the privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1456x in the privilege card ejection device 1450x. Are transferred to the discharge position.

The card ejection flag 223xe is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, the grant condition is satisfied, the ejection of the privilege card CA' is confirmed, and the main controller 110 issues a stop command. It is turned on when it is received. The card ejection flag 223xe thus turned on is turned off when the privilege card CA' to be ejected next time is transferred to the ejection position in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 78).

The card removal waiting flag 223xf is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed, that is, whether or not the privilege card CA' located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x is taken out by the player. is there. When the card removal wait flag 223xf is turned on, it indicates that the privilege card CA' located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x has not been taken out by the player.

The card removal wait flag 223xf is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time is located at the discharge position. The card removal wait flag 223xf thus turned on is turned off when the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off and the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed.

The card transfer flag 223xg is one privilege card CA′ located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1450xa (housing 1451x) among the plurality of privilege cards CA′ located in the storage member 1450xa in the privilege card ejection device 1450x. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be transferred to the standby member 1450xb for replenishment. If the card transfer flag 223xg is turned on, the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are driven in the card discharge processing (see FIG. 78) described later, and one privilege card located in the storage member 1450xa is driven. CA′ is transferred to the standby member 1456.

The card transfer flag 223xg is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the discharge of the privilege card CA' is completed. Then, the card transfer flag 223xg thus turned on is turned off when the supplement (transfer) of the privilege card CA' to the standby member 1450xb is completed in the card discharge process (see FIG. 78) described later.

The card reading flag 223xh is a flag indicating whether or not to read the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the privilege card CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x. If the card reading flag 223xh is turned on, the card information is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The card reading flag 223xh is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and the privilege card ejection device 1450x is set in the startup process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is turned on when it is performed, or when the supplement (transfer) of the privilege card CA′ to the standby member 1450xb is completed and the card information can be read. The card reading flag 223xh thus turned on is turned off when the card information for ejection 1453 is read.

The receiving section card flag 223xi indicates whether or not the privilege card CA′ is attached to the holder section 1302a of the card information reading device 1300, that is, the attaching solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited) and inserted into the holder section 1302a. This is a flag indicating whether or not is aligned. When the receiving part card flag 223xi is turned on, the privilege cards CA′ inserted in the holder part 1302a are in an aligned state, and the card information contained in the card information area 1602x can be read by the receiving part card reader 1303. Indicates that it is possible.

When the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10A is not played by the player for a predetermined period of time), the state of the receiving section card flag 223xi is changed each time. It is configured to invert. That is, if the receiver card flag 223xi is on, it is turned off, and if the receiver card flag 223xi is on, it is turned off. The receiving unit card flag 223xi is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

The receiving portion symbol flag area 223xj is the symbol information included in the card information read by the receiving portion card reader 1303 (in the present embodiment, the reach effect as a benefit that appears when the card information reading device 1300 is mounted). This is an area for storing the presence/absence of each symbol for the symbols that appear (information of the main symbol corresponding to an odd number).

This receiving part design flag area 223xj includes five flags of a number 1 flag 223xj1, a number 3 flag 223xj2, a number 5 flag 223xj3, a number 7 flag 223xj4, and a number 9 flag 223xj5, and these flags 223xj1 to 223xj5, respectively. , "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" indicates the presence or absence of five types of symbols corresponding to the main symbol. For example, if the number 5 flag 223xj3 is on, in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303, the card information that is the main symbol for "5" is the symbol that appears in the reach effect as a privilege. Indicates that it is included.

Each flag 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiver pattern flag area 223xj is initialized (OFF) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, and each time the card information is read by the receiver card reader 1303. On the basis of the read card information, if the corresponding card is included, it is turned on, and if it is not included, it is turned off.

The complete removal counter 223xk is completely removed from the main controller 110 in a state where the suggestion condition, which is a condition for initiating suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, is not satisfied. It is a counter for counting the number of times the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the deviation is continuously received.

This complete disengagement counter 223xk, when the reception of the symbol stop command corresponding to complete discontinuity is interrupted, that is, reach variation (reach variation at normal or probability variation jackpot, out-of-front/outer reach, reach other than out-of-position reach) When a command is received from main controller 110, it is cleared to 0. The complete disconnection counter 223xk is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the complete disconnection counter 223xk reaches 30, that is, when the complete disconnection occurs 30 times in succession. Is configured as.

The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is a counter for counting the number of times the probability variation jackpot occurs. The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is incremented by 1 when the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (in the present embodiment, the stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) is received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, each time the player takes out the privilege card CA', it is cleared to 0. In addition, the probability variation jackpot 223xl is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl reaches 2, that is, when the probability variation jackpot occurs twice, the granting condition is satisfied and the standby member 1450xb. Of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby, one privilege card CA′ is transferred to the ejection position.

When the suggestion counter 223xm suggests the types of the two privilege cards CA' that are on standby in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x, the suggestion counter 223xm suggests based on the card information of which privilege card CA'. A counter used for selecting whether to perform the suggestion based on the content stored in the ejection card memory A 223xa or the suggestion based on the content stored in the ejection card memory B 223xb. Is.

The suggestion effect counter 223xm is a loop counter that can take a range of 0 to 9, and 1 is added to the previous value every time it is updated at a predetermined update interval. When the maximum value (value=9) is reached, the value is returned to 0 by the next update.

The suggestion effect counter 223xm in the present embodiment is initialized (cleared to 0) in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 69). Is updated every 1 ms.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the suggestion appearance frequency (probability) is determined according to the value of the “level” of each of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby by the standby member 1450xb. It Based on the determined appearance frequency and the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the type of the two privilege cards CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb is suggested.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 70) described later is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the read command is analyzed. , Processing according to the command is performed.

It returns to FIG. 67 and demonstrates. The display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, but the video RAM 234 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment has a The special fluctuating effect data for performing the effect corresponding to the card information of the privilege card CA' (in the present embodiment, the reach effect including the slip notice, the reach effect including the group notice) is stored together with other variable effect data. Has been done.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 83. In the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from that of FIG. 42 except that the process of setting the privilege card ejection device 1450 (S2013) is different. Similar processing is performed.

In the process of S2013 in the fourth embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not there is a privilege card CA′ in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x. If there is no privilege card CA′ in the standby member 1450xb, the first transfer motor 1451xc. Also, the second transfer motor 1457xa is driven to rotate the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb, and two privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage unit 1450xa are transferred to the standby member 1450xb. On the other hand, if there is a privilege card CA' in the standby member 1450xb, the process of S2013 is ended and the process of S2012 is executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the fourth embodiment executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 69, when the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed from the start of the main processing (S2101), and 1 ms or more must be elapsed. If (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing S2102 to S2109.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2101, if 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the main process (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2109 are executed similarly to the above-described first embodiment, and the process of S2123 is executed. Move to processing.

In the process of S2123, the display setting process is executed (S2123). In this display setting process (S2123), similarly to the display setting process (S2118) of the second embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the mode of the jackpot effect is set. After the setting, it is a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 a command for instructing the set variation effect mode and jackpot effect mode, respectively. The details of the display setting process (S2123) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

After the execution of the display setting process (S2123), a grant condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the satisfaction of the condition (grant condition) for discharging the privilege card CA' from the privilege card discharging device 1450x is executed (S2124). The details of the application condition establishment confirmation process (S2124) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124), a card discharge process for discharging the privilege card CA' from the privilege card discharge device 1450x is executed (S2125). The detailed processing of the card ejection processing (S2125) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the card ejection process (S2125) is executed, the command determination process is executed (S2126). This command determination processing (S2126) is processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (S2121) of the second embodiment. The details of the command determination process (S2126) of the fourth embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

After executing the command determination process (S2126), the processes of S2113 to S2117 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. That is, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 223 (S2113), and if the power interruption occurrence information is stored (S2113: Yes), the processes of S2115 to S2117 are executed, After that, the process loops infinitely.

As a result of the confirmation by the process of S2113, when the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed ( (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2113, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped.

Next, the command determination processing (S2126) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S2126) of the fourth embodiment.

In the command determination process (S2126) of the fourth embodiment, first, it is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S2201), and if a fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), Similar to the second embodiment described above, the processes of S2205 and S2206 are executed, the command determination process (S2126) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking by the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is received (S2202: Yes), after executing the process of S2213 as in the second embodiment described above, based on the received stop symbol command, the privilege A suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation process for confirming the fulfillment of a condition (indication condition) for starting suggestion of the type of privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the card ejection device 1450x is executed (S2218). The detailed processing of the suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2218) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution of the suggestion condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2218), the command determination process (S2126) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2202, when the stop symbol command is not received (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

When the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

Next, it is confirmed whether the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is on, that is, whether the discharge of the privilege card CA' is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA' (S2214).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2214, if the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is on (S2214: Yes), the stop command in process is the stop command received immediately after the grant condition of the privilege card CA′ is satisfied. The card ejection flag 223xe is turned on (S2215).

When the card ejection flag 223xe is turned on in the process of S2215, the privilege card ejection is performed in synchronization with the corresponding stop display (in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot stop display) in the card ejection process (see FIG. 78) described later. The discharge of the privilege card CA′ from the device 1450x is started. After the processing of S2215, the card ejection confirmation flag 223xd is turned off (S2216), the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned off (S2217), the command determination processing (S2126) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is off, that is, if the grant condition of the privilege card CA′ is not satisfied (S2214: No), the processes of S2215 to S2217 are skipped. The command determination process (S2126) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Further, as a result of checking in the process of S2203, when the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2203: No), the process of S2204 is executed similarly to the above-described second embodiment, and this command is executed. The determination process (S2126) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the above-mentioned suggestive effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the suggested effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 70) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this suggestive effect formation confirmation process (S2218), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates complete disengagement. It is confirmed (S2421).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S2421, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2421: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2422). ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2422, if the card discharge suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2422: No), the suggestive effect suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb is the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the number of continuous receptions of the variation pattern command corresponding to the complete disconnection is being counted, and in this case, the complete disconnection counter 223xk is incremented by 1 (S2423).

After the processing of S2423, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is 30 or more (S2424), and if the value of the complete disconnection counter 223c is 30 or more (complete disconnection counter 223xk≧30) (S2424: Yes), Since the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disengagement has been received 30 times in succession, the suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of the privilege card CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card ejection device 1450x is Since it has been established, the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on (S2425), and this suggestion effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

Although details will be described later, when the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is turned on in the process of S2425, the suggestion for suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting in the waiting member 1450xb in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 73). A reach production mode (variation mode) as a production is set. Further, when the card discharge suggestion flag 223xc is turned on by the process of S2425, in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75) or the disengaged stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 76), the privilege card CA that is on standby in the standby member 1450xb. It is possible to set a stop pattern that suggests the type of'.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2424, if the value of the complete deviation counter 223x is less than 30 (S2424: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, so the process of S2425 is skipped and this suggestive effect is produced. The establishment confirmation process (S2218) ends.

Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2422, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2422: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the waiting member 1450xb is selected. Since the suggested effect to be suggested is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the processing of S2423 to S2425 is skipped, and the confirmation effect establishment confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2421, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the extracted stop symbol is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or a miss reach (front and rear). If it indicates "removal reach" or "reach other than front-back deviation" (S2421: No), the complete removal counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S2426), and this suggestive effect formation confirmation processing (S2218) is ended.

Next, the above-mentioned display setting process (S2123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2123) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in this display setting process (S2123), first, the update process of various counters is executed as in the second embodiment described above (S2301). In the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect counter 223xm is updated in S2301.

After the processing of S2301, it is determined whether a fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302), and if the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2302: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this display setting process (S2123) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is executed. The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2305).

After the processing of S2305, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2305, the variation effect setting processing for setting the aspect of the variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2314).

The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, but in the variation effect setting process (S2314), the third symbol display device 81 when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect setting process for setting the mode of the suggestion effect (variable display suggesting the type of privilege card CA′ that is on standby by the standby member 1450xb) displayed at is included.

After the execution of the variation effect setting process (S2314), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2315). The detailed process of the stop symbol setting process (S2315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is executed, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2314) is output to the display control device 114. (S2308).

Next, a stop symbol command for display indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309), and this display setting process ( After S2123) is completed, the process returns to the main process.

The display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the voice lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

Here, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2314) will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2314) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 72) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 73, in this variation effect setting process (S2314), first, is the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicating complete disengagement? Is confirmed (S2641).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2641, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete disengagement (S2641: Yes), the deviation variation effect as an effect mode of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. The mode is set (S2646), and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

In the process of S2646, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the deviation effect, based on the value of the counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223. Set the mode.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2641, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete deviation, that is, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates the out-reach (reach before/after out, reach other than out-of-front/rear) (S2641: No), the process proceeds to S2642.

In S2642, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates a normal jackpot (S2642).

As a result of checking in the process of S2642, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a normal jackpot (S2642: Yes), a counter for setting the effect mode of the variable effect provided in the RAM 223 (Fig. (Not shown) and a variation time period defining the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.) are set (S2648), and this variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2642, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not normally indicate a big jackpot, that is, a probability variation jackpot or out-reach (rear out-of-front/reach other than out-reach). In this case (S2642: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on, that is, whether the privilege card CA′ is attached to the holder unit 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 (S2643).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2643, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S2643: Yes), the receiving unit card effect setting process is executed (S2647), and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended.

In the receiving part card effect setting process (S2647), the values of the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiving part design flag area 223xj and the variable time defining the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.) are set. Based on this, the reach effect mode is set. As a result of the receiving unit card effect setting process (S2647), the player can see the reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA'.

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2643, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is off (S2643: No), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2644).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2644, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2644: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied yet, and in such a case, the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223 is set. The reach effect mode is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) to be set and the variation time that defines the type of reach (S2648). Then, after the processing of S2648, the variation effect setting processing (S2314) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2644, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2644: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and therefore the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb. The suggestion effect setting process for setting the mode of the variation display (indication effect) suggesting the type of (S2645) is completed, and the variation effect setting process (S2314) is ended. The detailed process of the suggestive effect setting process (S2645) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Here, with reference to FIG. 74, the above-mentioned suggestive effect setting process (S2645) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the suggested effect setting process (S2645) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 73).

As shown in FIG. 74, in this suggestive effect setting process (S2645), first, based on the value of the suggestive effect counter 223xm, of the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb, the ejection card used for the suggestive effect. A memory is selected (S2661).

In S2661, if the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is within the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa, the ejection card A memory 223xa is selected as the ejection card memory to be used. On the other hand, if the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is within the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xa, the ejection card B memory 223xb is selected as the ejection card memory to be used.

In addition, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa and the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb are the same as those of the respective ejection card memories (in the present embodiment, the ejection card A It is determined based on the selection probability according to the level value included in the memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb).

In the present embodiment, the value obtained by subtracting the (value of the level included in the ejection card B memory 223xb) from the (value of the level included in the ejection card A memory 223xa) is n, and the range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm is N. At this time, the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to “((N/2)+n)/N”, and the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb is “( (N/2)-n)/N".

Therefore, when the value of n is 4, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 8 based on the selection probability obtained as described above, and the ejection is performed. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is only 9.

Further, when the value of n is 3, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the discharge card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 7 based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to 8 and 9.

When the value of n is 2, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 6 based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to a range of 7-9.

Further, when the value of n is 1, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is set to the range of 0 to 5 based on the selection probability obtained as described above, and the ejection is performed. The selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the card B memory 223xb is set to a range of 6-9.

When the value of n is 0, that is, when the level values are equal, the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is based on the selection probability obtained as described above. The range of 0 to 4 is set, and the selection range of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card B memory 223xb is set to the range of 5 to 9.

After the processing of S2661, it is confirmed whether the ejection card memory to be used is the ejection card A memory 223xa (S2662). As a result of checking in the process of S2662, when the ejection card A memory 223xa is used (S2662: Yes), the additional effect as the suggestion effect is “additional effect” based on the content stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa. It is confirmed whether it is "A (that is, slip notice)" (S2663).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2663, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2663: Yes), the contents of the ejection card A memory 223xa and S2305 in the display setting process (see FIG. 70). Based on the variable time acquired by the process of step S1, the reach effect mode including the slip notice is set as an additional effect (S2664), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2663, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect B (that is, group notice)” (S2663: No), the contents of the ejection card A memory 223xa and the display are displayed. Based on the variation time acquired by the process of S2305 in the setting process (see FIG. 70), the reach effect mode including the group notice as an additional effect is set (S2665), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2662, when the ejection card B memory 223xb is used instead of the ejection card A memory 223xa (S2662: No), based on the contents stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb, It is confirmed whether the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2666).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2666, when the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect A” (S2666: Yes), the contents of the ejected card B memory 223xb and the variation acquired in S2305 (see FIG. 70). Based on the time, a reach effect mode including a slip notice is set as an additional effect (S2667), and the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2666, if the additional effect as the suggested effect is “additional effect B” (S2666: No), the contents of the ejection card B memory 223xb and S2305 (see FIG. 70) Based on the acquired variation time, a reach effect mode including a group notice as an additional effect is set (S2668), and this suggestion effect setting process (S2645) ends.

Therefore, when the suggestion effect setting process (S2645) is executed, the special reach effect according to the content of the selected privilege card CA' out of the two privilege cards CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb. The mode will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is the card information of the privilege card CA' to be ejected next time.

Therefore, the special reach production mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of execution of the suggestion production setting process (S2645) after the establishment of the suggestion condition suggests the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time. Since there is a possibility of a variation mode, the player can estimate the type of privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time when recognizing such a special reach effect mode.

In general, the degree of expectation that the player has for acquiring the privilege card CA′ varies depending on the type of the privilege card CA′, and therefore the expectation of the player according to the estimated type of the privilege card CA′. The degree can go up and down, and you can add intonation to the game.

According to the pachinko machine A of the present embodiment, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is the privilege card CA to be ejected next time. Although the content of the other is the card information of the privilege card CA that is not discharged next time, the special reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not always discharged next time. It does not correspond to the type of privilege card CA'.

Therefore, even if the player recognizes a special reach effect mode, it is difficult to guess the type of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time, and the player can obtain the result by discharging the privilege card CA'. You can continue playing while waiting for confirmation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to provide a wider variety of variations in game playability (variation) than the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is increased. It is hard to lose and enables to maintain its interest for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the above-mentioned stop symbol setting process (S2315) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process (S2315) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 72).

As shown in FIG. 75, in the stop symbol setting process (S2315), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot). Is confirmed (S2721).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2721, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2721: YES), it is confirmed whether or not it indicates a probability variation big hit (S2722).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2722, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S2722: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2723). ..

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2723, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2723: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and thus, similar to the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74). Based on the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the ejection card memory used for the suggestion effect is selected (S2728), and based on the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb). Then, the stop symbol is set (S2729), and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

As a result of the process of S2729, a stop pattern suggesting the type of the privilege card CA' waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, specifically, the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa Alternatively, the stop symbol in which the symbols corresponding to the card information stored in the discharge card B memory 223xb) (in this embodiment, one of the five types of main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers) are arranged is the stop of the variable display. At this time, the third symbol display device 81 will be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2723, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2723: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S2724).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2724, if the receiving card flag 223xi is on (S2724: Yes), the receiving card stop symbol setting process is executed (S2725), and this stopping symbol setting process (S2315) is ended. In addition, the receiver card stop symbol setting process is executed (S2725), and the stop symbol is set based on the values of the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 included in the receiver symbol flag area 223xj. As a result of the receiving unit card stop symbol setting process (S2725), the player can see the stop symbol as a privilege by the privilege card CA'.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2724, if the receiving unit card flag 223xi is off (S2724: No), based on the value of the counter (not shown) that is provided in the RAM 223 and sets the stop symbol at the time of jackpot. Stop symbols are set (S2727), and this stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2722, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a normal jackpot (S2722: No), the process proceeds to S2727, and when the jackpot is provided in the RAM 223. The stop symbol is set based on the value of the counter (not shown) for setting the stop symbol, and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S2721, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, but indicates a detachment (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear, complete detachment) ( (S2721: No), the disengagement stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol at the time of disengagement is executed (S2726), and the stop symbol setting process (S2315) is ended.

Here, the above-mentioned disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) executed in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75).

As shown in FIG. 76, in this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) is released. It is confirmed whether it indicates a reach other than the front/rear deviation (S2821).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S2821, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the out-reach (rear out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear) (S2821: Yes), the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is set. It is confirmed whether it is on (S2822).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2822, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2822: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and thus, similar to the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74). Based on the value of the suggestion effect counter 223xm, the ejection card memory used for the suggestion effect is selected (S2824), and based on the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb). Then, a stop symbol is set (S2825), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

As a result of the process of S2825, a stop pattern suggesting the type of the privilege card CA′ waiting on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, specifically, the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa Or, the reach for waiting for the design corresponding to the card information stored in the discharge card B memory 223xb) (in this embodiment, one of the five types of main designs corresponding to the odd number) (rear reach, front/rear) The stop symbol of the reach other than detachment) is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S28822, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is off (S2822: No), the suggestion condition is not satisfied, and in this case, the stop symbol at the time of removal provided in the RAM 223. A stop symbol is set based on the value of a counter (not shown) for setting (S2823), and this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

Further, as a result of confirmation by the process of S 2821, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the out-reach, that is, if it indicates complete detachment (S 2821: No), a card ejection suggestion flag It is confirmed whether 223xc is on (S2826), and if it is off (S2826: No), the process proceeds to S2823, and a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 for setting a stop symbol at the time of disconnection is provided. After setting the stop symbol based on the value, this disengagement stop symbol setting process (S2726) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2826, if the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc is on (S2826: No), the ejection card used for the suggestion production based on the value of the suggestion production counter 223xm as in the process of S2824. The memory is selected (S2827), the chance eye corresponding to the content of the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa or discharge card B memory 223xb) is set as a stop symbol (S2828), and this deviation stop symbol setting The process (S2726) ends.

Here, the chance eye set by the process of S2828 is defined in advance for each type of privilege card CA′, more specifically, for each design (in this embodiment, an odd design) corresponding to the card information, Each chance item corresponding to each type is defined as an arrangement of symbols including one of the symbols. For example, when the design corresponding to the card information is the octopus design (the design corresponding to "1"), "turtle (3), shark (4), octopus (1)" is defined as the corresponding chance item. ing.

As a result of the process of S2828, a specific chance eye corresponding to the content of the selected ejection card memory (ejection card A memory 223xa or ejection card B memory 223xb) is the third symbol at the time of stopping the deviation effect (variation display). The display is stopped and displayed on the display device 81. For example, if the pattern stored in the selected discharge card memory (discharge card A memory 223xa or discharge card B memory 223xb) corresponds to the octopus pattern, "turtle (3)/shark (4)" -The chance of "Octopus (1)" is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of stopping the deviation variation effect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, even if the deviation variation effect that does not expect a transition to the jackpot state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the deviation occurs. When the variation effect is stopped, a specific chance eye (stop display) suggesting the type of privilege card CA' that is on standby by the standby member 1450xb is displayed, so that the player who sees the specific opportunity eye is privileged. It is possible to expect the acquisition of the card CA'.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the above-mentioned grant condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the giving condition satisfaction confirmation processing (S2124) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the assignment condition satisfaction confirmation process (S2124), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70) indicates a probability variation jackpot. It is confirmed (S4121).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4121, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate the probability variation jackpot (S4121: No), the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2124) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4121, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probability variation jackpot (S4121: Yes), the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is incremented by 1 (S4122), and the probability variation jackpot is determined. It is confirmed whether the value of the counter 223xl is 2 or more (S4123).

As a result of confirmation by the processing of S4123, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is 2 or more (S4123: Yes), the grant condition is satisfied, so the card discharge confirmation flag 223xd is turned on (S4124), and this grant is given. The condition confirmation processing (S2124) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4123, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is less than 2 (S4123: No), the grant condition is not satisfied yet, so the process of S4124 is skipped and the grant condition is satisfied. The confirmation process (S2124) ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-described card ejection process (S2125) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the card ejection process (S2125) executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 69).

As shown in FIG. 78, in the card ejection process (S2125), first, it is confirmed whether the card ejection flag 223xe is on (S4221). If the card ejection flag 223xe is on (S4221: Yes), the ejection motor is detected. It is confirmed whether 1456xd is being driven, that is, whether the discharge roller 1456xe is being driven (rotated) (S4222).

As a result of confirmation by the processing in S4222, if the discharge motor 1456xd is not being driven (S4222: No), driving of the discharge motor 1456xd is started (S4223), the card discharge processing (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing. .. As a result of the processing in S4223, the transfer of the privilege card CA′ located on the bottom surface side of the standby member 1450xb in the privilege card discharging device 1450x to the discharging position is started.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4222, if the discharge motor 1456xd is being driven (S4222: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the predetermined amount required to transfer the privilege card CA' to the discharge position has been driven (S4227).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4227, when the discharge motor 1456xd is driven by a predetermined amount (S4227: Yes), the privilege card CA′ has reached the discharge position, and thus the discharge motor 1456xd is stopped to be discharged. The rotation of the roller 1456xe is stopped (S4228).

Next, the card ejection flag 223xe is turned off (S4229), the card ejection waiting flag 2233xf is turned on (S4230), and the player waits for the privilege card CA' to be ejected from the privilege card ejection device 1450x by the player. The card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4227, if the drive amount of the discharge motor 1456xd is still less than the predetermined amount (S4227: No), the privilege card CA′ being transferred has not yet reached the discharge position. The processes of S4228 to S4230 are skipped, the card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

If the card ejection flag 223xe is off (S4221: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4221, it is confirmed whether the card transfer flag 2233xg is on (S4224).

If the card transfer flag 2233xg is OFF as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4224 (S4224; No), it means that the privilege card CA' is not transferred, so the card discharge process (S2125) is terminated and the main process is executed. Return.

On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S4224, when the card transfer flag 2233xg is on (S4224: Yes), it is determined whether the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are driving, that is, the first transfer motor. It is confirmed whether the roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb are being driven (rotated) (S4225).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4225, if the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are not being driven (S4225: No), the driving of the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa is started (S4226). The card ejection process (S2125) is finished, and the process returns to the main process. As a result of the processing in S4226, the transfer of one privilege card CA' located at the bottommost side of the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is started.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S4225, if the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa are being driven (S4225: Yes), the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is completed. Is confirmed by a transfer completion confirmation sensor (not shown) (S4231).

As a result of confirmation by the process of S4231, when the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is completed (S4231: Yes), one privilege card CA′ is transferred (replenished) to the standby member 1450xb. Therefore, the driving of the first transfer motor 1451xc and the second transfer motor 1457xa is stopped, and the rotations of the first transfer roller 1451xd and the second transfer roller 1457xb are stopped (S4232).

Next, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned on (excited), the two privilege cards CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb are pressed (S2433), the card transfer flag 223xg is turned off (S4234), and the card reading flag 223xh is turned on. When turned on (S4235), this card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. By the process of S4235, when the card reading flag 223xh is turned on, the card information of the privilege card CA' is read by the ejection card reader 1453.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4231, if the transfer of the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb is not completed yet (S4231: No), it is necessary to continue the transfer, so S4232. The process of S4235 is skipped, the card ejection process (S2125) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, first, when the privilege card CA′ is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, the privilege card CA′ is taken out by the player. A discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) for confirming whether or not it is executed is executed. The detailed process of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After performing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008), a discharge card for reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the two privilege cards CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x. Confirmation processing is executed (S3009). The detailed processing of the discharged card confirmation processing (S3009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

After the discharge card confirmation process (S3009) is executed, a receiving part card confirmation process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA′ inserted in the holder part 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 is executed (S3010), and the timer interruption is performed. The process ends. The detailed process of the receiver card confirmation process (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the above-described discharge completion confirmation processing (S3008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation processing (S3008) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 80, in this ejection completion confirmation processing (S3008), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card ejection waiting flag 223xf is on (S3321). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223xf is off (S3321: No), it is not in the waiting state for the player to remove the privilege card CA' from the privilege card ejecting device 1450x, so this ejection completion confirmation process (S3008). To finish.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3321, if the card removal waiting flag 223xf is on (S3321: Yes), the privilege card CA′ is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, and the privilege card CA by the player. In this case, it is confirmed whether the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off (S3322).

If the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3322 (S3322: No), the privilege card CA′ is still in the discharge position and has not been taken out yet. S3008) is ended.

On the other hand, if the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3322 (S3322: No), the removal of the privilege card CA has been completed, and thus the requirement condition for the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time. The probability variation jackpot counter 223xl is cleared to 0 so that the number of probability variation jackpots can be counted (S3323).

After the processing of S3323, the card transfer flag 223xg is turned on (S3324), and the card removal waiting flag 223xf is turned off (S3325). Next, the fixing solenoid 1456xf is turned off to release the pressing state of the privilege card CA' located on the standby member 1450xb (S3326), and the discharge completion confirmation process (S3008) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the above-mentioned ejected card confirmation processing (S3009) will be described. 81 is a flowchart showing the ejected card confirmation process (S3009) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 81, in this ejected card confirmation process (S3009), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223xh is on (S3421), and if the card reading flag 223xh is off (S3421: No), Since it is not the time to read the card information of the privilege card CA′, in such a case, the discharge card confirmation processing (S3009) is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of confirmation in the process of S3421 is that the card reading flag 223xh is on (S3421: Yes), it is the time to read the privilege card CA′, and therefore the card information of the privilege card CA′ located on the standby member 1450xb. The (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) is read by the ejection card reader 1453 (S3422).

Next, the content of the read card information is determined based on the information stored in the card type table 222b (S3423). In the present embodiment, the card information of the two privilege cards CA' located on the standby member 1450xb is read together, so that the contents of the two pieces of card information at the maximum can be discriminated.

After the processing of S3423, one card information is stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa based on the determination result (S3424), and the other card information is stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb (S3425).

In the present embodiment, the card information of the higher level is stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa, and the card information of the lower level is stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb. When the levels of the two card information are equal, the card information in which the additional effect is the additional effect A is preferentially stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa.

Further, when the card information levels are the same and the additional effects are the same, the card information having a large symbol number is preferentially stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa. When only one card information can be read, that is, when the card information of the two privilege cards CA′ is the same, the same card information is stored in the discharge card A memory 223xa and the discharge card B memory 223xb. Memorize

After the process of S3425, the card reading flag 223xh is turned off (S3426), and the ejected card confirmation process (S3009) ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the above-described receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3010) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the receiver card confirmation processing (S3010) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

As shown in FIG. 82, in the receiver card confirmation process (S3010), first, it is confirmed whether or not the customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3521). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3521, if the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3521: Yes), it is confirmed whether the read button 1301 has been pressed (S3522).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3522, when the read button 1301 is pressed (S3522: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit card flag 223xi is on (S3523).

As a result of the confirmation in the process of S3523, if the receiving card flag 223xi is on (S3523: Yes), the mounting solenoid 1304 is off (not excited), so the receiving card flag 223xi is turned on (S3524). ), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (S3525).

After the process of S3525, a receiving part card reading process of reading the card information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602x) of the privilege card CA′ by the receiving part card reader 1303 is executed (S3526), and the receiving part is read. The card confirmation process (S3010) ends. The detailed process of the receiving unit card reading process (S3526) will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing in S3523, if the receiving card flag 223xi is off (S3523: No), the mounting solenoid 1304 is on (excitation), so the receiving card flag 223xi is turned off (S3527). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3528). Then, the receiving unit card confirmation process (S3010) ends.

As a result of confirmation by the process of S3521, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S3521: No), or the process of S3522. When the read button 1301 is not pressed (S3522: No) as a result of the confirmation by the above, the receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3010) is terminated without performing the processing of S3523 to S3528.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the above-mentioned receiving unit card reading process (S3526) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the receiver card reading process (S3526) executed in the receiver card confirmation process (S3010).

As shown in FIG. 83, in this receiving section card reading process (S3526), first, card information of one or a plurality of privilege cards CA′ attached to the card information reading apparatus 1300 (that is, the transparent section 1302c is transmitted). The code pattern) is read by the receiver card reader 1303 (S3621).

After the process of S3621, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA included in one or a plurality of privilege cards CA′ attached to the card information reading device 1300. The type of'is discriminated (S3622).

After the process of S3622, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA' cannot be discriminated due to a bad mounting state or the like (S3623). If not discriminable (S3623: No), the process proceeds to S3624.

In the processing of S3624, the flags 223xj1 to 223xj5 of the receiving portion design flag area 223xj are set according to the card information of the determined privilege card CA' (S3624). That is, the flags (223xj1 to 223xj5) corresponding to the symbols determined to be attached to the card information reading device 1300 are turned on. After the processing of S3624, the receiving section card reading processing (S3526) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S3623, if it is not possible to determine (S3623: No), error notification processing for notifying an error is executed (S3625), and the receiving unit card flag 223xi is turned off (S3626). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3627), and the receiving section card reading process (S3526) is ended.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the fourth embodiment, when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied, the two privilege cards CA that are on standby by the standby member 1450b of the privilege card ejection device 1450x. The card information of'is collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, and a suggestive effect (a special reach effect mode in the present embodiment) is executed according to the read content.

Here, of the two privilege cards CA′ that are on standby in the standby member 1450b, one is the privilege card CA′ that will be discharged next time, so the player who has confirmed the suggestion effect makes a suggestion (notification). You can continue playing with the expectation that you will be able to get the privilege (special value) that will be given next time.

At this time, if the privilege suggested by the suggestive effect indicates a special value that the player himself desires to acquire, the player may next acquire the special value he or she desires to acquire. You can continue playing while expecting something you don't know.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, one of the contents (card information) stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa and the ejection card B memory 223xb is a privilege to be ejected next time. Although it is the card information of the card CA′, the other content is the card information of the privilege card CA′ that is not discharged next time, so the special reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not always the next time. It does not correspond to the type of privilege card CA' discharged to.

Therefore, even if the player recognizes the suggestion effect (special reach effect mode), it is difficult to guess the type of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time, and the player is not able to discharge the privilege card CA'. You will continue to play while looking forward to confirming the results.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to provide a wider variety of variations in game playability (variation) than the conventional general game machine, and as a result, interest in the game is increased. It is hard to lose and enables to maintain its interest for a long time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, among the card information of the two privilege cards CA′ collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453, selection according to the level value of each privilege card CA′ is performed. There is a probability that the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa or the card information stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb will be used.

Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggestive effect suggesting each of the two privilege cards CA′ collectively read by the ejection card reader 1453 is changed, and thus the expectation for acquisition is also changed. be able to. Therefore, the playability is improved by suggesting (notifying) the content of the card information of the privilege card CA'.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a large number of privilege cards CA are stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read. It is configured to be read after being transferred to the confirmation position separated from the initial position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the privilege cards CA are arranged (pulled out) and stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 such that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides. The card readers 1453 for ejection are provided at two locations corresponding to the card information areas 1602 located on each side.

In addition, in this 5th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the fifth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

FIG. 84(a) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of stacked privilege cards CA, and FIG. 84(b) is a side schematically showing the state of the privilege cards CA of FIG. 84(a). FIG. As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), in the fifth embodiment, levers are arranged so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, and the privilege cards are discharged. It is housed in the internal space of the storage member 1451 of the device 1450.

In the second embodiment described above, the transparent portion 1451b is provided at a position corresponding to the position of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position. Transparent portions similar to the transparent portion 1451b are provided at respective positions corresponding to the card information areas 1602 (1602A, 1602B) that can be located at two locations.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, one discharge is provided below the transparent portion 1451b so that the card information (code pattern) formed in the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position can be read. In the fifth embodiment, one discharge card reader 1453 is provided below each of the two transparent portions (that is, two discharge card readers 1453 in total). (See FIG. 84(b)).

In the fifth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the discharge card reader 1453 in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card reader 1453 used for reading the card information is set. , The privilege card CA is alternately switched every time one is discharged.

As shown in FIG. 84( b ), when the levers are arranged so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on alternate sides, the privilege card to be given (discarded) next time. Since the background of the CA card information area 1602 is the back surface 1601b (that is, white ungrounded surface) of the main body 1601 of the privilege card CA that is discharged one after another, or the plate member 1455b (see FIG. 36), the next time. Only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given can be read by the discharge card reader 1453.

According to the fifth embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read by the ejection card reader 1453. Since it can be performed, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, by placing the levers so that the card information areas 1602 of the adjacent privilege cards CA are on the alternate sides, the privilege card CA to be given next time is provided. When the card information of 1 is read by the discharge card reader 1453, confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA stored in the privilege card discharging device 1450 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA given next time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the two discharge card readers 1453 are used, but the privilege card discharge device 1450 is configured to be rotatable around an axis passing through the stacking direction of the privilege cards CA, and the privilege card CA is used. It may be configured to rotate 180° each time one sheet is discharged. In this case, one discharge card reader 1453 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the discharge card reader 1453 in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card used for reading the card information. The card reader 1453 is configured to be alternately switched every time one privilege card CA is discharged.

Instead, the reading can be performed using both of the two ejection card readers 1453 every time, and the card information that can be read by either one of the ejection card readers 1453 can be used to read the card information. The content read by the other ejection card reader 1453 which has not been provided may be ignored.

Alternatively, when the card information of one privilege card CA is read, first, the reading is performed using one of the discharge card readers 1453, and if the card information can be read, the card information is read. On the other hand, if the card information cannot be read on the other hand, the card information may be read by switching to the other ejection card reader 1453.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The privilege card CA1 used in the sixth embodiment has a different shape from the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment described above.

FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing a privilege card CA1 used in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the privilege card CA1 used in this embodiment is a medium configured in a square card shape. The privilege card CA1 has a main body portion 2601 made of an opaque (light non-transmissive) material (for example, resin or paper) and a card information area 2602 made of a transparent (light transmissive) material. Composed.

Similar to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA (see FIG. 38), the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 has a code pattern (not shown) indicating card information formed therein.

Further, on the one surface side of the main body section 2601, as with the front surface 1601a of the main body section 1601 in the privilege card CA, the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 2602 (that is, the privilege card CA1 has The design corresponding to the contents of the privilege) is described. On the other hand, the other surface side of the main body 2601 is a white ungrounded surface, like the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 in the privilege card CA.

The privilege card CA1 having such a configuration has a storage member capable of accommodating a plurality of (stacked) sheets by stacking (superimposing), and is configured almost the same as the privilege card discharging device 1450 of the second embodiment ( It is housed in (not shown) and discharged one by one.

FIG. 85(b) is a top view schematically showing a plurality of stacked privilege cards CA1. In the sixth embodiment, the privilege cards CA1 are stacked by sequentially rotating the card information area 2602 by 90° counterclockwise from top to bottom.

On the bottom surface of the storage member in the privilege card ejection device according to the present embodiment, the card information regions 2602 can be positioned at four locations by stacking the privilege cards CA1 while rotating the card information regions 2602 by 90°. 2602D), transparent portions similar to the transparent portion 1451b are provided at the respective positions, and one discharge card reader similar to the discharge card reader 1453 is provided under each of the four transparent portions. It is provided. That is, in this embodiment, four ejection card readers are used.

In the sixth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA1 is read by the discharging card reader in the processing of S3402 of the discharging card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52), the discharging card reader used for reading the card information is It is changed every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged. Specifically, every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged, the discharge card reader to be used is changed to the adjacent one in the clockwise direction.

Since the adjacent privilege cards CA1 are rotated by 90° with respect to each other, the background of the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 given next time is the back surface of the main body 2601 of the privilege card CA1 discharged one after another ( That is, since the white plain surface) or a plate member similar to the plate member 1455b is positioned, only the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader.

As described above, since the other surface side of the main body 2601 is configured to be white groundless, the background of the card information area 2602 should be white groundless when the card information area 2602 is read by the ejection card reader. Therefore, the card information included in the card information area 2602 can be appropriately read. In the sixth embodiment, the other surface side of the main body 2601 is configured to be white and groundless, but the surface is not limited to white and may be any surface as long as the code pattern formed in the card information area 2602 can be read well.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. Further, the surface is not limited to the ground, and may be a surface on which a fine pattern is formed. Further, when the card information area 2602 of the privilege card CA1 to be discharged next time is read by the discharge card reader, the surface may be designed so as not to overlap the card information area 2602 to be read.

According to the sixth embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time can be read by the discharge card reader. Since it can be performed, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA1 to be given next time is obtained by stacking the privilege cards CA1 while rotating the card information area 2602 by 90°. When read by the discharge card reader, it is possible to prevent confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA1 stored in the privilege card discharge device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA1 given next time.

In the present embodiment, four discharge card readers are used, but the privilege card discharge device is configured to be rotatable about an axis passing through the stacking direction of the privilege cards CA1, and the privilege card CA is It may be configured to rotate 90° each time a sheet is discharged. In this case, one discharge card reader may be provided.

Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, when the card information of the privilege card CA1 is read by the discharge card reader in the process of S3402 of the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), the discharge card used for reading the card information. The reader is configured to be sequentially changed every time one privilege card CA1 is discharged.

Instead, reading is performed using four ejection card readers every time, and the card information that can be read by any one of the ejection card readers is used. The contents read by the ejection card reader may be ignored.

Alternatively, when the card information of one privilege card CA1 is read, first, the reading is performed by using one discharge card reader, and if the card information can be read, the card information is read. On the other hand, when the card information cannot be read on the other hand, the card information may be read by switching to the next ejection card reader.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a large number of privilege cards CA are stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read. It is configured to be read after being transferred to the confirmation position separated from the initial position.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by inserting the blocking member 2001 on the back surface side of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next, the discharge card reader 1453 causes the privilege card to be given next time. It is configured so that the card information possessed by the CA can be read. In addition, in this 7th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 86( a) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a blocking member 2001 is provided between the next privilege card CA (the lowest privilege card CA in FIG. 86(a)) and the privilege card CA granted one after another. It is configured to be insertable.

In the second embodiment described above, the transparent portion 1451b is provided at a position corresponding to the position of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position, but in the seventh embodiment, the initial stage of the privilege card CA is set. A transparent portion similar to the transparent portion 1451b is provided at each position corresponding to the card information area 1602, and an ejection card reader 1453 is provided below the transparent portion.

The blocking member 2001 is an opaque (light-impermeable) plate-shaped member, and has a size capable of covering the card information area 1602. The blocking member 2001 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F or arrow B) by a solenoid (not shown). The privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) of the seventh embodiment is provided with an opening that allows the blocking member 2001 to enter and exit.

The blocking member 2001 is configured such that the surface 2001a on the side of the privilege card CA to be given next time is white and ungrounded. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the blocking member 2001 is inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time, it is given next time. The background of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA can be the white solid surface 2001a of the insertion member 2001. Therefore, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader 1453.

The surface 2001a of the blocking member 2001 on the side of the privilege card CA to be given next time is not limited to the white groundless surface, and may be any surface that can read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602 well.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. Further, the surface is not limited to the ground, and may be a surface on which a fine pattern is formed.

In the seventh embodiment, when one privilege card CA is discharged, the blocking member 2001 is moved in the direction of the arrow B to be once discharged to the outside of the privilege card discharging device 1450, and then the blocking member 2001 is again marked by the arrow. It is moved in the F direction and inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, even if the privilege card CA is not transferred to the confirmation position as in the second embodiment, only the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is stored in the discharge card reader 1453. Since the card can be read, each process (S4205 to S4215) of transferring the privilege card CA to the confirmation position is unnecessary in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the privilege card CA granted next time and the other privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 are granted next time. A blocking member 2001 that can be the background of the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is inserted.

Therefore, when the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read by the discharge card reader 1453, it can be prevented from being confused with the card information of another privilege card CA stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the card information of the privilege card CA given next time.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the blocking member 2001 is preferably configured such that the thickness of the blocking member 2001 becomes thinner toward the tip thereof in the direction of the arrow F (that is, the lateral cross section tapers). When the end in the arrow F direction is configured to be thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2001 can be easily inserted between the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given next time. can do.

Note that the periphery of the privilege card CA may be thinned toward the edge. With this configuration, when the privilege cards CA are stacked, a gap can be formed between the adjacent privilege cards CA, and the blocking member 2001 is used as the privilege card CA that is given next time and the privilege card that is given one after another. It can be easily inserted into the CA.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86(b). In the above-described first embodiment, of the privilege coins C stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 (see FIG. 4), one coin to be paid out next time is transferred to the standby member 470, and the standby member The payout IC tag reader 501 reads the coin information of the privilege coin C located above 470.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the other bonus coins C stored in the storage member 460 are not transferred from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470. By inserting the blocking member 2002 between and, the coin information of the privilege coin C to be given (paid) next time can be read. In addition, in this 8th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 86(b) is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, among the privilege coins C stacked and stored in the storage member 460, the privilege coin C to be paid out next time (the lowest benefit coin C in FIG. 86(b)), The blocking member 2002 can be inserted between the bonus coins C paid out one after another.

The blocking member 2002 is a plate-like member made of a material, for example, a metal, which obstructs transmission of a transmission medium (electric wave, electromagnetic wave, etc.) used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7). The size is larger than the cross section of the peripheral wall member 641 of the storage member 460.

The blocking member 2002 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F or arrow B) by a solenoid (not shown). In the privilege coin payout device 450 of the eighth embodiment, the space between the peripheral wall member 641 and the bottom member 642 in the storage member 460 is separated by a width that allows the blocking member 2002 to be inserted, and the privilege coins to be paid out next time. In a state where the blocking member 2002 is inserted between C and the bonus coin C paid out one after another, the blocking member 2002 serves as a bottom lid of the peripheral wall member 641.

In the eighth embodiment, the bottom member 642 is made of a material that does not interfere with the transmission of a transmission medium used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602, for example, a non-metallic material such as a resin, and the blocking member 2002. Is inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another, only the coin information (contents stored in the IC tag 602) of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is to be paid out. It can be read by the IC tag reader 501.

In the eighth embodiment, when one privilege coin C is discharged, the blocking member 2002 is moved in the direction of the arrow B to be once discharged to the outside of the privilege coin payout device 450, and then the blocking member 2002 is again marked with the arrow. It is moved in the F direction and inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another. According to the eighth embodiment, the reading of the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is executed before the transfer of the privilege coin C to the standby member 470.

As described above, according to the eighth embodiment, between the special coin C to be paid out next time and the other special coins C stored in the special coin payout device 450, the coin information is transferred from the IC tag 602. By inserting a blocking member 2002 formed of a material that obstructs the transmission of the transmission medium used for reading, only the coin information (contents of the IC tag 602) of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is inserted. It is configured to be read by.

Therefore, when the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, it is possible to prevent confusion with the coin information of other privilege coins C stored in the privilege coin payout device 450. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time.

As shown in FIG. 86( b ), the blocking member 2002 is preferably configured so that the end in the direction of arrow F becomes thinner toward the tip (that is, the side section is tapered). When the thickness in the direction of the arrow F becomes thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2002 can be easily inserted between the bonus coin C to be paid out next time and the bonus coin C to be paid out one after another. You can

Further, the periphery of the privilege coin C may be thinned toward the edge. With this configuration, when the privilege coins C are stacked, a gap can be formed between the adjacent privilege coins C, and the blocking member 2002 is provided with the privilege coin C to be paid out next time and the privilege coin C to be paid out one after another. Can be easily inserted between.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked in the internal space of the storage member 1451 of the privilege card ejection device 1450 (see FIG. 36) so that the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA overlaps. It was configured to be stored.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, a plurality of privilege cards CA2 are stacked and accommodated in the privilege card ejection device in a state in which the positions are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap. It

FIG. 87 is a schematic side sectional view for explaining the configuration of the ninth embodiment. The privilege card CA2 used in the ninth embodiment has a different structure from the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment described above.

The privilege card CA2 is a medium formed into a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape), and includes a transparent body 3603 made of a transparent (light-transmissive) material and an opaque material made of an opaque (light-impermeable) material. It is configured to have a main body portion including a main body portion 3601 and a card information area 3602 which is transparent and has a code pattern indicating the card information therein which is transparent like the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA. .. The opaque body portion 3601 has a design corresponding to the content of the card information included in the card information area 3602 (that is, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA2).

In this ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, a predetermined number of privilege cards CA2 (four cards in the example shown in FIG. 87) are set as one set, and in this one set, each privilege card CA2 is set in advance. , The card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other, and the privilege cards CA2 adjacent to the background of the card information areas 3602 are stacked so that their positions are shifted so as not to interfere with each other.

In the privilege card ejection device of the ninth embodiment, a transparent portion for the number of privilege cards CA2 forming one set (4 in the example shown in FIG. 87) is formed on the bottom surface storing the privilege cards CA2. This transparent part is similar to the transparent part 1451b of the privilege card ejection device 1450, and is formed at a position corresponding to the positions of the respective card information areas 3602 which are shifted so as not to overlap each other.

Below the transparent parts, discharge card readers similar to the discharge card reader 1453 are provided one by one. That is, the same number of ejection card readers as the number of privilege cards CA2 (four in the example shown in FIG. 87) making up one set are provided.

As described above, the plurality of privilege cards CA2 forming one set are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap with each other, so that one discharge card reader 1453 allows one privilege. The card information in the card information area 3602 of the card CA2 can be read.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, since the transparent main body 3603 of another privilege card CA2 is located between the card information area 3602 of each privilege card CA2 and the ejection card reader 1453 located therebelow. The card information of all the privilege cards CA2 forming one set, that is, all the card information individually held by the four privilege cards CA2 in the example shown in FIG. 87 is collected by the four discharge card readers 1453. Can be read.

It should be noted that a set of a plurality of privilege cards CA2, which are preliminarily shifted and stacked so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other, has a plurality of sets prepared, and one privilege card CA2 is completely discharged. Then, the next set is replenished in the privilege card ejection device. Alternatively, the privilege cards CA2 corresponding to one set may be counted and replenished in the privilege card ejecting device, and then the privilege cards CA2 may be slid by rollers or the like so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap each other.

As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, the plurality of privilege cards CA2 forming one set are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 do not overlap each other. Since the transparent main body 3603 is located between the card information area 3602 and each ejection card reader 1453, it is possible to read the card information of all the privilege cards CA2 that make up one set collectively. Therefore, not only the type of privilege card CA to be given next time, but also the type of privilege card CA to be given after the next time can be suggested in advance.

Further, since the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 that form one set are arranged so as not to overlap with each other, which card information is determined depending on the position of each ejection card reader 1453. It is possible to distinguish whether the card information is the second privilege card CA to be discharged. Therefore, in the case where not only the type of the privilege card CA to be given next time but also the type of the privilege card CA to be given after the next time is suggested in advance, the control for changing the strength of the suggestion in consideration of the discharge order. Is also possible.

Note that, as described above, the card information areas 3602 of the privilege cards CA2 forming one set are arranged so as not to overlap each other, so that the card information of the privilege card CA2 to be given next time is to be discharged. When read by the card reader 1453, it is possible to prevent confusion with the card information of another privilege card CA2 stored in the privilege card ejection device.

Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to cause the ejection card reader 1453 to read only the card information of the privilege card CA2 to be given next time. In this case, each time one privilege card CA2 is discharged, the discharge card reader 1453 to be used may be sequentially moved from the front to the rear (direction of arrow B).

In addition, when the surface of the opaque main body 3601 on the card reader 1453 side for discharge is a white solid ground having a size corresponding to the card information area 3602 and the positions are shifted so that the card information areas 3602 do not overlap, The white non-ground plane of the opaque main body 3601 may be configured to overlap as the background of each card information area 3602.

Alternatively, using the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, the position of each privilege card CA is shifted so that the card information area 1602 of one privilege card CA overlaps the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 of the adjacent privilege card CA. It may be configured to be stacked in a state. Also in such a case, it is possible to collectively read the card information of all the privilege cards CA2 that form one set.

In the ninth embodiment, a code pattern indicating the card information is formed in the card information areas 3602 of the plurality of privilege cards CA2, and the card information areas 3602 are shifted so that they do not overlap each other, so that they are given next time. The card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA2 can be read by the discharge card reader 1453. Instead of this, the privilege card has a configuration in which card information (for example, a code pattern) is written on the surface of the opaque main body 3601 on the side of the ejection card reader 1453, and each privilege card includes the card information of the transparent main body 3601. The marked surface may be shifted so as to be stepwise with respect to the ejection card reader, and the card information of the privilege card to be given next time may be read by the ejection card reader. The entire card can also be made of opaque material.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the above-described second embodiment, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A (privilege card discharging device 1450). On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the privilege card CA is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A with both sides hidden.

In addition, in this 10th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the tenth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

88(a) is a sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the tenth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), in the privilege card CA according to the tenth embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are the seal member 4001 (on the front surface 1601a1 side) when shipped from the manufacturer. , And the sealing member 4002 (back side).

The seal members 4001 and 4002 have the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and when the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached, the main body 1601 and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA are completely covered.

The seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured to be light impermeable (opaque). Therefore, in the state where the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached, the design 1601a1 written on the surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA cannot be visually recognized.

Here, the design 1601a1 of the privilege card CA is information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA. Therefore, by covering the front surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA with the seal member 4001, it is possible to prevent the card information from being leaked before the privilege card CA is given.

When the privilege card ejection device 1450 stores the privilege card CA with the opaque seal members 4001 and 4002 attached thereto, when the player takes out the privilege card CA, the design 1601a1 cannot be visually recognized, and It is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA taken out by the user.

In such a case, the expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA does not end at the stage of taking out the privilege card CA, but continues until the seal member 4001 is peeled off (removed) and the design 1601a1 becomes visible. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

In addition, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are attached at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and the seal member 4001 is peeled off in order to make the design 1601a1 visible. Work is required. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA (for example, a privilege card CA that has a high value for a privilege due to its rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA.

Further, the seal members 4001 and 4002 of the present embodiment can be peeled off while maintaining the seal shape, but once peeled off, they cannot be reattached (that is, cannot be reused). Although the seal can be peeled off while maintaining the shape of the seal, the structure of the seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off is known, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured as seals that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, when a fraudster removes the seal member 4001 for the purpose of confirming the design 1601a1, the seal member 4001 is restored to the original state. Cannot be returned to. Therefore, it is easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal members 4001 and 4002 by an unauthorized person.

According to the tenth embodiment, since the card information area 1602 is covered by the seal members 4001 and 4002, the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read and read by the discharge card reader 1453. It is not possible to perform control according to the content (for example, control for changing the giving condition according to the card information as in the second embodiment).

Therefore, when the privilege card CA of the tenth embodiment is used, in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48) of the second embodiment, one kind of grant condition is set regardless of the type of the privilege card CA. When it is established (for example, when the probability variation jackpot is established twice), the privilege card CA may be given.

As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are impermeable to light when shipped from the manufacturer, and the seal member 4001 cannot be re-attached once peeled. , 4002 are attached, the sense of expectation that the player feels for the privilege card CA can be maintained until the design member 1601a1 becomes visible after the seal member 4001 is removed after the privilege card CA is taken out. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In addition, since the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured as seals that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA, and the seal members 4001 and 4002 by a fraudster. It is possible to make it easier to detect the illegal peeling of the.

In this embodiment, both sides of the privilege card CA are covered with the seal members 4001 and 4002, but at least the front surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA may be covered. That is, the seal member 4002 may not be attached to the back surface of the privilege card CA.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4001 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and the main body 1601 (front surface 1601a) and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA are completely covered. It suffices that at least the design 1601a1 that is the information that is specifically suggested is covered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4002 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA, and the back side of the main body 1601 of the privilege card CA and the card information area 1602 are completely covered, but the card information area 1602 is covered. It may be configured not to.

By configuring the seal member 4002 so as not to cover the card information area 1602, it becomes possible to read the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time by the ejection card reader 1453 as in the second embodiment. ..

In addition, by configuring the seal member 4002 so as not to cover the card information area 1602 and the seal member 4001 so as to cover the card information area 1602, the privilege card CA given next time is transferred from the initial position to the standby position. Even without doing so, only the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next time can be read by the ejection card reader 1453. At this time, by making the adhesive surface side of the seal member 4001 white, the adhesive surface side of the seal member 4001 can function as a reading assistance surface.

When both the seal members 4001 and 4002 cover the card information area 1602, coded (encrypted) code information corresponding to the content of the privilege is displayed on the surface (exposed surface) of the seal member 4001 or the seal member 4002. By printing and reading such code information with a readable reader, it is possible to perform control according to the content (card information) of the privilege of the privilege card CA to be given next time, as in the second embodiment.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the visibility of the design 1601a1 (information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is attached by being attached. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure as compared with that before attachment. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet) of the seal members 4001 and 4002 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 1601a1.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the seal members 4001 and 4002 can be peeled off while maintaining the seal shape, the seal members 4001 and 4002 are configured such that they cannot be re-attached once peeled off. It may be a seal that is impaired in its condition and thus cannot be reapplied. For example, it may be a seal in which tearing, wrinkling, or the like occurs due to peeling and the state of the seal becomes rough, so that re-sticking becomes impossible. Alternatively, when peeled from the privilege card CA, the shape of the seal is maintained, but some layers constituting the seal (for example, an intermediate layer such as a hologram sheet layer or an adhesive layer) are peeled off, As a result, it may be a sticker that cannot be reattached.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The privilege card CA of the second embodiment described above has a configuration in which a code pattern (card information) according to the content of the privilege is formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602. However, the privilege card of the eleventh embodiment The information (card information) corresponding to the content of the privilege of CA3 is stored in the IC tag 4602.

89(a) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the privilege card CA3 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 89(b) is an exploded perspective view for explaining the privilege card CA3 in the eleventh embodiment. ..

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the privilege card CA3 is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape) like the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, and has a main body. It is composed of a portion 4601 and an IC tag 4602 embedded in the main body portion 4601.

The IC tag 4602 is a wireless tag including a small IC chip 4602a and an antenna portion 4602b, and is generally called an IC tag, an RFID tag, an electronic tag, or the like. The IC tag 4602 of the present embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. An active type IC tag with a built-in battery may be adopted as the IC tag 4602.

The IC chip 4602a has a non-rewritable memory (for example, a ROM, a WOROM, etc.) that can store information in a nonvolatile manner, and the non-rewritable memory has card information (a privilege of the privilege card CA3). Information indicating contents) is stored.

The antenna portion 4602b is formed as an antenna pattern so that the resonance frequency is a constant frequency such as 2.45 GHz. The card information stored in the IC chip 4602a is called by the control unit of the IC chip 4602a and output (transmitted) from the antenna unit 4602b. The card information output in this way is transmitted by a wireless transmission medium (radio waves, electromagnetic waves, etc.), and is received and read by a corresponding IC tag reader.

The main body portion 4601 of the privilege card CA3 of the present embodiment is made of a material (for example, a non-metallic material such as resin) that does not interfere with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information, and the surface other than the surface 4601a (ie , The back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c) are coated with a material (for example, metal) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium that transmits card information. Therefore, in the privilege card CA of this embodiment, the card information stored in the IC tag 4602 (IC chip 4602a) can be read by the IC tag reader only through the front surface 4601a.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3 is covered with the seal member 4003 at the time of shipment from the manufacturer. Similar to the seal members 4001 and 4002 of the tenth embodiment, the seal member 4003 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque) and can be peeled while maintaining the seal shape. Configured as an impossible seal. Further, the seal member 4003 of the present embodiment is made of a material (for example, metal) that interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information.

As described above, since the privilege card CA3 of the present embodiment can read the card information by the IC tag reader only through the front surface 4601a, by covering the front surface 4601a with the seal member 4003, the card information by the IC tag reader can be displayed. It becomes impossible to read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the leakage of the card information of the privilege card CA3, and it becomes difficult to find a specific privilege card CA3 (for example, a privilege card CA3 having a high privilege value due to the rarity or the like) using the IC tag reader. It is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3.

Further, the seal member 4003 of the present embodiment can be peeled off while keeping the seal shape, but since it is a seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, when a cheating person peels off the seal member 4003, I can't get it back. Therefore, it is easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal member 4003 by a fraudulent person.

Further, the card information stored in the IC tag 4602 cannot be read until the seal member 4003 is peeled off. Therefore, the card information stored in the privilege card CA3 is prevented from being leaked, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the contents of the privilege before acquiring the privilege card CA3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 before the acquisition and thereby losing the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA3. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), on the front surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3, like the privilege card CA of the second embodiment, the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 (that is, A design 4601a1 corresponding to the card information stored in the IC tag 4602) is written. Therefore, by sticking the opaque seal member 4003, it becomes difficult to grasp the content of the privilege by just looking at it, and in that respect also, it is possible to prevent the leakage of the card information before the grant of the privilege card CA3.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA3 is ejected from the privilege card ejection device with the seal member 4003 attached, the player's expectation of the privilege card CA3 does not end when the privilege card CA3 is acquired. Since the seal member 4003 is peeled off and the design 4601a1 is maintained until it becomes visible, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

In addition, since the seal member 4003 is attached at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and it is necessary to remove the seal member 4003 to make the design 4601a1 visible. Become. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA3 (for example, a privilege card CA with a high value for a privilege due to rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3.

As described above, according to the eleventh embodiment, the surface (front surface 4601a) that enables the reading of the card information stored in the privilege card CA3 interferes with the transmission of the transmission medium that transmits the card information. Since the seal member 4003 made of a material is attached, leakage of card information is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA3 before the acquisition and thereby losing the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA3. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, by covering the surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3 with the seal member 4003, it is possible to prevent the card information from leaking, and thus it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA3 using the IC tag reader.

In the present embodiment, the back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c of the privilege card CA3 are coated with a material that obstructs the transmission of the transmission medium for transmitting the card information. However, the transmission of the transmission medium for transmitting the card information is obstructed. Instead of the coating, a seal member having the same structure as the seal member 4003 may be attached.

In addition, the coded (encrypted) code information corresponding to the contents of the privilege is printed on the surface (exposed surface) of the seal member 4003, and the code information is read by a readable reader, as in the second embodiment. In addition, control may be performed according to the content (card information) of the privilege of the privilege card CA to be given next time.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by exemplifying the privilege card CA3 which is a card form, the configuration of the present embodiment is a coin-shaped medium such as the privilege coin C (see FIG. 7) of the first embodiment. Is also applicable. For example, a portion of the privilege coin C other than one surface (for example, a surface on which a design indicating the content of the privilege is provided) is provided with a coating that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium that transmits information, and such coating is provided. A seal member similar to the seal member 4003 may be attached to the non-exposed surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card information is stored in the IC tag 4602. However, the card information is recorded on the front surface 4601a as code information such as a bar code, and the IC tag 4602 stores predetermined information (individual information). The IC tag 4602 may be configured to store ID information capable of identifying the IC tag 4602, specific information common to a plurality of IC tags 4602, and the like.

The privilege card CA3 having such a configuration can detect the information stored in the IC tag 4602 by the IC tag reader when the seal member 4003 is peeled off. Therefore, by providing the IC tag reader in the pachinko machine, it is possible to detect whether or not there is a privilege card CA3 whose front surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003, among the privilege cards CA3 before being given.

Here, the privilege card CA3 whose surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003 has a high possibility that the seal member 4003 has been unlawfully peeled off. Therefore, the privilege card CA3 whose surface 4601a is not covered by the seal member 4003 is When it is detected, the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are used to notify, so that the possibility of fraud can be reported to the surroundings.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4003 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the stickiness of the design 4601a1 (information visually suggesting the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA3) is attached by the sticking. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure compared with the above. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet) of the seal member 4003 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 4601a1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4003 can be peeled off while keeping the seal shape, but once it is peeled off, it cannot be re-adhered. However, the state of the seal is changed due to peeling from the privilege card CA. It may be a seal that is damaged and thereby makes re-application impossible. For example, it may be a seal in which tearing, wrinkling, or the like occurs due to peeling and the state of the seal becomes rough, so that re-sticking becomes impossible. Alternatively, when peeled from the privilege card CA, the shape of the seal is maintained, but some layers constituting the seal (for example, an intermediate layer such as a hologram sheet layer or an adhesive layer) are peeled off, As a result, it may be a sticker that cannot be reattached.

Further, in the present embodiment, the IC tag 4602 is configured to be embedded inside the privilege card CA3 (main body section 4601), but the IC tag 4602 may be provided on the front surface 4601a of the privilege card CA3. ..

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. In the above-described second embodiment, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed is discharged from the pachinko machine 10A (privilege card discharging device 1450). On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, a seal member 4004 described below is attached to the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA.

In the twelfth embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the twelfth embodiment is configured the same as the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment.

90(a) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 90(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 90C is a perspective view, and is a cross-sectional view of a seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b), the privilege card CA according to the twelfth embodiment is shipped from the manufacturer at the front surface 1601a side (main body 1601 and card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA. ) Is covered with a seal member 4004.

As shown in FIGS. 90(b) and 90(c), the seal member 4004 is formed by applying a base sheet 4004a having the same shape as the outer shape of the privilege card CA, and applying an adhesive to one side (back surface) side of the base sheet 4004a. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b is formed and the IC tag 4622 attached to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b.

Note that in FIG. 90C, the release sheet RS attached to the adhesive surface of the adhesive layer 4004b (that is, the surface that is the back surface side of the base sheet 4004a) is also shown. The release sheet RS is a sheet for storing the seal member 4004 before use so as not to be inadvertently attached to an unintended place, and is removed when the seal member 4004 is attached to the privilege card CA.

The base sheet 4004a is formed of a flexible resin film such as a polyester film and has appropriate brittleness. Since the base sheet 4004a has an appropriate degree of brittleness, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged by the stress caused by the peeling force. Therefore, a trace that the seal member 4004 has been peeled off can be left, which makes it easy to detect an unauthorized peeling of the seal member 4004 by a fraudulent person.

In addition, the base sheet 4004a has reactivity with a solvent and heat. Specifically, when toluene or the like having solubility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 4004b is applied to the base sheet 4004a, the base sheet 4004a is discolored. Furthermore, the base sheet 4004a is discolored even when heat is applied to the base sheet 4004a at a temperature (for example, 50° C.) at which the adhesive force of the adhesive layer decreases. Therefore, even if a solvent is applied or heat is applied for the purpose of peeling off the seal member 4004 from the privilege card CA, the base sheet 4004a is discolored, so that a trace of the misconduct can be left.

Further, in the present embodiment, the base sheet 4004a is colored so as not to transmit light (opaque). Therefore, by affixing the seal member 4004 to the privilege card CA, the design 1601a1 written on the surface 1601a1 of the privilege card CA is made invisible, and the card information is prevented from leaking before the grant of the privilege card CA. ing.

By discharging the privilege card CA with the opaque seal member 4004 attached thereto from the privilege card discharge device 1450, the player cannot see the design 1601a1 at the time when the player takes out the privilege card CA. It is difficult to understand the content of the privilege of the retrieved privilege card CA. Therefore, the expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA does not end when the privilege card CA is taken out, but is maintained until the seal member 4001 is peeled off (removed) and the design 1601a1 becomes visible. Therefore, the interest of the game held by the player can be increased accordingly.

Further, since the opaque seal member 4004 is attached to the privilege card CA at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, it is difficult to grasp the contents of the privilege with a glance, and the design 1601a1 can be visually recognized. In this case, the work of peeling off the seal member 4004 is required. Therefore, it is not easy to find a specific privilege card CA (for example, a privilege card CA that has a high value for a privilege due to its rarity or the like), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the specific privilege card CA.

Further, the adhesive layer 4004b of the seal member 4004 has such an adhesive strength that it is peeled from the base sheet 4004a when it is peeled off once it is attached to the privilege card CA. Therefore, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off from the privilege card CA, at least part of the adhesive layer 4004b remains on the privilege card CA, so that a trace of peeling off the seal member 4004 can be left.

Further, since the adhesive layer 4004b has an adhesive strength such that it can be peeled from the base sheet 4004a when peeled from the privilege card CA, the seal member 4004 cannot be re-attached once peeled from the privilege card CA ( That is, it is configured as a seal that cannot be reused.

The IC tag 4622 is a wireless tag including a small IC chip 4622a and an antenna portion 4622b, and is generally called an IC tag, an RFID tag, an electronic tag, or the like. The IC tag 4622 of this embodiment is configured as a passive type IC tag that does not require a battery. Note that an active type IC tag with a built-in battery may be used as the IC tag 4622.

The IC chip 4622a has a non-rewritable memory (for example, ROM, WOROM, etc.) capable of storing information in a nonvolatile manner, and card information formed in the card information area 1602 in the non-rewritable memory. Information corresponding to (that is, information indicating the content of the privilege of the privilege card CA) is stored.

The antenna part 4622b is formed as an antenna pattern so that the resonance frequency is a constant frequency such as 2.45 GHz. The card information stored in the IC chip 4622a is called by the control unit of the IC chip 4622a and output (transmitted) from the antenna unit 4622b. The card information output in this way is transmitted by a wireless transmission medium (such as radio waves or electromagnetic waves), and is received and read by the IC tag reader 4501 (see FIG. 92) provided in the card ejection device 1450.

As described above, the base sheet 4004a of the seal member 4004 has an appropriate brittleness, and therefore is damaged by the stress associated with the peeling force. Therefore, when the seal member 4004 is peeled off from the privilege card CA, the base sheet 4004a is damaged, and the damage causes the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 located on the back side of the base sheet 4004a to be divided.

When the antenna portion 4622b is divided, the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information (information corresponding to the card information). Therefore, based on whether the IC tag reader 4501 can read the information or not, It is possible to confirm whether or not the member 4004 is normally attached to the privilege card CA.

If the IC tag reader 4501 cannot detect the information, the seal member 4004 is illicitly removed from the privilege card CA and does not exist, or the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 may be damaged due to the illicit removal. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to notify (error notification) when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read, and to inform the surroundings of the possibility of fraud. ing.

FIG. 91 is a schematic side sectional view for explaining a configuration for reading information of the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to each privilege card CA in the card ejection device 1450.

In the card ejection device 1450 of the twelfth embodiment, the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 is made of a material that does not interfere with transmission of a transmission medium that transmits card information, while the other portions interfere with transmission of the transmission medium. It is composed of a material that The IC tag reader 4501 (displayed as a chain double-dashed line) is arranged below the bottom surface of the storage member 1451.

As shown in FIG. 91, the card ejection device 1450 of the twelfth embodiment includes a privilege card CA that is given next time (a privilege card CA at the bottom in FIG. 91) and a privilege card CA that is given one after another. A blocking member 2003 can be inserted between them.

The blocking member 2003 is a plate made of a material (for example, metal) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium (electric wave, electromagnetic wave, etc.) used for transmitting information (information corresponding to card information) from the IC tag 4622. The shape is a shape, and the size thereof is the size over the entire cross section of the storage member 1451.

The blocking member 2003 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (arrow F or arrow B direction) by a solenoid 1458 (see FIG. 92), and the privilege card CA given next time and the privilege card CA given one after another. The information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA to be given next time can be selectively read by the IC tag reader 4501 by inserting the blocking member 2003 between and. it can.

FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment. Note that the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment shown in FIG. 92 differs from the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment (see FIG. 40) in the configuration of the card ejection device 1450.

As shown in FIG. 92, the card ejection device 1450 in the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment operates the IC tag reader 4501 capable of reading the information stored in the IC tag 4622, the transfer motor 1451c, and the shielding member 2003. The IC tag reader 4501, the transfer motor 1451c, and the solenoid 1456 are connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 93 describes the ejection card confirmation processing (S3011) executed by the pachinko machine 10A of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the ejection card confirmation processing (S3011) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A.

The ejected card confirmation process (S3011) of the twelfth embodiment is replaced with the ejected card confirmation process (S3004) executed in the timer interrupt process process (see FIG. 50) of the second embodiment described above. This is the process to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this ejected card confirmation processing (S3011), it is first confirmed whether the card reading flag 223o is on (S3406), and if the card reading flag 223o is off (S3406: No), Since it is not the information reading timing, in such a case, the ejected card confirmation processing (S3011) ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3401, if the card reading flag 223o is on (S3406: Yes), it is the information reading timing. In this case, the solenoid 1458 is turned on (S3407).

As a result of the solenoid 1458 being turned on in the process of S3407, the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface of the storage member 1451, that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, is stored (stored) in the storage member 1451. It is separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA.

Next, the IC tag reader 4501 reads the information (information corresponding to the card information) stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004 attached to the privilege card CA that is to be discharged next time and thus separated (S3408). ..

After the processing of S3408, it is confirmed whether or not the information can be read by the IC tag reader 4501 (S3409). If the information can be read as a result of the confirmation in S3409 (S3409: Yes), the privilege card CA to be read, that is, the privilege card CA to be read, based on the read information and the information stored in the card type table 222b. The type of privilege card CA (contents of privilege) to be discharged next time is determined (S3410).

After the processing of S3410, a value indicating the type of the determined privilege card CA is stored in the discharge card memory 223j (S3411), the solenoid 1458 is turned off (S3412), and the card reading flag 223o is turned off (S3413). The discharge card confirmation process (S3011) is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S3409, if the information could not be read (S3409: No), an error notification process for notifying an error is executed (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3412. In addition, the notification performed by the error notification process (S3414) may be performed by any one of the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like capable of notifying, or a plurality of devices. You may perform combining the apparatus of.

As described above, when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot detect the information, the seal member 4004 is illegally peeled from the privilege card CA and does not exist, or the antenna portion 4622b of the IC tag 4622 is damaged due to the illegal peeling. Since there is a possibility that the error has occurred, the possibility of fraud can be transmitted to the surroundings by notifying the error in the process of S3414.

As described above, according to the twelfth embodiment, at the time of shipment from the maker, the base sheet 4004a is opaque to the front surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA, and once peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged and regenerated. Since the sticker member 4004, which cannot be stuck, is stuck, the sense of expectation that the player has for the privilege card CA is removed so that the seal member 4004 can be peeled off and the design 1601a1 can be visually recognized after taking out the privilege card CA. It can be maintained until the end of the game, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period.

In addition, since the seal member 4004 is configured as a seal that cannot be re-attached once peeled off, it is possible to prevent the specific privilege card CA from being unlawfully pulled out, and also the fraudulent person peels off the seal member 4004. Can be made easier to discover.

Further, when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information (information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004), an error notification is given, so that the possibility of fraud is transmitted to the surroundings, thereby paying attention to fraud. Can be evoked.

In this embodiment, since the information can be read by the IC tag reader 4501 even when the privilege card CA is in the initial position, the confirmation position in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) of the second embodiment. The respective processes for transferring to (i.e., S4205 to S4207, S4212 to S4215) may be omitted. When omitting S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215, the card reading flag 223o is turned on instead of the process (S3304) of turning on the card transfer flag 223n in the discharge completion confirmation process (see FIG. 51) of the second embodiment. It suffices to execute the processing to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4004 has the same outer shape as the privilege card CA and completely covers the main body 1601 (front surface 1601a) and the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA. It suffices that at least the design 1601a1 that is the information that is specifically suggested is covered.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 91, the blocking member 2003 is preferably configured such that the end portion in the arrow F direction becomes thinner toward the tip (that is, taper in a side cross section). When the end in the arrow F direction is configured to be thinner toward the tip, the blocking member 2003 can be easily inserted between the privilege card CA discharged next time and the privilege card CA discharged next time. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the IC tag 4622 is configured to store the information corresponding to the card information. However, the IC tag 4622 has predetermined information (ID information capable of identifying each IC tag 4622, a plurality of pieces of information). Specific information common to the IC tag 4622) may be stored. Note that when predetermined information is stored in the IC tag 4622 instead of the information corresponding to the card information, control according to the information read by the IC tag reader 4501 (for example, as in this embodiment, the card information It is not possible to perform the control of changing the giving condition according to the above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the seal member 4004 is configured to be light-impermeable (opaque), but the visibility of the design 1601a1 (information visually suggesting the content of the privilege held by the privilege card CA) is not adhered before the bonding. A semi-transparent seal member may be used as long as it reduces the pressure compared with the above. Alternatively, the base material (base sheet 4004a) of the seal member 4004 may be printed to reduce the visibility of the design 1601a1.

In the present embodiment, the blocking member 2003 is inserted between the privilege card CA discharged next time and the privilege card CA discharged next time, and one privilege card CA discharged next time is stored. It is configured to be separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA stored in the member 1451. The insertion position of the blocking position 2003 is not limited to between the privilege card CA to be discharged next time and the privilege card CA to be discharged one after another, but a plurality of privilege cards CA (for example, a privilege card CA to be discharged next time may be A plurality of privilege cards CA at least included may be located so as to be separated from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ejected card confirmation process (see FIG. 93), when the information stored in the IC tag 4622 (information corresponding to the card information) cannot be read, an error notification process (that is, , S3414) and the process of determining the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejected card memory 223j (that is, the processes of S3410 and S3411). It was configured to do.

Instead, in the ejection card confirmation process (see FIG. 93), an error occurs when the information (information corresponding to the card information) stored in the IC tag 4622 cannot be read without performing the processes of S3410 and S3411. The configuration may be such that only the processing for making the notification is performed. In such a case, a process of discriminating the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejection card memory 223j is executed as a process different from the ejection card confirmation process of FIG. You can do it.

For example, when the card information is recorded as code information such as a barcode on the front surface 4601a separately from the information stored in the IC tag 4602, and the information stored in the IC tag 4622 cannot be read. The process of notifying the error is performed in the discharge card confirmation process of FIG. On the other hand, a process of determining the card type based on the information corresponding to the read card information and storing the card type in the ejected card memory 223j is executed as a process different from the ejected card confirmation process of FIG. It may be configured as follows.

In this case, the information stored in the IC tag 4602 is not the card information but predetermined information (ID information capable of identifying each IC tag 4602, specific information common to a plurality of IC tags 4602). Etc.).

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described twelfth embodiment, the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time) whose information is read by the IC tag reader 4501 using the blocking member 2003 is housed in the storage member 1451. It is configured to be separated (separated) from the privilege card CA.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the privilege card CA whose information is to be read by the IC tag reader 4501 is separated from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451 without using the blocking member 2003 ( To separate.

In addition, in this 13th Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as 12th Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. For example, the privilege card CA used in the thirteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the privilege card CA used in the twelfth embodiment (that is, the privilege card CA used in the second embodiment). The seal member 4004 used in the thirteenth embodiment is also the same as the seal member 4004 used in the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 94(a) is a sectional view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 94(b) is an exploded view for explaining the state of the privilege card CA in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), the privilege card CA of the thirteenth embodiment is shipped from the manufacturer with the surface 1601a of the privilege card CA (main body 1601 and card information area 1602). ) Is covered with a seal member 4004, and the back side of the privilege card CA is covered with a seal member 4005.

Similar to the blocking member 2003 (see FIG. 91) of the twelfth embodiment, the seal member 4005 is made of a material (for example, a radio wave or an electromagnetic wave) that interferes with transmission of a transmission medium used to transmit information from the IC tag 4622 ( For example, metal).

Therefore, the privilege card CA of the thirteenth embodiment can read information (information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the seal member 4004) from the front surface 1601a side by the IC tag reader 4501, but the seal member 4005 is provided on the back surface side. The information cannot be read from the back side because it is attached.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA according to the thirteenth embodiment is stacked with its front surface 1601a (that is, the seal member 4004) directed in one direction, the IC tag reader 4501 is at the end side where the seal member 4004 is exposed. The information can be read from the privilege card CA of the above, but for other privilege cards CA, the seal member 4005 attached to the back surface side of the adjacent privilege card CA blocks the transmission of the transmission medium, so that the IC tag reader The information cannot be read due to 4501.

Therefore, by stacking the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA toward the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451, the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface side without inserting the blocking member 2003 (see FIG. 91) (that is, The privilege card CA to be discharged next time can be separated (separated) from other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, as described above, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is separated from the other privilege cards CA stored in the storage member 1451 without inserting the blocking member 2003. Therefore, the processes of S3407 and S3412 in the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 93) of the twelfth embodiment can be omitted.

As described above, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the seal member 4005 attached to the rear surface side of the privilege card CA blocks transmission of the transmission medium, and thus is attached to the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. The information stored in the IC tag 4622 of the sealed seal member 4004 can be selectively read by the IC tag reader 4501.

Therefore, similar to the twelfth embodiment, an error can be notified when the IC tag reader 4501 cannot read the information, so that the possibility of fraud can be communicated to the surroundings, thereby alerting the fraud. ..

Further, as in the twelfth embodiment, at the time of shipment from the manufacturer, the surface 1601a side of the privilege card CA is impermeable to light, and once peeled off, the base sheet 4004a is damaged and cannot be reattached. Since the seal member 4004 is attached, the sense of expectation that the player feels for the privilege card CA can be maintained until the design member 1601a1 becomes visible after the privilege card CA is taken out and the seal member 4004 is peeled off. As a result, the interest of the game held by the player is increased, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the upper lid member 1452 of the privilege card ejection device 1450 is removable, and when replenishing the privilege card CA, the upper lid member 1452 is removed and the privilege card CA is stored in the internal space of the storage member 1451. Was added.

Instead, in the fourteenth embodiment, the privilege card ejection device 1450 accommodating the privilege card CA is purchased from the manufacturer, and the privilege card ejection device 1450 is replaced to supplement the privilege card CA. In the fourteenth embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure of the privilege card ejection device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment when viewed from the side, and FIG. 95(b) is similar to FIG. 95(a). It is an enlarged view of an Ex section. For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, a space is provided between the adjacent privilege cards CA in FIG. 95(a).

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the privilege card ejection device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured to be attachable/detachable to/from the pachinko machine 10A, and extends between the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 to store the storage member. It has a locking member 4801 that locks (fixes) 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 with difficulty or inseparability.

Since this locking member 4801 is locked at the time of shipment from the manufacturer (that is, in the state of being received from the manufacturer), the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 is not leaked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA before the acquisition, thereby preventing the player from losing his/her expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period.

Further, since the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are locked by the locking member 4801 in a difficult or non-separable manner, it is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person.

Here, since this privilege card ejecting device 1450 is shipped from the manufacturer with the locking member 4801 locked, the storage period during transportation until arrival and during installation until arrival in the pachinko machine 10A. It is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person both during and after being attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The locking member 4801 may have a structure that can be unlocked by a corresponding key after locking or a structure that cannot be unlocked after being locked. In order to reliably prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person, it is preferable that the locking member 4801 be configured so that it cannot be released after being locked by the manufacturer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 in the fourteenth embodiment has the upper end face from the internal space side of the storage member 1451 to the outlet side. Since the position on the outlet side of the discharge port 1451a is lower than the height of the privilege card CA located closest to the bottom surface, the privilege card CA is inclined downward in the direction of arrow M4. While being discharged.

Here, two steps 1451a1 and 1451a2 are formed on the upper end surface of the discharge port 1451a. Of these steps 1451a1 and 1451a2, the step 1451a1 on the internal space side is located above the exit side step 1451a2.

Therefore, when the privilege card CA is pushed back in the direction from the outside of the outlet 1451a to the internal space of the storage member 1451 (that is, the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow M4), the privilege card CA pushed back in a downward curved state is: When the end on the most outlet side enters the discharge port 1451a, it springs up due to elasticity. Since the stepped portion 1451a1 is located above the stepped portion 1451a2, as a result of the privilege card CA jumping up, the privileged card CA cannot be pushed back further or taken out again.

As described above, since the discharge port 1451a of the privilege card discharge device 1450 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so as not to easily push back the privilege card CA, it is not possible to easily return the privilege card CA that has been illegally removed from the discharge port 1451a. Therefore, the removal of the privilege card CA can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are shipped from the manufacturer in a difficult or non-separable state due to the locking by the locking member 4801 (and the shipment. Since the privilege card CA is replenished by mounting the card ejection device 1450 on the pachinko machine 10A, the leakage of the card information of the privilege card CA is prevented.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the privilege of the privilege card CA before the acquisition, thereby preventing the player from losing his/her expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA. It is possible to maintain it for a longer period. Further, it is possible to prevent the privilege card CA from being pulled out by a fraudulent person not only after being attached to the pachinko machine 10A but also during transportation from the manufacturer or during a storage period after receipt.

Further, since the discharge port 1451a of the card discharge device 1450 is configured to make it difficult (or impossible) to push back the privilege card CA from the outside to the inside, as a result, the removal of the privilege card CA can be suppressed. it can.

In the present embodiment, the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are locked by the locking member 4801 so that the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are difficult or inseparable to be fixed. The storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 may be fixed to each other.

For example, by providing a concave portion on the storage member 1451 side, providing a corresponding convex portion on the upper lid member 1452 side, and fitting the convex portion into the concave portion, it becomes difficult or impossible to separate the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452. It may be fixed. In such a case, it is preferable that it cannot be removed after the fitting. Alternatively, the card ejection device 1450 may be shipped from the manufacturer with the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 fixed to each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to locking (fixing) the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 in a difficult or inseparable state, or in place of such locking (fixing), It is also possible to provide an identification unit that can identify the separation from the upper lid member 1452, and prevent the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card ejection device 1450 from being leaked by the identification unit.

It is preferable that such an identification means does not return to the state before the separation once the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 are separated. As the identification means, for example, a caulking structure that fixes the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452 and needs to be destroyed when separating, or is attached across the storage member 1451 and the upper lid member 1452, Examples include a seal seal that is damaged when peeled off, an upper lid member 1452 that is damaged when removed (separated) from the storage member 1451, and the like.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the privilege card CA accommodated in the card ejecting device 1450 (the storage member 1451) is the privilege card CA of the second embodiment (that is, the privilege card CA in which both surfaces are exposed). Not limited to this, the privilege card CA exemplified in the eleventh embodiment, the twelfth embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, or the like may be used.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

For example, in the first embodiment, when the coin information is given as the special value, the coin form is used as the medium of the coin (special coin C), but the special value is provided by the special coin C or the like. It is not limited to a tangible form using a medium, and may be provided in an intangible form (that is, a form of data such as coin information itself) that does not use a medium for holding information.

When providing information of special value in the form of data, a mobile terminal (a mobile phone, a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants), etc.) possessed by the player, a USB memory, etc. are provided when the data of special value is provided. It may be configured to be stored in a portable small memory such as.

In the first embodiment, the coin (privilege coin C) is used as the medium for holding the information (coin information) as the special value. However, the form of the medium for holding the information as the special value is a coin. It is not limited, and various media such as cards, sticks, and other tangible objects (eg, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, the information (coin information) as the special value is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C. However, like the IC tag 602, wireless communication is possible. It may be configured to store the data in an IC chip that does not have an antenna.

When an IC chip having no built-in antenna is used, an output terminal for outputting information stored in the IC chip is provided on the privilege coin C, and an input terminal connectable to the output terminal is provided on the privilege coin. The coin information stored in the bonus coin C may be read by being provided in the standby member 470 of the payout device 450.

Further, in the first embodiment, the information (coin information) as the special value is configured in the form of data stored in the IC tag 602. However, the barcode, the color of the medium, the pattern of the medium, the medium, and the like. Information that can be detected by an optical reading device (for example, an optical sensor or a bar code reader), such as the shape of the medium (the uneven pattern on the outer periphery of the medium, the outer shape of the medium (for example, the shape of a stuffed animal), etc.), or Alternatively, it may be configured in the form of information that can be identified by a shape recognition device (for example, a shape recognition device that is performed using imaging data (image) of an object).

Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, the plurality of partitions formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602 are filled so as to have a pattern according to the card information. May have a bar code or a shape (pattern) according to the card information.

Further, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, some of the plurality of partitions formed in the card information areas 1602, 1602x are filled, but the fill color is not limited to black. Various colors (eg, red, blue, etc.) may be used. In such a case, the card reader may be capable of color detection and may detect (read out) the card information according to the filling color.

At this time, the filling color may be different on the front and back sides. Since the filling color is different between the front and back, it is possible to determine the front and back of the privilege card CA by the filling color.

Further, when the filling color is multicolor, the colored portion may be light transmissive. When the filling pattern constituting the card information is configured to be light-transmissive, when reading the card information of the privilege cards CA and CA′ mounted on the card information 1300, light is emitted from the reading side by the value content detecting means, From the color of the reflected light, it is possible to determine the type of the privilege card CA, CA′ that is attached. Alternatively, it is possible to irradiate light from the side opposite to the reading side by the value content detecting means, and to discriminate the type of the privilege card, CA' mounted, from the color of the transmitted light.

In addition, by making the filling pattern that constitutes the card information of the privilege cards CA and CA′ light-transmissive, it is possible to form the pattern at a position where the privilege cards CA and CA′ are overlapped with each other. It is also possible to distinguish the combination by the color of the reflected light.

Further, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmitting card information area 1602. However, the privilege coin C illustrated in the first embodiment is exemplified. Alternatively, an IC tag may be used. The value content detecting means in the second and third embodiments detects the card information at the confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, so the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to confusion with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means when reading the.

Further, in the second and third embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602. The concavo-convex pattern, the outer peripheral shape) may have a shape corresponding to the card information, and the card information may be acquired using an optical sensor or a shape recognition device. The value content detecting means in the second and third embodiments detects the card information at the confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, so the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Can be detected without being confused with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means.

Further, in the above second and third embodiments, the card (privilege card CA) is used as the medium having the special value (card information), but the form of the medium is not limited to the card, and coins and Various media such as a stick, and other tangible objects (eg, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, the back surface 1601b of the privilege card CA is configured to be white groundless. Good.

For example, if the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or navy blue), it may be white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue), or groundless, When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark groundless. The surface is not limited to the ground, but is a surface on which a fine pattern is formed, or a surface that is designed at a position that does not overlap the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time at the confirmation position. May be.

Similarly, the white solid ground of the plate member 1305 and the white solid ground of the plate member 1455b are not limited to white as long as they can read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602 well.

Further, in the second, third and fourth embodiments, the card information areas 1602 and 1602x of the privilege cards CA and CA′ are configured such that the four sides are surrounded by the main body portions 1601 and 1601x. The edge of 1602x may constitute a part of the edge of the privilege card CA, CA′, that is, the edge of the card information area 1602, 1602x may be exposed without being surrounded by the main body 1601, 1601x. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the main body 1601x of the privilege card CA' is configured to be opaque, but the main body 1601x may be configured to be transparent like the card information area 1602x.

Further, in the privilege card ejection device 1450 of the second and third embodiments, as shown in FIG. 37, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 is provided between the lower plate unit 15 and the ejection port 1451a on the side closer to the ejection port 1451a. Although the configuration is adopted, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 may be provided between the lower tray unit 15 and the outlet 1451a on the side closer to the lower tray unit 15 (that is, on the opening 1054 side).

Here, by setting the presence/absence detection sensor 1461 at a position where the tip of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position can be detected, it can be used only for confirmation of discharge completion as in the second and third embodiments. Instead, it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the arrival at the confirmation position when the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the medium for playing the game (gaming ball) and the medium for obtaining the privilege (privilege coin C or privilege card CA, CA′) are different, but for playing the game The medium and the medium for obtaining the privilege may have the same form, and the medium for obtaining the privilege may be configured to be usable as a medium for playing a game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is configured as the information indicating the symbol used in the new reach effect mode that can be displayed by mounting the special coin C on the coin information reading device 300. Alternatively, it may be configured as information of a character that appears in the reach effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value, one of the five main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) Although it is configured as the information shown, instead of this, it may be configured as information showing one main symbol out of the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). Good. Alternatively, it may be configured as information indicating one main symbol of all the main symbols.

Further, in the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is a symbol used in a new reach effect mode that can be displayed by mounting the privilege coin C on the coin information reading device 300 (specifically, an odd number). Although it is configured as information indicating one main symbol) among the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9), it is not limited to this, and points (score) and Information that can change the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability) or information that guides the game strategy can be used.

Similarly, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the card information as the special value is given a predetermined effect (a big hit effect or a reach effect) by mounting the privilege cards CA, CA′ on the card information reading device 1300. The information that can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the information is not limited to this, and information that can change the points (score) and the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability). Alternatively, it may be information that guides the game strategy.

Further, the card information as the special value may be information that allows a predetermined stop symbol to be displayed after the variable display by mounting the privilege cards CA and CA' on the card information reading device 1300.

Further, the new effect displayed based on the coin information or the card information is a predetermined effect mode using a certain symbol, but an effect unrelated to the symbol (for example, an effect that a specific character that is not a symbol appears) Alternatively, an effect in which a specific situation appears (for example, an effect by an image and sound of a bell ringing) may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA is attached to the pachinko machine 10 (the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300) in order to obtain the privilege. Is not limited to being mounted on the pachinko machine 10. For example, a player may obtain a privilege by exchanging with a prize based on coin information (for example, points) stored in the privilege coin C at a prize exchange place. Alternatively, the player reads out and uses the information by using an information processing device (for example, a personal computer) connected to an information reading device (a reader capable of reading data from various media such as an IC tag reader). It may be configured to obtain a privilege.

In the second and third embodiments, when a special combination of privilege cards CA (gold and silver cards) is attached to the card information reading device 1300, the special cards CA appear only after being combined. It was configured to display the jackpot performance. Alternatively, when a special combination of privilege cards CA is attached to the card information reading device 1300, the combination type or the number of combination of privilege cards CA is a privilege that appears only after combining these privilege cards CA. It may be configured to perform a special reach effect according to. At this time, a reach effect of a type that develops according to the combination type or the number of combinations of the privilege cards CA may be performed.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the contents of the special value (the special value However, if the special value information is information indicating a numerical value (for example, points), the numerical value may be displayed during variable display or stop display.

Alternatively, the information as the special value may be converted into a numerical value, and the numerical value may be displayed during variable display or stop display. For example, in the case where there is a high or low value due to a scarcity value or the like between each type of special value, a higher numerical value may be displayed for higher value information during variable display or stop display. In this case, it may be configured to have a table or a function for digitizing the information as the special value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when suggesting the coin information as the special value, the variable display and the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are configured in the same manner except for the symbol indicated by the coin information. When the value as the special value has high or low value, the mode of variable display or stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the high or low value.

In the first embodiment, the coin information of the privilege coin C is acquired based on the coin type table 222a, and a value indicating the type of coin is acquired and stored in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b. However, the coin information of the privilege coin C may be stored as it is in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b as a value indicating the type of coin.

Further, in the first and fourth embodiments, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete disconnection is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). Not limited to the corresponding variation pattern command, the suggestion condition may be established when the variation pattern command corresponding to the out-reach (rear out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear reach) is continuously received a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in the first and fourth embodiments, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). For example, even in the configuration in which the suggestion condition is satisfied when the ratio of complete deviation to all fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined value in a period starting from the timing of paying out the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA′) Good. Alternatively, the suggestion condition may be satisfied when the ratio of deviation (complete deviation, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear) with respect to all fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined value in a predetermined period.

The suggestion condition is, as in the first and fourth embodiments, at least one profit lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state ( It is preferable that the condition is based on a lottery result of whether or not (a big hit state) is generated.

For example, if the deviation (the result of not generating an advantageous state) is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more as the suggestion condition is satisfied, the deviation is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more and the interest in the game is about to be lost. Also, by suggesting the types of the bonus coin C and the bonus card CA' to be paid out next time, the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the bonus coin C and the bonus card CA'. You can maintain interest in the game.

Alternatively, by setting that the result of generating the jackpot state is obtained as the suggestion condition, the type of the bonus coin C or the bonus card CA′ to be paid out next time is suggested together with the occurrence of the jackpot state. As a result, new amusement features are added to the amusement features provided by conventional general gaming machines by lottery, the interest of the amusement is improved, and the player's interest in the amusement can be maintained for a long time. enable.

Further, the establishment of the suggestion condition is based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 which is a trigger to start the variable display of the identification information (LED 37a and the pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Preferably.

With such a configuration, the suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA′ to be paid out next time is a variable display (dynamic display) using the identification information performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. ), it is not only for the player who visually recognizes this variable display to have the same stop display as a conventional general-purpose gaming machine, but also for a special value that conventional general-purpose gaming machines do not have. Can be expected to be earned. Therefore, the change (variation) of the game property becomes richer than that of the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, the suggestion condition may be established according to the length of the game time. For example, the number of revolutions of the variable display, the period during which the player touches the operation handle 51, the switch provided by the player for inputting the start of the game to the pachinko machine 10, and the period after the switch is operated, etc. The game time may be set, and the suggestion condition may be established when the game time exceeds a predetermined period.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the receiving part coin flag 223h confirmation process (S2603 process) is preceded by the coin payout suggestion flag 223d confirmation process (S2604 process). It was configured to be done by. That is, when the bonus coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300, the reach effect mode is set by giving priority to the bonus coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. Instead of this, the confirmation process of the coin payout suggestion flag 223d may be executed prior to the confirmation process of the receiving section coin flag 223h, and the reach effect based on the establishment of the suggestion condition may be preferentially set.

Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 73), the confirmation process of the receiving card flag 223xi (the process of S2643) is replaced with the confirmation process of the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc (the process of S2644). The configuration is performed in advance. That is, when the privilege card CA′ is mounted on the card information reading device 1300, the reach effect mode is set by giving priority to the privilege card CA′ mounted on the card information reading device 1300. Alternatively, the confirmation processing of the card ejection suggestion flag 223xc may be executed prior to the confirmation processing of the receiving section card flag 223xi, and the reach effect based on the establishment of the suggestion condition may be preferentially set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured such that the suggestion condition is satisfied based on the command received from the main control device 110, but in the main control device 110, the bonus coin C to be paid out next time. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not to suggest the type of is drawn, and the result of the drawing is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Here, the lottery as to whether or not to suggest the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is performed when the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the game board 13 (for example, the ball enters the first entrance 64). If you enter the ball). Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, in the main control device 110, whether or not to suggest the type of privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time is selected by lottery, and the result of the lottery is output to the voice lamp control device 113. May be

In the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110 (specifically, a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot), the giving condition is Although it is configured that the bonus coin C is paid out when it is established, the granting condition can be set appropriately. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to a complete disconnection from the main control device 110 a predetermined number of times, and then receives a command corresponding to a reach other than a normal jackpot (probability variation jackpot, front-back detachment reach, reach other than front-back detachment). When it does, it is good also as satisfaction of grant conditions. It should be noted that the applying conditions can be appropriately set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment.

Further, in the first embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the establishment of the suggestion condition) and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607. If the coin information of the target benefit coin C is the same as (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the benefit coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), it corresponds to the coin information. It is configured that the same reach effect mode using the pattern is set.

Instead of this, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 may be different reach effect modes using symbols corresponding to the same coin information. For example, in the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a are stopped and displayed in two rows out of three, and the remaining one row fluctuates. Although it is a reach effect mode, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 remains in the state where the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in the two columns out of the three columns. It may be a configuration in which a new reach production mode including a notice production that the symbols pass through as a group fluctuates.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the content of the special value (special Although the type of value) is suggested, the special value is notified by voice from the audio output device 226, and the special value is displayed by the lamp display device 227 (lamp lighting, blinking, change of emission color, etc.). The content may be notified. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the content of the special value performed by the establishment of the suggestion condition is notified by using the lamp display by the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (lamp lighting, blinking, emission color change, etc.). It may be configured to.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display or the stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the content of the special value (special Although the type of value) is suggested, the first symbol display device 37 may perform variable display or stop display according to the symbol corresponding to the coin information.

In addition, in the second and third embodiments, the grant condition is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot or the out-reach reaches the specified number according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next, and the grant condition is satisfied. Although the privilege card CA is discharged, the remaining number of times required to reach the grant condition may be notified (displayed or output by voice).

Further, in the second embodiment, the difference in the number of occurrences of the common game state (specifically, the probability variation big hit) is the difference in the giving condition, but the common game state in which the number of occurrences is counted. In addition to the probability variation jackpot, the out-reach, the out-revolution speed, the number of shot balls, or the like may be applied. Further, the difference in the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10A and the difference in the period in which the player is touching the operation handle 51 may be configured as the difference in the giving condition.

At this time, for example, a gold card is provided with 300 out-reach conditions, a silver card is provided with 150 out-reach conditions, and a copper card is provided with 30 out-reach conditions. be able to. Alternatively, the gold card is set to 3000 out-of-rotations, the silver card is set to 1500 out-of-rotations, and the copper card is set to 300 out-of-rotations. be able to. In addition, the number of shots (the number of shots) to be fired 30000 times is given to the gold card, the number of shots (the number of shots) to be 1500 times is given to the silver card, and the number of shots is set to be 300 times for the copper card. The number of shots (the number of shots) can be set as the giving condition.

Alternatively, even if the gaming state is not the common gaming state, the gaming state in which the number of occurrences is counted may be different according to the card information of the privilege card CA. For example, in the case of a gold card, the probability of 10 occurrences of a jackpot can be set as a grant condition, and in the case of a silver card, the occurrence of 10 times a normal jackpot can be set as a grant condition. In this case, it is possible to give a difference in the degree of difficulty of establishment to the grant condition depending on the difference in the game state. For example, the probability of establishment is higher when the probability variation jackpot with a low selection probability is used as the granting condition than when the normal jackpot is used as the granting condition.

In addition, the game state targeted for the grant condition may have a configuration in which not only the game state in which the number of occurrences is counted, but also the number of occurrences to be established is different according to the card information of the privilege card CA. For example, in the case of a gold card, 10 occurrences of a probability variation jackpot may be set as a grant condition, and in the case of a silver card, 150 occurrences of a miss reach may be set as a grant condition.

Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the discharge mode is changed based on the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800, the information stored for the previous application conditions is held, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information that has been accumulated for the previous grant conditions is cleared as the mode is changed.

In the second and third embodiments, the granting condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. In addition to changing the conditions, as in the first embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the type of privilege card CA to be paid out next time, an effect according to the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j ( The variable display and/or the stop display) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Alternatively, according to the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, instead of changing the grant condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, as in the first embodiment, it is paid out next time. In order to suggest (notify) the type of privilege card CA to be displayed, an effect (variable display and/or stop display) corresponding to the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured as follows.

In the second embodiment, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on. However, when the pachinko machine 10A is powered on, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is not cleared to 0 and the power is shut off. The configuration may be such that it can continue from the hour value.

Since the probability variation jackpot occurs with a relatively low probability, the probability variation jackpot number 223v may not be cleared to 0 each time the power is turned on, so that the condition for granting the probability variation jackpot number may be satisfied soon after the opening of the hole. obtain. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game from the opening of the hall while expecting the discharge of the privilege card CA due to the establishment of the grant condition.

In the first embodiment, the payout coin detection process (see FIG. 29) and the receiving coin detection process (see FIG. 30) are executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 ms. However, the payout coin detecting process and the receiving coin detecting process may be executed in the main process (see FIG. 19).

Further, in the second embodiment, the timer allocation executed for the discharge completion confirmation processing (see FIG. 51), the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52), and the receiving unit card confirmation processing (see FIG. 53) every 2 ms. Although the configuration is performed in the plug-in process (see FIG. 50 ), the ejection completion confirmation process, the ejection card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process may be performed in the main process (see FIG. 43 ).

Further, in the third embodiment, the ejection mode changing process (see FIG. 59), the ejection completion confirmation process (see FIG. 60), the ejection card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), and the receiving unit card confirmation process (see FIG. 53). Is configured to be executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50) executed every 2 ms. However, the main processing is the discharge mode change process, the discharge completion confirmation process, the discharge card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process. It may be configured to be executed in the processing (see FIG. 43).

Also, in the fourth embodiment, the timer allocation executed for the discharge completion confirmation processing (see FIG. 80), the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81), and the receiving unit card confirmation processing (see FIG. 82) every 2 ms. Although the configuration is performed in the plug-in process (see FIG. 79), the ejection completion confirmation process, the ejection card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process may be performed in the main process (see FIG. 69).

Further, in the second and third embodiments, the type (contents of privilege) of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is configured not to be notified (indicated) before the discharge, but like the first embodiment. Even when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied, the variable display and the stop display according to the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time are performed to notify the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Good.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the bonus card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card, the grant condition is satisfied by the occurrence of 10 probability variation jackpots, and if it is a silver card, the probability variation jackpots of 5 probability variation jackpots. The condition for grant is satisfied by the occurrence, and in the case of a copper card, the condition for grant is satisfied by the occurrence of one probability variation jackpot.

Here, even if there is a probability variation jackpot occurrence in the main control device 110 for at least the last one of the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot that is the provision condition, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v determines that the probability variation jackpot that is the provision condition. The number of occurrences may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability). For example, if the bonus card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card and the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 9, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the probability variation jackpot, but the probability variation jackpot. Whether or not to add 1 to the counter 223v is determined with a probability of 1/2.

With this configuration, even if the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot as the granting condition is relatively small, the granting condition is not always satisfied in a short time. Therefore, the length of time until the privilege card CA is discharged and the length of the value of the privilege card CA are not necessarily proportional to each other, so that the game in which the privilege card CA can be obtained can be suppressed and the interest of the player can be increased. It can be prevented from being monotonic. Also, the player expects a high-value privilege card CA because the period until the privilege card CA is discharged is long, but thinks that the player may acquire a low-value privilege card CA. When the privilege card CA is acquired, the player's joy for the acquisition can be amplified.

In addition, for gold cards, silver cards, and copper cards, all of the same number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpots satisfy the condition for granting. However, even if the main controller 110 generates the probability variation jackpots, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is generated. According to the type of the privilege card CA (whether it is a gold card, a silver card, or a bronze card), the probability of deciding whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot as the grant condition is determined according to You may comprise. For example, the probability that the probability variation jackpot 223v determines whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot that is a grant condition is 1/5, 1/2, and 1 for a gold card, a silver card, and a copper card, respectively. Good.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (variation pattern command, stop symbol command) from the main control device 110 and then receives a stop command, the coin The payout flag 223f is turned on, and the payout operation of the bonus coin C is performed. Similarly, in the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a command (a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot or a command corresponding to the out-reach) that satisfies the grant condition. After that, when the stop command is received, the card ejection flag 223l is turned on and the privilege card CA is ejected.

Instead of these, a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is provided in the voice lamp control device 113 without using the stop command, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is included in the variation pattern command. Alternatively, the coin payout flag 223f or the card ejection flag 223l may be turned on at the timing when only the time elapses.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 includes information on the variation time and information on the first hit type counter C2 (that is, a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot). However, the variation pattern command may be configured as a command that does not include the information of the first hit type counter C2 but includes only the variation time information.

In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command is configured as a command including only variation time information, the voice lamp control device 113 is a big hit based on the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110. It distinguishes whether the mode of is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot.

Further, in the second, third and fourth embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes the jackpot display mode (probable variation jackpot, normal jackpot) based on the stop symbol command received from the main controller 110. Although configured, when the variation pattern command includes information of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, whether it is a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit), based on the change pattern command, as in the first embodiment. Then, it may be configured to distinguish whether the mode of the big hit is the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to use the stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol set based on the first hit type counter C2, but instead of the stop symbol command, the first hit The voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 uses the type command including the information of the type (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear reach, complete out) according to the value of the type counter C2. The stop symbol may be determined based on the content of the command. In such a case, the voice lamp control device 113 can distinguish the big hits (probability variation big hits, normal big hits) and the misses (rear out-of-front/reach, reach other than out-of-fronts/reach, complete disconnection) based on the type command. it can.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, in the reach other than the normal jackpot (probability variation jackpot, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outer hit), the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is determined. Since the new reach effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, after the suggestion condition is satisfied, not only the new reach effect mode appears, but also the appearance frequency increases.

Instead, a new reach effect mode according to the coin information of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is simply stopped in two rows out of three rows corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The remaining one column may fluctuate in the displayed state, and a reach production mode similar to that during a normal reach variation may be adopted, and only the appearance frequency of the reach production state similar to such a normal reach variation may be increased. ..

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the receiving coin flag 223h is turned on based on the bonus coin C being attached to the pachinko machine 10 (coin information reading device 300), a reach other than the normal jackpot (probably variable jackpot, In front and rear out-reach, reach other than out-of-front-and-rear), since a new reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the coin information of the installed privilege coin C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a new reach effect is obtained. Not only does the mode appear, but the frequency of occurrence also increases.

Instead of this, a new reach effect mode as a privilege corresponding to the coin information of the installed privilege coin C is simply used, and the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving coin memory 223b are two columns out of three columns. With the remaining one row fluctuating in a state where it is stopped and displayed, the reach production mode is the same as when the normal reach is changed, and only the frequency of the reach production is the same as when the normal reach is changed. Good.

Further, in the first embodiment, the privilege coins C are stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction, but the privilege coins C are arranged on a plane. A configuration may be used in which a storage member having a storage form is used.

As described above, when using a storage member in which the privilege coins C are arranged and stored on a plane, a push-out member (appended to push out the row of the privilege coins C arranged in the storage member from one end side to the standby member side) A biasing member) may be provided, and the privilege coin C stored in the storage member may be configured to be supplied to the standby member by being pushed (transferred) by the pushing member. Alternatively, the privilege coins C may be arranged on the conveyor in the storage member, and the privilege coins C stored in the storage member by the transfer by the conveyor may be supplied to the standby member.

In the first embodiment, the privilege coins C are stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the privilege coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction (gravitational direction). It may be configured to use a storage member having a configuration in which the items are horizontally arranged and stored.

As described above, when using a storage member in which the planes of the privilege coins C are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and stored, the pushing member (biasing member) that pushes the row of the privilege coins C arranged in the storage member from one end side to the standby member side. It is sufficient to provide a member) and supply the privilege coin C stored in the storage member to the standby member by pushing (transferring) by the pushing member. At this time, for example, from the discharge side of the storage member to the standby member, a descending inclined rail on which the outer peripheral surface of the privilege coin C can be placed is connected, and the privilege coin C is discharged from the discharge side of the storage member to the rail, The privilege coin C on the rail can be configured to run by utilizing gravity and be supplied to the standby member.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the privilege coin payout device 450, the coin information of one privilege coin located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, so that the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is read. Although the type is determined, a plurality of standby members according to the payout order are provided, the coin information of each privilege coin C stored in the plurality of standby members is individually read by the IC tag reader, and paid out from the next time. The type of the privilege coin C may be determined in advance in the payout order.

Similarly, in the second and third embodiments, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, and the card information is read, but a plurality of privilege cards are used. The card CA is transferred to the confirmation position as the privilege card to be discharged next time, and based on the code pattern read by the discharge card reader 1453, as in the case where a plurality of privilege cards CA are mounted in the card information reading device 1300. The card information of each privilege card CA may be acquired.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, as a device for paying out the privilege coin C, regardless of the type of the privilege coin C, one kind of privilege coin is stored from the storage member 460 that stores various kinds of privilege coins C in various ways. By supplying C to the standby member 470 and reading the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 by the payout IC tag reader 501, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined.

Alternatively, a plurality of storage units may be provided for each type of privilege coin C, and one storage unit to be paid out may be selected from the plurality of storage units when the grant condition is satisfied. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is determined by selecting the storage unit. Therefore, the reading for individually detecting the type of the privilege coin C (contents of coin information) The device (dispensing IC tag reader 501) can be eliminated.

It should be noted that by previously determining the selection order of the one storage unit to be paid out, it is possible to previously determine the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out after the next time. The selection order of the storage units may be determined by lottery or the like.

In the first embodiment, the coin information of one privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501. However, the standby member 470 is not provided (that is, the storage member). Only 460). For example, the coin information of the privilege coin C is made information that can be detected by an optical reading device, a transparent window that can read the coin information is provided on the discharge side of the storage member, and the standby member 470 is not provided next time. The configuration may be such that the type of privilege coins C to be paid out is determined.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 is formed with the concave coin receiving portion 300a, and the bonus coin C can be detachably attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. .. Alternatively, the bonus information C may be simply placed (arranged) on the plate-like portion without providing the coin information reading device 300 with a recess such as the coin receiving portion 300a. Similarly, instead of the card information reading device 1300 in the second and third embodiments, the privilege card CA may be simply placed (placed) at a position on the plate-shaped portion that can be read by the pattern reading means. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is integrally provided with the pachinko machine 10. However, the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is not the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured as a separate body and used by being connected to the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the main control device 110. Based on the command (fluctuation pattern command, stop symbol command), the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is suggested.

Instead, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 determines whether the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the suggestion condition are satisfied by the main control device 110. Alternatively, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, a corresponding command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113. At this time, for example, in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 14) executed by the main control device 110, when complete deviation is determined as a fluctuation pattern for a predetermined number of times in succession, or a probability variation jackpot is set as a display mode. If it is, it can be determined that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

Here, when the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the main control device 110 to determine whether or not the main control device 110 indicates the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time, The coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the coin payout device 450 are connected to the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 determines whether the grant condition is satisfied. When the grant condition is satisfied, a corresponding command is voiced. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113. At this time, for example, in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 14) executed by main controller 110, when the probability variation big hit is set as the display mode, it can be determined that the grant condition is satisfied.

Alternatively, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the display control device 114, and in the display control device 114, the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the command received from the voice lamp control device 114 (display variation pattern command, Based on the display stop symbol command), the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the privilege coin payout device 450 may be connected to the display control device 140.

In the first embodiment, the receiving IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113, but they are connected to the main control device 110. The coin information of the privilege coin C read by the receiving IC tag reader 302 may be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the receiving IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 may be connected to the display control device 114.

Further, in the first embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

In the second, third, and fourth embodiments, the ejection card reader 1453, the receiving card reader 1303, the presence/absence detection sensor 1461, and the read button 1301 are connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is connected. Although information and signals are input to 113, at least one of them is connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 to input information or signals to the connection destination control device. Good.

Here, when the ejection card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 performs processing according to the input information or signal, and the resulting command (privilege card CA , CA′ is instructed to be discharged, or a command to instruct a special effect is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the information and signals input from the ejection card reader 1453 or the like to the main control device 110 are output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the same processing as in the second, third and fourth embodiments is performed to the voice lamp control device 113. It is also possible to adopt a configuration of executing the above.

Alternatively, when the ejection card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 performs a process according to the input information or signal, and the display control device 114 causes the privilege card CA. , CA' can be discharged or effect display as a privilege can be performed.

In the second and third embodiments, the transfer motor 1451c and the mounting solenoid 1304 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and are driven and controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least one configuration may be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and driven and controlled by the control device of the connection destination.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first transfer motor 1451xc, the second transfer motor 1457xa, the discharge motor 1456xd, the fixing solenoid 1456xf, and the mounting solenoid 1304 are connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113. However, at least one of these configurations may be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and driven and controlled by the control device of the connection destination. ..

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, for one section formed in the card information area 1602x of the privilege card CA′, there are three types of information of “design number”, “additional effect” information, and “level” information. Although the card information, which is a combination of information, is associated with each other, these three types of information may be associated with one section without being combined.

In addition, the information associated with one section is not limited to the three types of information ("symbol number" information, "additional effect" information, and "level" information) exemplified in the fourth embodiment. Two types of information or four or more types of information may be associated with one section.

Further, the information used as the card information is not limited to the three types (the information of the “design number”, the information of the “additional effect”, and the information of the “level”) exemplified in the fourth embodiment, and other information may be used. It may be. For example, it may be information that defines the grant probability.

In the fourth embodiment, the card information area 1602x is divided into two areas, but it may be divided into one area or three or more areas.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the card information area 1602x of the two privilege cards CA′ overlapping by the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x is collectively read by the discharging card reader 1453, but three cards are used. The card information area 1602x of the above privilege card CA′ may be collectively read.

Further, the privilege card CA of the second and third embodiments may be stored in the storage member 1450xa of the card ejection device 1450x of the fourth embodiment, and the same control as that of the fourth embodiment may be performed.

Further, in the process of S2661 of the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, as the selection probability for selecting either the ejection card A memory 223xa or the ejection card B memory 223xb, (ejection card A It is configured to calculate from the difference “n” between the value of the level included in the memory 223xa) and the value of the level included in the ejection card B memory 223xb, and the range “N” of the suggestive effect counter 223xm.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, since the number of privilege cards CA′ to be read collectively is two, the selection probability of the suggestion effect counter 223xm for selecting the ejection card A memory 223xa is “((N/2)+n”. )/N” and the selection probability of the suggestion counter 223xm for selecting the discharge card B memory 223xb is “((N/2)−n)/N”, but the number of privilege cards CA′ to be read collectively is 3 In the case of more than one sheet, the range of the suggestive effect counter 223xm may be distributed according to the level included in the reading result.

Alternatively, the selection probability set for the card information of the higher level (that is, the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa) and the card information of the lower level (that is, the ejection card B memory 223xb The selection probability set for the stored card information) may be a uniform value irrelevant to the level difference. For example, the selection probability for the card information stored in the ejection card A memory 223xa may be set to 2/3, and the selection probability for the card information stored in the ejection card B memory 223xb may be set to 1/3. When both the card information stored in the ejected card A memory 223xa and the card information stored in the ejected card B memory 223xb are at the same level, the selection probability is halved.

Further, as long as it is a medium capable of reading a plurality of card information, it is not limited to the privilege card CA′ having the light-transmitting card information area 1602x exemplified in the fourth embodiment, and other mediums can be used. For example, a plurality of privilege coins C illustrated in the first embodiment may be made to stand by in the standby member 470 of the privilege coin payout device 450, and the card information may be read by the payout IC tag reader 501.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharging device 1450x, after the card information for the two privilege cards CA′ that overlap is read by the discharging card reader 1453, and the granting condition is satisfied, It is configured to transfer one sheet on the bottom side to the discharge position.

Instead, in the standby member 1450xb of the privilege card discharge device 1450x, after reading the card information of the two privilege cards CA' that overlap each other by the discharge card reader 1453, before transferring the discharge position to the bottom one May be transferred to a position corresponding to the confirmation position in the second and third embodiments described above. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the card information of the privilege card CA' to be discharged next time at the confirmation position. By independently confirming the card information of the privilege card CA′ to be discharged next time, the discharge probability of the privilege card CA′ can be changed according to the content, for example, as in the second and third embodiments. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, in the card ejection device 1450x, by transferring the privilege card CA′ from the storage member 1450xa to the standby member 1450xb, two card privileges for reading the card information by the ejection card reader 1453. The card CA′ is configured to be separated from other privilege cards CA′ stored in the storage member 1450xa.

The configuration for separating the two privilege cards CA' for reading the card information by the ejection card reader 1453 from other privilege cards CA' is not limited to the configuration exemplified in the fourth embodiment.

For example, with the blocking member 2001 of the seventh embodiment, the privilege card CA' (the lowest and second privilege card CA' from the bottom in FIG. 86(a)) which is given to the next time and the next time, and the third from the bottom. The two privilege cards CA′ for reading the card information may be separated from the other (remaining) privilege cards CA′ by inserting the privilege card CA′ from the other privilege card CA′.

Alternatively, by using the card ejecting device 1450 of the second and third embodiments, two privilege cards CA' (next lowest and second privilege card in FIG. 86(a)) to be given next time and next time. CA') is provided with a push-out mechanism for pushing out toward the discharge outlet 1451a side, and the push-out mechanism pushes out the two privilege cards CA' to the confirmation position and separates them from other privilege cards CA'. The card information may be read by the discharge card reader 1453 with the back surface 1601b of the second privilege card CA' as the background.

In addition, to obtain a gaming machine in which the characteristic configurations of the pachinko machines 10, 10A, and 10B illustrated in the above embodiments, and the characteristic configurations included in the first to fourteenth embodiments are combined as necessary. Is of course possible.

For example, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a characteristic configuration of (A) suggesting or notifying the information of the special value medium (privilege coin C) to be paid out next time when the predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 10B of the third embodiment is characterized in that (B) the granting condition of the privilege card CA discharged next time is changed according to the information of the privilege card CA discharged next time. Although it has a configuration, it is naturally possible to obtain a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having the characteristic configurations (A) and (B) from these embodiments.

The present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to a pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. It is also possible to carry out. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and winning a ball in the special area as a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray.

In the following, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described various embodiments will be shown.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and pays out the game medium as a game value when the game state of the game satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game state satisfies a predetermined special value giving condition. And a special value giving means for giving a special value different from the game value, and a value judging means for judging the kind of the special value for the special value given at least next time by the special value giving means. , A value presenting means for suggesting or notifying the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means based on the judgment by the value judging means when the game state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition A gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, in the game using the game medium, when the game state satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out as a game value, while the game state satisfies a predetermined special value giving condition. Then, a special value different from the game value is given by the special value giving means.

Here, for at least the next time the special value is given by the special value giving means, the type of the special value is judged by the value judging means, and based on the judgment, when the gaming state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition. The type of special value to be given next time by the special value giving means is suggested or notified by the value presenting means.

Therefore, when a certain game state (a game state satisfying the suggestion condition) is reached, the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, so that the player can obtain the special value before the special value is acquired. You can continue playing with the expectation that you may win.

In particular, if the type of special value to be added next time, which is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, is one that the player desires to acquire, the player is waiting for the acquisition of the special value. You can continue playing while playing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A1, since the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, a new gaming property is created, which becomes a new added value, and the game is added. Allows the player to retain interest for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine A1, the "suggestion condition" that triggers the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next is the same condition as the "special value grant condition" that triggers the grant of the special value. May be different conditions. Further, in the gaming machine A1, the form of the special value given by the special value giving means may be a tangible form such as a medium or an intangible form such as data.

In the above embodiment, the special value giving means in the gaming machine A1 corresponds to the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22) in S2404 and the coin payout process (see FIG. 27). In the above embodiment, the payout coin detecting process (see FIG. 29) corresponds to the value determining means in the gaming machine A1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the value presenting means in the gaming machine A1, the process of S2405 of the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22), the process of S2504 of the complete miss count process (see FIG. 23), and the variation effect setting process ( The process of S2605 of FIG. 24), the process of S2707 of the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25), and the processes of S2804 and S2807 of the disengagement stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26) are applicable.

In the gaming machine A1, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display using identification information, a passage detecting unit provided at a predetermined position for detecting passage of a game medium, and the game medium by the passage detecting unit. And a dynamic display start means for starting dynamic display using the identification information on the display device based on the detection of the detection condition of the game medium by the passage detection means. Gaming machine A2 which is a condition based on.

According to the gaming machine A2, when the game medium that has passed through the predetermined location is detected by the passage detecting means, the dynamic display starting means starts the dynamic display using the identification information on the display device. At this time, the condition based on the detection of the game medium by the passage detecting unit is set as the suggesting condition that triggers the suggestion or notification by the value presenting unit. Therefore, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time will be performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device.

By the way, in the conventional general game machine, the dynamic display (variable display) of the identification information on the display device is started on the condition that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location as a starting condition, and the identification information is predetermined. There is a case where an advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs when the combination is stopped and displayed. However, according to the gaming machine A2, the display device gives a suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time. Since it is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information that is performed, not only the player who visually recognizes the dynamic display has an expectation about the outcome of the stop display similar to the conventional general gaming machine, It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a special value may be acquired, which is not possible with conventional general game machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, the suggestion or notification of the type of the special value to be given next time is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device, and thus The variation (variation) of the amusement property is richer than that of a general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to keep the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A2. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the passage detecting means in the game machine A2 corresponds to the first entrance opening switch provided in the first entrance 64. Further, in the above embodiment, the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A2 corresponds to the variable display start process (see FIG. 14) and the decorative symbol variable display process (see FIG. 21) in S2308.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a passage detecting means provided at a predetermined position for detecting passage of the game medium, and a player from the normal state based on the fact that the game medium is detected by the passage detecting means. A profit lottery means for lottery whether or not to generate an advantageous state advantageous to the gaming machine A3, which is a condition based on at least one lottery result performed by the profit lottery means.

According to the gaming machine A3, whether or not the advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is generated based on the fact that the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location. The lottery is carried out by the profit lottery means. At this time, the condition based on the result of the lottery performed at least once by the profit lottery means is the suggestion condition that triggers the suggestion by the value presenting means or the notification.

Therefore, since the kind of special value to be given next time will be suggested or notified according to the lottery result, it will be given next time to the game performance by the lottery provided by the conventional general gaming machine. A new game property is added by suggesting or informing the type of special value that is given, and as a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Generally, when a result of not generating an advantageous state is frequently obtained (for example, a predetermined number of consecutive times or a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period), the player tends to lose interest in the game. .. Here, for example, by setting as a suggestion condition that the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more, the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at the predetermined frequency or more and the interest of the game is obtained. Even if the player loses interest in the game, by suggesting or notifying the type of special value to be given next time, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of special value. Can be maintained.

Alternatively, by setting that the result of generating the advantageous state is obtained as the suggestion condition, the special value is suggested or informed at the same time as the occurrence of the advantageous state, whereby a conventional general gaming machine is provided. A new game playability is added to the game playability provided by the lottery, the interest of the game is improved, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a long time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first ball entrance switch provided in the first ball entrance 64 corresponds to the passage detecting means in the gaming machine A3. Further, in the above embodiment, the starting winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A3.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A3 is provided with a passage detecting unit which is provided at a predetermined position and detects passage of the game medium, and is usually based on the fact that the passage detecting unit detects the game medium. Providing profit lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the suggestion condition is that the result of not generating the advantageous state by the profit lottery means is obtained a predetermined number of times in a row Gaming machine A4 which is a condition satisfied with.

According to the gaming machine A4, when the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location, based on the detection, an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. The lottery is performed by the profit lottery means. At this time, the presenting means is configured as a condition that is satisfied when the profit lottery means continuously obtains the result of not generating the advantageous state a predetermined number of times.

Generally, a player tends to lose interest in a game when a state in which an advantageous state does not occur continues. However, according to the gaming machine A4, the suggestion condition is satisfied when the advantageous state is not generated in the lottery by the profit lottery means for a predetermined number of times in succession, and as a result, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is given. As a result, the range of game playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the passage detecting means in the game machine A4 corresponds to the first entrance opening switch provided in the first entrance 64. Further, in the above embodiment, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A4.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using the identification information, and a dynamic selection mode of the dynamic display using the identification information displayed by the display device The dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode selection means, the passage detection means provided at a predetermined location for detecting the passage of the game medium, and the game medium being detected by the passage detection means. Dynamic display starting means for starting the dynamic display of the mode set by the selecting means, and following the dynamic display started by the dynamic display starting means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination. And an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, wherein the value presenting means is provided with a special value next by the special value providing means after the suggestion condition is satisfied. In the meantime, when the mode for denying the generation of the advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means, the special value given next time by the special value giving means A combination of the identification information that includes identification information corresponding to the type and is configured as a specific combination different from the combination that causes the advantageous state generation means to generate the advantageous state on the display device. A game machine A5 that suggests or informs the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A5, when the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location, the dynamic display starting means dynamically uses the identification information based on the detection. The display is started on the display device. At this time, the dynamic display started by the dynamic display start means is the dynamic display of the set mode set by the dynamic display mode selection means. After that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the advantageous state generating means generates an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

When the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value presenting means suggests or informs the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means. Here, according to the gaming machine A5, a mode in which the generation of the advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means is denied is performed between the satisfaction of the suggestion condition and the next addition of the special value by the special value provision means. When selected by the special display mode selecting means, at that time, a combination including identification information corresponding to the type of special value to be added next by the special value adding means, and generating an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating means. The combination of identification information configured as a different specific combination is stopped and displayed on the display device, whereby the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the special value giving means.

In general, the dynamic display of the mode in which the occurrence of the advantageous state is denied cannot be expected to occur in the advantageous state. Therefore, if the dynamic display of such a mode continues, the player tends to lose interest in the game. It is in. However, according to the gaming machine A5, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, until the special value is given next by the special value giving means, the stop display is displayed next to the dynamic display of the mode in which the occurrence of the advantageous state is denied Since the type of special value to be given is suggested or notified, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, the interest in the game is extended over a long period of time. It allows people to maintain.

In addition, as a stop display for indicating or notifying the type of special value to be given next time, it is not a combination for generating an advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means, Since a specific combination including the corresponding identification information is displayed, the appearance of a specific stop indication can make the player expect to acquire a special value. Allows the player to maintain over.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A5. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first ball entrance switch provided in the first ball entrance 64 corresponds to the passage detecting means in the gaming machine A5. Further, in the above embodiment, as the dynamic display mode selection means in the gaming machine A5, the variation start process (see FIG. 14) and the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 23) correspond. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S2308 of the decorative symbol variable display processing (see FIG. 21) corresponds to the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A5.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the special value giving means gives the next time. And a setting means for setting a dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value, the value presenting means, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode set by the setting means. A gaming machine A6 that dynamically indicates on the display device to suggest or inform the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A6, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value presenting means sets the setting means to set the dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means. The value presenting means suggests or reports the type of special value to be given next time by the special value giving means. Here, according to the gaming machine A6, by dynamically displaying the dynamic display mode set by the setting means on the display device, the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the special value giving means. It

Therefore, since the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is performed using the dynamic display, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general gaming machine, and as a result, the game is played. It enables the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A6. Further, in the above embodiment, the setting means in the gaming machine A6 corresponds to the processing of S2605 in the variation effect setting processing (see FIG. 23).

In the gaming machine A6, when the display device dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined combination and then stops, the game machine A6 is provided with an advantageous state generation unit that generates an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the combination of the identification information including the identification information corresponding to the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means and causing the advantageous state to be generated by the advantageous state generating means, the setting means A gaming machine A7 in which an expected mode in which a part of the game is stopped during the dynamic display is set as a dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value giving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, the dynamic display mode set by the setting means as the dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value to be given next by the special value giving means is an expected mode in which an advantageous state is expected to occur. Since it is configured by, the range of playability is increased as compared with the conventional general game machine, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the special value assigned by the special value assigning means is a gaming machine A8 configured in the form of a second medium having the special value.

According to the gaming machine A8, since the special value provided by the special value providing means is configured in the form of the second medium having the special value, the special value can be easily handled. In the above embodiment, the bonus coin C corresponds to the second medium in the gaming machine A8.

In the gaming machine A8, a storage unit that stores the plurality of second media regardless of the type of special value of each second medium, and a standby unit that is separated from the storage unit and waits for the second medium. The special value imparting means includes a transfer means for transferring the second medium stored in the storage means from the storage means to the standby means, and the second means transferred by the transfer means to the standby means. A gaming machine A9 configured to include a payout executing means for paying out a medium, wherein the value determining means determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means.

According to the gaming machine A9, the second medium having the special value is stored in the storage means, and from the storage means to the standby means separated from the storage means, the transfer means (one of the special value adding means). Department). The second medium transferred to the standby means is kept on standby by the standby means until it is paid out by the payout execution means (a part of the special value giving means). Then, the value discriminating unit discriminates the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby unit.

Here, the storage means stores a plurality of (a plurality of, a plurality of) second media irrespective of the type of special value of each second medium, and therefore an administrator who manages the second media (For example, a manager of a hall in which a gaming machine that can dispense the second medium is installed), when the plurality of second mediums are put into the storing means and stored, each second medium is classified as a special value type. It is not necessary to sort according to the above, and the load on the management of the second medium can be suppressed.

Further, since the standby unit is provided at a position separated from the storage unit, it is possible to prevent the type of special value from being discriminated by the value discriminating unit with respect to the second medium stored in the storage unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to surely determine the special value of the second medium to be paid out at least next time while waiting by the waiting means, and to definitely indicate the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time after the condition for suggesting is satisfied. Or, it can be notified.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 460 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine A9. In the above embodiment, the standby member 470 corresponds to the standby means in the gaming machine A9. Further, in the above embodiment, the transfer means in the gaming machine A9 corresponds to the branch process to Yes in S2908 in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) and the processes in S2909 to S2913. Further, in the above embodiment, the payout executing means in the gaming machine A9 corresponds to the branch process to Yes in S2901 in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) and the processes in S2902 to S2907.

In the gaming machine A9, the standby means is a configuration in which the one second medium is in a standby state.

According to the gaming machine A10, since the standby means is configured to wait for the second medium, the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated by the value discriminating means. The special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with a wireless reading unit that reads information by wireless communication using a transmission medium, and the second medium is configured to include a storage unit that stores information as a special value of the second medium. The value discriminating means reads the information as the special value stored in the storage means of the second medium located in the standby means by the wireless reading means, and based on the read information as the special value. The type of special value possessed by the second medium located in the standby means, and the storage means is made of a material that prevents transmission of the transmission medium to the second medium stored therein. A gaming machine A11 configured.

According to the gaming machine A11, the special value type is discriminated by the value discriminating means, and for the second medium located in the standby means, the information as the special value stored in the storage means of the second medium is transmitted as the transmission medium. Is read by a wireless reading means by wireless communication using, and is performed based on the read information.

Here, since the storage means is made of a material that prevents the transmission medium from being transmitted to the second medium stored therein, the determination of the type of the special value by the value determination means is performed by the storage means. It is possible to effectively prevent the operation from being performed on the second medium stored in.

Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the wireless reading means in the gaming machine A11. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag 602 (more specifically, a non-rewritable memory that can store information provided in the IC tag 602 in a nonvolatile manner) is used as a storage unit in the gaming machine A11. Applicable

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with an optical detecting means for optically detecting the information that the object has, and the second medium is information corresponding to the information as the special value that the second medium has and the optical information. The media discriminator, the media discriminator including the medium information, which is information that can be physically detected, and the value discriminating unit detects the medium information of the second medium located in the standby unit by the optical detecting unit and is detected. A gaming machine A12 that determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means based on the medium information.

According to the gaming machine A12, the special value type is discriminated by the value discriminating means by detecting the medium information of the second medium located in the standby means by an optical detecting means (for example, an optical sensor or a bar code reader). Then, it is performed based on the detected medium information. Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

The gaming machine A9 or A10 is provided with a shape recognition means for recognizing the shape of the object, and the second medium is configured to have a shape corresponding to information as a special value of the second medium. The value determining means recognizes the shape of the second medium located in the standby means by the shape recognizing means, and determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means based on the recognized shape. Playing machine A13.

According to the gaming machine A13, the type of the special value is discriminated by the value discriminating means by determining the shape of the second medium located in the standby means by using the shape recognizing means (for example, the shape obtained by using the imaged data (image) of the object). It is performed based on the recognized shape recognized by the recognition device or the like). Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely discriminated, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be surely suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. ..

In the gaming machine A8, a plurality of storage means for storing the second medium for each type of special value of the second medium are provided, and the special value giving means selects the second from the plurality of storage means. The value discriminating means is provided with a selecting means for selecting one storage means for paying out the medium, and a payout executing means for paying out the second medium stored in the storage means selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine A14 that determines the type of the special value before being given by the special value giving means, based on the selection of the storage means by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine A14, a plurality of storage means are provided for each type of special value possessed by the second medium, and one storage medium corresponding to the second medium paid out by the selection means (a part of the special value giving means) is provided. The storage means is selected, and the second medium stored in the selected storage means is dispensed by the dispensing execution means.

Here, the type of special value is discriminated by the value discriminating unit based on the selection of the storage unit by the selecting unit. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time, without requiring a unit for detecting the identification information of each second medium.

In any of the gaming machines A8 to A14, the value of detecting the special value of the second medium with respect to the medium arranging means capable of removably arranging the second medium and the second medium arranged in the arranging means. A gaming machine A15 provided with a detecting means and a special effect executing means for performing a special effect according to the special value of the second medium detected by the value detecting means during a game using the game medium.

According to the gaming machine A15, a medium arranging unit capable of removably arranging the second medium is provided, and with respect to the second medium arranged in the medium arranging unit, the special value possessed by the second medium is the value detecting unit. The special effect corresponding to the detected special value is performed by the special effect executing means during the game using the game medium.

Therefore, the player can have a high interest in the game due to the new playability that can be experienced by using the second medium. Not only that, the interest of the player is also directed toward obtaining the second medium in which a new playability can be experienced, and in that respect, the playability is improved. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving portion 300a) corresponds to the medium mounting means in the gaming machine A15. Further, in the above embodiment, the receiving IC tag reader 302 corresponds to the value detecting means in the gaming machine A15. Further, in the above embodiment, as special effect executing means in the gaming machine A15, the receiving section coin detection processing (see FIG. 30), the variation effect setting processing (see FIG. 24) in S2607, and the stop symbol setting processing (see FIG. The processing of S2704 in (see 25) is applicable.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A15, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means for storing a plurality of the special value media, and a special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means. When the value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time and the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time are detected by the value content detecting means In addition, the game machine B1 is provided with confusion prevention means for preventing confusion with the contents of the special value of the other special value medium stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, as for the special value medium, among the plurality of special value media stored in the storage unit, the content of the special value of one special value medium to be provided next time by the special value medium providing unit is obtained by the value content detecting unit. To be detected.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the detected special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium. You can Alternatively, before giving the special value medium, by suggesting the detected special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be given next time) to the player according to the content of the detected special value. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B1, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, the detected content can be used to add value to the game. .. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, according to the gaming machine B1, when the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the one special value medium given next time, another special value medium stored in the storing means Confusion with the content of the special value possessed is prevented by the confusion prevention means.

Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the content of the special value possessed by the one special value medium given next time by the value content detecting means, the special value possessed by the other special value medium stored in the storing means. It is possible to prevent the contents of the item from being confused and detected. In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22) corresponds to the special value medium giving means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 or the like corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B1. Further, in the above embodiment, the privilege coin payout device 450 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B1. In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B1.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the confusion preventing means in the gaming machine B1, the configuration and operation of the privilege card discharging device 1450 shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and S4205 to S4207, S4212 in the card discharging process (see FIG. 49). This corresponds to the process of S4215. Further, in the above embodiment, as the transfer means in the gaming machine B1, the configuration and operation of the privilege coin payout device 450 shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 and the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) are performed. Applicable As the confusion prevention means in the gaming machine B1, for example, the configuration and arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, CA2 shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 66, and the blocking member 2001 (see FIG. 65(a)). Also, a blocking member 2002 (see FIG. 65(b)) is included.

In the gaming machine B1, the confusion prevention means adds one special value medium to the other special value medium next time so that the value content detecting means cannot detect the special value content of the other special value medium. A game machine B2, characterized in that the game machine B2 is configured to include a blocking means inserted between the value medium and the value medium.

According to the gaming machine B2, a blocking means (a part of confusion prevention means) is provided between one special value medium given next time by the special value medium giving means and another special value medium stored in the storage means. By being inserted, the special value content of another special value medium is configured so that it cannot be detected by the value content detecting means. Therefore, the special value content of one special value medium assigned next time is It can be suitably detected.

The blocking means in the gaming machine B2 includes, for example, a blocking member 2001 (see FIG. 65(a)) and a blocking member 2002 (see FIG. 65(b)).

In the gaming machine B1, the storage means has an initial position in which the plurality of special value mediums are stored, and a confirmation position provided apart from the initial position, and the confusion prevention means is Of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position in the storage means, a transfer means for transferring one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium adding means from the initial position to the confirmation position. B3, wherein the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the special value medium located at the confirmation position.

According to the gaming machine B3, a plurality of special value media are stored at the initial position in the storage means, and the special value medium providing means next gives the special value medium among the plurality of special value media located at the initial position. The one special value medium to be transferred is transferred by the transfer means (a part of the confusion prevention means) to the confirmation position provided in the storage means so as to be separated from the initial position, and is applied next at the confirmation position. The content of the special value of one special value medium is detected by the value content detecting means.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored, for example, the special value medium is given next time. Even if the special value content of a special value medium is detected using a transmission medium such as an electromagnetic wave, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to confusion with the special value content of another special value medium. It is possible.

By the way, for example, when a light transmissive area is provided in a predetermined area of each special value medium and a pattern indicating the content of the special value is formed in the light transmissive area, the light transmissive area in which the pattern is formed is If the light transmissive areas of each special value medium are adjacent to each other at the position, even if an attempt is made to detect the pattern of the light transmissive areas at the initial position, it will be detected as a pattern in which the special values of adjacent special value media are mixed. As a result, it becomes difficult to detect only the contents of the special value possessed by the one special value medium added next time.

Such a problem is that each special value medium is arranged (lever arrangement) so that the light transmissive areas of the adjacent special value media are on alternate sides, and the pattern of the light transmissive areas located on each side can be detected respectively. It is possible to solve the problem by arranging various detecting means at two places, but a plurality of detecting means (two places in this case) are required, which increases the manufacturing cost and one of the two detecting means. The control for detecting the pattern of the light transmissive region also becomes complicated. Furthermore, the administrator who manages the special value medium (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine to which the special value medium can be added) or the manufacturer of the special value medium is stored in the storage means. In addition, it is necessary to rearrange the directions of the special value media so that the special value media are in the lever arrangement, and the handling of the special value media is heavy.

However, according to the gaming machine B3, the content of the special value of one special value medium given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Even if the special-value mediums are not arranged in a lever shape, it is possible to create a state in which the light-transmissive areas of the special-value mediums to be given next do not overlap the light-transmissive areas of the adjacent special-value mediums. Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be detected by the one detecting unit, and the load on the handling of the special value medium can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the gaming machine B3, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Therefore, it is possible to preferably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the above embodiment, the transfer means in the gaming machine B3 corresponds to the processing of S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) corresponds to the transfer means in the gaming machine B3.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means having an initial position where a plurality of the special value media are stored, and a confirmation position provided apart from the initial position; Of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position, a transfer unit that transfers one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium adding unit from the initial position to the confirmation position, and A game machine B4 provided with a value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the positioned special value medium.

According to the gaming machine B4, in the game using the game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, a plurality of special value media are stored at the initial position in the storage means, and one of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position is given next by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium is transferred by the transfer means to a confirmation position provided in the storage means so as to be separated from the initial position, and at the confirmation position, the contents of the special value of one special value medium given next time It is detected by the value content detecting means.

Therefore, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the detected special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium. You can Alternatively, before giving the special value medium, by suggesting the detected special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be given next time) to the player according to the content of the detected special value. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B4, since the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be added next time is detected, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the detected content. .. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. For example, even when the special value content of the special value medium to be given next time is detected using a transmission medium such as an electromagnetic wave, it is confused with the special value content of another special value medium. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to.

By the way, for example, when a light transmissive area is provided in a predetermined area of each special value medium and a pattern indicating the content of the special value is formed in the light transmissive area, the light transmissive area in which the pattern is formed is If the light transmissive areas of each special value medium are adjacent to each other at the position, even if an attempt is made to detect the pattern of the light transmissive areas at the initial position, it will be detected as a pattern in which the special values of adjacent special value media are mixed. As a result, it becomes difficult to detect only the contents of the special value possessed by the one special value medium added next time.

Such a problem is that each special value medium is arranged (lever arrangement) so that the light transmissive areas of the adjacent special value media are on alternate sides, and the pattern of the light transmissive areas located on each side can be detected respectively. It is possible to solve the problem by arranging various detecting means at two places, but a plurality of detecting means (two places in this case) are required, which increases the manufacturing cost and one of the two detecting means. The control for detecting the pattern of the light transmissive region also becomes complicated. Furthermore, the administrator who manages the special value medium (for example, the manager of the hall in which the gaming machine to which the special value medium can be added) or the manufacturer of the special value medium is stored in the storage means. In addition, it is necessary to rearrange the directions of the special value media so that the special value media are in the lever arrangement, and the handling of the special value media is heavy.

However, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Even if the special-value mediums are not arranged in a lever shape, it is possible to create a state in which the light-transmissive areas of the special-value mediums to be given next do not overlap the light-transmissive areas of the adjacent special-value mediums. Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be detected by the one detecting unit, and the load on the handling of the special value medium can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B4, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Therefore, it is possible to preferably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B4, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the special value medium adding means in the gaming machine B4 corresponds to the process of S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B4. Further, in the above embodiment, the privilege coin payout device 450 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine B4.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the transfer means in the gaming machine B4, the processes of S4205 to S4207 and S4212 to S4215 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the processing of S2908 to S2913 in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) corresponds to the transfer means in the gaming machine B4.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B4. In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine B4.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the special value medium is a medium having a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value, The value content detecting means is configured to be able to read the pattern, and on the opposite side of the light transmissive region of the special value medium located at the confirmation position from the value content detecting means, a reading assistance surface. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B5, the special value medium has a light non-transmissive region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value. By reading the pattern formed in the area by the value content detecting means, the content of the special value is detected.

Here, since the reading auxiliary surface is arranged on the side opposite to the value content detecting means of the light transmissive area in the special value medium located at the confirmation position, the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is detected as the value content detection. When reading by a means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

It should be noted that the reading assisting surface may be a groundless surface or the like. Here, when the reading assistance surface is configured as a groundless surface, it is preferable that the color is a groundless surface that does not hinder the reading of the pattern. For example, when the color of the pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or dark blue), the reading assistance surface has a white or light color (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue). It is preferable to use the groundless surface as the reading assistance surface. Alternatively, when the color of the pattern is white or a light color, it is preferable that the read assisting surface is black or dark groundless ground.

In the gaming machine B5, one surface of the light opaque area of the special value medium is configured as the reading assistance surface, and the reading assistance surface of the plurality of special value media stored at the initial position is the value. A gaming machine B6, wherein the gaming machine B6 is superposed so as to face the content detecting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, the plurality of special value mediums stored in the initial position are superposed with the reading auxiliary surface, which is a light opaque area, facing toward the value content detecting means (overlapped). Exist). Therefore, the reading assistance surface of the special value medium located at the initial position is provided on the side opposite to the value content detecting means of the light transmissive region of the special value medium located at the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium to be added next time). Can be located.

Therefore, when reading the pattern formed in the light transmissive region by the value content detecting means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, one surface of the light opaque region of the special value medium is configured as the reading auxiliary surface, and the plurality of special value media stored in the initial position have the reading auxiliary surface. The special value medium is overlapped so as to face the value content detecting means, and the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position is a direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive region. And a length shorter than a length in a direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light non-transmission region on the confirmation position side of the light transmission region. B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, the plurality of special value mediums stored in the initial position are superposed with the reading assisting surface, which is a light opaque area, facing the value content detecting means. Further, the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position of the special value medium is longer than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive region, and the light opaque region on the confirmation position side of the light transmissive region. Is shorter than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position.

Therefore, when the special value medium to be added next time is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position, the value content of the light transmissive region in the special value medium located at the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium to be added next time) On the opposite side to the detecting means, the reading assistance surface of the special value medium located at the initial position is located.

Therefore, when reading the pattern formed in the light transmissive region by the value content detecting means, the pattern can be surely read. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

Further, since the light opaque area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as the background when the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is read by the value content detecting means, the space between the initial position and the confirmation position is The distance can be suppressed to a relatively short distance. As a result, the entire device for applying the special value medium can be configured in a space-saving manner.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the light transmissive region is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the special value medium.

According to the gaming machine B8, the light transmissive region in the special value medium is formed so as to be deflected toward the peripheral side of the special value medium, so that the light non-transmissive region can be widened. Therefore, when the light opaque area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as a background when the pattern formed in the light transmissive area is read by the value content detecting means, the light of the adjacent special value medium is used. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value content of one special value medium to be added next time because the transparent areas overlap each other.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, arrangement means capable of arranging the plurality of special value media, and pattern reading means for reading a pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means And a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display is selected based on the pattern read by the pattern reading means. A gaming machine B9, comprising: a display mode selection means.

According to the gaming machine B9, when the pattern of the light transmissive area in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means, it is displayed on the display device based on the read pattern. The display mode of the static display and/or the stop display is selected by the display selection means.

Therefore, by arranging a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player dynamically displays and/or stops the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed on the display device. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B9. Further, in the above embodiment, the card reader 1303 for receiving part corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B9. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B9. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B9, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In the gaming machine B9, the display mode selection means sets one dynamic display and/or one to one set of a combination of predetermined special value media among the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Alternatively, the game machine B10 is characterized in that a display mode of the stop display is selected.

According to the gaming machine B10, if there is one set consisting of a combination of predetermined special value media among the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means, one dynamic display and The display mode of the stop display is set by the display mode selection means.

Therefore, by combining a plurality of special value media, one display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display can be made to appear as a privilege, so in a game in which the special value medium is provided by the establishment of the special value providing condition. , It is possible to add value to the acquisition of a plurality of special value media. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a long time.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, an installation means capable of disposing one or more special value media, and a pattern of the light transmissive region in the one special value medium arranged in the disposition means, or Pattern reading means for reading a pattern formed by a combination of patterns of the light transmissive regions in the plurality of special value media, and analysis means for analyzing the contents of the game value included in the pattern read by the pattern reading means And a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the contents of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means. A gaming machine B11 provided with a display mode selection means for selecting.

According to the gaming machine B11, when one or a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one special value medium arranged in the arranging means, or a plurality of special values are arranged. The pattern formed by the combination of the patterns of the light transmissive regions on the medium is read by the pattern reading means, and the content of the game value contained in the read pattern is analyzed by the analyzing means. Then, the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selecting means based on the content of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means.

Therefore, by arranging the special value medium acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player displays on the display device a dynamic display and/or a stop display of a display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game.

In particular, when a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement means, after the contents of the game value included in the pattern formed by the combination of the patterns of the light transmissive regions in the plurality of special value media are analyzed. The display selection means selects the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device.

Therefore, it is possible to display the dynamic display and/or the stop display in the display mode on the display device according to the number of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Therefore, the player's interest is also directed toward obtaining a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading unit in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the analyzing means in the gaming machine B11 corresponds to the processing of S3605 to S3612 in the receiving card reading processing (see FIG. 54).

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B11, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In any of the gaming machines B9 to B11, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern irrespective of the content of the game value, and the special value medium. The common pattern formed in the light transmissive region is formed at a position where the reading result by the pattern reading unit differs depending on which side of the special value medium faces the pattern reading unit. A gaming machine B12 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B12, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern regardless of the content of the game value, and the common pattern is used by the pattern reading means. On the other hand, the reading result by the pattern reading means is formed at different positions depending on which side of the special value medium is turned.

Therefore, it is possible to clearly determine the side of the special value medium that should be properly oriented with respect to the pattern reading unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a result different from the result that should be originally produced from occurring by arranging the face opposite to the face to be legally directed to the pattern reading means, and it is possible to maintain fairness of each player. ..

In any of the gaming machines B9 to B12, the arranging means has a slot for inserting one or a plurality of the special value media, and the special value that has been inserted after the special value medium has been inserted into the slot. In order to arrange the media in alignment, there is provided an alignment means for pressing the special value media loaded into the input port from one surface side, and the alignment means corresponds to a pattern reading part in the pattern reading means. The pressing surface is provided at a position to press the special-value medium, and the pressing surface is configured to have a size to cover at least a pattern reading portion of the pattern reading unit and to read the pattern. A gaming machine B13, characterized in that a region covering the portion is configured as at least a reading assistance surface.

According to the gaming machine B13, after one or a plurality of special value media are loaded into the loading slot, the special value media loaded into the loading slot are pressed from one side by the aligning means, whereby the special value medium is loaded. It is arranged in an aligned state. At this time, the special value medium is aligned by the aligning means by pressing by the pressing surface provided at the position corresponding to the pattern reading portion in the pattern reading means.

Here, since the pressing surface is configured to have a size that covers at least the pattern reading portion of the pattern reading means, and the region that covers the pattern reading portion is configured at least as a reading assistance surface, the pressing surface is disposed in the arranging means. Further, it is possible to reliably read the pattern of the light transmissive region in one or more special value media, and to display the dynamic display and/or the stop display of the display mode according to the read pattern on the display device. ..

In the above embodiment, the opening of the holder portion 1302a corresponds to the insertion port of the gaming machine B13. Further, in the above embodiment, the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305 correspond to the aligning means in the gaming machine B13.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B13, the special value medium giving means exposes the special value medium located at the confirmation position to the outside of the gaming machine by the transferring means. A gaming machine B14, wherein the special value medium is added by transferring the special value medium to a predetermined discharge position.

According to the gaming machine B14, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to the predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, Since it can be realized by the common transfer means, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B13, the transfer means includes one drive means (for example, a transfer motor 1451c) for moving the position of the special value medium, and the initial position of the special game value medium by the drive means. The first transfer of the special value medium from the to the confirmation position is performed to a position where the special value medium is not exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, and after the transfer of 1, the driving means is used. The game machine B15, wherein the second transfer of the special value medium is performed to a predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B15, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to the predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the game machine, Since it can be realized by one driving means, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost. Further, since the special value medium located at the initial position can be transferred to the confirmation position and the discharge position by one driving means, the special value medium is transferred from the initial position to the discharge position via the confirmation position. It is possible to prevent the mechanism from becoming complicated.

In a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a light opaque area and a light transmissive area are provided when a predetermined special value addition condition is satisfied. And a special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium giving means. Arrangement means capable of arranging a plurality of special value media, pattern reading means for reading a pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, dynamic display using identification information, and A display device capable of displaying a stop display, and a display mode selecting means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the pattern detected by the pattern reading means. Characteristic game machine B16.

According to the gaming machine B16, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value.

Here, when a plurality of special value mediums are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means, and the read pattern is formed. Based on this, the display selecting means selects the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device.

Therefore, by arranging a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player dynamically displays and/or stops the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed on the display device. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B16, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B16. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading unit in the gaming machine B16. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B16. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B16, S2623 in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

In a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a light opaque area and a light transmissive area are provided when a predetermined special value addition condition is satisfied. And a special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium giving means. Arrangement means capable of arranging one or more special value media, pattern reading means for reading the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or more special value media arranged in the arrangement means, and identification information are used. A display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display, analysis means for analyzing the contents of the game value included in the pattern detected by the pattern reading means, and contents of the game value analyzed by the analysis means And a display mode selection means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B17, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value.

Here, when one or a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arranging means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or a plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means is read by the pattern reading means and read. The content of the game value included in the created pattern is analyzed by the analysis means. Then, the display mode of the dynamic display and/or the stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selecting means based on the content of the game value analyzed by the analyzing means.

Therefore, by arranging the special value medium acquired in advance in the arranging means, the player displays on the display device a dynamic display and/or a stop display of the display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged in the arranging means. Can be displayed. As a result, the playability is improved and the player can have a high interest in the game. Further, the player's interest is also directed toward acquiring a special value medium that leads to improvement in playability. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine B17, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arranging means in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above embodiment, the card reader 1303 for receiving part corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the analyzing means in the gaming machine B17 corresponds to the processing of S3605 to S3612 in the receiving card reading processing (see FIG. 54).

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine B17. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the display mode selection means in the gaming machine B17, S2623 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 46), S2626 to S2631 processes, and S4002 to S4006 in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds to this.

Any of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine B19 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine B20 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value of the special value medium given next by the special value medium giving means, and value content detecting means The game machine C1 is provided with condition changing means for changing the special value giving condition for the special value medium to be given next time in accordance with the content of the special value detected by.

According to the gaming machine C1, in the game using the game medium, when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out as the game value, and when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value is different from the game value. The special value is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time is detected by the value content detecting means, and the special value giving condition for the special value medium to be given next time is detected by the condition changing means. It is changed according to the content of the special value detected by the means.

Therefore, since the frequency of giving the special value medium changes according to the content of the special value, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine C1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 61) and the step S4406 in the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) are performed. The processing of S4410 and the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49) correspond to this.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine C1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the condition changing means in the gaming machine C1, the processing of S4104 and S4107 in the grant condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 61), the step S4404 in the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62), The process of S4407 corresponds to this.

In the gaming machine C1, the condition changing means changes the degree of difficulty of establishing the special value giving condition according to the content of the special value.

According to the gaming machine C2, the condition changing means changes the degree of difficulty of establishing the special value giving condition in accordance with the content of the special value, so that the player changes the content of the special value held by each special value medium. It can be grasped sensuously.

It is generally recognized that a special value medium having a high degree of difficulty in establishing a special value giving condition and hard to obtain by a player has a high rarity and a high value. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the special value medium due to the change to the special value giving condition with a relatively high difficulty level, it is difficult for the player to obtain the special value medium. You can continue playing while expecting to obtain a special value that is highly valuable and valuable. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a counting means for counting the number of times that a predetermined state occurs is provided, the special value giving condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means, and the condition changing means is According to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, the number of times counted by the counting means necessary for satisfying the special value giving condition is changed. Machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value giving condition, that is, the predetermined state is The number of occurrences is changed by the condition changing means. Therefore, since it is possible to change the frequency of giving the special value medium, the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the player can keep his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the probability variation big hit counter 223v or the out-reach counter 223x corresponds to the counting means in the gaming machine C3.

In the gaming machine C3, the counting means counts the number of occurrences of a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, the special value giving condition is based on the occurrence of a common gaming state, so that the player sensibly grasps the ease or difficulty of acquiring the special value medium (special value). can do. Therefore, it is possible to fuel the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium and create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the second counting means for counting the number of times that a state different from the state whose number is counted by the counting means occurs, and the special value giving condition are counted by the counting means. The selection means for selecting whether to set the condition according to the number of times to be counted or the condition according to the number of times to be counted by the second counting means, and the special value giving condition to the conditions selected by the selection means. A second condition changing means for changing the condition, wherein the condition changing means changes the second condition changing means to a condition according to the number of times the special value giving condition is counted by the counting means. Is, in accordance with the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, changes the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value giving condition, on the other hand, When the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing unit to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting unit, the special value detected by the value content detecting unit A gaming machine C5, wherein the number of times counted by the second counting means, which is required to satisfy the special value giving condition, is changed according to the content.

According to the gaming machine C5, the special value giving condition is set to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state has occurred) or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, , The number of times that a state different from the state counted by the counting means occurs) is selected by the selecting means, the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing means by the selecting means. It will be changed to the selected conditions.

At this time, when the special value giving condition is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means, according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, The condition changing means changes the number of times counted by the counting means necessary to satisfy the special value giving condition. On the other hand, when the special value provision condition is changed by the second condition changing unit to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting unit, the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting unit. Accordingly, the condition changing unit changes the number of times counted by the second counting unit, which is required to satisfy the special value giving condition.

Therefore, a variety of special value giving conditions for obtaining the special value medium (special value) are abundant, and it is possible to create a situation in which the player does not feel tired of playing the game. Here, by allowing the selection by the selection means to be performed based on the player's intention (for example, an input instructing which one to select), the player can obtain a special result reflecting his own intention. Value-adding conditions can be selected. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player's consciousness easy to obtain the special value medium, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the above embodiment, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v corresponds to the counting means in the gaming machine C4, and the detach reach counter 223x corresponds to the second counting means in the gaming machine C4.

Further, in the above embodiment, the discharge mode changing process (see FIG. 59) corresponds to the selecting means in the gaming machine C4. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S4110 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIG. 61) corresponds to the second condition changing means in the gaming machine C4.

In the gaming machine C5, the counting means and the second counting means hold the number of times counted before the condition is changed by the second condition changing means. A gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means, the number of times counted by the counting means or the second counting means before that is held, so that Even when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means and then the condition is returned, it is possible to count from the continuation before the change.

Therefore, the special value provision condition is appropriately set to a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting unit (that is, the number of times a certain state occurs), or the number of times counted by the second counting unit (that is, the number counted by the counting unit). It is possible to make conditions according to the number of times that a state different from the state that occurs is generated), so there are abundant changes in the special value giving conditions for obtaining the special value medium (special value), and it is hard to feel bored with the game. Can create situations.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, an input means for inputting an instruction by a player is provided, and the selection means selects a condition when there is an input from the input means. Machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, since the selection by the selection means can be performed based on the intention of the player, the player can select the special value giving condition reflecting his own intention. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player's consciousness easy to obtain the special value medium, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is less likely to get tired of the game.

In the above embodiment, the discharge mode change button 1800 corresponds to the input means in the gaming machine C7.

The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine C9 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine C10 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, arrangement means for arranging a plurality of the special value media, and the special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means Detecting means for detecting the content of the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time based on the content of the information part detected by the detecting means And a value content acquisition unit for acquiring the value content, wherein the arranging unit is arranged so that the information section formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not overlap with the information section of the other special value medium. A gaming machine D1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D1, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied in a game using a game medium, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the special value medium is a plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, the content of the information portion formed in the special value medium to be added next by the special value medium addition means is detected by the detection means, Based on the detected content, the content of special value of the special value medium to be given next time is acquired by the value content acquisition means.

Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be acquired, and thus the added content can be added to the game by using the acquired content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the acquired special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium, so that the progress of the game can be suppressed. You can Alternatively, by suggesting the acquired special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be added next time) to the player according to the content of the acquired special value before the special value medium is added. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D1, since the contents of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time are acquired, it is possible to add value to the game by using the acquired contents. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Here, according to the game machine D1, the information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time is arranged by the arranging means so as not to overlap the information section of the other special value medium. Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information section of the special game medium and the information section of the other special value medium are overlapped, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information section.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine D1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the detection means in the gaming machine D1, and the ejection card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) corresponds to the value content acquisition means in the gaming machine D1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arrangement member 1451 or the like corresponds to the arrangement means in the game machine D1. Here, the arrangement in which "the information part formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not overlap the information part of the other special value medium" in the arrangement means is shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 66. The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1 and CA2 is applicable.

The gaming machine D2, wherein the arranging unit is arranged so that an information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time and an information section of another special value medium do not directly overlap with each other.

According to the gaming machine D2, the arranging unit arranges the information section formed on the special value medium to be given next time so as not to directly overlap the information section of the other special value medium. Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information part of the special game medium and the information part of the other special value medium are directly overlapped with each other, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information part.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as the arrangement of “the information section formed in the special value medium to be given next time does not directly overlap the information section of the other special value medium” in the arrangement means in the gaming machine D2, The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, and CA2 shown in 63, FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is applicable.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, arrangement means for arranging a plurality of the special value media, and the special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media arranged in the arranging means Detecting means for detecting the content of the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time based on the content of the information part detected by the detecting means And a value content acquisition means for acquiring the information content formed in the special value medium to be given next time, at least, so that the information portion is not overlapped with the information portion of the special value medium given one after another. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine D3, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, the special value medium is a plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, the content of the information portion formed in the special value medium to be added next by the special value medium addition means is detected by the detection means, Based on the detected content, the content of special value of the special value medium to be given next time is acquired by the value content acquisition means.

Therefore, the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time can be acquired, and thus the added content can be added to the game by using the acquired content. For example, by changing the special value giving condition of the special value medium according to the content of the acquired special value, it is possible to change the giving frequency of the special value medium, so that the progress of the game can be suppressed. You can

Alternatively, by suggesting the acquired special value (that is, the special value of the special value medium to be added next time) to the player according to the content of the acquired special value before the special value medium is added. The player can continue the game with the expectation that the special value medium may be acquired.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D3, since the contents of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time are acquired, it is possible to add the added value to the game by using the acquired contents. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Here, according to the gaming machine D3, the information unit formed on the special value medium to be given next time is arranged by the arranging unit so as not to overlap with the information portion of the special value medium to be given one after another. ..

Therefore, although it is desired to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be given next time by the detecting means and to acquire only the content of the special value of the special value medium to be given next time, Since the information section of the special game medium to be played overlaps the information section of the special value medium to be given one after another, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value based on the overlapped information section.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine D3, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ejecting card reader 1453 corresponds to the detecting means in the gaming machine D3, and the ejected card confirmation processing (see FIG. 52) corresponds to the value content acquiring means in the gaming machine D3.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arrangement member 1451 or the like corresponds to the arrangement means in the game machine D3. 63, FIG. 64, and FIG. 63, FIG. 64, where the arrangement means "the information part formed on the special value medium to be added next time does not at least overlap the information part of the special value medium to be added one after another" The arrangement of the privilege cards CA, CA1, CA2 shown in FIG. 66 is applicable.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detecting means is provided with a plurality of the information units arranged so as not to overlap each other so as to be respectively detectable.

According to the gaming machine D4, since the detection means is provided with a plurality of information portions which are arranged so as not to overlap in the arrangement means so as to be respectively detectable, it is possible to easily detect each information portion arranged so as not to overlap. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged in the arrangement means in a stacked manner while rotating the information section of each special value medium around an axis in the stacking direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, a plurality of special value media are stacked in the arranging means in a state where the information parts of the respective special value media are rotated around the axis in the stacking direction, so that the space saving is relatively space-efficient. It is possible to arrange a plurality of special value media so that the information sections of the special value media do not often overlap.

In the gaming machine D5, the special value medium is composed of the information section and a non-transparent main body section other than the information section, and the information section is internally provided according to the content of the special value. A gaming machine D6, which is a light-transmissive region in which a pattern is formed, and the detection means is configured to read the pattern.

According to the gaming machine D6, the information part in the special value medium is configured as a light transmissive region in which a pattern corresponding to the content of the special value is formed, and the pattern formed in the light transmissive region is formed. It is read by the detection means. As a result, the contents of the special value can be acquired.

Here, since the special value medium is configured as a light opaque main body except for the information section, a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement means such that the information section of each special value medium is stacked in the axis of the stacking direction. When stacked in a state of being rotated around, the light opaque body of the adjacent special value medium will overlap with one side of the information part (special value medium) of the special value medium, Only the pattern formed in the information portion (light transmissive area) can be detected by the detection means.

Therefore, it is possible to selectively detect the information part of the special value medium to be added next time, and the content of the special value of the special value medium to be added next time is confused with other special value and is erroneously detected. Can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged and stacked in the arrangement means while shifting the information section of each special value medium in a predetermined direction. Gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, the plurality of special value mediums are arranged and stacked in the arrangement means while being shifted in one direction of the information section of each special value medium. Therefore, the information section of each special value medium is arranged. Multiple special value media can be placed so that they do not overlap.

In the gaming machine D7, the special value medium has the information section and a first light transmissive area adjacent to the information section, and the information section internally corresponds to the content of the special value. A second light-transmissive region having a pattern formed thereon, the value content detecting means is configured to read the pattern, and the arranging means includes the plurality of special value media. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that the information section of the special value medium is arranged in a direction from the information section toward the first light-transmitting area while being shifted so as not to overlap each other. ..

According to the gaming machine D8, the information section of the special value medium is configured as a second light transmissive area in which a pattern according to the content of the special value is formed, and the second light transmissive area is formed. The pattern formed on is read by the detection means. As a result, the contents of the special value can be acquired.

Here, since the special value medium has the first light-transmissive region adjacent to the information section in addition to the information section, the information section of the special value medium has the first light transmission area from the information section. When the information parts are stacked in the direction toward the transmissive area while being shifted so that they do not overlap, the information part of each special value medium that is stacked must face through the first light transmissive area. You can

Therefore, it is possible to individually read a plurality of information sections in the special value mediums that are stacked. Here, by providing a plurality of detection means so that each information section can be read, the plurality of information sections can be read collectively without being confused with each other, so the special value medium to be given next time It is possible to more complicatedly provide an added value using a plurality of special value contents including the special value contents owned by.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine D10 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A plate-shaped information medium having a predetermined outer shape, which is used in a game machine for giving a game value when a game is played using a game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a main body having optical transparency And an information section of a specific shape having a light-transmitting property, which is continuously provided at a predetermined position of the main body section, and the information section is formed inside the information section and is readable by the gaming machine. The information medium 1 includes an information pattern indicating the content of information that gives a value different from the game value, and the information pattern is formed as a different pattern according to the content of the information.

According to the information medium 1, the information medium 1 is configured in a plate shape having a predetermined outer shape, and is used in a gaming machine that gives a game value when a game is played using the game medium and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. .. This information medium 1 has a light-impermeable main body and an information section connected to the main body.

In the information medium 1, the information section is formed in a specific shape having light transmissivity, and an information pattern showing the content of information giving a value different from the game value that can be read by a gaming machine is provided inside the information section. Contains.

Therefore, the information pattern can be read by the gaming machine, and the gaming machine that has read the information pattern can read a new value according to the information indicated by the information pattern (for example, by reading the information medium owned by the player. It is possible to present a new effect corresponding to the information medium, to give a notification suggesting the addition before giving the information medium to the player, and the like) to the player.

Here, since the information pattern is formed as a different pattern according to the content of the information, different types of information media can exist according to the difference in the information pattern, and the number of different information patterns can be varied. It is possible to provide the player with various values.

Further, according to the information medium 1, since the information pattern is formed in the light-transmissive information portion, and the information portion is located at the predetermined position of the information medium and has the specific shape, a plurality of information patterns are formed. By overlapping the information media, the information patterns of the information media can be overlapped. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to read the information patterns in a superimposed state. That is, it is possible to collectively cause the gaming machine to read the information that each of the plurality of information media has.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the information possessed by one information medium is read by collectively causing the gaming machine to read the information possessed by each of the plurality of information mediums, the amount of information is increased and the value based on the read information is increased. Offers can be diversified.

For example, in the case where a new value is provided to a player by causing a player to read an information medium owned by the player to bring out a new effect corresponding to the information medium, the number of information media owned is The more there are, the more diversified the effects that appear. Further, by giving a notification suggesting the giving before giving the information medium to the player, when providing a new value to the player, by giving one of the information read collectively, It is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information mediums are attached, and thereby, it is possible to enhance the playability by attaching the information mediums.

As described above, according to the information medium 1, a value different from the game value provided by the information medium becomes an added value, thereby allowing the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time. To do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the privilege cards CA and CA' correspond to the information medium which is the information medium 1. Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the main body portions 1601 and 1601x correspond to the main body portion in the information medium 1. In the above embodiment, the card information areas 1602 and 1602x correspond to the information section of the information medium 1.

In the information medium 1, the one information pattern is a pattern formed by one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area of the information section into a plurality of sections, and with respect to the one information pattern, An information medium 2 in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated.

According to the information medium 2, of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections, one section has one information pattern in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated. ..

Therefore, it is possible to form different information patterns for each partition, and it is possible to increase the number of information media having different information (that is, information patterns) while suppressing an increase in the size of the information medium. By doing so, the added value can be increased.

Further, since a large amount of information can be included in one information pattern, it is possible to diversify the value that one information medium can provide to the player. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability by adding the information medium.

In addition, when a plurality of information media are overlapped and an information pattern is read, it is possible to obtain a combination of various types of information that each information medium has without being confused. Therefore, when a new value is provided to the player by notifying the player before giving the information medium to the player, it is possible to notify any of the information read collectively. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information media are added, and thus it is possible to enhance the game play by adding the information media.

In the information medium 1 or 2, the information section is divided into a plurality of areas, and each area in the plurality of areas is divided into a plurality of sections so that the information pattern can be formed. The information medium 3 is characterized in that the pattern is a pattern formed by using one section for each area among the sections formed in each area.

According to the information medium 3, the information section is divided into a plurality of areas, and each area in the plurality of areas is divided into a plurality of sections so that an information pattern can be formed. Here, one information pattern is formed by using one section for each area among the sections formed in each area.

Therefore, when a plurality of information media are overlapped and an information pattern is read, it is possible to obtain a combination of a plurality of types of information included in each information medium without confusion. Therefore, when a new value is provided to the player by notifying the player before giving the information medium to the player, it is possible to notify any of the information read collectively. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the order in which the information media are added, and thus it is possible to enhance the game play by adding the information media. Further, since one information pattern is formed by using one section from each of the plurality of regions, the number of specific elements of the information pattern is increased, and the accuracy of reading the information pattern can be improved.

In the information medium 3, the information pattern 1 is formed such that the arrangement when viewed from one surface side is different from the arrangement when viewed from the other surface side.

According to the information medium 4, one information pattern is formed so that the arrangement when viewed from one surface side is different from the arrangement when viewed from the other surface side. easy.

The information medium 5 according to any one of the information media 1 to 4, wherein a reading assistance surface for assisting the reading of the information pattern by the gaming machine is provided on one surface side of the main body portion.

According to the information medium 5, since the reading auxiliary surface for assisting the reading of the information pattern by the gaming machine is provided on the one surface side of the main body portion, the information medium is superposed with the reading auxiliary surface in one direction. In this case, by moving one information medium, it becomes possible to cause the gaming machine to read the information pattern with the reading auxiliary surface of the adjacent information medium as the background. Therefore, the information pattern of 1 can be surely read by the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the reading assisting surface may be a groundless surface or the like. Here, when the reading assistance surface is configured as a groundless surface, it is preferable that the color is a groundless surface that does not hinder the reading of the pattern. For example, when the color of the pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or dark blue), the reading assistance surface has a white or light color (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue). It is preferable to use the groundless surface as the reading assistance surface. Alternatively, when the color of the pattern is white or a light color, it is preferable that the read assisting surface is black or dark groundless ground. In the above-described embodiment, the back surface 1601b of the privilege card CA corresponds to the reading assistance surface of the information medium 5.

In a gaming machine for playing a game using a gaming medium and giving a gaming value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is arranged on one side of the information medium in any one of the information media 1 to 5, and from the one side. An amusement machine E1 comprising: a reading unit capable of reading an information pattern of the information medium, and a control unit executing a control based on the information pattern read by the reading unit.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the information pattern of the information medium in any of the information media 1 to 6 is read by the reading means, the control means executes the control based on the read information pattern. Therefore, the value indicated by the information pattern of the information medium can be provided to the player based on the control executed by the game machine, thereby keeping the player interested in the game for a longer period of time. Enable that.

In the above embodiment, the reading card in the gaming machine E1 corresponds to the ejection card reader 1453 and the receiving section card reader 1303. Further, in the above embodiment, as the control means in the gaming machine E1, the variation effect setting means (see FIG. 46), the addition condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and the receiving section card reading processing (FIG. 54). , FIG. 83), suggestive effect setting process (see FIG. 74), stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 75), and the like.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with an informing means for making an informing, and the control means causes the informing means to execute an informing according to the information pattern read by the reading means.

According to the gaming machine E2, since the notification by the notification means is executed by the control means based on the information pattern read by the reading means, it is possible to perform the notification according to the information pattern of each information medium. Therefore, when the information medium is given from the gaming machine according to the situation of the game, the information medium is given to the player by giving a notification according to the information pattern of each information medium (that is, the game value is It is possible to add a sense of expectation to the acquisition of different new value.

Further, since the notification given by the notifying means based on the information pattern read by the reading means is a notification according to the read information pattern, it is possible to notify the player of the value of the information medium, and thereby, It enables the player to maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the notification means in the gaming machine E2.

The gaming machine E1 or 2 is provided with a variable display means for displaying a variable display when the starting condition is satisfied, and the control means changes the specific variable display according to the information pattern read by the reading means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine E3, the variable display is displayed by the variable display means when the starting condition is satisfied. Here, when the information pattern is read by the reading means, a specific variable display according to the information pattern thus read is displayed on the variable display means under the control of the control means.

Therefore, when the information pattern is read by the reading means, a specific variable display different from the normal variable display is displayed, and the player is informed of the value of the information medium by the specific variable display. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time. In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation display means in the gaming machine E3.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a housing means for housing the plurality of information media, and a predetermined number of information media of the plurality of information media housed in the housing means, The separating means for separating from the information part of the information medium and the reading means read the information part of the predetermined number of information media separated from the information part of the other information medium by the separating means. Gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, the information unit of two or more information media among the plurality of information media stored in the storage unit is separated from the information units of other information media by the separation unit. Then, the reading means reads the information parts of the predetermined number of information media separated from the information parts of other information media by the separating means.

Therefore, a plurality of values based on two or more information media can be provided to the player based on the control executed by the gaming machine, so that the value can be provided regardless of the order of giving. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the playability by providing a value different from the game value, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1450xa corresponds to the accommodating means in the gaming machine E4. In the above embodiment, the standby member 1450xb corresponds to the separating means in the gaming machine E4.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the information medium is read by the reading means, a holding means for holding the information medium to be read from a surface opposite to the reading means is provided. Playing machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, when the information medium is read by the reading means, the information medium to be read is pushed by the pressing means from the surface opposite to the reading means, so that the warp of the information medium can be prevented, The accuracy of reading the information pattern can be improved. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the fixing solenoid 1456xf and the plate member 1456xg correspond to the pressing means in the gaming machine E5.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, a storage means for storing a plurality of the special value media, and a special value medium giving means of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means. Separation means for separating two or more special value media including at least one special value medium to be given next time from other special value media, and the above-mentioned 2 separated from the other special value media by the separating means. Value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value possessed by the above special value medium, and notifying means for notifying based on the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value Is given by the special value medium giving means.

Here, a plurality of special value media are stored in the storage means, and among the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means, one special value medium to be added next time by the special value medium addition means is selected. The two or more special value media at least included are separated from the other special value media by the separating means, and the special content of the two or more special value media thus separated is detected by the value content detecting means. ..

Then, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, notification is performed based on the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means. Here, since the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means includes the content of the special value of one special value medium given next time, the notified special value may be acquired next time. You can continue playing with the expectation.

In particular, if the content of the notification by the notification means indicates a special value that the player himself desires to acquire, the player may be able to acquire the special value he or she desires next time. You can continue playing while expecting.

On the other hand, the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means is not only the special value of the one special value medium given next time but also the special value of the special value medium given after that. Therefore, the notification by the notification means does not necessarily indicate the special value of the special value medium to be given next time.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to reliably estimate the type of special value medium to be given next time, and the player is looking forward to confirming the result by actually ejecting the special value medium and playing the game. I can continue.

As described above, according to the gaming machine F1, since the notification is performed based on the contents of the special value of two or more special value media including at least one special value medium to be given next time, the gaming property is improved, It becomes a new added value and makes it possible to keep the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine F1, the “notification condition” that triggers the notification of the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means is the same condition as the “special value granting condition” that triggers the granting of the special value. Alternatively, different conditions may be used. Further, in the gaming machine F1, the form of the special value given by the special value medium giving means may be a tangible form such as a medium or an intangible form such as data.

In the above embodiment, the special value medium adding means in the gaming machine F1 corresponds to the processing of S4124 in the addition condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIG. 77). Further, in the above embodiment, the storage member 1450xa corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine F1. In the above embodiment, the standby member 1450xb corresponds to the separating means in the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above embodiment, the ejection card reader 1453 corresponds to the value content detecting means in the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the notification means, the process of S2425 in the suggestion effect formation confirmation process (see FIG. 71), S2664, S2665, S2667, S2668 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) and the like correspond.

In the gaming machine F1, the classifying means for classifying the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means and the content of the special value classified by the classifying means when the information is notified by the notifying means. The game machine F2 is further provided with a notification content selection means for selecting the content of the special value to be notified by the notification means based on the selection probability according to a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine F2, the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means is classified by the classification means. Then, when performing the notification by the notifying means, the content of the special value to be notified by the notifying means is notified from among the contents of the special value classified by the classifying means based on the selection probability according to a predetermined rule. Selected by the content selection means. As a result, the notification means gives notification based on the content of the special value selected by the notification content selection means.

Therefore, the probability of notification based on the content of each classified special value is changed according to the probability of being selected by the notification content selection means (that is, the selection probability according to a predetermined rule). It is possible to inflate the expectation for acquisition and to improve the playability by notifying the contents of the special value.

Further, in the above embodiment, the classification means in the gaming machine F2 corresponds to the processing of S3424 and S3425 in the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2661 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) corresponds to the notification content selection unit in the gaming machine F2.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the special value medium includes a main body portion having a predetermined outer shape and having a light opacity, and an information portion having a light permeable property, which is continuously provided at a predetermined position in the main body portion. The information section includes an information pattern formed inside the information section and indicating the content of the special value that can be detected by the value content detecting unit, and the separating unit includes the two or more special values. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the information unit of the value medium is separated from the other special value medium.

According to the gaming machine F3, the special value medium is configured in a plate shape having a predetermined outer shape, and has a light-impermeable main body section and an information section connected to the main body section. The information part of the special value medium is formed in a specific shape having light transmissivity, and contains an information pattern indicating the content of the special value that can be detected by the value content detecting means.

Here, of the plurality of special value media stored in the storage means, two or more of the special value media including at least one special value medium to be provided next time by the special value medium providing means are separated by the separating means. It is separated from other special value media in a state where the information parts of two or more special value media are overlapped.

Therefore, since the content value detecting means can collectively detect the contents of the special values respectively possessed by the two or more special value media, it is possible to make a notification based on the contents of the special values respectively possessed by these special value media. it can.

In the above embodiment, the special value medium in the gaming machine F3 corresponds to the privilege card CA'. In the above embodiment, the main body 1601x corresponds to the main body of the special value medium in the gaming machine F3. Further, in the above embodiment, the card information area 1602x corresponds to the information section of the special value medium in the gaming machine F3.

In the gaming machine F3, one of the information patterns is a pattern formed by one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections, and with respect to the one information pattern, A gaming machine F4 characterized in that a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated as one gaming value.

According to the gaming machine F4, one information pattern in which a combination of a plurality of types of information is associated is formed in one of the sections obtained by dividing the predetermined area in the information section into a plurality of sections. ..

Therefore, when a plurality of special value media are read and information patterns are read, it is possible to obtain a combination of each type of information that each special value medium has without being confused. Since it is possible to provide the player with a notification based on the content of the special value regardless of the order of giving, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the order of giving the special value medium. It is possible to improve the game playability.

In the gaming machine F4, a classifying unit that classifies the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting unit, and in the case of performing the notification by the notifying unit, the content of the special value classified by the classifying unit From the above, there is provided notification content selection means for selecting the content of the special value to be notified by the notification means based on a predetermined selection probability, and one of the plurality of types of information is the selection probability. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the information is prescribed information.

According to the gaming machine F5, the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means is classified by the classifying means. Then, when the notification means performs the notification, the notification is performed based on the selection probability defined by the information defining the selection probability included in one information pattern from the contents of the special value classified by the classification means. The content of the special value to be notified by the means is selected by the notification content selection means. As a result, the notification means gives notification based on the content of the special value selected by the notification content selection means.

Therefore, the probability of notification based on the content of each classified special value is the probability of being selected by the notification content selection means (that is, the selection probability defined by the information defining the selection probability included in one information pattern). Since it is changed accordingly, the sense of expectation for the acquisition of the notified special value can be added, and the playability by notifying the content of the special value can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the classification means in the gaming machine F5 corresponds to the processing of S3424 and S3425 in the discharge card confirmation processing (see FIG. 81). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of S2661 in the suggestion effect setting process (see FIG. 74) corresponds to the notification content selection unit in the gaming machine F5.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the value content detecting means is arranged on one surface side of the special value medium, detects the information pattern from the one surface side, and is separated by the separating means. When the content of special value of the special value medium is detected by the value content detecting means, a holding means for holding the special value medium from the surface opposite to the value content detecting means is provided. Machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, when the value content detecting means detects the content of the special value of the special value medium separated by the separating means, the special value medium is pressed by the pressing means on the opposite side of the value content detecting means. Since it is pressed from the side, the warp of the special value medium can be prevented and the reading accuracy of the information pattern can be improved. In the above embodiment, the holding means in the gaming machine F6 corresponds to the fixing solenoid 1456xf and the plate member 1456xg, or the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305.

The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine F8 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium, wherein the special value medium has an information surface on which information visually suggesting the content of the special value is written, and the information written on the information surface. A gaming machine G1 provided with a removable covering means that reduces visibility of the information by covering.

According to the gaming machine G1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value The special value medium having is added by the special value medium giving means. In this special value medium, information that visually suggests the contents of the special value is written on the information surface.

Here, the information surface of the special value medium is provided with a covering unit that reduces the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information visually suggesting the content of the special value medium). Has been.

Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.

Therefore, the player's expectation for obtaining the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value, and therefore, the player's expectation is added to the game as compared to the game of simply obtaining the special value medium. You can add value. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) on the information surface is provided, the special value having the high value contents is provided. It is possible to prevent the value medium from being selected and illegally extracted.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine G1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

In the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a, etc. correspond to the information surface in the gaming machine G1. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing members 4001, 4003, 4004 and the like correspond to the covering means in the gaming machine G1.

In the gaming machine G1, a game machine G2, wherein the covering means is removable and cannot be reused after removal.

According to the gaming machine G2, since the covering means is configured so that it cannot be reused after being removed, the covering is performed from the special value medium obtained by illegally extracting it, not by justifying the acquisition of the special value giving condition. It is possible to prevent illegal reading of the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the means.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the covering means includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer comprises: A gaming machine G3 characterized by having brittleness such that at least a part thereof is damaged by the stress when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface.

According to the gaming machine G3, the coating means for reducing the visibility of the information (information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) written on the information surface is a base layer and a base layer. The adhesive layer is provided on the back side of the material layer, and is adhered to the information surface by the adhesive layer.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the gaming machine G3, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the gaming machine G3.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the covering unit has a wireless communication unit, and the wireless communication unit has a circuit unit having a storage unit in which information corresponding to the contents of the special value is stored. An antenna unit connected to the circuit unit and capable of transmitting information corresponding to the contents of the special value stored in the storage unit by using a wireless transmission medium, A gaming machine G4 comprising information reading means capable of reading information corresponding to the contents of the special value sent through the antenna section.

According to the gaming machine G4, the covering means is provided with the wireless communication means capable of transmitting the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value) stored in the circuit section from the antenna section using the wireless transmission medium. ing. Then, the information (information corresponding to the content of the special value) sent via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, based on the reading by the information reading means, the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium given by the special value medium giving means can be grasped. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the wireless communication means does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information to be sent from the wireless communication means. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. It is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.

When the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle to the extent that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna part) Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4622 corresponds to the wireless communication means in the gaming machine G4, the IC chip 4622a corresponds to the circuit unit in the gaming machine G4, and the antenna is used as the antenna unit in the gaming machine G4. The part 4622b is applicable. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag reader 4501 corresponds to the information reading means in the gaming machine G4.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the covering means includes an information code formed on an exposed surface and encoding information corresponding to the content of the special value, and the information code can be read. A gaming machine G5, characterized by comprising information reading means.

According to the gaming machine G5, the covering means has, on the exposed surface, an information code that encodes information corresponding to the content of the special value. The information code on the exposed surface of the covering means is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, based on the reading of the information code by the information reading unit, the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium added by the special value medium adding unit can be grasped. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to maintain his or her interest in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the information code does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means can read the information code, that is, the information corresponding to the content of the special value. Can not. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by a fraudulent person. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. It is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.

The gaming machine G6 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine G7 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine G8 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied Special value giving means for giving the special value medium, accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium given by the special value giving means, and contents of the special value of the special value medium accommodated in the accommodating means A gaming machine H1 provided with a leak prevention means for preventing the leak of the game machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, while the game value is stored in the storing means when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied. The special value medium is added from the containing means by the special value medium adding means. Here, the leakage of the special value contained in the special value medium stored in the storage means is prevented by the leakage prevention means.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for. Therefore, the player's expectation for acquiring the special value medium can be maintained at all times, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, as the special value medium granting means in the gaming machine H1, the processing of S4106 and S4109 in the granting condition establishment confirmation processing (see FIGS. 48 and 61) and the detach reach discharge mode processing (see FIG. 62) can be performed. The processes of S4406 and S4410, and the processes of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection process (see FIG. 49) correspond.

Further, in the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the accommodating means in the gaming machine H1. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the leakage prevention means in the gaming machine H1, the seal members 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004, 4005 and the back surface 4601b and the side surface coated with a material that obstructs the transmission of a transmission medium that transmits information. 4601c, the locking member 4801, the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment (see FIG. 95(b)), and the like.

In the gaming machine H1, the special value medium has an information surface on which information that can identify the content of the special value is written, and the leakage prevention means is written on the information surface of the special value medium. A gaming machine H2, comprising removable covering means for covering the information to reduce the identifiability of the information.

According to the gaming machine H2, the information surface of the special value medium covers the information written on the information surface (information that can identify the content of the special value medium) to reduce the identifiability of the information. Means are provided.

Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.

Therefore, the player's expectation for obtaining the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value, and therefore, the player's expectation is added to the game as compared to the game of simply obtaining the special value medium. It is possible to add value, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

Further, since the covering means is provided to reduce the identifiability of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information that can identify the content of the special value medium), the special value having the high value content is provided. It is possible to prevent illegal selection of a medium.

In the gaming machine H2, the "information capable of identifying the contents of the special value medium" is not limited to the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium (for example, a picture, a pattern, a character, etc.), but a special value medium. It also includes information (for example, information that can determine the content of the special value by reading and processing with a corresponding reading device) that encodes the content of the.

Further, in the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a and the like correspond to the information surface in the gaming machine H2. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing members 4001, 4003, 4004 and the like correspond to the covering means (a part of the leakage preventing means) in the gaming machine H2.

In the gaming machine H2, the covering means is removable and cannot be reused after being removed.

According to the gaming machine H3, the covering means is configured so that it cannot be reused after being removed, so that the covering is performed from the special value medium that is illegally extracted and not obtained legally by the establishment of the special value giving condition. It is possible to prevent illegal reading of the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the means.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the covering means includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer is A gaming machine H4 characterized by having brittleness such that at least a part thereof is damaged by a stress when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface.

According to the gaming machine H4, the covering means that reduces the distinguishability of the information (information that can identify the contents of the special value medium) written on the information surface is the base layer and the base material. And an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the layer, and the adhesive layer is applied to the information surface.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the gaming machine H4, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the gaming machine H4.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the covering means has a wireless communication means provided on the back side of the base material layer, and the wireless communication means has a storage unit in which predetermined information is stored. And a antenna unit connected to the circuit unit and capable of transmitting the predetermined information stored in the storage unit by using a wireless transmission medium. A gaming machine H5, comprising information reading means capable of reading the predetermined information sent out through the antenna section.

According to the gaming machine H5, the wireless communication means capable of transmitting the predetermined information stored in the circuit portion from the antenna portion using the wireless transmission medium is provided on the back surface side of the base material layer in the covering means. There is. Then, the predetermined information transmitted via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, if the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, the wireless communication means does not exist, and in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the predetermined information to be transmitted from the wireless communication means. ..

Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the covering means covers the special value medium by confirming the reading by the information reading means with respect to the privilege value medium accommodated in the accommodating means. One of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by the wrongdoer's hand. Therefore, it is possible that an illegal act was performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. The sex can be confirmed.

Here, when the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle so that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled off from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna part) is damaged. ) Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

The “predetermined information” stored in the storage unit may be information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium or information unrelated to the contents of the special value medium. When the "predetermined information" stored in the storage unit is information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium, the special value medium provided by the special value medium providing unit has the information based on the reading by the information reading unit. It is possible to perform an effect according to information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium).

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4622 corresponds to the wireless communication means of the gaming machine H5, the IC chip 4622a corresponds to the circuit section of the gaming machine H5, and the antenna section of the gaming machine H5 includes the antenna. The part 4622b is applicable. Further, in the above embodiment, the IC tag reader 4501 corresponds to the information reading means in the gaming machine H5.

In the gaming machine H5, it is interposed between a predetermined number of special value media including at least the special value medium to be given next time by the special value medium giving means and another special value medium accommodated in the accommodating means, A gaming machine H6, comprising partitioning means for obstructing transmission of the transmission medium from the wireless communication means to another special value medium contained in the containing means.

According to the gaming machine H6, wireless communication is performed between a predetermined number of special value mediums including at least the special value medium to be given next time by the special value medium giving means and other special value mediums accommodated in the accommodating means. The transmission of the transmission medium from the means to the other special-value medium contained in the containing means is obstructed by the partition means.

Therefore, with respect to a predetermined number of special value media including at least the special value medium to be given next time, the predetermined information included in the special value medium is exchanged with other information included in the other special value medium contained in the accommodating means. It can be separated and selectively read.

In the above embodiment, the partitioning means in the gaming machine H6 corresponds to the blocking member 2003 and the sealing member 4005.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the covering means includes an information code formed on an exposed surface and encoding predetermined information, and is provided with an information reading means capable of reading the information code. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H7, the covering means has the information code, which encodes predetermined information, on the exposed surface. The information code on the exposed surface of the covering means is read by the information reading means.

Therefore, when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, there is no information code, and in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information code, that is, the predetermined information.

Therefore, based on the reading of the information code by the information reading means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the covering means covers the special value medium. One of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium is that the person illegally removed it by the wrongdoer's hand. Therefore, it is possible that an illegal act was performed by confirming the reading by the information reading means. The sex can be confirmed.

The "predetermined information" to be encoded may be information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium or may be information irrelevant to the contents of the special value medium. When the "predetermined information" stored in the storage unit is information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium, the special value medium provided by the special value medium providing unit has the information based on the reading by the information reading unit. It is possible to perform an effect according to information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium).

The gaming machine H8 according to any one of the gaming machines H5 to H7, wherein the leakage prevention means includes an informing means for informing when the information reading means cannot read the information.

According to the gaming machine H8, when the information reading means cannot read the information, the notification means (a part of the leakage prevention means) notifies the possibility of misconduct to the surroundings. it can. In the above embodiment, the notification means in the gaming machine H8 corresponds to the processing of S3414 in the discharged card confirmation processing (see FIG. 93).

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the special value medium has information indicating the content of the special value in a predetermined form that can be read by a reader, and the leakage prevention unit is the special value medium. A game machine characterized by including information isolation means for unreadablely isolating the information indicating the content of the special value of the special value medium from the special value medium before the addition by the adding means. H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, the information indicating the content of the special value which the special value medium has in a predetermined form that can be read by the reader is provided before the special value medium is added by the special value medium adding means. , The information is quarantined by the information quarantine means (a part of the leakage prevention means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information indicating the contents of the special value from being read from the special value medium before being added by the special value medium adding means, so that the player grasps the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. , It is possible to prevent losing sense of expectation for acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the information isolating means (a part of the leak preventing means) in the gaming machine H9 is a seal member 4001, 4002, 4004, 4005 covering the card information area 1602, and a transmission medium for transmitting information. The back surface 4601b and the side surface 4601c coated with an interfering material, a seal member 4003 made of a material that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium for transmitting information, and the like are applicable.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the special value medium has a second wireless communication unit, and the second wireless communication unit stores a second storage in which information indicating the content of the special value is stored. Circuit section having a section, and a second antenna connected to the second circuit section and capable of transmitting information indicating the content of the special value stored in the second storage section using a wireless transmission medium. The information surface is configured to be permeable to the wireless transmission medium, the covering means is configured to prevent transmission of the wireless transmission medium, and the leakage prevention means is A gaming machine H10 characterized by including a covering means.

According to the gaming machine H10, as the special value medium, the second wireless communication means capable of transmitting the information indicating the content of the special value stored in the second circuit section from the second antenna section by using the wireless transmission medium. Is provided.

Here, the information surface of the special value medium is configured to be permeable to the wireless transmission medium, while the covering means is configured to interfere with the transmission of the wireless transmission medium. Therefore, when the special value medium is covered by the covering means, it is possible to prevent the reading of the information indicating the content of the special value by the reader capable of reading the information communicated using the wireless transmission medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the IC tag 4602 corresponds to the second wireless communication means in the gaming machine H10, the IC chip 4602a corresponds to the second circuit unit in the gaming machine H10, and the second circuit unit in the gaming machine H10. The antenna portion 4602b corresponds to the antenna portion. Further, in the above embodiment, the seal member 4003 corresponds to the covering means (a part of the leakage preventing means) in the gaming machine H10.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the accommodating means forms an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a part of the housing is opened to supply the special value medium, and And a lid that covers an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention unit is configured to include a fixing unit that fixes the housing and the lid inseparably or inseparably. A gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the housing and the lid are fixed by the fixing means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in a difficult or non-separable manner, the lid is removed to be housed in the housing means (housing). It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium that is present from being extracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H11, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H11. Further, in the above embodiment, the locking member 4801 corresponds to the fixing means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H11.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the housing means has an internal space capable of housing the special value medium, and a part of the housing opened to supply the special value medium, and And a lid that can be opened and closed to cover an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention unit includes a locking unit that locks the lid and the housing when the lid is closed. A gaming machine H12 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine H12, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the housing and the lid are locked by the locking means (part of the leakage prevention means), it is possible to remove the privilege value medium stored in the housing means (housing) by removing the lid. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H12, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H12. Further, in the above embodiment, the locking member 4801 corresponds to the locking means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H12.

In the gaming machine H12, the locking means is configured such that unlocking after locking is difficult or impossible.

According to the gaming machine H13, the housing and the lid are made difficult or impossible to unlock after locking by the locking means (a part of the leakage prevention means). It is possible to reliably prevent the removal of the.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H13, the housing means forms an internal space capable of housing the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and A lid for covering an opening of the housing, and the leakage prevention means is configured to include an identification means capable of identifying that the housing and the lid are separated from each other. A gaming machine H14.

According to the gaming machine H14, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, And a lid that covers the opening of the housing.

Here, since the separation between the housing and the lid is identifiable by the identification means (a part of the leakage prevention means), it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium stored in the housing means (housing). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before the special value medium is given from the containing means, so that the player grasps and acquires the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium. It is possible to prevent the loss of expectation for.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H11, and the upper lid member 1452 corresponds to the lid of the gaming machine H11. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification means in the gaming machine H11 corresponds to the identification means exemplified as a modification in the fourteenth embodiment.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H14, the accommodating means has an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, and has a housing part of which is opened so that the special value medium can be sent out. The leakage prevention means prevents the special-value medium sent from the opening capable of sending the special-value medium in the casing from making it difficult or impossible to move the special-value medium in the direction returning to the inside of the casing. A gaming machine H15 characterized by including means.

According to the gaming machine H15, the accommodating means for accommodating the special value medium is composed of a casing in which an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and the special value medium is provided in a part of this casing. A delivery opening is provided.

Here, the special value medium sent out from the opening capable of sending the special value medium in the housing is difficult or difficult to move in the direction of returning to the inside of the housing due to the presence of the return prevention means (a part of the leakage prevention means). Made possible. Therefore, extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the storage means before the special value medium is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the gaming machine H15. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment (see FIG. 95B) corresponds to the return prevention means (a part of the leakage prevention means) in the gaming machine H15.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H15, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium replenishing method for replenishing a special value medium to a game machine having a special value medium giving means, wherein the game machine has a container which is detachably attached to the game machine and in which the special value medium is previously stored. And a case in which an inner space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed in the accommodation body, and a part of which is opened to supply the special value medium, and the enclosure. And a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and that the housing and the lid are fixed to the gaming machine in a difficult or non-separable manner, and are mounted on the gaming machine by the mounting step. 1. A medium replenishing method 1.

According to the medium replenishment method 1, while the game value giving means gives the game value when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value has a special value different from the game value. When the special value medium is replenished to the gaming machine to which the special value medium is given by the special value medium giving means, the special value medium is removably attached to the gaming machine by the mounting step and the special value medium is stored in advance. This is done by mounting the body on the game machine.

Here, the accommodation body includes an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. It is configured, and when it is mounted on the gaming machine in the mounting step, it is mounted on the gaming machine in a state where the housing and the lid are fixed inseparable or inseparable.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container after the mounting by the mounting means (that is, after the supplement of the special value medium). As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the container in the medium replenishing method 1, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the case in the medium replenishing method 1, and the cover body in the medium replenishing method 1 corresponds to the case. Corresponds to the upper lid member 1452.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium replenishing method for replenishing a special value medium to a game machine having a special value medium giving means, wherein the game machine has a container that is detachably attached to the game machine and pre-stores the special value medium. And a case in which an inner space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed in the accommodation body, and a part of which is opened to supply the special value medium, and the enclosure. And a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and when the housing and the lid are separated from each other, the game machine is attached by the mounting step while being fixed so that the separation can be discriminated. A medium replenishing method 2 characterized by being mounted.

According to the medium replenishment method 2, while the game value giving means gives the game value when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, the game value has a special value different from the game value. When the special value medium is replenished to the gaming machine to which the special value medium is given by the special value medium giving means, the special value medium is removably attached to the gaming machine by the mounting step and the special value medium is stored in advance. This is done by mounting the body on the game machine.

Here, the accommodation body includes an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium, a housing partly opened to supply the special value medium, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. It is configured, and when it is mounted on the gaming machine in the mounting step, when the housing and the lid are separated, they are mounted on the gaming machine in a state of being fixed so that the separation can be discriminated.

Therefore, after mounting by the mounting means (that is, after supplementing the special value medium), it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium from the container. As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the container in the medium replenishing method 2, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing in the medium replenishing method 2, and the cover body in the medium replenishing method 2 corresponds to the case. Corresponds to the upper lid member 1452.

The medium replenishment method 1 or 2 includes a shipping step of shipping the container from a manufacturer, and the container is fixed such that the housing and the lid are difficult or inseparable at the time of shipping in the shipping step. 3. A medium replenishing method 3 characterized in that

According to the medium replenishment method 3, the container is shipped from the manufacturer in the shipping process. At this time, at the time of shipping in the shipping process, since the housing and the lid of the container are fixed so as to be difficult or inseparable, they are not attached to the gaming machine (during transportation before arrival and after arrival) It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container during the storage period of the container).

In any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 3, a receiving step of receiving the container from the manufacturer is included, and it is difficult to separate the housing and the lid body in the state of being received by the receiving step. A medium replenishing method 4 characterized by being fixed inseparably.

According to the medium replenishment method 4, the container is received from the manufacturer in the receiving process. At this time, since the housing and the lid of the container are fixed inseparably or inseparably in the received state, before mounting on the gaming machine (during storage of the container after receipt). It is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the container.

In any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 4, the container is exposed to the outside of the housing through a delivery opening opened in the housing so as to deliver the special value medium and the delivery opening. 6. The medium replenishing method 5 characterized in that the special value medium has a return preventing portion that makes it difficult or impossible to move in the direction in which the special value medium returns.

According to the medium replenishment method 5, the special value medium is delivered from the delivery port provided in the housing of the container. Here, it is difficult or impossible for the special-value medium sent out from the delivery port to move back in the housing due to the presence of the return prevention unit. Therefore, since the extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the accommodating means before the special value medium is added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium and losing the expectation for the acquisition.

In the above embodiment, the outlet 1451a corresponds to the outlet in the medium replenishing method 5, and the shape of the outlet 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment corresponds to the return prevention unit in the medium replenishing method 5.

In any of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 5, the special value medium has an information surface on which information capable of identifying the content of the special value is written, and the special value medium previously stored in the container. The value medium has a removable covering member for covering the information written on the information surface, and by covering with the covering member, the identifiability of the information is reduced as compared with that before the covering. Medium supplement method 6.

According to the medium replenishment method 6, the information surface of the special value medium is covered with the information written on the information surface (information capable of identifying the content of the special value medium), thereby reducing the identifiable property of the information. , A removable covering member is provided.

Therefore, since the special value medium is provided with the covering member that reduces the identifiability of the information by covering the information written on the information surface, the special value medium having a high value content is selected and illegally selected. In addition, when the special value medium is provided with such a covering member provided, the recipient of the special value medium has the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It is not possible to easily identify the contents of the special value shown by.

Therefore, the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering member is completed in order to confirm the content of the special value. It is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

The "information that can identify the contents of the special-value medium" is not limited to information that visually indicates the contents of the special-value medium (for example, a picture, a design, characters, etc.), but the contents of the special-value medium are coded. It also includes converted information (for example, information that can be used to determine the contents of special value by reading and processing with a corresponding reading device).

Further, in the above embodiment, the design 1601a1, 4601a, etc. correspond to the information surface in the medium replenishment method 6. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sealing member 4001, 4003, 4004 or the like corresponds to the covering means in the medium replenishing method 6.

In the medium replenishing method 6, the covering member includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface, and the base material layer is 8. A medium replenishing method 7, characterized in that, when the covering member attached to the information surface is peeled off, the covering member has brittleness such that at least a part of the covering member is damaged by the stress when peeling off.

According to the medium replenishment method 7, by covering the information (information that can identify the contents of the special-value medium) written on the information surface, the covering means that reduces the identifiability of the information is a base layer and a base layer. The adhesive layer is provided on the back side of the material layer, and is adhered to the information surface by the adhesive layer.

Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.

As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. Can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the base sheet 4004a corresponds to the base material layer in the medium replenishment method 7, and the adhesive layer 4004b corresponds to the adhesive layer in the medium replenishment method 7.

9. The medium replenishment method 8 according to any one of medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

9. The medium replenishment method 9 according to any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

11. The medium replenishment method 10 according to any one of the medium replenishment methods 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is sent and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied A medium container for accommodating the special value medium, which is mounted and used in a game machine having a special value medium providing means, wherein an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and A housing whose portion is opened to supply the special value medium, a lid that covers the opening of the housing, and the housing and the lid are difficult to separate after the housing is covered with the lid. Alternatively, it is configured to include a fixing member that is fixed inseparably, and is mounted on the game machine in a state in which the housing and the lid are difficult or inseparably fixed by the fixing member. And a medium container 1.

According to the medium container 1, an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and a housing partly opened so that the special value medium can be supplied, and a lid body covering the opening of the housing. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game value giving means gives the game value, while when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given. The special value medium that the user has is used by mounting it on the gaming machine provided by the special value medium providing means.

Here, after the housing is covered with the lid, the housing and the lid are fixed by the fixing member in a difficult or non-separable manner. When it is mounted on the game machine, it is mounted in a state where the housing and the lid are fixed with difficulty or inseparability by the fixing member.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege value medium from being extracted from the medium replenisher, and thus it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking before being imparted by the special value medium imparting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her expectation for the acquisition by grasping the contents of the special value before acquiring the special value medium, and the player's interest in the game can be extended to the player for a longer period of time. It is possible to maintain it.

In the above-described embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the medium container 1, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the medium container 1, and the lid of the medium container 1 corresponds to the upper lid. The member 1452 corresponds to this, and the locking member 4801 corresponds to the fixing member in the medium container 1.

A game value giving means for giving a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is given and given when a predetermined special value giving condition is met A medium container for accommodating the special value medium, which is mounted and used in a game machine equipped with the special value medium providing means, wherein an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, and A housing whose part is opened to supply the special value medium, a lid for covering the opening of the housing, and the housing and the lid are separated after the housing is covered with the lid. When the casing and the lid are separated by the identifying unit, the identifying unit is attached to the gaming machine in a state of being fixed so that the separation can be identified. A medium containing body 2.

According to the medium container 2, an internal space capable of accommodating the special value medium is formed, a part of which is opened so that the special value medium can be supplied, and a lid which covers the opening of the case. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game value giving means gives the game value, while when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is given. The special value medium that the user has is used by mounting it on the gaming machine provided by the special value medium providing means.

Here, after the housing is covered with the lid, when the housing and the lid are separated by the identifying means, the separation is fixed so that the separation can be discriminated. When it is mounted on the game machine, when the casing and the lid are separated by the identifying means, the separation is fixed so that the separation can be discriminated.

Therefore, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the housing and the lid are separated after being mounted on the gaming machine (that is, after supplementing the special value medium). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act by an illegal acter who separates the housing from the lid (removes the lid from the housing) and removes the privilege value medium from the medium container. As a result, the contents of the special value are prevented from leaking before being given by the special value medium giving means, the player grasps the contents of the special value before the special value medium is obtained, and loses the expectation for the acquisition. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.

In the above-described embodiment, the card ejecting device 1450 corresponds to the medium container 2, the storage member 1451 corresponds to the housing of the medium container 2, and the top cover is the lid of the medium container 2. The member 1452 corresponds to this, and the identifying means in the medium container 2 corresponds to the identifying means exemplified as a modification in the fourteenth embodiment.

In the medium container 1 or 2, the delivery port opened in the housing so that the special value medium can be delivered, and the special value medium exposed to the outside of the enclosure through the delivery port are the housings. A medium container 3 having a return preventing portion that makes it difficult or impossible to move in the direction of returning to the inside of the body.

According to the medium container 3, the special value medium is delivered from the delivery port provided in the housing. Here, it is difficult or impossible for the special-value medium sent out from the delivery port to move back in the housing due to the presence of the return prevention unit. Therefore, extraction of the special value medium is suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the special value from leaking from the storage means before the special value medium is provided.

In the above embodiment, the outlet of the medium container 3 corresponds to the discharge port 1451a, and the return prevention portion of the medium container 3 corresponds to the shape of the discharge port 1451a in the fourteenth embodiment.

The medium container 4 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The medium container 5 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The medium container 6 according to any one of the medium containers 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
A game machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) that gives a player a game value (game ball, game medal, etc.) as a prize when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied is known as a general game machine.
With respect to such a general gaming machine, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-224283), a game value (game medal) is awarded to a player as a prize when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied, and There is described a gaming machine (slot machine) that gives a player a privilege (privilege data) different from the game value when the grant of the privilege is permitted based on a predetermined criterion.
However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured so as to be able to obtain a privilege different from the gaming value in the conventional general gaming machine, there is a problem in the conventional general gaming machine. It was still inadequate to solve the lack of variation (variation) in playability that was one. Therefore, there is a problem in that the tendency that the player feels monotonous about the game and gets tired of the game cannot be eliminated as the game time of the player becomes longer.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can give a new added value that allows the player to maintain interest in the game for a long time. The purpose is to do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and a predetermined special value is given. When the condition is satisfied, a special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a special value different from the game value is provided, and the special value medium has information for visually suggesting the contents of the special value. It is provided with a written information surface and a removable covering means for reducing the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the same as the gaming machine of technical idea 1, in which the covering means is provided on a base material layer and a back side of the base material layer, and is an adhesive that enables sticking to the information surface. The base material layer has a brittleness to such an extent that at the time of peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress during peeling.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the covering means has a wireless communication means, and the wireless communication means stores information corresponding to the contents of the special value. A circuit unit having a stored storage unit and an antenna unit connected to the circuit unit and capable of transmitting information corresponding to the contents of the special value stored in the storage unit using a wireless transmission medium. It is provided with an information reading unit capable of reading information corresponding to the content of the special value transmitted through the antenna unit of the wireless communication unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, in the game using the game medium, the game value is given when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, while the game value is given when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied. Special value media having different special values are given by the special value medium giving means. In this special value medium, information that visually suggests the contents of the special value is written on the information surface.
Here, the information surface of the special value medium is provided with a covering unit that reduces the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface (information visually suggesting the content of the special value medium). Has been.
Therefore, when the special value medium is added in the state where the covering means is provided, the recipient of the special value medium displays the contents of the special value indicated by the information written on the information surface covered by the covering means. It cannot be easily identified by a glance.
Therefore, the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium continues until the work of removing the covering means is completed to confirm the content of the special value. You can add value. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a longer period of time.
Further, since the covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (the information visually suggesting the contents of the special value medium) on the information surface is provided, the special value having the high value contents is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the value medium from being selected and illegally extracted.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are exhibited. Covering means for reducing the visibility of the information (visually indicating the contents of the special value medium) by covering the information written on the information surface is provided on the base layer and the back side of the base layer. The adhesive layer is attached to the information surface by the adhesive layer.
Here, the base material layer in the covering means, when peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, has a brittleness such that at least a part of the covering means is damaged by the stress at the time of peeling off. Once removed from the information side, reuse after removal becomes impossible.
As described above, since the covering means cannot be reused after being removed, it is possible to illegally read the information written on the information surface by illegally removing the covering means from the special value medium obtained by the illegal extraction. The effect is that it can be prevented.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. The covering means is provided with a wireless communication means capable of transmitting information stored in the circuit section (information corresponding to the contents of the special value) from the antenna section using a wireless transmission medium. Then, the information (information corresponding to the content of the special value) sent via the antenna section of the wireless communication means provided in the covering means in this way is read by the information reading means.
Therefore, based on the reading by the information reading means, it is possible to grasp the information (information corresponding to the contents of the special value medium) of the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means. Since the information included in the special value medium added by the special value medium adding means can be grasped, control according to the added special value medium (for example, effect control according to the added special value medium) can be performed. This allows the player to keep the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.
Further, since the wireless communication means does not exist when the special value medium is not covered by the covering means, in such a case, the information reading means cannot read the information to be sent from the wireless communication means. Here, one of the situations in which the covering means does not cover the special-value medium includes the illegal removal by the wrongdoer's hand. There is an effect that it is possible to confirm the possibility of being broken.
When the base material layer in the covering means is configured to be brittle to the extent that at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by the stress when peeled from the information surface, the base material layer is damaged and the wireless communication means (particularly the antenna portion) is damaged. Can be damaged. When the wireless communication means is damaged, the information reading means cannot read the information, so that it is possible to surely and easily find out that there is an illegal act.

10, 10A, 10B Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
C privilege coin (game related privilege)
CA, CA1, CA2, CA3, CA' Privilege Card (Game related benefits)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming medium and gives a gaming value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied,
A special value medium giving means for giving a special value medium having a special value different from the game value when the predetermined special value giving condition is satisfied,
The special value medium is
An information surface on which information visually suggesting the content of the special value is written,
A gaming machine, comprising: a removable covering unit that reduces the visibility of the information by covering the information written on the information surface. The coating means is
A base material layer,
An adhesive layer provided on the back side of the base material layer and capable of being attached to the information surface,
The base material layer has brittleness to such an extent that at the time of peeling off the covering means attached to the information surface, at least a part of the base material layer is damaged by stress when peeling off. Amusement machine. The covering means has a wireless communication means,
The wireless communication means corresponds to a circuit unit having a storage unit in which information corresponding to the content of the special value is stored, and the content of the special value stored in the storage unit connected to the circuit unit. An antenna unit capable of transmitting information using a wireless transmission medium,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an information reading unit capable of reading information corresponding to the content of the special value transmitted through the antenna unit of the wireless communication unit.

Images